Routledge Mental Health and Guilford Press New Books catalogue 2009 Psychotherapy and Counselling, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy, Creative Arts Therapies, Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Clinical Problems, Couples and Family Therapy, Psychoanalysis, Jung and Analytical Psychology, Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry
Welcome to the Routledge Mental Health New Books Catalogue 2009 This year we will be offering you access to over 250 new books from Routledge, Psychology Press, and Guilford Press, giving you a chance to read-up on the latest research from leading experts in your particular field of interest. You also have the opportunity to browse and purchase books in the more discrete topic areas.
Turn to page 29: to read more on The CBT Distinctive Features series edited by Windy Dryden. This exciting new series asks leading practitioners and theorists of the main CBT therapies to write simply and briefly on what constitutes the main features of their particular approach. To order books online visit: www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-distinctive-features
Free downloadable resources
nEW fREE online SHIPPING LEVELS FOR uk, us AND cANADIAN ORDERS We’ve lowered the amount you have to spend to get free shipping for orders in the UK and we’ve introduced a brand new free shipping threshold for customers in the US and Canada. From now on, UK customers only need to spend £20 online to qualify for free shipping (reduced from our previous post-free threshold of £30). And US and Canadian customers can now also get free shipping on their orders by spending $35 (USD) or more.
Who to Contact
Latest news
To order books: Either return the order form in the centre of this catalogue to the address below, or contact them directly. Taylor & Francis Customer Services Bookpoint 130 Milton Park Abingdon Oxon, OX14 4SB Tel: +44 (0) 1235 400 524 Fax: +44 (0) 1235 400 525 Email: tandf@bookpoint.co.uk
Turn to page 42: to find out more on the new CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families series edited by Paul Stallard. The series provides clinicians and trainees with the latest evidence-based clinical programmes for a range of problems including: depression; OCD; and anxiety. Free downloadable resources are available, visit: www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-with-children
If you have a new book proposal for the Routledge list: Kate Hawes, Publisher Jung/Analytical Psychology and Psychoanalysis Email: Kate.Hawes@tandf.co.uk
For review requests, mailing list changes (removal or address change) or further copies of the catalogue: Email: Susannah.Brown@informa.com Fax: +44 (0) 207 017 6717
Joanne Forshaw, Senior Editor Psychotherapy, Counselling, Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry Email: Joanne.Forshaw@informa.com
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
new books catalogue 2009
Contents Psychotherapy and Counselling ........................................................................ 5 Adlerian Psychotherapy and Counselling ........................................................................ 16 Cross Cultural Counselling ..................................................................................................... 16 Coaching ....................................................................................................................................... 17 Hypnotherapy ............................................................................................................................. 18 Professional Issues and Resources ...................................................................................... 18 Social Work . ................................................................................................................................. 21 Spirituality .................................................................................................................................... 22 Grief and Bereavement . .......................................................................................................... 23 Cognitive Behaviour Therapy .......................................................................... 25 Mindfulness ................................................................................................................................. 35 Creative Arts Therapies .................................................................................... 36 Art Therapy .................................................................................................................................. 37 Dance Therapy ............................................................................................................................ 38 Dramatherapy ............................................................................................................................. 38 Play Therapy ................................................................................................................................ 39 Child and Adolescent Mental Health .............................................................. 39 Child and Adolescent Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry . ....................................... 44 Child and Adolescent Forensic Psychiatry ....................................................................... 46 Child and Adolescent Clinical Problems ........................................................................... 47 Addictions .................................................................................................................................... 47 ADHD . ............................................................................................................................................ 48 Autism ............................................................................................................................................ 48 Behavioural and Emotional Disorders ............................................................................... 49 Mood Disorders . ........................................................................................................................ 50 Physical Abuse and Trauma ................................................................................................... 50 Self-Harm ...................................................................................................................................... 51 Child and Adolescent Development .................................................................................. 52 School-Based Mental Health and Learning Disabilities .............................................. 54 The Peer Power Program ........................................................................................................ 61 Family Therapy .................................................................................................. 63 Parenting . ..................................................................................................................................... 65 Couples Therapy ........................................................................................................................ 66 Psychoanalysis .................................................................................................. 70 Jung and Analytical Psychology ...................................................................... 79 Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry ................................................................. 81 Clinical Tests and Assessments . ........................................................................................... 84 Forensic Psychiatry . .................................................................................................................. 85 Neuropsychiatry . ....................................................................................................................... 87 Clinical Problems . ............................................................................................. 87 Addictions .................................................................................................................................... 87 Anxiety Disorders ...................................................................................................................... 90 Attachment .................................................................................................................................. 90 Eating Disorders ......................................................................................................................... 91 Gerontology ................................................................................................................................ 92 Mood Disorders . ........................................................................................................................ 93 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder . ......................................................................................... 95 Personality Disorders ............................................................................................................... 95 Physical and Sexual Abuse ..................................................................................................... 96 Schizophrenia and Psychosis ................................................................................................ 97 Self-Harm and Suicide . ......................................................................................................... 100 Stress and Trauma . .................................................................................................................. 101 Author Index .................................................................................................... 103
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over ÂŁ20/$35
READ and Recommend
ROUTLEDGE RECOMMENDS
Series Editor: Windy Dryden
What Should I Believe? Why Our Beliefs about the Nature of Death and the Purpose of Life Dominate Our Lives Dorothy Rowe
Page 5
The Lost Art of Listening
Page 15
Collaborative Case Conceptualization
Page 25
Simply Effective Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Practitioner’s Guide Michael J. Scott
Page 27
Developing Resilience A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach Michael Neenan Page 29
The Mindful Path to Self-Compassion Freeing Yourself from Destructive Thoughts and Emotions Christopher K. Germer
The 100 Key Points series are concise and practical introductions to approaches and modalities in counselling and psychotherapy. Ideal for those in training, or for professionals wishing to improve their practice. www.routledgementalhealth.com/100-key-points
How Learning to Listen Can Improve Relationships Second Edition Michael P. Nichols
Working Effectively with Clients in Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy Willem Kuyken, Christine A. Padesky, and Robert Dudley
100 Key Points Series
Page 35
Pages 6, 63
Counselling and Psychotherapy series: Investigating Practice from Scientific, Historical, and Cultural Perspectives series Series Editor: Bruce Wampold This innovative new series is devoted to grasping the vast complexities of the practice of counselling and psychotherapy. As a set of healing practices delivered in a context shaped by health delivery systems and the attitudes and values of consumers, practitioners, and researchers, counselling and psychotherapy must be examined critically. By understanding the historical and cultural context of counselling and psychotherapy and by examining the extant research, these critical inquiries seek a deeper, richer understanding of what is a remarkably effective endeavour. Page 11 www.routledgementalhealth.com/counseling-and-psychotherapy
Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men
The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy
Series Editor: Mark S. Kiselica
Psychoanalytic Approaches Second Edition Edited by Monica Lanyado, and Ann Horne
The Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men captures the burgeoning body of knowledge about the emotional and psychological lives of boys and men and the process of counselling them in a male-friendly manner. This series will appeal to mental health practitioners (psychologists, counsellors, social workers, psychiatrists, clinical and counselling psychologists, marriage and family therapists, nurses and psychotherapists) and educators who wish for in-depth and Page 13 practical suggestions for helping men and boys.
Page 40
Reading French Psychoanalysis Edited by Dana Birksted-Breen, Sara Flanders, and Alain Gibeault Page 74
Film After Jung
Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge Series
Post-Jungian Approaches to Film Theory Greg Singh Page 79 When Someone You Love is Bipolar Help and Support for You and Your Partner Cynthia G. Last Page 94 Getting Over OCD A 10-Step Workbook for Taking Back Your Life Jonathan S. Abramowitz
Series Editors: Gladeana McMahon, Stephen Palmer, and Averil Leimon The Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge series provides an accessible and lively introduction to key areas in the developing field of coaching. Each title in the series is written by leading coaches with extensive experience and has a strong practical emphasis, including illustrative vignettes, summary boxes, exercises and activities. Page 17 www.routledgementalhealth.com/essential-coaching-skills
Page 95
Series in Death, Dying and Bereavement
CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Series
Series Editor: Robert Neimeyer Volumes published within the prestigious Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement are representative of the multidisciplinary nature of the intersecting fields of death studies, suicidology, end-of-life care, and grief counselling. The series meets the needs of clinicians, researchers, paraprofessionals, pastoral counsellors, and educators by providing cutting edge research, theory, and best practices on the most important topics in these fields – for today and tomorrow. Page 23 www.routledgementalhealth.com/death-dying-and-bereavement
The CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families series is designed to provide clinicians and trainees with the latest evidence-based clinical programmes and materials for a range of common problems in a concise and accessible format. Page 42 www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-with-children
Clinical Psychology: A Modular Course Series Series Editor: Chris R. Brewin
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Series Editor: Windy Dryden This exciting new series asks leading practitioners and theorists of the main CBT therapies to write simply and briefly on what constitutes the main features of their particular approach. Each Distinctive Features book will highlight the thirty main features – practical and theoretical – of its respective approach. The series as a whole will be essential reading for psychotherapists, counsellors, clinical and counselling psychologists of all orientations who wish to learn more about the range of new and developing cognitive-behavioural approaches. www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-distinctive-features
Series Editor: Paul Stallard
Page 29
Practical Clinical Guidebooks series The Practical Clinical Guidebooks series provides clinicians, students, and trainees with clear descriptions of practical, empirically supported treatments for specific disorders and their sequelae. Focusing largely on CognitiveBehavioural approaches to the assessment, diagnosis, and treatment of a disorder, each volume presents a clear and focused structure to facilitate the transition from book to practice. Page 32 www.routledgementalhealth.com/practical-clinical-guidebooks
Supervision in the Arts Therapies Series Series Editor: Joy Schaverien This innovative series comprises five edited volumes, each focusing on one of the arts therapies – art, music, drama, dance or sandplay – and reflects on the dynamic nature of the presentation of that art form in supervision. Supervision in the Arts Therapies series makes a timely contribution to the literature and will be essential reading for experienced practitioners, and students of the arts therapies as well as psychotherapists and other professionals engaged in supervision. Page 36 www.routledgementalhealth.com/supervision-arts-therapies
Clinical Psychology: A Modular Course was designed to overcome problems faced by the traditional textbook in conveying what psychological disorders are really like. All the books in the series, written by leading scholars and practitioners in the field, can be read as stand-alone texts, but they will also integrate with other modules to form a comprehensive resource in clinical psychology. Page 44 www.psypress.com/clinicalmodular
Studies in Adolescent Development Series Series Editors: Leo B. Hendry, Marion Kloep, and Inge Seiffge-Krenke The Studies in Adolescent Development series is published in conjunction with the European Association for Research on Adolescence and is committed to publishing and promoting the highest quality of writing in the field of adolescent development.
Page 53
www.psypress.com/siad
The Adolescence and Society Series Series Editor: John Coleman In the 20 years since it began, this series has published some of the key texts in the field of adolescent studies. The series has covered a very wide range of subjects, almost all of them being of central concern to students, researchers and practitioners. The primary aim of the series is to make accessible to the widest possible readership important and topical evidence relating to adolescent development.
Page 53
www.psypress.com/adolescence-and-society
school- based practice in Action Series Series Editors: Rosemary B. Mennuti, and Ray W. Christner This series provides school-based practitioners with concise practical guidebooks that are designed to facilitate the implementation of evidence-based programs into school settings, putting the best practices in action.
Page 54
The Peer Power Program The Peer Power Program is a peer training program designed for middle and high school students, focusing on 8 core skills: Attending, Empathizing, Summarizing, Questioning, Genuineness, Assertiveness, Confrontation, and Problem Solving. Through a series of exercises, games, and self-awareness techniques, children and adolescents involved in the program gain the basic communication Page 61 and mediation skills necessary to effectively help their peers.
Family Therapy and Counselling Series Series Editor: Jon Carlson The Family Therapy and Counselling series is devoted to providing practitioners and students with current information on specific topics relevant to marriage and family therapy, counselling, couples therapy, and child and adolescent therapy. Forthcoming volumes in the series will explore divorce, infidelity, religion and spirituality, and family art therapy. Page 63 www.routledgementalhealth.com/family-therapy-and-counseling
The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series Series Editor: Dana Birksted-Breen Assistant Editor: Alessandra Lemma The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching series extends the aims and achievements of The New Library of Psychoanalysis to those studying psychoanalysis and related fields such as the social sciences, philosophy, literature and the arts. Each text provides a comprehensive yet accessible introduction to the central subjects in psychoanalysis, expressing even the most complex psychoanalytic concepts in clear and simple language whilst avoiding over simplification. Page 74 www.routledgementalhealth.com/nlp/teachingseries.asp
The New Library of Psychoanalysis Series Series Editor: Dana Birksted-Breen Assistant Editor: Alessandra Lemma The New Library of Psychoanalysis is published by Routledge in association with the Institute of Psychoanalysis, London. Its purpose is to facilitate a greater and more widespread appreciation of what psychoanalysis is really about and to provide a forum for increasing mutual understanding between psychoanalysts and those in other disciplines such as linguistics, literature, medicine, philosophy, psychology, and the social sciences. The series also aims to make some of the work of Continental and other non-English speaking analysts more readily available to English-speaking readers, and to increase the interchange of ideas between British and American analysts. Page 75 www.routledgementalhealth.com/nlp
Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series Series Editor: Donnel B. Stern The “new key” in which volumes in this series are written is an intentional focus on innovative and unsettling clinical thinking that, while contributing to the Interpersonal and Relational psychoanalytic traditions, grows from sources not usually tapped in the psychoanalytic literature. The series encompasses ideas from other fields, such as trauma theory or literary criticism, and topics that are typically excluded from formal psychoanalytic discourse, among them: the role of the analyst’s personal values in analytic work; the association between dissociation and criminal violence and the nature and treatment of massive onset adult trauma. Page 76 www.routledgementalhealth.com/psychoanalysis-new-key
Relational Perspectives book Series Series Editors: Lewis Aron, and Adrienne Harris The Relational Perspectives Book series publishes books that grow out of the relational tradition in contemporary psychoanalysis. Various tributaries – interpersonal psychoanalysis, object relations theory, self psychology, empirical infancy research, and certain currents of contemporary Freudian thought – flow into this tradition, which understands relational configurations between self and others, real and fantasized, as the primary subject of psychoanalytic investigation. This series is home to works by Stephen A. Mitchell, Lewis Aron, Neil Altman, Joyce Slochower, Adrienne Harris, Muriel Dimen, and other exemplars of contemporary relational thinking. Page 78 www.routledgementalhealth.com/relational-perspectives
Maudsley Monographs Series Series Editor: Professor A. S. David Henry Maudsley, founder of the Maudsley Hospital, was the most prominent English psychiatrist of his generation. The Maudsley Hospital was united with the Bethlem Royal Hospital in 1948 and its medical school renamed the Institute of Psychiatry. It is now entrusted with the duty of advancing psychiatry by teaching and research. The South London and Maudsley (SLAM) NHS Trust, together with the Institute of Psychiatry, are jointly known as The Maudsley. The monograph series reports work carried out at The Maudsley. Page 86 www.routledgementalhealth.com/maudsley
ISPS SERIES Series Editor: Brian Martindale The ISPS (The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses) series contributes to the psychological understanding and therapeutic treatment of psychosis. www.routledgementalhealth.com/isps
Page 98
psychotherapy and counselling
Routledge Recommends!
What Should I Believe? Why Our Beliefs about the Nature of Death and the Purpose of Life Dominate Our Lives Dorothy Rowe, Clinical Psychologist “Dorothy Rowe casts a bracingly cool eye on the fantasies which can inform religious belief. An important and robust attack on the selfserving aspects of religion.” - Gwyneth Lewis “Dorothy Rowe uses her exceptional gifts of wisdom, common sense and clarity of thought to explain the nature of religious belief and to show us, as only she can, how to confront the problem of death.” - Carmen Callil Suddenly, in the twenty-first century, religion has become a political power. It affects us all, whether we’re religious or not. We want to make up our own minds about what we believe, but it’s difficult to do this. Everyone has to face the dilemma that we all die but no one knows for certain what death actually is. All religions promise to overcome death, but there’s no set of religious or philosophical beliefs that ensures that our life is always happy and secure. Moreover, for many of us, what we were taught about a religion severely diminished our self-confidence and left us with a constant debilitating feeling of guilt and shame. Through all this turmoil comes the calm, clear voice of eminent psychologist Dorothy Rowe. She separates the political from the personal, the power-seeking from the compassionate. She shows how, if we use our beliefs as a defence against our feelings of worthlessness, we feel compelled to force our beliefs on to other people by coercion or aggression. However, it is possible to create a set of beliefs, expressed in the religious or philosophical metaphors most meaningful to us, which allow us to live at peace with ourselves and other people, and to face life with courage and optimism. Contents: Religion in the Twenty-first Century. What it is to Be Human. ‘Hemmed in a Cirque of Our Own Creating’. Very Different Points of View. Being Good and the Just World. Trying to Be Good. How We Acquire Our Beliefs. The Consequences of Our Beliefs. 2008: 312pp. Pb: 978-0-415-46679-0: £9.99 Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/dorothy-rowe for further books on Spirituality please see page 22 Also by Dorothy Rowe
My Dearest Enemy, My Dangerous Friend Making and Breaking Sibling Bonds Pb: 978-0-415-39048-4: 2007: 376pp. £9.99
5
What Works with Children, Adolescents, and Adults? A Review of Research on the Effectiveness of Psychotherapy Alan Carr, University College Dublin, Ireland
“This book offers a unique and comprehensive up-to-date review of the research into the effectiveness of psychotherapy and psychological interventions with children, adolescents, adults, people in later life, and people with intellectual and pervasive developmental disabilities. Thanks to Alan Carr who has done an admirable job, the book presents a helpful guide to mental health professionals who aim to provide evidence based interventions. I highly recommend this book as a valuable source of information for students, clinicians, and researchers in clinical psychology and psychiatry.” - Anegen Trillingsgaard, University of Aarhus, Denmark
What Works with Children, Adolescents, and Adults? provides an up-todate review of research on the effectiveness of psychotherapy and psychological interventions with children, adolescents, adults, people in later life, and people with intellectual and pervasive developmental disabilities. Drawing on recent meta-analyses, systematic reviews, and key research studies in psychotherapy, this volume presents evidence for: • the overall effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy • the contribution of common factors to the outcome of successful psychotherapy • the effectiveness of specific psychotherapy protocols for particular problems. This comprehensive, user-friendly guide will inform clinical practice, service development and policy. It will be invaluable to psychotherapists, service managers, policymakers, and researchers. What Works with Children, Adolescents, and Adults? offers a review of the evidence base for three handbooks published by Routledge: The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Clinical Psychology (Carr, 2006), The Handbook of Adult Clinical Psychology (Carr & McNulty, 2006), and The Handbook of Intellectual Disability and Clinical Psychology Practice (Carr, O’Reilly, Walsh, & McEvoy, 2007). Contents: Psychotherapy, Psychotherapy Research, and Translating Science into Practice. The Overall Effectiveness and Cost-effectiveness of Psychotherapy. Common Factors in Psychotherapy. Effectiveness of Psychotherapy and Psychological Interventions with Specific Problems in Children, Adolescents, and People with Intellectual Disabilities and Pervasive Developmental Disorders. Effectiveness of Psychotherapy and Psychological Interventions with Specific Problems in Adulthood and Later Life. Additional Elements in the Psychotherapy Evidence-base. Conclusions. 2008: 400pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45290-8: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45291-5: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Bestseller!
Depression The Way Out of Your Prison Third Edition Pb: 978-1-58391-286-7: 2003: 344pp. £9.99
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
6
psychotherapy and counselling
New Edition!
Theoretical Models of Counseling and Psychotherapy Second Edition Kevin A. Fall, Loyola University – New Orleans, USA, Janice Miner Holden, The University of North Texas, Denton, USA, and Andre Marquis, University of Rochester, New York, USA Theoretical Models of Counseling and Psychotherapy presents a comprehensive overview of a variety of major counseling theories. Written for both student and practitioner, this text gives the reader an easily accessible venue through which to explore the deeper layers of each theory, and provides a bridge from classroom study to practice. Chapters blend current literature with primary source material and include illustrative case examples, which help the reader more readily apply theory to practice. This book is unique in its attention to the philosophical underpinnings of each theory, and also includes theoryspecific information on diagnosis, psychopharmacology, multicultural issues, spirituality, and gender issues. The second edition includes a brand new chapter on constructivist approaches to counseling, and information has been updated throughout. Even more case examples are included, along with additional reflective questions and exercises. The availability of a newly created online Instructor’s Manual (upon publication) has increased the teachability of the material and enhances the pedagogical features of the text, making for a more engaging learning experience.
100 Key points series from which these authors have drawn seven core competencies of effective practice. These competencies also line up with a three-level model of counselor experience developed and researched by Cal Stoltenberg. The result is a paradigm shift in how to teach and learn basic counseling skills, which separates this text from the competition and brings training up to speed with current practice. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: The Level I Practitioner Profile. The Basic Skills of Psychotherapy: A New Look. The Domain of Connecting with and Engaging the Client, Part I: Listening. The Domain of Connecting with and Engaging the Client, Part II: Responding. The Domain of Assessment, Part I: Clients’ Symptoms, Stages of Change, Needs, Strengths, and Resources. The Domain of Assessment, Part II: The Theme Behind a Client’s Narrative, Therapeutic Goals, and Client Input about Goal Achievement. The Domain of Establishing and Maintaining the Therapeutic Relationship and the Therapeutic Alliance, Part I: Relationship Building. The Domain of Establishing and Maintaining the Therapeutic Relationship and the Therapeutic Alliance, Part II: The Care and Feeding of the Therapeutic Alliance. Part III: The Level II Practitioner: Supervisory and Developmental Considerations. The Domain of Understanding Clients’ Cognitive Schemas, Part I: Foundations. The Domain of Understanding Clients’ Cognitive Schemas, Part II: Assessment and Clinical Conceptualization. The Domain of Addressing and Managing Clients’ Emotional States, Part I: Basic Understandings. The Domain of Addressing and Managing Clients’ Emotional States, Part II: Managing Common Negative Emotions in Therapy. The Domain of Addressing and Resolving Ambivalence, Part I: Understanding and Identifying Client Ambivalence. The Domain of Addressing and Resolving Ambivalence, Part II: Working with and Resolving Client Ambivalence. Part IV: The Level III Practitioner Profile. The Domain of Paradoxical Interventions, Part I: Definition and Neutralizers. The Domain of Paradoxical Interventions, Part II: Tranquilizers. The Domain of Paradoxical Interventions, Part III: The Energizers. The Domain of Paradoxical Interventions, Part IV: Challengers. Ethically and Effectively Helping the Client to Disengage: How and Why Nonlinear Thinking and Paradoxical Interventions Contribute to the Making of a Master Therapist.
March 2010: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99476-7: £33.00
May 2009: 504pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99751-5: £69.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99752-2: £27.95
Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
Principles of Counseling and Psychotherapy Learning the Essential Domains and Nonlinear Thinking of Master Practitioners
Gerald J. Mozdzierz, Loyola University Stritch School of Medicine, Illinois, USA, Paul R. Peluso, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA, and Joseph Lisiecki, Licensed Clinical Social Worker (LCSW) and a Certified Supervisor Alcohol – and Other Drug – Dependence Counselor (CSADC) “Find out what master practitioners do, then do that. This is a simple approach, yet a missing one in the history of therapist and counselor training. This book opens up this new world of the master practitioner. It is rich and thick – a must read gift to the profession!” - Tom Skovholt,
The University of Minnesota, USA
This text presents a novel approach to teaching and learning the fundamental skills and techniques of counseling and psychotherapy, based on a “non-linear” process of thinking that more accurately reflects the reality of mental health practice. At the core of this text lies the idea that to best prepare students for practice with real clients, they have to learn how to think in a new way, the way that research has shown the most effective practitioners think. This non-linear approach to therapy is based on the authoritative research of Tom Skovholt and colleagues, who have studied “master therapists” in action for years,
100 Key Points Series www.routledgementalhealth.com/100-key-points
Forthcoming!
Transactional Analysis 100 Key Points and Techniques Mark Widdowson, Psychotherapist, in private practice, Glasgow, UK “Consistently stimulating and informative, this book is essential reading for anyone interested in learning about current developments in Transactional Analysis theory and practice. The structure of the book makes it easy to identify ways in which TA addresses fundamental practice issues, and is highly accessible both to TA specialists and those trained in other orientations who are seeking to integrate TA perspectives into their work with clients.” - John McLeod, Professor of Counselling, University of Abertay Dundee, UK
Transactional Analysis (TA) is a versatile and comprehensive system of psychotherapy. Transactional Analysis: 100 Key Points and Techniques synthesises developments in the field, making complex material accessible and offering practical guidance on how to apply the theory and refine TA psychotherapy skills in practice.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
100 Key points series Divided into seven manageable sections, the 100 key points cover: • the philosophy, theory, methods and critique of the main approaches to TA • TA perspectives on the therapeutic relationship • diagnosis, contracting and treatment planning using TA • a trouble shooting guide to avoiding common pitfalls • refining therapeutic skills. As such this book is essential reading for trainee TA therapists, those preparing for examinations as well as experienced practitioners.
psychotherapy and counselling
Therapists Speak About Self-Disclosure in Psychotherapy Edited by Andrea Bloomgarden, in private practice, Philadelphia, USA, and Rosemary B. Mennuti, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA
Relationship. Part III: Diagnosis. Part IV: Contracting. Part V: Treatment Planning. Part VI: Avoiding Common Pitfalls. Part VII: Refining Therapeutic Skills.
Series: 100 Key Points Published by Routledge
for a further book in this series please see page 63 Also in the Series
Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy 100 Key Points and Techniques Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK, and Michael Neenan, Centre for Stress Management, London, UK
Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques presents 100 main features of this system, to help therapists improve their practice. These essential points have been derived from the authors’ own practice, and also from their experience as trainers and supervisors of novice rational emotive behaviour therapists. Hb: 978-1-58391-740-4: 2006: 288pp. £47.50 Pb: 978-1-58391-741-1: 2006: 288pp. £12.99
Cognitive Therapy 100 Key Points and Techniques Michael Neenan, Centre for Stress Management, London, UK, and Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK
Cognitive Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques is a crisp, concise elaboration of the 100 main features of the most popular and best validated approach within the field of cognitive behaviour therapy. The 100 key points cover cognitive therapy theory and practice, and examine misconceptions about this approach. Hb: 978-1-58391-880-7: 2004: 280pp. £47.50 Pb: 978-1-58391-858-6: 2004: 280pp. £12.99
Forthcoming!
Psychotherapist Revealed
Selected contents: Part I: Approaches in TA Practice. Part II: The Therapeutic
October 2009: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47386-6: £47.50 Pb: 978-0-415-47387-3: £12.99
7
In this edited volume, the real dialogue begins. Therapists speak openly and honestly about their self-disclosure practices, decisions and clinical dilemmas. Bloomgarden and Mennuti bring together research, training and tales from their clinical experience to illuminate lessons derived from their own journeys toward judicious, balanced self-disclosure practices. In a readable fashion, the stories highlight a variety of self-disclosure and boundary issues that occur in the course of psychotherapy. Numerous treatment modalities and clinical orientations are represented. The collective wisdom offered through these stories, which includes suggested guidelines and a standard of care for good practice, will assist the reader in developing a better understanding of what it means to self-disclose appropriately, recognizing a flexible middle ground between “too much” and “too little” along with responsiveness to client need. The Freudian based taboo that rigidly warns against all selfdisclosure is antiquated, and a more reasonable, balanced perspective is under way. Contents: Part I: Foundations. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Therapist SelfDisclosure: Beyond the Taboo. Maroda, Less is More: An Argument for the Judicious Use of Self-Disclosure. Zur, Therapist Self-Disclosure: Standard of Care, Ethical Considerations and Therapeutic Context. Part II: Case Examples by Clinical Orientation and Clientele. Rabinor, Self-Disclosure as a Turning Point in Psychotherapy. Filetti, Mattei, To Share or Not to Share – Self-Disclosure in the Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder. Prenn, I Second that Emotion! On Self-Disclosure and its Metaprocessing. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Lessons Learned from Adolescent Girls. Malatesta, Behavioral Treatment of a Case Involving Obsessive Compulsive Hoarding: Case Formulation, The Therapeutic Relationship, and In Vivo Therapy. Nerenberg, Treating Addictions: A Balanced Approach to Boundaries and Therapist Self-Disclosure. Part III: Interface of Therapist and Client Ethnic/Racial/Cultural Factors. Laliotis, Attachment and Healing: An EMDR Relational Approach. Sparks, Learning to Be Authentic with Clients: The Untold Journey of a Relational Practitioner. Patton, Engendering a New Paradigm: Self-Disclosure with Queer Clients. Part IV: Treatment Variations. Gerstein, Family Therapist/Family Member: Family Dynamics at Work and at Home. Barber, The Perils of Rigid Adherence: A Look Back at a Group. McNiff, Creative Expression in Service of Others: Reflections on Transparency in Art Therapy Practice. Billock Tropea, The Therapeutic Relationship in Motion: A Dance/Movement Therapist’s Perspective. Part V: Therapists Losses and Personal Challenges. Gottlieb, Bloomgarden, Mennuti, McCoubrey, Nobody Gets to See the Wizard: An Interview with Dan Gottlieb. Comstock, Confronting Life’s Adversities: Self-Disclosure in Print and in Session. Treadway, For Your Client’s Sake: Practicing Clinically Constructive Self-Disclosure. Part VI: Supervision, Best Practice Guidelines. Feindler, Padrone, Self-Disclosure in Clinical Supervision. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Collective Wisdom for Good Practice: Themes for Consideration.
July 2009: 342pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96383-1: £31.00 Published by Routledge
for further books by Windy Dryden and Michael Neenan please see page 28
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
psychotherapy and counselling
8
Forthcoming!
Forthcoming!
Core Competencies in Psychotherapy Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Core Competencies in Psychotherapy addresses the core competencies common to the effective practice of all psychotherapeutic approaches, and includes specific intervention competencies of the three major orientations. The book provides a research-based framework to aid clinicians in applying these competencies in their own practice. It begins by identifying and describing the core competencies and skills of expert therapists, then elaborates six core competencies and related supporting competencies and skill-set. Core Competencies in Psychotherapy is a highly readable and easily accessible book that can enhance the knowledge and skill base of clinicians – both novice and experienced – in all the mental health specialties. Contents: Competency in Counseling and Psychotherapy. Competency 1: Establishing a Treatment Frame. Competency 2: Establishing a Therapeutic Relationship. Competency 3: Conceptualizing and Planning and Treatment. Competency 4: Implementing Treatment and Change. Competency 5: Maintaining a Therapeutic Relationship. Competency 6: Maintaining Treatment Gains and Terminating Treatment. Beyond Competency: Becoming and Being a Master Therapist. January 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95249-1: £24.95 Published by Routledge
for further books by Len Sperry please see pages 19, 22 Forthcoming!
Psychotherapy as a Developmental Process Michael Basseches, Suffolk University, Massachusetts, USA, and Michael F. Mascolo, Merrimack College, Massachusetts, USA This book provides a basis for improving psychotherapy practice, research, and training, offering therapists ways of improving their success rate by means of disciplined attention to and reflection upon therapeutic processes across all psychotherapy. It is based upon four main components: a presentation of the conceptual framework that underlies the proposed way of understanding the nature of psychotherapy in general, as well as the differences among various theoretical and technical approaches; a discussion of the research method, derived from the conceptual framework, for examining psychotherapy case material and determining how psychological development is occurring or how it may be being obstructed; a presentation of case material, illustrating the application of the research method and conceptual framework to particular cases; and a summary and discussion of the potential contributions of the theory and method in the contexts of psychotherapy research, practice, and training. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Psychotherapy and Development – Goals of
this Book. Part II: Conceptual Foundations. The Concept of Development and its Implications for Psychotherapy. A Coactive Systems Model of Psychotherapy and Development. How Psychotherapy Fosters Development. Multiple Traditions, Multiple Paths: How Different Therapeutic Approaches Foster Development. Part III: Method. The Developmental Analysis of Psychotherapy Process (DAPP) Method. Part IV: Case Analyses. From Isolation to Intimacy: The Transformation of Eva’s Communicative Repertoire. The Lady Cloaked in Fog: Developing a Construction of the Therapist as a “Harbor Light.” Sam I am Not: Affective Splitting and the Reintegration of Self in an Autistic Child. Tracking the Role of Emotion in Psychotherapy: Case Illustrations. Part V: Implications. Psychotherapy as a Developmental Process: Implications and Future Directions for Psychotherapy Research, Practice, and Training. September 2009: 376pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5730-6: £31.00 Published by Routledge
The Creative Therapist The Art of Awakening a Clinical Session Bradford Keeney, California Institute of Integral Studies, San Francisco, USA In The Creative Therapist, Bradford Keeney makes the case that “creativity” is the most essential aspect of vibrant, meaningful, and successful therapy. No matter what therapeutic orientation one practices, it must be awakened by creativity in order for the session to come alive. This book presents a theoretical framework that provides an understanding of how to go outside habituated ways of therapy in order to bring forth new and innovative possibilities. A basic structure for creative therapy, based on the outline of a threepart theatrical play, is also set forth. With these frameworks, practical guidelines detail how to initiate and implement creative contributions to any therapeutic situation. Contents: Erickson, Preface. Introduction: Therapy: Dead or Alive? Part I:
Bringing it Forth. Theatre of Creative Transformation. Three-act Therapeutic Performances. In-and-Out-of-the-Box Musings. Part II: Awakening a Session. “Man of Plenty”. “A Night in the Love Corral”. “Weight-ing to Leave”. “Cody”. “Pea Shooter Love”. “Seaman’s Song for His Son”. “Spiritual Eyes for Trance”. “Making the News”. “Magmore”. Part III: “Therapy of Therapy”. Christine Apple Nut’s Theatre of Therapy. The Psychoanalyst Who Wanted to be a Priest. Funny Medicines for Children. Absurd Action Koans for Therapists. The Therapeutic Crossroads.
September 2009: 273pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99703-4: £19.50 Published by Routledge
The Therapist’s Notebook More Homework, Handouts, and Activities for Use in Psychotherapy Volume 3 Catherine Ford Sori, Governors State University, Illinois, USA, and Lorna L. Hecker, Purdue University Calumet, USA
The Therapist’s Notebook, Volume 3 includes clinician field-tested activities for therapists who work with individuals, children and adolescents, couples, families, and groups. The reproducible handouts are designed to be practical and useful for the clinician, and cover the most salient topics that counselors are likely to encounter in their practices, with various theoretical approaches. Each chapter includes a “Reading and Resources for the Professional” section that guides readers toward useful books, videos, or websites that will further enhance their understanding of the chapter contents. This book is an excellent tool for both experienced and novice counselors for increasing therapeutic effectiveness. selected contents: Part I: Children and Adolescents. Part II: Adult Clients.
Part III: Couples. Part IV: Families and Groups. 2008: 248pp. Pb: 978-0-7890-3522-6: £29.95 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
psychotherapy and counselling
Forthcoming!
The Therapist’s Notebook on Strengths and Solution-Based Therapies Homework, Handouts, and Activities Bob Bertolino, and Michael Kiener, both at Maryville University, St. Louis, Missouri, USA, and Ryan Patterson, licensed clinical social worker and director of clinical services at Youth in Need, Inc., St. Louis, Missouri, USA The Therapist’s Notebook on Strengths and Solution-Based Therapies offers multiple pathways for those in helping relationships to employ strengths and solution-based (SSB) principles and practices as a vehicle for promoting positive change with individuals, couples, and families. The 100 exercises in this book are based on a series of core principles that are not only central to solution-based therapies; they have been demonstrated through research as essential to successful outcome. Readers will learn about processes and practices that are supported by research and are collaborative, competency-based, culturally sensitive, client-driven, outcome-informed, and changeoriented. The text is categorized into seven parts, each formatted similarly to ensure easy accessibility. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Becoming Strengths and Solution-Based (SSB):
Creating a Context for Change. Part II: Getting Focused: Exploring Strengths and Solutions in Information-gathering. Part III: Reconnection to Self: Experience, Affect, and Emotion. Part IV: Exploring New Worlds of Possibility: Changing Perspectives and Perceptions. Part V: Lives in Motion: Changing Patterns of Action and Interaction. Part VI: Narratives of Transformation? Change, Progress, Transitions, and Endings. Part VII: Creating a Culture of Care and Respect: Consultation, Supervision, and Development. August 2009: 200pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99415-6: £27.95 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Building Motivational Interviewing Skills A Practitioner Workbook David B. Rosengren, University of Washington’s Alcohol and Drug Abuse Institute, USA “Rather than blaming the client for lack of change, this book takes seriously the clinician’s role in the change process. In a friendly, accessible format, the book shows how to skillfully guide clients toward healthy behavior change... For those who are new to MI or who are already familiar with the approach, I highly recommend this book.” - Scott Walters, University of Texas School of Public Health, USA Developing expertise in motivational interviewing (MI) takes practice, which is exactly the point of this engaging, user-friendly workbook. The volume is packed with real-world examples from a range of clinical settings, as well as sample interactions and hands-on learning activities. Working alone or with a partner or study group, the reader is taken step by step through practicing core MI skills: raising the importance of behavior change, enhancing the client’s confidence, resolving ambivalence, solidifying commitment to change, and negotiating a change plan.
9
Contents: Introduction. Foundations of MI. The Use of OARS: Reflective Listening. The Use of OARS: Open-ended Questions, Affirmations and Summaries. Recognizing, Reinforcing and Eliciting Change Talk. Managing Resistance. Opening a Session or Topic. Working with Ambivalence. Information Sharing, Expressing Concern, and Giving Advice. The Key Question. Negotiating a Treatment Plan. Learning MI. Appendices.
August 2009: 340pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-299-6: £25.95
Series: Applications of Motivational Interviewing Published by Guilford Press
Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy for Women A Clinician’s Manual Hadar Lubin, and David Read Johnson, both Co-Director’s, Post Traumatic Stress Center, New Haven, Connecticut, USA
The awareness of psychological trauma has grown exponentially in the past decade, and clinicians in many areas have increasingly found themselves confronted with the need to provide trauma-related services to clients. Still, there remains a serious lack of manuals that guide clinicians using group therapy to treat posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy for Women is the important, “how-to” resource that fills this void with a successful theory-based, field-tested model of group therapy for traumatized women. Concise and full of clinical examples, this helpful text includes a session-by-session guide for clinicians and a workbook for clients. selected Contents: Courtois, Foreword. Part I: The Trauma-Centred Group Psychotherapy Model. Part II: Session-by-session Lecture Series. Part III: Ensuring Success with Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy. Appendices.
2008: 176pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3682-7: £31.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3683-4: £18.50 Published by Routledge
The Past in the Present Therapy Enactments and the Return of Trauma Edited by David Mann, NHS Trust, Kent, UK, and Valerie Cunningham, in private practice, Tunbridge Wells, UK
“Mann and Cunningham have brought together a fine collection of clinicians, from diverse backgrounds and both sides of the Atlantic, providing an unprecedented depth and breadth of exploration of enactment. This will be of great importance and interest to seasoned practitioners as well as those in training.” - Phil Mollon, Psychoanalyst (British Psychoanalytic Society), Psychotherapist (Tavistock Society), and Clinical Psychologist
The Past in the Present brings together, for the first time, contemporary ideas from both the psychoanalytic and humanistic therapy traditions, looking at how trauma and enactments affect therapeutic practice. Enactments are often experienced as a crisis in therapy and are understood as symbolic interactions between the client and therapist, where personal issues of both parties become unconsciously entwined. This is arguably especially true if the client has undergone some form of trauma. This trauma becomes enacted in the therapy
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
psychotherapy and counselling
10
and becomes a turning point that significantly influences the course of therapy, sometimes with creative or even destructive effect. Using a wealth of clinical material throughout, the contributors show how therapists from different therapeutic orientations are thinking about and working with enactments in therapy, how trauma enactment can affect the therapeutic relationship and how both therapist and client can use it to positive effect. Contents: Mann, Cunningham, Introduction. Mann, Enactments and Trauma: The Therapist’s Vulnerability as the Theatre for the Patient’s Trauma. Cunningham, Mutual Enactments Within the Therapeutic Relationship. Adams, The Abandonment: Enactments from the Patient’s Sadism and the Therapist’s Collusion. Harding, The Ghost at the Feast: Enactments of Cumulative Trauma in the Therapeutic Relationship. Cornell, Loves and Losses: Enactments in the Disavowal of Intimate Desires. Case, Action, Enactment and Moments of Meeting in Therapy with Children. Kenward, Bad Faith in Practice: Enactments in Existential Psychotherapy. Marsden, Knight-Evans, Tangled Webs: Enactments on an Inpatient Ward for Eating Disorders. Embleton Tudor, Tudor, Past Present: Person-Centred Therapy with Trauma and Enactment. Webster, The Therapist as a ‘Bad Object’: The Use of Countertransference Enactment to Facilitate Psychoanalytic Therapy. McDermott, Working with Refugees: An Enactment and Guilt. Wieland, Chronic and Acute Enactment: The Passive Therapist and the Perverse Transference.
2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43369-3: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43370-9: £19.99 Published by Routledge
for further books on Trauma please see pages 50, 101
Contemporary Body Psychotherapy The Chiron Approach Edited by Linda Hartley, Transpersonal and Body Psychotherapist, Cambridge Body Psychotherapy Centre, UK “Essential reading for anyone seriously interested in body psychotherapy.” - Nick Totton, body psychotherapy trainer and author
Contemporary Body Psychotherapy: The Chiron Approach looks at the ground-breaking work of the London based Chiron Centre for Body Psychotherapy, a training centre recognised worldwide by professionals in the field. The book brings together Chiron trainers and therapists, describing how their integrative approach has enabled cutting-edge thinking. At a time when the psychotherapeutic profession has turned its interest towards the body and its intrinsic psychological dimension, Contemporary Body Psychotherapy: The Chiron Approach offers a timely and valuable contribution to the literature. It will provide essential reading for those practicing or involved with body psychotherapy, offering a new synthesis with the psychoanalytic tradition, as well as appealing to a wider audience of mental health professionals and academics with an interest in the area.
Illustration. Keary, Do We? Can We Look at the Disabled Body? Heitzler, Towards an Integrative Model of Trauma Therapy. Warnecke, The Borderline Relationship. Clark, Facing the Abuser in the Abused in Body Psychotherapy. Changing Socio-political Contexts. Waterston, Body Psychotherapy, Social Theory, Marxism and Civil War. Hartley, Concluding Words. 2008: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43938-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43939-8: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Eleven Blunders that Cripple Psychotherapy in America A Remedial Unblundering Nicholas A. Cummings, and William T. O’Donohue, both at the University of Nevada, Reno, USA
After a period of economic success and high regard in society, clinical psychology has fallen onto hard times, assert authors Nicholas Cummings and William O’Donohue. In the 1960s, clinical psychologists with doctorates were well paid in relation to comparable professions; today, starting salaries are lower than many jobs that require only a bachelor’s degree. Clinical psychology in the 1960s was preferred and valued over other fields as a profession; today it is not even on the list of top 20 fields for graduates to enter. What was and continues to be the reason for the decline and continuing descent of clinical psychology? Psychotherapy practice is based on a 50-minute hour, yet mental health treatment must operate at a much briefer, more efficient pace. Clinicians ignore the findings of scientific research for effective treatments and favor the overblown pronouncements of gurus who preach without substance. Clinicians failed to adapt their practice to the needs of the healthcare industry and do not recognize that psychotherapy is a health profession. The authors enumerate and discuss the Eleven Blunders That Cripple Psychotherapy in America and offer remedies to correct the ongoing decline of the field. Contents: Preface: The 50-minute Hour in a Nanosecond Era. Foreword: Our Founders Were Economically Savvy. Blunder 1: We Successors are Economic Illiterates. Blunder 2: We Turned Our Charismatic Leaders into Gurus. Blunder 3: Don’t Worry, Managed Care is a Passing Fad. Blunder 4: We are Not a Healthcare Profession. Blunder 5: At War with Ourselves: Failure of the Profession to Own its Training. Blunder 6: Our Anti-business Bias, an Inadvertent Vow of Poverty. Blunder 7: Our Public Relations: A Disaster or Just a Fiasco? Blunder 8: Political Correctness: We No Longer Speak as a Science and Profession. Blunder 9: Creating Patients Where There are None. Blunder 10: Diversity Fiddles While Practice Burns. Blunder 11: RxP: Is this Our Sole Economic Thrust? Afterword: Hope for a Profession of Endearing Losers.
2008: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98963-3: £19.95 Published by Routledge
Contents: Hartley, Introduction. Part I: The Development of Core Principles
and Theory. Ground and Roots. Eiden, The Roots and the Development of the Chiron Approach. Schaible, Biodynamic Massage as a Body Therapy and as a Tool in Body Psychotherapy. Reynolds, Gestalt Body Psychotherapy. The Crucible. Soth, From Humanistic Holism Via the ‘Integrative Project’ Towards Integral-relational Body Psychotherapy. Carroll, Self-regulation – An Evolving Concept at the Heart of Body Psychotherapy. Asheri, To Touch or Not to Touch: A Relational Body Psychotherapy Perspective. Ablack, The Body-mind Dynamics of Working with Diversity. Part II: New Directions and Applications. An Intimate Perspective. Stauffer, The Use of Neuroscience in Body Psychotherapy: Theoretical and Clinically Relevant Aspects. Landale, Working with Psychosomatic Distress and Developmental Trauma: A Clinical
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Counselling and Psychotherapy series: Investigating Practice from Scientific, Historical, and Cultural Perspectives
11
www.routledgementalhealth.com/counseling-and-psychotherapy Forthcoming!
Forthcoming!
Therapeutic Assessment
The Resilient Practitioner
Using Psychological Testing to Help Clients Change
Second Edition
Stephen Finn, University of Texas, USA Collaborative Assessment, or Therapeutic Assessment, has been a recognized concept in clinical and counseling psychology for twenty years and one that is now rapidly growing in popularity. Finn has prepared this very detailed handbook for masters and doctoral students in clinical psychology and counseling. He discusses the principles and background of therapeutic assessment, procedures for using it with clients, and special issues that need to be considered. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Paradigm. A Model of Therapeutic Assessment.
History and Context of Therapeutic Assessment. Part II: Procedures. The Phone Contact, Observation, and Initial Interview. Early Assessment Sessions. Assessment Intervention Sessions. Summary/Discussion Sessions. Writing Feedback to Clients. Follow-up Sessions. Part III: Special Topics. Adults Referred by Another Professional. Testing One’s Own Clients During Therapy. Involuntary Assessments. Part IV: Conclusion. Concluding Remarks. January 2010: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5763-4: £50.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Culture and the Therapeutic Process A Guide for Mental Health Professionals Edited by Mark M. Leach, and Jamie D. Aten, both at the University of Southern Mississippi, USA Leach and Aten take a “start to finish” approach to incorporating culture into the treatment stages of counseling and psychotherapy. This book goes beyond the brief introduction to bridge culture and mental health theory and research with practice. Each expert author provides practical strategies, techniques, examples, and case studies highlighting the incorporation of culture at each stage of treatment. Contents: Leach, Aten, An Introduction into the Practical Incorporation of Culture into Practice. Leach, Aten, Boyer, Strain, Bradshaw, Developing Therapist Self-awareness and Knowledge. Fontes, Considering Culture in the Clinical Intake Interview and Report. Paniagua, Assessment and Diagnosis in a Cultural Context. Constantine, Mivilee, Kindaichi, Owens, Case Conceptualizations of Mental Health Counselors: Implications for the Delivery of Culturally Competent Care. Johnson, Sandhu, Treatment Planning in a Multicultural Context: Some Suggestions for Counselors and Psychotherapists. Roysircar, Gill, Cultural Encapsulation and Decapsulation of Therapist Trainees. Utsey, Fischer, Belvet, Culture and Worldview in Counseling and Psychotherapy: Recommended Approaches for Working with Persons from Diverse Sociocultural Backgrounds. Ridley, Shaw-Ridley, Termination within the Context of Culture: A Three-phase Model. Fukuyama, Phan, Looking through a Kaleidoscope: A Case Study.
January 2010: 320pp. Pb: 978-0-8058-6247-8: £25.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Thomas Skovholt, University of Minnesota, USA This informative and inspirational volume creates a map for new mental health practitioners – one that provides a positive trinity of validity, clarity, and hope for novices, their teachers, and their supervisors. Contents: Opening Up Your Life to the Excitement of the Helping Professions. The Novice Advantage. The Curse of Ambiguity and Other Ills and What to Do About Them. Who Am I Becoming? Novice Critical Incidents. Developing Habits of Culturally Competent Practice. Issues, Concerns and Tips for the Novice Practitioner. Clash of Cultures. The Holding World of Supervisors, Mentors and Peers. Accelerating Development Along the Novice to Expert Path. The Cycle of Caring. Developing Practitioner Resiliency. The Enormous Meaning of the Work.
January 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98938-1: £56.00 Pb: 978-0-415-98939-8: £22.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Pharmacology and Treatment of Substance Abuse Evidence and Outcome Based Perspectives Edited by Lee M. Cohen, Texas Tech University, USA, Frank L. Collins, Jr., University of North Texas, USA, Alice Young, Texas Tech University, USA, Dennis E. McChargue, University of Nebraska, USA, Thad R. Leffingwell, Oklahoma State UniversityStillwater, USA, and Katrina L. Cook, Texas Tech University, USA Given the prevalence of substance abuse in general clinical populations, it is important for healthcare providers to have knowledge and skill in the treatment of these problems. Evidence-Based Practice (EBP) involves the integration of the best evidence with clinical expertise and patient values. This text is designed as a bridge for practitioners that will provide up-to-date evidence reviews as well as information on how to best keep up with emerging trends in the field. The editors have gathered expert authors to provide a much needed summary of the current status of the evidence based practice for both the assessment and treatment of specific substance use disorders. Contents: Young, Cohen, Part I: Psychopharmacology and Neurobiology of Substance Abuse. Paronis, Principles of Drug Action. Cooper, Comer, Actions of Drugs Pertinent to their Abuse. Vandrey, Mintzer, Performance and Cognitive Alterations. Allen, Tolerance, Sensitization, and Physical Dependance. Koob, The Neurobiology of Addiction. Ray, Hutchison, Genetics of Addiction. Callahan, Evidence-Based Practice. Collins, Leffingwell, Part II: Conceptual Models and Principles of Substance Abuse Treatment. Pierce, King, Brooner, From Individual Therapy to Individualized Treatment. Morrell, Myers, Group Therapy for Substance Abuse. Gianini, Lundy, Smith, The Community Reinforcement Approach: CRA and CRAFT Programs. Steiker, Hopson, Goldbach, Sagun, Laird, Prevention. Cohne, McChargue, Part III: Assessment and Treatment of Substance Abuse. Blume, Resor, Villanueva, Braddy, Evidence-Based Practices to Treat Alcohol Problems. Brandon, Droves, Ditre, Elibero, Nicotine. Looby,
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
counselling and psychotherapy series
12
Earleywine, Assessment and Treatment of Marijuana and Use Disorders. Barry, Petry, Alessi, Cocaine. Rush, Vansickel, Lile, Stoops, Evidence-Based Treatment of Amphetamine Dependance: Behavioral and Pharmacological Approaches. Marsch, Bickel, Heroin and Other Opioids. Crano, Ting, Hemovich, Inhalants. Suzuki, Halpern, Passie, Huertas, Hallucinogens and Dissociative Drugs. Echevery, Nettles, Club Drugs: An Overview. Collins, Cohen, Part IV: Special Topics. Rowe, Liddle, Dakof, Henderson, Development and Evolution of an Evidence-Based Practice: Multidimensional Family Therapy as a Treatment System. Roman, Knudsen, Drug Testing, the Workplace, and Other Applications. al’Absi, Mechanisms of Stress on Substance Abuse Initiation, Maintenance, and Relapse: Intervention Implications. Murphy, Correia, Vuchinich, The Behavioral Economics of Substance Abuse. Caldeiro, Meredith, Saxon, Calsyn, Pharmacological Approaches to the Treatment of Substance Abuse. Hartzler, Rosengren, Baer, Motivational Interviewing. Johnson, Bennett, Faith-based Approaches. Sher, Martinez, The Future of Treatment for Substance Use: A View from 2009. August 2009: 720pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5968-3: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5969-0: £45.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Intersections of Multiple Identities A Casebook of Evidence-Based Practices with Diverse Populations Edited by Miguel E. Gallardo, Pepperdine University, Irvine, USA, and Brian W. McNeill, Washington State University, Pullman, USA This casebook provides demonstrations of Evidence-Based Practice in Psychology (EBPP) with diverse clientele, focusing on multiple dimensions and intersections of identity and diversity. The integration of research and clinical expertise described in this volume allows the reader to examine, conceptualize and treat the multiple ways individuals identify themselves (ethnicity/race, religion/spirituality, disability, and sexual orientation). Each chapter is written by experts who illustrate their work in therapeutic encounters from an EBPP perspective, addressing various expressions of diversity in a culturally sensitive manner. Contents: Goodheart, Foreword. McNeill, Gallardo, Introduction: Psychotherapy as a Healing Process. Cervantes, In Search of a Bi-ethnic Identity: Clinical and Ethical Issues in the Treatment of a Latino/African American Adolescent Boy. Mejia, Struggling with Research and Practice with a Mexican American Family: The Case of Robert. Rowe, Rowe, Conversations in Marriage: An African-centered Marital Intervention. McCubbin, Intersecting Multiple Identities: The Case of Lehua. King, Psychotherapy with an American Indian Perspective. Ortiz, Spirituality and Psychotherapy: A Gay Latino Client. Miville, Romero, Corpus, Incorporating Affirming, Feminist, and Relational Perspectives: The Case of Juan. Englar-Carlson, Rath, The Conflict of Navigating Cultural Expectations: The Case of Sam. Sayyedi, Psychotherapy with a 17-year-old Iranian American Female: Therapeutic Guidelines. Gibson, Clinical Competency and Culturally Diverse Clients with Disabilities: The Case of Linda. Gallardo, McNeill, Conclusion: Evidence-Based Practice and Multiple Implications: Reflections and Future Directions. Parham, Afterword. June 2009: 394pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6189-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6190-7: £27.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Beyond Evidence-Based Psychotherapy Fostering the Eight Sources of Change in Child and Adolescent Treatment George W. Rosenfeld, Sutter Counseling Center, California, USA
Beyond Evidence-Based Psychotherapy teaches students through a common factors pointof-view, combining research, case studies, multiple treatment orientations, and a perspective that describes the personal growth of a clinician’s career. It differs from previous texts in that it presents the recent research on psychotherapy in a format that is understandable, memorable, and relevant to student concerns, while integrating research and clinical experience to pragmatically guide clinical decisions. This book provides students of child and adolescent psychotherapy that are pursuing degrees in psychiatry, clinical psychology, social work, and marriage and family counseling with an insight into the practice of a child psychologist with 40,000 hours of experience working with thousands of clients and families. Contents: What Are Reasonable Expectations for Psychotherapy? The 8 Sources of Change in Psychotherapy. The Therapist’s Contribution to Treatment. Using the Therapeutic Relationship as a Treatment Tool. How Can I Keep Clients in Treatment so They can Benefit? Managing Treatment. Engaging Clients Through Seeking Greater Happiness. Has Being a Therapist Been a Good Career Choice? We Are Like Chefs Who Never Eat Out: A Typical Day. Seven and Eleven Week Follow-up.
2008: 284pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99335-7: £59.50 Pb: 978-0-415-99336-4: £25.00
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Deaf and Hearing Persons with Language and Learning Challenges Neil Glickman, Westborough State Hospital, Massachusetts, USA
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Deaf and Hearing Persons with Language and Learning Challenges provides a model for adapting best practices in cognitive-behavioral therapy to consumers whose language and cognitive deficits make it difficult for them to benefit from traditional talk oriented psychotherapy. The book focuses primarily upon the mental health care of those deaf clients, sometimes referred to as “low functioning” or “traditionally underserved,” who are particularly difficult to engage in meaningful treatment. Drawing most heavily upon the work of Donald Meichenbaum, Marsha Linehan and Ross Greene, this book presents adaptations and simplifications of psychotherapy which make it accessible and meaningful for persons often viewed as “poor candidates.” The heart of the book is a greatly simplified approach to psychosocial skills training, especially in the domains of coping, conflict resolution and relapse prevention skills. Contents: Introduction. Language and Learning Challenges in the Deaf Psychiatric Population. Do You Hear Voices? Gaines, Meltzner, Glickman,
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
counselling and psychotherapy series Language and Learning Challenges in Adolescent Hearing Psychiatric Inpatients. Pre-treatment Strategies to Engage and Motivate Clients. Coping Skills. Conflict Resolution Skills. Relapse Prevention and Crisis Management Skills. Staff and Program Development.
2008: 420pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6398-7: £78.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6399-4: £34.50
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Principles of Multicultural Counseling and Therapy
Edited by Uwe P. Gielen, St. Francis College, New York, USA, Juris G. Draguns, Pennsylvania State University, USA, and Jefferson M. Fish, St. John’s University, New York, USA Principles of Multicultural Counseling and Therapy focuses on general cultural principles of importance for psychological intervention. Each chapter explores the role of culture in defining, interpreting, and managing interpersonal situations that center around client distress and confusion, providing a global approach that leads readers to a deeper understanding of the international aspects that govern a variety of counseling and therapeutic situations. This concise, teachable volume, covering both models and practice of multicultural counseling, is designed for instructors and students in multicultural counseling and clinical psychology. 2008: 488pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6205-8: £56.50 Pb: 978-0-8058-6204-1: £22.00
Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men
13
Forthcoming!
Counseling Boys and Men with ADHD George Kapalka, Monmouth University, New Jersey, USA This book fills a void in the current literature by providing a detailed and comprehensive discussion of a wide variety of specific interventions – individual counseling, parenting techniques, classroom interventions, group counseling techniques, and (where appropriate) the use of medications as adjuncts to those counseling techniques and the methods of coordinating this multimodal treatment. The author begins by reviewing issues of description, etiology, course, assessment, and differential diagnosis. Next, he discusses counseling and psychotherapy techniques, focusing on individual and group approaches, as well as the involvement of parents and spouses/ partners in treatment. Educational interventions are then reviewed, followed by a review of the use of medications. A highly practical and scholarly guide, this book will no doubt be invaluable to school and mental health professionals who serve boys, adolescent males, and men with ADHD. Contents: Part I: Diagnosis, Epidemiology, and Course Symptoms of ADHD. Epidemiology and Course of ADHD. Assessment Techniques. Differential Diagnosis. Part II: Counseling and Psychotherapy Individual Techniques: Boys and Teens. Individual Techniques: Men. Group Techniques. Parenting Techniques. Working with Spouses and Partners of Men with ADHD. Part III: Educational Interventions. Classroom Behavior Management. Instructional Modifications. Part IV: Medical Approaches. Stimulant Medications. Non-stimulant Medications. Alternative Treatments.
December 2009: 416pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99344-9: £24.95
Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men Published by Routledge
Series: Counselling and Psychotherapy Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Finn: In Our Clients’ Shoes: Theory and Techniques of Therapeutic Assessment Hb: 978-0-8058-5764-1: 2007: 320pp. £19.95
Grawe: Neuropsychotherapy: How the Neurosciences Inform Effective Psychotherapy Hb: 978-0-8058-6121-1: 2006: 504pp. £90.50 Pb: 978-0-8058-6122-8: 2006: 504pp. £29.95
Blustein: The Psychology of Working: A New Perspective for Career Development, Counseling, and Public Policy Hb: 978-0-8058-4376-7: 2006: 384pp. £62.50 Pb: 978-0-8058-5879-2: 2006: 384pp. £24.50
Glidden-Tracey: Counseling and Therapy with Clients Who Abuse Alcohol or Other Drugs: An Integrative Approach Hb: 978-0-8058-4550-1: 2005: 312pp. £69.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-4551-8: 2005: 312pp. £26.00
Wampold: The Great Psychotherapy Debate: Models, Methods, and Findings Hb: 978-0-8058-3201-3: 2001: 280pp. £39.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-3202-0: 2001: 280pp. £21.50
Forthcoming!
Counseling Fathers Edited by Chen Z. Oren, and Dora Chase Oren, both at the Phillips Graduate Institute, California, USA Men do not often come for counseling because they are having difficulties with being a father, but many of the presenting problems and reasons for seeking help can be related to the roles and responsibilities of fathering. Counseling Fathers is designed to bridge the gap between fathers and professional helpers. This book provides the mental health practitioners with a guide for working with fathers in therapy, whether the issues of fathering are at the center of the discussions or in the background. The organization of the book speaks to the variety of today’s fathers and the issues that they face. Part I provides an historical overview of the fathering movement, a strength-based approach to working with fathers, and an assessment paradigm using gender role conflict theory. Part II takes a cross-cultural approach, with a series of chapters that look at counseling with Latino, Asian, Black, and Caucasian fathers. Part III looks at specific populations of fathers, including first time fathers, teen fathers, stay-at-home fathers, gay fathers, and older fathers. Counseling Fathers provides the most up-to-date and comprehensive resource for family and individual practitioners who work with men who father.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
14
Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men
Contents: Pleck, Foreword. C. Z. Oren, D. C. Oren, Preface: Counseling
Diverse Populations of Fathers. Part I: Historical Perspectives and Current Directions. Levant, Wimer, The New Fathering Movement. Oren, Englar-Carlson, Stevens, Oren, Counseling Fathers from a Strength-based Perspective. O’Neill, Luan, An Assessment Paradigm for Fathers and Men in Therapy Using Gender Role Conflict Theory. Part II: Counseling Fathers Across Ethnic Groups. Cervantes, Mexican American Fatherhood: Culture, Machismo, and Spirituality. Seto, Becker, Narang, Working with Asian American Fathers. Franklin, Another Side of Invisibility: Present and Responsible Black Fathers. Owen, Glass, Counseling Caucasian Fathers: Affirming Cultural Strengths While Addressing White Male Priviledge. Part III: Counseling Specific Populations of Fathers. Robertson, Challenges and Clinical Issues in Counseling Religously Affiliated Fathers. Berger, Increasing Clinical and Contextual Awareness When Working with New Fathers. Rochlen, McKelley, Working Therapeutically with Stay-at-Home Fathers. Arcinue, Prince, Counseling Teen Fathers: A Developmentally Sensitive Strength-based Approach. Alonzo, Counseling Gay Fathers: Stepping into the New Frontier. Remer, Massoth, Crumpton, Oren, Oren, Counseling Older Fathers. September 2009: 356pp. Pb: 978-0-415-98864-3: £22.00
Routledge Series on Counselling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men Published by Routledge
also in the series Kiselica et al., Eds.: Counseling Troubled Boys: A Guidebook for Professionals Pb: 978-0-415-95547-8: 2007: 336pp. £20.99
Mortola et al.: BAM! Boys Advocacy and Mentoring
psychotherapy and counselling
Counseling Military Families What Mental Health Professionals Need to Know
Lynn K. Hall, Western New Mexico University, USA Foreword by Mary Edwards Wertsch The objectives of Counseling Military Families are to help the practicing counselor understand how the military works, what issues are constants for the military family, and what stressors are faced by the military member and the family. The book begins with an overview of military life, including demographic information and examples of military family issues, before delving into specific chapters focused on the unique circumstances of reservists, career service personnel, spouses, and children. The final section of the book presents treatment models and targeted interventions tailored for use with military families. Contents: Setting the Stage. Introduction: Rationale and Purpose. Military Service Members. The Military Family. The Unique Culture of the Military. The Military Family. The Children. Other Military Families to Consider. Working with Military Families. Major Challenges of Military Families. The Transition Journey. Effective Interventions. Military Family Case Studies. Resources. 2008: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95687-1: £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95688-8: £18.95 Published by Routledge
Pb: 978-0-415-96318-3: 2007: 192pp. £22.50
for further books on Child and Adolescent Mental Health please see page 39
Biennial Review of Counseling Psychology Volume 1, 2008 W. Bruce Walsh, The Ohio State University, Columbus, USA Co-published with APA Division 17 (Counseling Psychology)
Created to keep pace with changes in the psychological fields, the Biennial Review of Counseling Psychology addresses key developments in theory, research, and practice. New areas that have evolved in counseling psychology are discussed, and each chapter is written by current front-runners in the field. Contents: Baker, Subich, Counseling Psychology. Minami, Wampold, Adult Psychotherapy in the Real World. Goodheart, Carter, The Proper Focus of Evidence-based Practice in Psychology. Stoltenberg, Pace, Science and Practice in Supervision. Constantine, Fuertec, Kindaichi, Multicultural Competence. Blustein, Fouad, The Changing Face of Vocational Psychology. Magyar-Moe, Lopez, Human Agency, Strengths-based Development, and Well-being. Bieschke, Hardy, Fassinger, Croteau, Intersecting Identities of Gendertransgressive Sexual Minorities. Cooper, Resnick, Rodolfa, Douce, College Counseling and Mental Health Services. Heppner, Leong, Gerstein, Counseling Within a Changing World. Santiago-Rivera, Guzman, Psychosocial Issues and Psychotherapeutic Treatment Considerations with Recent Immigrants. Elliott, Hurst, Social Problem Solving and Health.
2008: 344pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6279-9: £75.00 Published by Psychology Press
New in Paperback!
The Science of Subjective Well-Being Edited by Michael Eid, Free University of Berlin, Germany, and Randy J. Larsen, Washington University, St. Louis, USA “What makes us happy? One might think this a very simple question, but the contributors to this volume suggest that many of our intuitions are not well supported by science... Eid and Larsen have gathered together brilliant thinkers and lively writers who explore just what it is that makes us feel good about our lives.” - Peter Salovey, Dean of Yale College, USA, and Chris Argyris Professor of Psychology, Yale University, USA
This authoritative volume reviews the breadth of current scientific knowledge on subjective well-being (SWB): its definition, causes and consequences, measurement, and practical applications that may help people become happier. Leading experts explore the connections between SWB and a range of intrapersonal and interpersonal phenomena, including personality, health, relationship satisfaction, wealth, cognitive processes, emotion regulation, religion, family life, school and work experiences, and culture. Interventions and practices that enhance SWB are examined, with attention to both their benefits and limitations. The concluding chapter from Ed Diener dispels common myths in the field and presents a thoughtful agenda for future research. selected Contents: Part I: The Realm of Subjective Well-Being. Part II: Measuring Subjective Well-Being. Part III: The Happy Person. Part IV: Subjective Well-Being in the Interpersonal Domain. Part V: Making People Happier. Part VI: Conclusions and Future Directions. 2008: 546pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-581-9: 2007: £43.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-073-2: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
psychotherapy and counselling
Routledge Recommends!
The Lost Art of Listening How Learning to Listen Can Improve Relationships Second Edition Michael P. Nichols, College of William and Mary, Virginia, USA “Lily Tomlin once advised that we listen with an intensity that most people save for talking.’ Michael Nichols, in The Lost Art of Listening, tells us how. This is a very special book which distills years of clinical wisdom into practical advice about improving our most important relationships and, ultimately, who we are... This is more than a good book, it is a vital manual for any of us who would either like to feel good about our relationships or avoid dying before the end of our lives.” - Carol M. Anderson, coauthor of Flying Solo This perennial bestseller has already helped many thousands of readers resolve conflicts and transform their relationships with family members, romantic partners, colleagues, and friends. Experienced therapist Michael P. Nichols explains why we often feel cut off from those we care about and provides easy-to-learn techniques for really hearing and being heard. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Yearning to be Understood. Why Listening is So Important. “Did You Hear What I Said?” How Listening Shapes Us and Connects Us to Each Other. “Thanks for Listening”. How Communication Breaks Down. “Why Won’t You Listen to Me?” Part II: The Real Reasons People Don’t Listen. The Heart of Listening: The Struggle to Suspend Our Own Needs. “When is it My Turn?” How Hidden Assumptions Prejudice Listening. “You Hear Only What You Want to Hear!” How Emotionality Makes Us Defensive. “Why Do You Always Overreact!” Part III: Getting Through to Each Other. How to Let Go of Your Own Needs and Listen. “Take Your Time – I’m Listening.” Empathy Begins with Openness. “I Never Knew You Felt That Way.” How to Defuse Emotional Reactivity. “I Can See This is Really Upsetting You.” Part IV: Listening in Context. Listening Between Intimate Partners. “We Never Seem to Talk Anymore.” How to Listen and Be Heard within the Family. “Nobody Around Here Ever Listens to Me!” Being Able to Hear Friends and Colleagues. “I Knew You’d Understand.” April 2009: 314pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-064-0: £27.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-986-2: £11.95
Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Changepower! 37 Secrets to Habit Change Success Meg Selig, St. Louis Community College, Florissant Valley, USA In Changepower!, author Meg Selig guides the readers through a step-by-step process to help change their behavior – whether breaking a long-time habit such as smoking, heavy drinking, or habitual speeding or trying to integrate a new, positive habit into their life, this book presents a platform for change. The book takes a practical approach to behavioral change, helping the reader along the way from precontemplation all the way through termination. Selig provides a
15
detailed, step-by-step plan for each stage, but with plenty of room for flexibility depending on each individual’s needs. Lively and engaging stories, from the author as well as clients and friends, provide humor and encouragement through anecdotal successes, failures, and pitfalls. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Springboard: Change by Choice. Secret 1: Discover Your Place on the Wheel of Change. Secret 2: Try the Quick-change Path. Secret 3: Detect Your Success Pattern. Secret 4: Respect the Power of Habit and Addiction. Secret 5: Know the Key Factor in Habit Change Success. Part II: The Precontemplation Stage: Open the Door. Secret 1: View Your Habit with a Compassionate Eye. Secret 2: Know When True Self-care has Morphed into False Self-care. Secret 3: Reduce Harm. Secret 4: Define Your “Change Point.” Secret 5: When Your Habit is Stronger Than You Are, Seek Help. Secret 6: Open the Door. Part III: The Contemplation Stage: Discover Your Motivators. Secret 1: Wake Up from Your Habit Trance. Secret 2: Keep Score. Secret 3: Welcome the Pain. Secret 4: Think Big: Spark Your Change with these Eight Great Motivators. Secret 5: Pump Up Your Motivation. Secret 6: Create an Encouraging Inner Friend. Secret 7: Dare to Decide. Part IV: The Preparation Stage: Use Plan Power. Secret 1: Think Small: Glide into Change with a Gentle Mini-goal. Secret 2: Build Your Plan with These 12 Super-tools of Change. Secret 3: Back Up Wimpy Willpower. Secret 4: Recruit Your Support Team. Secret 5: Vaccinate Yourself Against Lapses and Relapses. Secret 6: Make Your Plan – and Tweak it as You Go. Part V: The Action Stage: Do It! Secret 1: Use the Action Supertools on Change Day – and Every Day. Secret 2: Ride Out the Cravings with these Proven Techniques. Secret 3: Speak Up. Secret 4: Brace Yourself for the Change-back Squad. Secret 5: Shape Up a Flabby Plan with These Easy Fixes. Part VI: Relapse: Turn Setbacks into Success. Secret 1: Prevent Lapses and Relapses. Secret 2: Deal with the Dreadful “D Feelings” of Relapse. Secret 3: Try Again. Part VII: The Maintenance Stage: Keep On Keeping On. Secret 1: Keep On Keeping On with Maintenance Super-tools. Secret 2: Keep Your Life in Balance. Secret 3: Climb a Few Rungs on the Happiness Ladder. Part VIII: The Termination Stage: Move On. Secret 1: Know Your Final Destination. Secret 2: Build a Better Life with Habit Change Skills. January 2010: 170pp. Pb: 978-0-415-80066-2: £10.95 Published by Routledge
Anger, Rage and Relationship An Empathic Approach to Anger Management Sue Parker Hall, BACP accredited therapist
“This is a powerful and timely work that enhances and extends the field of ‘anger management’ considerably. Reading it has given me many points of reflection and its richness and clarity have already helped me personally as well as professionally in the role of therapist. An inspiring read.” - Jim Holloway, Independent Counsellor and Psychotherapist Anger, Rage and Relationship presents a radically new way to understand and work with anger and rage issues. Taking a relational approach to anger and rage, the book presents a positive view of human nature, supported by recent research findings and illustrated with case studies, with individuals trusted to be essentially pro-social. Rather than promoting strategies and techniques for eradicating anger, Sue Parker Hall, puts forward an approach which seeks to not only work with, but to differentiate between, anger and rage. Anger and rage are constructed as entirely different phenomena, originating at different developmental stages, having different functions and relational needs and requiring different aspects of relationship in the therapeutic process. 2008: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41347-3: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41348-0: £18.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
16
adlerian psychotherapy and counselling
New Edition!
Forthcoming!
Adlerian Counseling and Psychotherapy
Multicultural Counseling
A Practitioner’s Approach Fifth Edition Thomas J. Sweeney, Ohio University, Athens, USA Adlerian Counseling and Psychotherapy, now it its fifth edition, remains a classic text for students and an essential resource for practitioner’s of all levels of experience. Reviewers have consistently lauded the book in previous editions for its clarity, concise focus, and use of many practical applications. It explains and illustrates individual, group, and couples work with children, adolescents, and adults of all ages. The fifth edition presents a fresh organization and an even clearer structure. Contents: Part I: Foundations for Understanding Human Nature. Individual Psychology: The Man, the Movement, and the Psychology of Alfred Adler. Wellness Through Social Interest: The Goal of Helping. Part II: What We Learn from Life. Life’s Rules are for Everyone: Natural and Logistical Consequences. Encouragement: The Essential Element in Helping. Part III: First vs. Second Order Change: Counseling vs. Psychotherapy. Adlerian Psychotherapy in Practice. Life Style Assessment: Uncovering the Unconscious. Part IV: Life Task Applications of Individual Psychology. Work: Career Style Assessment and Counseling. Friendship: Guiding Children Through Social Interest and Cooperation. Love: Counseling Couples. Love: Counseling with Families. Self and Spirit: Working with Groups. Adlerian Supervision: Passing on the Legacy. Appendix A: Family Counseling. Appendix B: Family Council.
July 2009: 431pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99348-7: £31.00 Published by Routledge
cross cultural counselling
Forthcoming!
The Psychology of Courage An Adlerian Handbook for Healthy Social Living Julia Yang, and Alan Milliren, both at Governors State University, USA, and Mark Blagen, University of Illinois, Springfield, USA Courage refers to the willingness for risk taking and to move ahead in the presence of difficulties. The purpose of this book is to present courage as the main thrust of understanding and training for mental health in three life task areas: Work, Love, and Friendship. The authors discuss the theoretical basis of courage in combination with the assessment and change strategies of Adlerian psychology. The processes that bring out the courage of change serve as the major framework by which practical Adlerian techniques (i.e. early recollection, family constellation, lifestyle assessment, consequences, and Socratic questioning), counseling scripts, and case stories are illustrated. Contents: Carlson, Foreword. Part I: Foundation. What is Courage? Gemeinschaftsgefuhl. Tasks of Life. Part II: The Courage of Social Living. The Courage to Work. The Courage to Love. The Courage for Friendship and Family. The Courage to Belong. The Courage to Be. The Courage of Spiritual Wellbeing. Part III: Implications. The Art of Facilitating Courage. Tools to Facilitate Courage.
September 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96519-4: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Perspectives from Counselors as Clients of Color Aretha Marbley, Texas Tech University, Counselor Education, USA Multicultural Counseling contains the firsthand telling of cultural stories (that encompass race, ethnicity, class, gender, and life cycle) of African American, Asian, Hispanic/Latino, and Native American Indian people’s experiences of mental health services. Using real cases, narratives, and biographical material, each chapter motivates the reader to ponder and challenge how issues related to mental health intersect with race and ethnicity within a broader diversity framework. January 2010: 256pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95686-4: £21.95 Published by Routledge
Cross Cultural Awareness and Social Justice in Counseling Edited by Cyrus Marcellus Ellis, and Jon Carlson, both at Governors State University, Illinois, USA
The theoretical foundation for this book rests on research into diversity, spirituality, religion, and color-specific issues. Each chapter addresses the unique needs and relevant issues in working with a specific population, such as women, men, African Americans, Asian Americans, Spanishspeaking clients, North America’s indigenous people, members of the LGBT community, new citizens, and the poor, underserved, and underrepresented. Issues that enter into the counselor-patient relationship are discussed in detail for all of these groups. Contents: Toporek, Counseling from a Cross Cultural and Social Justice Posture. Manis, Brown, Paylo, The Helping Professional as an Advocate. Farrell, Developing a Diverse Counseling Posture. Brown, May, Counseling with Women. Englar-Carlson, Counseling with Men. Grimmett, Locke, Counseling with African Americans. Singh, Counseling with Asian Americans. Smith, Montilla, Counseling with Spanish Speaking Clients. Turner, Pope, Counseling with North America’s Indigenous People. Tollerud, Slabon, Counseling with Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, and Transgender People. Zagelbaum, Counseling with New Citizens. Caldwell, Counseling with the Poor, Underserved and Underrepresented. Ellis, Carlson, The Next Step.
2008: 335pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95452-5: £26.00 Published by Routledge
Latina/o Healing Practices Mestizo and Indigenous Perspectives Edited by Brian McNeill, Washington State University, USA, and Jose M. Cervantes, California State University, USA
This edited volume focuses on the role of traditional or indigenous healers, as well as the application of traditional healing practices in contemporary counseling and therapeutic modalities with
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Essential coaching skills and knowledge series
coaching Latina/o people. The book offers a broad coverage of important topics, such as traditional healer’s views of mental/psychological health and well-being, the use of traditional healing techniques in contemporary psychotherapy, and herbal remedies in psychiatric practice. Contents: Garcia-Teague, An Appreciation of Dr. Michael Smith (1960-2006).
McNeill, Cervantes, Introduction – Counselors and Curandera/os: Parallels in the Healing Process. Part I: Mestizo and Indigenous Perspectives. Cervantes, What is Indigenous About Being Indigenous: The Mestizo Experience. Ortiz, Davis, Latino/a Folk Saints and Marian Devotions: Popular Religiosity and Healing. McNeill, Esquivel, Carrasco, Mendoza, Santería and the Healing Process in Cuba and the United States. Part II: Indigenous and Mestizo Healing Practices. Smith, Ascani, Use of Psychotropic Herbal and Natural Medicines in Latino and Mestizo Populations. Nuñez, Brazil’s Ultimate Healing Resource: The Power of Spirit. Holliday, La Limpia de San Lazaro as Individual and Collective Cleansing Rite. Castellanos, Gloria, Rese un Ave María y ensendi una velita: The Use of Spirituality and Religion as a Means of Coping With Educational Experiences for Latina/o College Students. Part III: Contemporary Aspects of Mestizo and Indigenous Healing Practices: Reclamation and Integration. Medina, Los Espiritus Siguen Hablando: Chicana Spiritualities. Holliday, Religious Healing and Biomedicine in Comparative Context. Ortiz, Rice, McNeill, Curanderismo: Religious and Spiritual Worldviews and Indigenous Healing Traditions. Cervantes, McNeill, Epilogue: Summary and Future Research and Practice Agendas. 2008: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95420-4: £39.95 Published by Routledge
Coaching
New Edition!
The Psychology of Executive Coaching Theory and Application Second Edition Bruce Peltier, in private practice, San Francisco, USA Coaching has become an important way for psychotherapists and other mental health professionals to adapt their skills to a changing environment. This book provides a comprehensive translation of psychotherapy theory and skills for the would-be executive coach. It was written to help clinical mental health practitioners understand the culture and expectations of the corporate and business world, as well as how to use their hard-earned skills effectively in executive coaching. The book begins with a clear explanation of how coaching differs from counseling and how to explain this to prospective new clients. Eight chapters translate popular therapies into coaching strategies, along with a guide for assessing executives. Contents: Introduction. Assessment. Developmental Psychology and Adult Development. The Psychodynamic View. Behavioral Concepts. The Personcentered Approach. Cognitive Psychology and Cognitive Therapy. Family Therapy and Systems Thinking. The Existential Stance. Social Psychology and Coaching. Hypnotic Communication. Emotional Intelligence. Lessons from Athletic Coaches. Coaching Women. Psychopathology. Leadership. Workers, Managers, and Leaders. Ethics in Coaching. Making the Transition.
November 2009: 384pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99341-8: £22.00 Published by Routledge
17
www.routledgementalhealth.com/essential-coaching-skills
Forthcoming!
101 Coaching Strategies Edited by Gladeana McMahon, Personal development and executive coach, UK and Anne Archer, Executive coach, group facilitator and researcher 101 Coaching Strategies provides focused, practical strategies to help the coach with their work. Each point provides a detailed explanation of the strategy together with potential pitfalls and solutions. Contributors from a range of coaching backgrounds are brought together to cover a number of issues faced by professional coaches including: • confidence building • developing specific skills and strategies • group coaching • problem solving and creativity • self awareness • the stuck client. 101 Coaching Strategies will be a handy reference tool for busy coaches; the bite-sized strategies will also provide a useful guide for those in training. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Confidence Building. Part II: Developing as a
Coach. Part III: Developing Specific Skills and Strategies. Part IV: Focus on the Future. Part V: Group Coaching. Part VI: Relationships. Part VII: Self Awareness. Part VIII: When a Client Gets Stuck. December 2009: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47333-0: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47334-7: £16.99
Series: Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Essential Life Coaching Skills Angela Dunbar, Managing Director, Dunbar Training and Development Consultancy, UK “This is a refreshing new take on areas which have been explored in other books... this book provides an entertaining and easy to follow guide to what coaching is, what it does, how it works and where to go for the next stage of the journey.” - Carol Wilson, From the Foreword Essential Life Coaching Skills provides a comprehensive guide to the complete range and depth of skills required to succeed as a life coach. Angela Dunbar uses theoretical background alongside practical examples to provide a clear understanding of what makes a successful life coach. This book focuses on seven essential skill sets that are necessary for effective life coaching with each chapter giving specific examples of how these skills are used in life coaching, and how they can be developed and improved. The book also includes a comprehensive, current overview of life coaching processes, practices, and issues, from both the coach and client perspectives.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
hypnotherapy
18
Essential Life Coaching Skills will be ideal reading for new and existing life coaches who wish to find ways to enhance their competence and ability. It will also be of use to therapists and counsellors looking to expand into coaching. Contents: Wilson, Foreword. Life Coaching in the UK – The Story So Far. Providing a Life Coaching Service. Life Coaching Case Studies. The Life Coaching Process. Skills Within the Wider Context. Relationship Building Skills. Listening Skills. Questioning Skills. Intuitive Skills. Challenging Skills. Motivating Skills. Marketing Skills. The Difference Between Life Coaching and Therapy. Developing Your Skills.
August 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45896-2: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45897-9: £16.99
Series: Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Buckley, A./Buckley, C.: A Guide to Coaching and Mental Health: The Recognition and Management of Psychological Issues Hb: 978-0-415-39458-1: 2006: 264pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39459-8: 2006: 264pp. £16.99
Leimon et al.: Essential Business Coaching Hb: 978-1-58391-882-1: 2005: 192pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-883-8: 2005: 192pp. £16.99
McMahon et al.: Achieving Excellence in Your Coaching Practice: How to Run a Highly Successful Coaching Business Hb: 978-1-58391-895-1: 2005: 248pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-896-8: 2005: 248pp. £16.99
hypnotherapy
New in Paperback!
The February Man Evolving Consciousness and Identity in Hypnotherapy Milton H. Erickson, Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Arizona, USA, and Ernest Lawrence Rossi, in private practice, California, USA Featuring a New Introduction by Ernest Lawrence Rossi This book is a fascinating case study that illustrates the use of multiple levels of consciousness and meaning to access and therapeutically reframe traumatic memories that were the source of very severe phobias and depression. It is a rare record of Erickson’s pioneering genius in facilitating the evolution of new patterns of consciousness and identity in a patient. Contents: Rosen, Foreword. Rossi, Introduction. Session I, Part I: Approaches
to Therapeutic Hypnosis. Session I, Part II: Identity Creation of the February Man. Session II: Multiple Levels of Communication and Being. Session III: Evoking and Utilizing Psychodynamic Processes. Session IV: Active Therapeutic Trancework. April 2009: 288pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99095-0: £19.00 Published by Routledge
professional issues and resources
Relational Ethics in Practice Narratives from Counselling and Psychotherapy
Edited by Lynne Gabriel, York St John University College, York, UK, and Roger Casemore, Senior Teaching Fellow, Warwick University, UK Relational Ethics in Practice presents a new collection of narratives on ethics in day-to-day therapeutic practice. Highly experienced professionals from a range of roles in the therapeutic professions explore ways of developing ethical and effective relationships. The contributors provide the reader with engaging and informative narratives that indicate how ethics can inform and influence practice in a variety of clinical contexts across the helping professions. These personal and professional narratives will encourage people to think more proactively about ethics and the impact that they have on both therapeutic practice, and life in general. Contents: Gabriel, Casemore, Introduction. Gabriel, Relational Ethics, Boundary Riders and Process Sentinels: Allies for Ethical Practice. Casemore, Relational Ethics as a Way of Being. Balick, Relational Ethics Beyond the Sex and Gender Binary: An Integrative Relational Approach. Wosket, Relational Ethics in Supervision. Etherington, Ethical Research in Reflexive Relationships: A Dialogical Process. Neath, Relational Ethics: A Perspective After the Essays and Marking. Dave, Relational Ethics in Psychiatric Settings. Jenkins, Therapy as Evidence: Legal Perspectives on the Relationship Between Therapist and Client. Dunnett, The Role of Practitioner Self-care in Practitioner-client Relationship Ethics. West, Training Matters: On the Way In. Casemore, Relational Ethics in Small Communities and Organisations. Gabriel, Exploring the Researchercontributor Research Alliance. Tudway, Relational Ethics from a Cognitive Behavioural Perspective. Walker, Counselling Survivors of Abuse: Feminism, Psychodynamic Psychotherapy and Ethics. Gabriel, Experiencing the Edge: Relationships with Self and Others in Times of Intense or Enduring Trauma. March 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42591-9: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42592-6: £19.99 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
The Paper Office Forms, Guidelines, and Resources to Make Your Practice Work Ethically, Legally, and Profitably Fourth Edition Edward L. Zuckerman, Armbrust, Pennsylvania, USA “How many times have you grumbled, while completing clinical, financial, and HIPAA records, ‘There must be a better way!’? The Paper Office is that better way – the book and companion CD offer a treasure trove of clinical documents, financial tools, security procedures, consent forms, and record releases.” - John C. Norcross, University of Scranton, USA Providing essential recordkeeping and risk-reduction tools that every psychotherapy practice needs, this highly practical resource is now in a fully updated fourth edition. It is ideal for new practitioners who want to hit the ground running and for seasoned pros who want to streamline their paperwork and clinical efficiency. Contents: List of Figures, Forms, and Handouts. Introduction. Basic Paperwork and Communication Tools. Financial Tools and Procedures. Reducing Malpractice Risk by Operating Ethically. Getting Informed
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
professional issues and resources
19
Consent. Intake and Assessment Forms and Procedures. Planning and Then Documenting Treatment. Confidentiality and Releasing Records. Appendices: Resources. CD-ROM with Forms and Instructions.
selected Contents: Part I: The Practicum Experience. Part II: Ethics and the Law. Part III: The Internship Experience. Part IV: Internship Preparation and Experience. Appendices.
2008: 474pp. Pb: 978-1-59385-835-3: £43.50
Series: The Clinician’s Toolbox
January 2009: 608pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99069-1: £34.00 Published by Routledge
Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Forthcoming!
Highly Effective Therapy Developing Clinical Competencies in Counseling and Psychotherapy Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Mental health professionals and accrediting bodies have steadily been embracing competency-focused learning and clinical practice. In contrast to a skill, a competency is a level of sufficiency evaluated against an external standard. Learning to be clinically competent involves considerably more than the current emphasis on skill and micro skill training. While there are now a small number of books that describe the various clinical competencies of counseling and psychotherapy, none of these books focus on how to learn them. Highly Effective Therapy emphasizes the process of learning these essential competencies. Contents: Introduction: Developing Essential Clinical Competencies. Apply a Conceptual Map to Understand and Direct the Therapeutic Process. Establish an Effective Therapeutic Alliance. Assess Readiness and Foster Treatment-promoting Factors. Recognize and Resolve Resistance and Ambivalence. Recognize and Repair Alliance Ruptures. Recognize and Resolve Transference-Countertransference. Perform an Integrative Diagnostic Assessment. Develop an Accurate DSM Diagnosis. Develop an Effective Clinical Case Conceptualization. Develop an Effective Cultural Formulation. Plan Interventions and Predict Obstacles to its Implementation. Draft an Integrative Clinical Case Report. Establish a Treatment Focus. Maintain the Treatment Focus. Modify Maladaptive Cognitions, Behaviors, Affects, and Interpersonal Relations. Plan and Implement Culturally-sensitive Treatment. Recognize and Resolve Treatment-interfering Factors. Monitor Progress and Modify Treatment Accordingly. Evaluate Progress and Prepare Clients for Termination. Utilize Supervision Effectively to Develop and Evaluate Competencies. November 2009: 222pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80276-5: £49.99 Pb: 978-0-415-80277-2: £24.99 Published by Routledge
State of the Art in Clinical Supervision Edited by John Culbreth, Associate Professor and Coordinator of Community Counseling Program, UNC-Charlotte, USA, and Lori Brown, University of North Carolina-Greensboro, USA This book includes a series of cutting edge chapters that present the state of the art in clinical supervision, written by some of the leading researchers, scholars, and professionals in the field. Readers will find fresh approaches to core topics such as multicultural competence, spirituality, and the training of supervisors themselves. Several new areas of study are covered, including the use of expressive arts in supervision, triadic supervision, teaching supervision to master’s level students, and applications of narrative therapy and emotionally intelligent concepts in supervision. Contents: Culbreth, Brown, Introduction. Chang, Hays, Grey, Supervision Multicultural Competence. Osborn, No Surprises. Gillam, Baltimore, Triadic Supervision. Jenicus, Baltimore, Getz, Innovative Uses of Technology in Clinical Supervision. Adcock, Scholl, Wittman, Tucker, Using Expressive Arts in Clinical Supervision. Young, Cashwell, Spirituality in Supervision. Brown, University Based Supervision. Jordan, Semivan, Teaching Supervision to Master’s Level Students. Borders, The Training of Supervisors. Culbreth, Gressard, Scarborough, Stages of Change Theory in Supervision. Sturm, Applications of Narrative Theory in Supervision. Cooper, Ng, On Becoming an Emotionally Intelligent Counseling Supervisor. Culbreth, Brown, Epilogue.
December 2009: 400pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99130-8: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Supervision in Clinical Practice A Practitioner’s Guide Second Edition
for further books by Len Sperry please see pages, 8, 22
Joyce Scaife, Independent consultant, clinical psychologist, UK
New!
Practicum and Internship Textbook and Resource Guide for Counseling and Psychotherapy Fourth Edition John C. Boylan, Marywood University, Pennsylvania, USA, and Judith Scott, University of Pittsburgh, USA Completely revised and updated, the fourth edition of Practicum and Internship carries on the tradition of the previous editions as a popular and highly useful textbook and resource guide. It continues to be a comprehensive resource for students and their supervisors throughout the counseling and psychotherapy process, providing thorough coverage of both the theoretical and practical aspects of the practicum and internship process.
New Edition!
With contributions from Francesca Inskipp, Brigid Proctor, Jon Scaife, and Sue Walsh “This second edition is a major revision and should be considered essential reading for those involved in expanding access to psychological therapy services... A source of much excellent and practical advice, written in an engaging and creative style.” - Professor Graham Turpin, University of
Sheffield, UK
Since the publication of the first edition of this book supervision has become of even greater significance in health, education and social care settings, with continuing pace in the trend towards mandatory registration, managed care and clinical governance. This fully updated and expanded edition includes new chapters on issues of diversity and the managerial role of the supervisor in context. Packed with practical examples in the key areas of personal and professional development, Joyce Scaife and her contributors draw on three decades of clinical experience to explore frequently encountered dilemmas.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
professional issues and resources
20
Contents: Introduction. J. M. Scaife, J. A. Scaife, Supervision and Learning.
J. M. Scaife, Walsh, Personal Development and the Emotional Climate of Work. The Contracting Process and the Supervisory Relationship: Averting Pitfalls and Problems. Frameworks for Supervision. Proctor, Inskipp, Group Supervision. Ethical Dilemmas and Issues in Supervision. Supervision and Diversity. The Interface of Supervision and Management Roles. Use of Recordings and Other Technologies in Supervision. Live Supervision and Observation. Creative Approaches. The Influence of Different Models of Therapeutic Intervention on the Supervisory Process. Challenge and the Assessment Role. Outcome Studies of Supervision. Appendices. 2008: 424pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44999-1: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45000-3: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Contents: Yesterday’s Guarantees – Today’s Insecurities. Marital Relationships: The Long and Short of It. Divorce: When Waiting Until Death Do Us Part Becomes Too Long. Widowhood: When Loss Seems Overwhelming. Career Changes. Cohabitation, the Challenges of an Alternative Lifestyle. Single Parenthood. Health-related Issues Requiring Changes. Care-taking Responsibilities: Putting One’s Own Life on Hold. Retirement: A Diverse Menu of Options. Geographical and Cultural Relocations.
2008: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96057-1: £22.00 Published by Routledge
Special 15th Anniversary Edition!
Vital Information and Review Questions for the NCE, CPCE, and State Counseling Exams
Forthcoming!
IDM Supervision An Integrative Developmental Model for Supervising Counselors and Therapists Third Edition Cal D. Stoltenberg, University of Oklahoma, USA, and Brian W. McNeill, Washington State University, Pullman, USA This book is an updated and expanded presentation of the widely used Integrated Developmental Model of Supervision (IDM). In contrast to other volumes on clinical supervision, Stoltenberg and McNeill present a single comprehensive, time tested, and empirically investigated model of supervision rather than a broad summary of other existing or historical approaches. In addition to presenting a model of therapist development that spans beginning through advanced training, the book integrates theory and research from numerous perspectives including learning, cognition, and emotion as well as an up-to-date treatment of research directly addressing the supervision process. Contents: Theoretical Foundations. An Overview of the IDM. The Level 1 Therapist. The Level 2 Therapist. The Level 3 Therapist. The Supervisory Relationship. Nuts and Bolts of Supervision. Supervision Across Settings. Supervisor Development and Training. Ethical and Legal Issues. A Qualitative Examination of the IDM. Appendices. November 2009: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5824-2: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5825-9: £27.00 Published by Routledge
Lifestyle Changes A Clinician’s Guide to Common Events, Challenges, and Options
Vera Sonja Maass, Living Skills Institute, Indianapolis, USA Change is inevitable, and each person handles each event differently, some with more difficulty than others. In Lifestyle Changes, psychologist Vera Maass draws on 25 years of practice experience – and a lifetime filled with changes, growth, and challenges – to present a clinician’s guide to working with clients who are facing a fundamental change in their lifestyle. Each chapter explores a different event and its potential impacts on the client’s current lifestyle, focusing on positive ways to respond and adapt to the situation. Through a mix of case examples, personal vignettes, sample clinician/client dialog, and engaging language, Lifestyle Changes provides an accessible and practical resource for practitioners that maximizes the potential for positive growth out of each experience.
Howard Rosenthal, St. Louis Community College, Florissant Valley, USA This new edition of Vital Information and Review Questions for the NCE, CPCE, and State Counseling Exams sticks to the successful structure of the previous versions, each of which has demonstrated to be a valuable resource for anyone preparing for these difficult exams. Two new Discs have been added to this new edition, bringing the total to 20 audio CDs and over 20 hours of programming. The material covered on the CDs is arranged into nine major areas, containing explanations of terms, concepts, and inter-relationships between subjects. Key definitions, theories and techniques are discussed, and appraisal, research, and evaluation methods are presented in an easily-understood format. The set also includes 325 tutorial questions, supplemented with additional information on all eight major areas of the National Counselor Examination and Counselor Preparation Comprehensive Examination. Contents: Part I: Vital Information CDs. Disc 1: Introduction. Research and
Program Evaluation. Disc 2: Research and Program Evaluation Continued. Human Growth and Development. Disc 3: Human Growth and Development Continued; Social and Cultural Foundations. Disc 4: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship. Disc 5: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued. Disc 6: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued. Disc 7: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued; Group Counseling. Disc 8: Group Counseling Continued; Lifestyle and Career Development. Disc 9: Lifestyle and Career Development Continued; Appraisal of the Individual. Disc: 10: Appraisal of the Individual Continued; Marriage and Family Counseling; Ethics. Part II: Tutorial Questions and Answers CDs. Disc 1: Introduction; Questions 1-42. Disc 2: Questions 43-94. Disc 3: Questions 95-154. Disc 4: Questions 155-221. Disc 5: 222-290. Disc 6: 291-325. Part III: Special Purpose CDs. Disc 1: Final Overview and Last Minute Super Review Bootcamp. Disc 2: Test Anxiety Prevention. Disc 3: Cutting Edge Ethics. Disc 4: Ask Dr. Rosenthal.
CD-ROM: 978-0-415-80141-6: July 2009: £60.00 Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/rosenthal-nce Forthcoming!
On Becoming a Group Member Muhyiddin Shakoor, SUNY Brockport, New York, USA While there are many excellent books on the market on the subject of leading groups, Shakoor takes the simple yet insightful perspective that learning to be an effective group member is an important part of becoming an effective group leader. This book expands on the individual, practical, and experiential aspects of group work by focusing on the needs of the individual student as a participant,
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
social work providing a counter-balance to current group literature. Each chapter is built around a case example to illustrate the concepts presented, and concludes with reflection questions.
Clinical and Diversity Perspectives Sixth Edition
Hb: 978-1-59385-838-4: 2008: 367pp. £37.50 Pb: 978-1-59385-837-7: 2008: 367pp. £24.00
Lee Ann Hoff, Life Crisis Institute, USA, Bonnie Joyce Hallisey, Curry College, Massachusetts, USA, and Miracle Hoff, Drake Counseling Services, North Dakota, USA The first edition of People in Crisis published in 1978, and it established success as a comprehensive and user-friendly text for health and social service professionals. The book and its following incarnations included critical life events and life cycle transition challenges, clearly pointing out the interconnections between such events, stressful development changes, and their potential for growth but also danger of suicide and/ or violence toward others. This new edition includes new case examples and expanded coverage of cross-cultural content, including “commonalities and differences” in origins, manifestations, and crisis responses. The authors illustrate the application of crisis concepts, assessment, and intervention strategies across a wide range of health and mental health settings, as well as at home, school, workplace, and in the community. Each chapter contains a closing summary that includes discussion questions, references, and data sources for maximum application and learning.
Published by Guilford Press
Contents: Part I: The Understanding and Practice of Crisis Intervention.
December 2009: 192pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96522-4: £18.00 Published by Routledge
Also of Interest
Becoming a Behavioral Science Researcher A Guide to Producing Research that Matters Rex B. Kline, Concordia University, Montreal, Canada
www.researchmethodsarena.com
Social Work Forthcoming!
Working in Social Work The Real World Guide to Practice Settings Jessica Rosenberg, Long Island University – Brooklyn Campus, New York, USA Working in Social Work provides graduate students going into the social work field with real world and practical information about what it is really like to work as a social worker. Each chapter presents a true picture of what to expect as a front-line social worker in the given practice setting, consistently formatted in the following sections for ease of reference and comparison across settings: overview, critical Issues, joys and challenges, field forecast, and resources. The resources section is tailored specifically to each practice setting, including relevant books and other traditional print materials as well as hard-to-find online resources. Contents: Social Work in Addictions. Social Work with Older Adults. Social Work with Child Welfare. Social Work in Criminal Justice. Domestic Violence and Social Work. Social Work in Health Care. Social Work with Housing and Homelessness. International Social Work. Social Work and Mental Illness. Social Work with the Military. Social Work with Palliative and End-of-Life Care. Social Work and Private Practice. School Social Work.
November 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96551-4: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96552-1: £17.00 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
People in Crisis
Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: Orientation Prologue, Part One:
Key Components of an Effective Member Mindset. Part III: Orientation Prologue, Part Two: Basic Strategies and Skills for Successful Involvement in the Group. Part IV: Utilizing Prologue Tips after Group Stage Chapters. Part V: Orientation Glossary. Part VI: Group Stage Chapters. Beginning Stage. Early Middle Stage. Late Middle Stage. Ending Stage (Termination). Multicultural Competency and Diversity. Leadership. A Word on Ethical Concerns.
21
Crisis Theory and Practice: Introduction and Overview. Understanding People in Crisis. Identifying People at Risk. Helping People in Crisis. Family and Social Network Strategies During Crisis. Part II: Crisis Related to Developmental and Situational Transitional States. Stress and Change During Life Passages. Threats to Health and Self-image. Threats to Occupational and Residential Security. Part III: Suicide, Violence, and Catastrophic Events. Suicide and Other Self-destructive Behavior: Understanding and Assessment. Helping Self-destructive People and Survivors of Suicide. The Crisis of Victimization by Violence. The Violent or Abusive Person: Individual and Sociocultural Factors. Violence and Crisis from Disaster. April 2009: 480pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99075-2: £30.00 Published by Routledge
Progressive Community Organizing A Critical Approach for a Globalizing World Loretta Pyles, University at Albany, State University of New York, USA
This interdisciplinary textbook offers a comprehensive view of the central issues facing progressive community organizers who seek to mobilize those negatively impacted by local, national, and global social policies and practices. Intended for both undergraduate and graduate students in social work, it aims to articulate the depth of the subject by introducing students to the philosophical, political, and sociological theories that inform community organizing and advocacy. March 2009: 208pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95780-9: £28.00 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
social work
22
Community Psychology in Practice
An Oral History Through the Stories of Five Community Psychologists Edited by James G. Kelly, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA, and Anna V. Song, University of California, Merced, USA Community Psychology in Practice is a unique examination of how community psychology evolved through the years. Five highly respected community psychologists recount their personal histories telling how they went from academia to careers disseminating principles of community psychology. Newer members to the field of psychology can trace how these leaders came to pursue careers in community psychology. Contents: Introduction. Mulvey, Reconceiving Myself: Challenging
Conundrums and Creating Feminist Community Psychology. Morgan, Psychology in the Community: A Community Psychologist Looks at 30 Years in Community Mental Health. Serrano-García, To Be Different: The Challenge of Social-community Psychology. Wolff, My Life as a Community Activist. Swift, Odyssey of a Community Psychologist Practitioner. Commentary. Popkin, Response to Autobiographical Essays by Community Psychologist. Watts, Community Psychologists Who Go Beyond the Profession: A Commentary. Hall, Reflections on Calling and Careers in Community Psychology. 2008: 124pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3763-3: £37.50 Pb: 978-0-7890-3764-0: £16.50 Published by Routledge
Spirituality
spirituality
Paths for Counselors and Psychotherapists David R. Matteson, in private practice, USA Exploring the Spiritual provides cognitive information grounded in the empirical findings of social science, as well as experiential material which encourages the counselors’ own spiritual quest. This invaluable source clarifies the interface between the counselor’s spirituality and the client’s, and allows the spiritual dimension to emerge appropriately in the counseling process. Exploring the Spiritual provides challenging questions and exercises that lead the counselor or psychotherapist through a personal exploration to attain the maturity of development needed to facilitate the client’s spiritual growth. Contents: Marcia, Foreword. Introduction: Spirituality and the Counselor’s Connection with the Client. Part I: Assessing Spiritual Health and Development. What is Healthy Spirituality? An Overview. Models of Spiritual Development. Part II: Areas of Crisis. The Crisis in Values. The Crisis in Belief: Science, Spirituality, and Authority. The Body, Passion, and Spirituality. Spiritual Implications of Sexual Orientation. Overcoming Barriers, Dealing with Differences. Why So Much Suffering? Part III: Helping and Healing. Staying with Process. Continuing the Spiritual Journey: Reaching for a Spirit-filled Life. Part IV: Experiential Approaches. Centering the Self. Focusing on Others. Seeking the Spiritual Dimension. Appendix: Additional Resources.
2008: 504pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3672-8: £56.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3673-5: £37.50 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Spirituality in Clinical Practice
Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Thoroughly updated and revised, this second edition of Spirituality in Clinical Practice includes perspectives not found in other texts, such as a developmental perspective integrating moral and spiritual development, the interface of spiritual development with personality functioning, and insights from object relations, self psychology and transpersonal psychotherapy as they relate to various spiritual traditions and contemporary spiritual practices. This brief, readerfriendly text is written in a highly accessible style and is destined to set a precedent for excellence in the emerging field of spirituality in clinical practice or psychotherapy and counseling. Contents: Part I: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Theory. The Spiritual Dimension in Clinical Practice. Dimensional Perspectives in Spirituality. Developmental Models in Spirituality. Spiritual Dynamics, Crises and Emergencies in Clinical Practice. Part II: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Practice. Establishing and Maintaining a Positive Therapeutic Relationship. Assessment and Case Conceptualization. Psychotherapeutic Interventions. Psychospiritual and Spiritual Interventions. Termination and Evaluation. Cultural Considerations. Ethical and Legal Considerations. Part III: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Clinicians and the Future. How Clinicians Incorporate Spirituality in their Personal and Professional Lives. Spirituality in Counseling and Psychotherapy: Future Prospects.
February 2010: 275pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95724-3: £21.95 Published by Routledge
for further books by Len Sperry please see pages 8, 19
Coming Out, Coming Home Making Room for Gay Spirituality in Therapy
New Dimensions in Psychotherapy and Counseling Second Edition
Exploring the Spiritual
Kenneth Burr, minister and Marriage and Family Therapist Coming Out, Coming Home increases the potential for spiritual growth and development in our society. Many books have been written and many opinions aired about gay rights and pro-gay theology, but not many have focused upon providing people with an opportunity to enlarge their own belief systems to embrace gay spirituality while still being true advocates of Scripture. Currently many people have felt the need to split the personal from their professional lives in order to intensify their job performance and maintain proper boundaries. But in doing so, many have also split off their soul life from their work life, forcing spirituality to go underground which often results in tension and disharmony. Because spirituality is all about connection, we know that when people lack the opportunities and richness of deeper connections, soul healing is often inhibited. Here readers will find a deeper connection with themselves and others as they experience formerly rigid boundaries between God and sexual minorities begin to relax. Contents: Thank God for Change! Spiritual Connections. Development of Sexuality and Spirituality. Hindrances to Gay Spirituality. Embracing the Possibility of Gay Spirituality. Coming Out is a Spiritual Experience. The Search for an Inclusive Theology. Research Resources.
May 2009: 291pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3842-5: £44.50 Pb: 978-0-7890-3843-2: £22.50 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Series in Death, Dying and Bereavement
spirituality
Guide to Ministering to Alzheimer’s Patients and Their Families
www.routledgementalhealth.com/death-dying-and-bereavement
Decision Making Near the End of Life
Pat Otwell, served for many years on the cutting edge of Alzheimer’s ministry The Guide to Ministering to Alzheimer’s Patients and Their Families examines the importance of spirituality in dealing with the everyday challenges of this mysterious disease. Not a “how-to” manual with step-by-step instructions or tried and true formulas, this unique book instead examines the essential elements of ministering to dementia patients based on the first-hand accounts of family members living through pain and uncertainty. The book explores the stages of Alzheimer’s, grief and guilt, available resources, and implications of spiritual care for patients and families. Contents: Help! Alzheimer’s Disease. Desire to Minister to Alzheimer’s Patients and Families. Theological Understanding. Grief. Guilt. Alzheimer’s Patients and Communication. Alzheimer’s Ministry Coordinator. Implications of Spiritual Care for Patients. Implications of Spiritual Care for Families. Ethical Issues. Models for Ministry. Pastoral Potpourri. Faith, Hope, and Love. Remembering Blessings During Difficult Times. Resources. Appendices.
2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2902-7: £39.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-2903-4: £28.00 Published by Routledge
23
Issues, Developments, and Future Directions Edited by James L. Werth, Jr., University of Akron, Ohio, USA, and Dean Blevins, University of Arkansas, Little Rock, USA Decision Making Near the End of Life provides a comprehensive overview of the recent developments that have impacted decisionmaking processes within the field of end-of-life care. The most current developments in all aspects of major underlying issues such as public attitudes, the impact of media, bioethics, and legal precedent provide the background information for the text. The authors examine various aspects of end-of-life choices and decision-making, including communication (between and among family, medical personnel, the dying person), advance directives, and the emergence of hospice and palliative care institutions. January 2009: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95448-8: £31.00
Series in Death, Dying and Bereavement Published by Routledge
for further books on Gerontology please see page 92
Forthcoming!
also in the series
Rediscovering Confession
Leong/Leach, Eds.: Suicide Among Racial and Ethnic Minority Groups: Theory, Research, and Practice
The Practice of Forgiveness and Where it Leads
Hb: 978-0-415-95532-4: 2007: 352pp. £24.95
David A. Steere, in private practice, Louisville, USA Rediscovering Confession is about recovering the experience of confession, in danger now of becoming a lost art. It identifies four elements present in psychotherapy and confession: a state of heightened self-awareness, a growing realization that our predicament points in some meaningful direction beyond itself, the necessity to make a relevant response to our situation, and a potential for spiritual encounter that accompanies the process. Each chapter contains a section devoted to practice, with exercises for individual contemplation and experimentation, guidelines for forming a confessional partnership, directions for conducting discussions in a study group, and ways to organize a small confessional group. Contents: Honest Confession. The Full Confessional Experience. Some Classical Confessions: Augustine and Patrick. More Confessions: Tolstoy and Vonnegut. The Trouble with Adam. The Confessional Relationship. Women in Confession: Julian of Norwich and Margery Kemp. Contemporary Women Confessors: Karen Armstrong and Elaine Pagels. The Enneagram. The Truth of the Matter. More Confessors: Bill Wilson and Recovery. Predicament and Presence in Practice. Forgiveness and Confessional Relationships. Changing Our Mind. The Compassionate Community.
August 2009: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99746-1: £25.00
Rogers, Ed.: The Art of Grief: The Use of Expressive Arts in a Grief Support Group Pb: 978-0-415-95535-5: 2007: 224pp. £19.95
Berger: Music of the Soul: Composing Life Out of Loss Pb: 978-0-415-95481-5: 2006: 240pp. £22.00
Katz/Johnson, Eds.: When Professionals Weep: Emotional and Countertransference Responses in End-of-Life Care Hb: 978-0-415-95094-7: 2006: 336pp. £47.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95095-4: 2006: 336pp. £22.50
Rosenblatt/Wallace: African American Grief Hb: 978-0-415-95151-7: 2005: 224pp. £56.99 Pb: 978-0-415-95152-4: 2005: 224pp. £18.50
Jeffreys: Helping Grieving People – When Tears Are Not Enough: A Handbook for Care Providers Pb: 978-0-415-94603-2: 2004: 376pp. £26.99
Silverman: Widow to Widow: How the Bereaved Help One Another, Second Edition Pb: 978-0-415-94749-7: 2004: 288pp. £20.99
Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
grief and bereavement
24
Forthcoming!
Bereavement Studies of Grief in Adult Life Fourth Edition Colin Murray Parkes, St Christopher’s Hospice, UK, Life President of Cruse Bereavement Care, in 1996 awarded an OBE for services to bereaved people, and Holly G. Prigerson, Harvard Medical School, Boston, USA The loss of a loved one is one of the most painful experiences that most of us will ever have to face in our lives. This book recognises that there is no single solution to the problems of bereavement but that an understanding of grief can help the bereaved to realise that they are not alone in their experience.
enables us to bring together knowledge of childhood attachments and problems of bereavement, resulting in a new way of thinking about love, bereavement and other losses. Selected Contents: Part I: Attachment and Loss. Part II: Patterns of Attachment and Patterns of Grief. Part III: Other Influences on Attachment and Loss. Part IV: Disorders of Attachment, Other Psychiatric Problems and their Prevention and Treatment.
2008: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39041-5: 2006: £34.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47718-5: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Hospice and Palliative Care The Essential Guide
Long recognised as the most authoritative work of its kind, this new edition has been revised and extended to take into account recent research findings on both sides of the Atlantic. Parkes and Prigerson include additional information about the different circumstances of bereavement including traumatic losses, disasters, and complicated grief, as well as providing details on how social, religious, and cultural influences determine how we grieve. Bereavement provides guidance on preparing for the loss of a loved one, and coping after they have gone. It also discusses how to identify the minority in whom bereavement may lead to impairment of physical and/or mental health and how to ensure they get the help they need. Contents: Bowlby, Foreword to the First Edition. Lifton, Foreword to the Fourth Edition. Introduction. The Cost of Commitment. The Broken Heart. Trauma. Attachment and Loss. Mitigation. Anger and Guilt. Changing the Assumptive World. Complicated Grief. Determinants of Grief I: Kinship, Gender and Age. Determinants of Grief II: Mode of Death. Determinants of Grief III: Personal Vulnerability. Determinants of Grief IV: Social, Religious and Cultural Influences. Helping the Bereaved I: Bereavement Support – History and Evaluation. Helping the Bereaved II: Types of Help for Types of Problem. Helping the Bereaved III: Sources of Help. Reactions to Other Types of Loss. Disasters. Appendices. Organisation in the UK and USA offering help to Bereaved People. Recommended Further Reading.
September 2009: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45118-5: £39.95 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Second Edition Stephen R. Connor, Vice President of National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization and the National Hospice Foundation (NHPCO) Published in partnership with the National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization (NHPCO) This book provides professionals with a comprehensive overview of the practice of hospice, as well as the challenges faced by and the future direction of the hospice movement. Connor combines clinical, administrative, and research considerations in his analysis. Chapters address key topics such as the goals and importance of community involvement, outcome measurement, and the manner in which hospices address death, grief, and bereavement. Connor also provides a detailed analysis of the business side of hospice and offers strategies for proper management. Contents: What is Hospice and Palliative Care? The Interdisciplinary Team. Symptom Management and Physical Care. Psychosocial and Spiritual Care. Grief and Bereavement. Community Education. Managing Hospice and Palliative Care. Hospice and Palliative Care in the US Health Care System. Society and Denial. A Right to Die? How Palliative Care is Unique in the Health Care System. How Good is Hospice and Palliative Care? Hospice and Palliative Care Around the World. The Future of Hospice and Palliative Care.
New in Paperback!
June 2009: 278pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99356-2: £19.00
Love and Loss
Published by Routledge
The Roots of Grief and its Complications
Forthcoming!
Colin Murray Parkes, St Christopher’s Hospice, UK, Life President of Cruse Bereavement Care, in 1996 awarded an OBE for services to bereaved people “Love and Loss manages to be both academic and written in prose that dances with love around its subject.” - Bel Mooney, The Times Loving and grieving are two sides of the same coin: we cannot have one without risking the other. Only by understanding the nature and pattern of loving can we begin to understand the problems of grieving. Conversely, the loss of a loved person can teach us much about the nature of love. Love and Loss, the result of a lifetime’s work, has important implications for the study of attachment and bereavement. In this volume, Colin Murray Parkes reports his innovative research that
Grief, Loss and Bereavement Care An Evidence-Based Approach for Health and Social Care Peter Wimpenny, Robert Gordon University, Aberdeen, UK This invaluable text draws together a comprehensive evidence-base for supporting grieving people from a wide range of research, and applies it to a health and social care context. Accessible and practical throughout, each chapter identifies key recommendations from the research and includes thinking points to help the reader apply them to practice. An overview chapter examines theoretical perspectives and defines key concepts, such as grief, loss, bereavement, mourning and bereavement care. October 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46750-6: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46751-3: £19.99 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
cognitive behaviour therapy
grief and bereavement
The Children Who Lived
Using Harry Potter and Other Fictional Characters to Help Grieving Children and Adolescents
Working Effectively with Clients in CognitiveBehavioral Therapy Willem Kuyken, University of Exeter, UK, Christine A. Padesky, Center for Cognitive Therapy, Huntington Beach, USA, and Robert Dudley, Institute of Neuroscience, Newcastle University, UK “An important and timely book that will be of great interest to clinicians and researchers. CBT texts rarely provide detailed guidance on conceptualization. Written by internationally recognized experts, this book fills the gap by providing clinicians with numerous insightful tips about how to develop conceptualizations, and, crucially, how to link those conceptualizations to interventions... A major achievement.”
Pb: 978-0-415-95765-6: £21.95 Published by Routledge
- David M. Clark, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College London, UK
“This book sets a gold standard for how to develop individualized case conceptualizations with our clients... This book is destined to be one of the most important and widely used works on case conceptualization for many years to come.” - Aaron T. Beck, University of Pennsylvania
When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space Existential Perspectives in Psychotherapy and Counselling
Medical School, USA
Presenting an innovative framework for tailoring cognitivebehavioral interventions to each client’s needs, this accessible book is packed with practical pointers and sample dialogues. Step by step, the authors show how to collaborate with clients to develop and test conceptualizations that illuminate personal strengths as well as problems, and that deepen in explanatory power as treatment progresses. An extended case illustration demonstrates the threestage conceptualization process over the entire course of therapy with a multiproblem client. The approach emphasizes building resilience and coping while decreasing psychological distress.
Edited by Laura Barnett, in private practice, UK “Much can be learnt from this book about what has been said on this topic by philosophers and practitioners alike... the counsellor and therapist who are confronted with clients who have been faced with their mortality will find exactly what they need to approach this challenge with due care, consideration and philosophical clarity.” - Professor Emmy van Deurzen, From the Foreword
Although it is a natural and inescapable part of life, death is a subject that is often neglected in psychotherapeutic literature and training. In When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space Laura Barnett and her contributors offer us insights into working with mortality in the therapeutic encounter. Taking an existential perspective, the book brings together a variety of client groups, all of whom have experienced a confrontation with mortality, and encourages the reader to engage with and reflect upon the subject of death. Although this may initially evoke anxiety and distress, Barnett and her contributors introduce the reader to the ‘vitality of death’ (Koestenbaum): an energy and focus that can come from confronting our greatest fears and anxieties, including the anxiety aroused by our own mortality. Contents: van Deurzen, Foreword. Barnett, Introduction. Barnett, The
Philosophical Roots of Existential Therapies. Lockett, Reflections on Cancer Counselling. Horne, HIV as a Mirror to Life. Barnett, Surviving Intensive Care. Oakley, Creating Safety for the Client (The London 7/7 Bombings). Blackwell, Mortality and Meaning in Work with Refugee Survivors of Torture and Organized Violence. Heaton, Reflections on Suicide and Despair. Smith-Pickard, The Experience of Working with Patients with a Short Prognosis. Diffley, Fife, Lockett, Palliative Care, Pastoral Care and Counselling – Working Together, Learning from One Another. Young, Working With Bereavement. Chalmers, Working with Bereaved Parents. Sorensen, And When the Therapist or Supervisor Dies. Barnett, Dialogues: Buber, Rogers, Levinas and the Therapeutic Relationship. Barnett, The Therapeutic Relationship, When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space. 2008: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41654-2: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41655-9: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Routledge Recommends!
Collaborative Case Conceptualization
Kathryn A. Markell, Anoka-Ramsey Community College, Minnesota, USA, and Marc A. Markell, St. Cloud State University, Minnesota, USA Harry Potter’s encounters with grief, as well as the grief experiences of other fictional characters, can be used by educators, counselors, and parents to help children and adolescents deal with their own loss issues. The Children Who Lived is a unique approach toward grief and loss in children. Focusing on fictional child and adolescent characters experiencing grief, this book uses classic tales and the Harry Potter books to help grieving children and adolescents. 2008: 208pp.
25
Contents: The Procrustean Dilemma. The Case Conceptualization Crucible: A New Model. Two Heads Are Better Than One: Collaborative Empiricism. Incorporating Client Strengths and Building Resilience. “Can You Help Me?”: Descriptive Case Conceptualization. “Why Does This Keep Happening to Me?”: Cross-sectional Explanatory Conceptualizations. “Does My Future Look Like My Past?”: Longitudinal Explanatory Conceptualizations. Learning and Teaching Case Conceptualization. Appraising the Model. Appendix: Aid to History Taking Form.
January 2009: 366pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-072-5: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
The Case Formulation Approach to CognitiveBehavior Therapy Jacqueline B. Persons, San Francisco Bay Area Center for Cognitive Therapy, Oakland, USA
“Decades of research and clinical experience meet in this seminal book. Persons provides a guide for both the novice and experienced practitioner to deal with even the most complex of cases. This significant work will no doubt become the shining light by which the idiographic approach to CBT will be guided in the future. One of the few books that is worth even more than the purchase price!” - Nicholas Tarrier, University of Manchester, UK
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
cognitive behaviour therapy
26
This eagerly awaited book shows how skillful case formulation addresses a critical challenge in psychotherapy today: how to use empirically supported therapies (ESTs) in real-world clinical contexts. The author explains the basic theories of cognition, learning, and emotion that underlie available ESTs and shows how the theories also guide systematic case formulation. By crafting a sound formulation and continually refining and monitoring it as treatment progresses, the therapist can smoothly “shift theoretical gears” and weave together elements of different ESTs to meet the needs of individual patients, who typically present with multiple problems. Contents: What is the Case Formulation Approach to Cognitive-Behavior Therapy?
Cognitive Theories and Their Clinical Implications. Learning Theories and Their Clinical Implications. Emotion Theories and Their Clinical Implications. Beginning the Therapeutic Relationship and Obtaining a Problem List and Diagnosis. Developing an Initial Case Formulation and Setting Treatment Goals. Using the Formulation to Develop a Treatment Plan and Obtain the Patient’s Consent to It. The Therapeutic Relationship. Monitoring Progress. Decision Making in the Therapy Session. Handling Nonadherence and Treatment Failure. Decision Making Over the Course of Therapy. 2008: 273pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-875-9: £24.00
Series: Guides to Individualized Evidence-Based Treatment Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
The Therapeutic Relationship in the Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapies Edited by Paul Gilbert, Kingsway Hospital, Derby, UK, and Robert L. Leahy, American Institute for Cognitive Therapy, USA “This book will be useful to all psychotherapists who want to deepen their knowledge and understanding, and especially those who are following cognitivebehavioural approaches.” - Francine Brett, Therapy Today The Therapeutic Relationship in the Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapies covers new research on basic models of the process of the therapeutic relationship, and explores key issues related to developing emotional sensitivity, empathic understanding, mindfulness, compassion and validation within the therapeutic relationship. The contributors draw on their extensive experience in different schools of cognitive behavioral therapy to address their understanding and use of the therapeutic relationship. Contents: Gilbert, Leahy, Preface. Key Issues. Gilbert, Leahy, Introduction and Overview: Basic Issues in the Therapeutic Relationship. Hardy, Cahill, Barkham, Active Ingredients of the Therapeutic Relationship that Promote Client Change: A Research Perspective. Greenberg, Emotion in the Therapeutic Relationship in Emotion Focused Therapy. Miranda, Anderson, The Therapeutic Relationship: Implications from Social Cognition and Transference. Katzow, Safran, Recognizing and Resolving Ruptures in the Therapeutic Alliance. Gilbert, Evolved Minds and Compassion in the Therapeutic Relationship. Liotti, Internal Working Models of Attachment in the Therapeutic Relationship. The Therapeutic Relationship in Specific Therapies. Newman, The Therapeutic Relationship in Cognitive Therapy with Difficult to Engage Clients. Swales, Heard, The Therapy Relationship in Dialectical Behaviour Therapy. Pierson, Hayes, Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Empower the Therapeutic Relationship. Leahy, Schematic Mismatch in the Therapeutic Relationship: A Social-cognitive Model. Bennett-Levy, Thwaites, Self and Self-reflection in the Therapeutic Relationship: A Conceptual Map and Practical Strategies for the Training, Supervision and Self-supervision of Interpersonal Skills.
January 2009: 312pp. Pb: 978-0-415-48542-5: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Treatment Resistant Anxiety Disorders Resolving Impasses to Symptom Remission Edited by Deborah Sookman, McGill University, Montreal, Canada, and Robert L. Leahy, American Institute for Cognitive Therapy, USA This book brings together leading cognitive behavioral therapists from major theoretical orientations to provide clinicians with a greatly needed source of information, skills and strategies, from a wide range of CBT approaches. It describes and illustrates how to combine empirically based findings, broad based and disorder specific theoretical models, and individualized case conceptualization to formulate and apply specific strategies for varied aspects of resistance during treatment of anxiety disorders. Contents: Sookman, Introduction. Theoretical Models. Sookman, Steketee, Cognitive Therapy. Wells, Meta-cognitive Therapy. Leahy, Emotional Schema Therapy. Gilbert, Compassionate Mind. Hayes, Acceptance and Commitment. Welch, Dialectical Behavior Therapy. Westra, Motivational Interviewing. Greenberg, Emotion Focused Therapy. Specific Applications. Sanderson, Panic and Agoraphobia. Stewart, Comorbid Substance Abuse. Swenson, Medication Compliance. Overvalued Ideas. Specific Phobia. Medication Compliance. Leahy, Conclusion. December 2009: 367pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98891-9: £28.00 Published by Routledge
Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Guide for the Practising Clinician Volume 2
Edited by Gregoris Simos, Aristotelian University of Thessaloniki, Greece “Gregoris Simos has, once again, compiled an up-to-date comprehensive text, which serves as a second volume to his first text on cognitivebehavior therapy. This companion volume is filled with interventions that serve as an invaluable contribution to the field... Practitioners and researchers alike will find this text a great asset to the professional literature.” - Frank M. Dattilio, Harvard Medical School, USA CBT: A Guide for the Practising Clinician, Volume 2 brings the practising clinician up to date with recent developments in the continuously expanding field of cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT). As with the first volume, this book is a clinically orientated and techniques-focused CBT manual, dealing with specific clinical conditions, skillfully blending guiding theories, focused techniques and clinical flexibility. With contributions from distinguished clinicians and researchers, a variety of specific disorders are examined, including: • social anxiety disorder, CBT for psychoses, preventing relapse in depression • posttraumatic stress disorder, health anxiety • body dysmorphic disorder, pathological gambling, medical illness. These disorders are also discussed in the context of up-to-date processes and approaches, such as homework assignments, compassion-focused therapy and metacognitive-focused therapy. Contents: Simos, Preface. Pinto, Turkington, Kingdon, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Psychosis: Enhancing the Therapeutic Relationship to Improve the Quality of Life. Papageorgiou, CBT, Depressive Rumination and Metacognition. Barnhofer, Fennell, Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy: Preventing Relapse in Depression. Blackmore, Heimberg, Cognitive Behavior Therapy for Social Anxiety Disorder. Rauch, Foa, Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD). Taylor, Collimore, Asmundson, Cognitive-Behavioral Approaches to Health Anxiety. Neziroglu, Khemlani-Patel, Jacofsky, Body
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
cognitive behaviour therapy
27
Dysmorphic Disorder: Symptoms, Models and Treatment Interventions. Morasco, Ledgerwood, Weinstock, Petry, Cognitive-Behavioral Approaches to Pathological Gambling. Kyrios, Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy in Medical Illness. Konstadinidis, Goga, Simos, Effective Socialization in CBT: The Collaborative Interviewing in Mathematical Analogy Technique (CLIMATE). Kazantzis, Daniel, Homework Assignments in Cognitive Behavior Therapy. Leahy, Resistance: An Emotional Schema Therapy Approach. Gilbert, Developing a Compassion Focused Approach in Cognitive Behavioural Therapy.
2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44963-2: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44964-9: £19.99 Published by Routledge
“This guide provides an integration of recommended practices and up-to-date evidence for CBT across a range of disorders... The book is clearly written and highly accessible. Dobson and Dobson are to be congratulated on doing exactly what the title suggests by providing a valuable, well-balanced introductory guide to science and practice.” - Edward Watkins, Mood Disorders Centre, School of
Volume 1
Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Guide for the Practicing Clinician
Edited by Gregoris Simos Pb: 978-1-58391-105-1: 2002: 352pp. £19.99
Routledge Recommends!
Simply Effective Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Practitioner’s Guide Michael J. Scott, University of Manchester, UK “This book manages to balance and structure theory, research and practical detail in a guide which helps the reader to understand how to conduct cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT). Not only does it provide a clear clinical guide to treatment, but it also helps the reader to identify further resources and tools which will allow the clinician to extend the scope of their work without losing the essential empirical grounding which underpins CBT.” - Paul Salkovskis, Professor of
Clinical Psychology and Clinical Director of the Centre for Anxiety Disorders and Trauma, Maudsley Hospital, UK
Research shows that cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT) is an effective treatment for mental health disorders of mild to moderate severity. Simply Effective Cognitive Behaviour Therapy guides the therapist in treating clients in a simple, structured, time-limited way with maximum results, as well as indicating where additional treatment or referral is required, thus widening access to CBT. Simply Effective CBT is illustrated throughout with transcripts of sessions which serve as models for putting theory into practice. It provides the therapist with sufficient understanding of the cognitive theory of a disorder, enabling them to tailor the protocols provided to the needs of the individual. Contents: Simple CBT – Strengths and Limitations. Getting Started – Diagnosis and Beyond. The First Interview. Depression. Panic Disorder and Agoraphobia. Post-traumatic Stress Disorder. Social Phobia. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. Generalised Anxiety Disorder. Putting it All Together. Appendices.
March 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46676-9: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46677-6: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Evidence-Based Practice of CognitiveBehavioral Therapy Deborah Dobson, and Keith S. Dobson, both at the University of Calgary, Canada
Psychology, University of Exeter, UK
From leading experts in the field – a practicing clinical psychologist and a renowned psychotherapy researcher – this book synthesizes the evidence base for cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and translates it into practical clinical guidelines. The focus is how clinicians can use current research findings to provide the best care in real-world practice settings. Within a case formulation framework, core cognitive and behavioral theories and techniques are described and illustrated with vivid case examples. Contents: Introduction and Context of Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions. Assessment for Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy. Integration and Case Formulation. Beginning Treatment: Planning for Therapy and Building Alliance. Beginning Treatment: Basic Skills. Behavior Change Elements in CognitiveBehavioral Therapy. Cognitive Restructuring Interventions. Assessing and Modifying Core Beliefs and Schemas. Completion of Treatment and Prevention of Relapse. Challenges in Conducting Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy. The Research Context of Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy. Myths about CognitiveBehavioral Therapy. Starting and Maintaining a Cognitive-Behavioral Practice. Appendix A: The Cognitive Therapy Scale. Appendix B: Review Articles Regarding the Efficacy of Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy.
March 2009: 322pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-020-6: £25.95 Published by Guilford Press
Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Acute Inpatient Mental Health Units Working with Clients, Staff and the Milieu Edited by Isabel Clarke, and Hannah Wilson, both at the Hampshire Partnership NHS Trust, UK
“This book will be an invaluable tool for mental health professionals working in inpatient settings, and will hopefully inspire people to increase access to such approaches and conduct the research required to firmly establish the evidence base.” - Anthony P. Morrison, From the Foreword Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Acute Inpatient Mental Health Units presents innovative ways of delivering CBT within the inpatient setting and applying CBT principles to inform and enhance inpatient care. Maintaining staff morale and creating a culture of therapy in the acute inpatient unit is essential for a well-functioning institution. This book shows how this challenge can be addressed, along with introducing and evaluating an important advance in the practice of individual CBT for working with crisis, suited to inpatient work and crisis teams.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
cognitive behaviour therapy
28
selected contents: Part I: Setting the Scene. Part II: Individual CBT in the Inpatient Setting. Part III: Working With the Staff Group to Create a Therapeutic Culture. Part IV: CBT Group Work. Part V: The Challenge of Evaluating this Service.
2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42211-6: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42212-3: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Cognitive Behavioral Therapy with Children A Guide for the Community Practitioner Katharina Manassis, University of Toronto, Canada
This highly practical guide will be essential reading for all those who have recently been introduced to rational emotive behaviour therapy. Contents: Introduction. Thinking and Intervening Related to Engaging Clients in REBT. Thinking and Intervening Related to Placing Client Problems in Context. Thinking and Intervening Related to Emotional “C’s”. Thinking and Intervening Related to “A”. Thinking and Intervening Related to “B”. Thinking and Intervening Related to Disturbance. Thinking and Intervening Related to Goals. Thinking and Intervening Related to Explaining the Process of Change. Thinking and Intervening Related to Disputing. Thinking and Intervening Related to Homework Assignments. Thinking and Intervening Related to Dealing with Obstacles to Change. Thinking and Intervening Related to Maintaining Change.
April 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48793-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48795-5: £18.99 Published by Routledge
This book aims to bridge the gap between child CBT as practiced in academic centres and its use in community settings. Because CBT is considered the ‘gold standard’ in the treatment of a variety of child mental health conditions and has been evaluated in numerous randomized controlled trials, practitioners often face pressure to “do CBT” for children meeting criteria for certain disorders, especially anxiety and depression. This book uses a step-by-step, practical approach to spell out child CBT assessment and treatment considerations that are often not detailed in treatment manuals but are highly relevant to community practitioners. Contents: Why the Gap Between Efficacy and Effectiveness? Leveling the Playing Field. Priorities and Timing of Therapy. Treatment Expectations. Using Manuals Appropriately. How Child CBT Differs from Adult CBT. Working with Challenging Children. Working with Challenging Families. Group-based and School-based Child CBT. Overcoming Therapeutic Obstacles. Concluding Therapy. Appendices.
August 2009: 234pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99670-9: £22.50 Published by Routledge
Please see page 42 to find out more about the new CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Series
How to Think and Intervene Like an REBT Therapist Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK
Trainee therapists often stick rigidly to the therapeutic guidelines that are taught to them in the lecture theatre, or adopted from a book, regardless of their approach. How to Think and Intervene Like an REBT Therapist provides the trainee with an opportunity to discover how experienced therapists think, and how their thoughts influence their interventions when using REBT. In this book, Windy Dryden compares the thinking and intervening characteristics of experienced REBT therapists with the actions of trainees making errors typical of people at an introductory level.
Understanding Emotional Problems The REBT Perspective Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK Rational emotive behaviour therapy (REBT) is an approach to counselling and psychotherapy firmly rooted in the CBT tradition and one that has a distinctive perspective on emotional problems.
Understanding Emotional Problems provides an accurate understanding of the REBT perspective on eight major emotional problems for which help is sought: • anxiety • depression • shame • guilt • unhealthy anger • hurt • unhealthy jealousy • unhealthy envy. Rather than discussing treatment methods, Windy Dryden encourages the reader to accurately understand these problems and suggests that a clear, correct understanding of each disorder will provide a firm foundation for effective treatment. This concise, straightforward text presents each emotional problem in a similar way, allowing the reader to compare and contrast the similarities and differences between problems. Understanding Emotional Problems will be essential reading for therapists both in training and in practice. Contents: Introduction. Understanding Anxiety. Understanding Depression. Understanding Shame. Understanding Guilt. Understanding Unhealthy Anger. Understanding Hurt. Understanding Unhealthy Jealousy. Understanding Unhealthy Envy. How People Maintain Emotional Problems.
2008: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48196-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48197-7: £17.99 Published by Routledge
By using clinical vignettes, case scenarios and verbatim dialogue he demonstrates how REBT therapists can make better use of the work alliance between themselves, their clients and their trainees, and use REBT more flexibly in practice. 10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
the cbt distinctive features series
cognitive behaviour therapy
29
www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-distinctive-features
Routledge Recommends!
Developing Resilience
Schema Therapy Distinctive Features
A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach
Jeffrey Young, and Eshkol Rafaeli, both at Columbia University, New York, USA, and David P. Bernstein, Maastricht University, the Netherlands
Michael Neenan, Centre for Stress Management, London, UK “In this scholarly, yet practical book, Michael Neenan shows how you can develop skills for managing life challenges in a way that strengthens and empowers you. For anyone who wants to find inner strength in the face of adversity, this book is for you.” - Professor Alan Carr, Director of Clinical Psychology Training, University College Dublin, Ireland
Some people can survive grim experiences yet emerge stronger in both mind and spirit than others who experience the same fate. In this book, Michael Neenan suggests that it is the meanings that we attach to events, and not the events themselves, that determine our reactions to them; this is why different people can react to the same event in a variety of ways. Developing Resilience shows how people can find constructive ways of dealing with their difficulties by using the techniques of cognitive behaviour therapy as well as listening to the wisdom of those who have prevailed over adversity. The book provides useful guidance and advice on topics including: • managing negative emotions • distinguishing between what is within and outside of your control • learning from past experiences • developing self-belief • increasing your level of frustration tolerance • maintaining a resilient outlook. This book will be essential for anyone trying to find constructive ways forward in difficult times, as well as counsellors, coaches and therapists looking for guidance in helping their clients. Contents: What is Resilience? Attitude: The Heart of Resilience. Attitudes
That Undermine Resilience Building. Developing Resilience. Strengths Underpinning Resilience. Resilience in the Workplace. Resilience in Relationships. Resilience in Dealing with Difficult People. Maintaining Resilience. An Overview of Resilience. June 2009: 208pp. Pb: 978-0-415-48068-0: £12.99 Published by Routledge
ALSO OF INTEREST
Life Coaching A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach
Michael Neenan, and Windy Dryden Pb: 978-1-58391-138-9 : 2001: 200pp. £12.99
Forthcoming!
Schema therapy combines proven cognitive behaviour therapy techniques with elements of interpersonal, experiential and psychodynamic therapies in order to help people with long term mental health problems including personality disorders and chronic depression. Schema therapy suggests that many negative cognitive conditions are based on past experiences, and therefore provides models for challenging and modifying negative thoughts and behaviours in order to provoke change. In this book, Jeffrey Young and Eshkol Rafaeli – pioneers of the schema therapy approach – indicate the 30 distinctive features of schema therapy, and how the method fits into the broader CBT Spectrum. Divided into two sections The Distinctive Theoretical Features of Schema Therapy and The Distinctive Practical Features of Schema Therapy, this book with provide a concise introduction for those new to the technique, as well as a discussion of how it differs from the other cognitive behavioural therapies for those experienced in the field. March 2010: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46298-3: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46299-0: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Distinctive Features Frank Bond, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK, and Paul Flaxman, City University, London, UK Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) focuses on accepting and dealing with uncomfortable thoughts and feelings instead of challenging these beliefs by looking for a more rational response – a technique used in other methods of cognitive behaviour therapy. ACT incorporates acceptance and mindfulness strategies, encouraging the client to observe their experience without judgement and then work with this experience rather than against it, to bring about psychological change. Divided into two sections, The Distinctive Theoretical Features of ACT and The Distinctive Practical Features of ACT this book summarises the key features of the approach in 30 concise points. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy: Distinctive Features provides an excellent guide to ACT and explains how the technique differs from traditional cognitive behaviour therapy. Its straightforward format will appeal to those who are new to the field, and it will be a handy reference tool for more experienced clinicians.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
the cbt distinctive features series
30
Contents: Part I: Theory. Developments Within CBT. The History of ACT. ACT’s View on Human Suffering. ACT’s Underlying Philosophy: Functional Contextualism. ACT’s Underlying Theory: Relational Frame Theory. Psychological Flexibility. Acceptance. Defusion. Self-as-context. Contact with the Present Moment. Values. Committed Action. Measuring Psychological Flexibility: The Acceptance and Action Questionnaire (AAQ). Part II: Practice. ACT Case Formulation. Core Clinical Goals and Examples of Associated Intervention Techniques. The Technical Flexibility of ACT. ACT and the Therapeutic Relationship. ACT in Groups. ACT in Non-clinical Contexts. ACT: The Evidence.
December 2009: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45065-2: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45066-9: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Behavioral Activation Distinctive Features
Jonathan W. Kanter, Andrew M. Busch, and Laura C. Rusch, all at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, USA “All therapists who treat depression should read this excellent overview of behavioural activation. The authors describe an integrated model of depression and a stepped care approach in the application of the behavioural activation. There are good clinical examples and descriptions of how to apply the principles in practice.” - David Veale, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College London, UK
Behavioral activation theory indicates that human behavior is a direct result of positive reinforcement, and that when positive, stable sources of reinforcement are lost, depression and other mental health disorders occur. Behavioral activation encourages the client to obtain and nurture the skills that allow them to increase and maintain contact with forms of positive reinforcement. Behavioral Activation: Distinctive Features clarifies the fundamental theoretical and practical features of behavioral activation. The book includes numerous case examples and transcribed segments from therapy sessions as well as outlining behavior terminology and concepts using straightforward terms and examples so that all therapists can see the utility and practical value of this approach. Contents: Part I: The Distinctive Theoretical Features of Behavioral Activation. A Distinctive History. A Distinct Definition of Human Behavior. Distinct Terminology. A Distinct Philosophy and Theory. The Distinct Behavioral ABC Model. The Ubiquity of Positive Reinforcement. The Meaning of Life. Depression and Positive Reinforcement. The Ubiquity of Negative Reinforcement. The Role of Punishment. An (Almost) Complete Behavioral Model of Depression. The Role of Cognition. The Role of Insight. Activation and Acceptance. Part II: The Distinctive Practical Features of Behavioral Activation. A Distinct Structure. The Initial Treatment Rationale. Activity Monitoring. Values Assessment. Simple Activation. The Importance of Homework. Functional Assessment. Post-it Notes and Other Stimulus Control Procedures. Skills Training. Contingency Management. Mindful Valued Activation. Ending Therapy. Thinking Functionally about Suicide and Medication. The Therapeutic Relationship in BA. A Distinct Flexible Framework: Adaptations for Minorities. The Promise of BA.
April 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44653-2: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44654-9: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series
Beck’s Cognitive Therapy Distinctive Features Frank Wills, Independent Practitioner and Researcher, UK Beck’s Cognitive Therapy: Distinctive Features explores the key contributions made by Aaron T. Beck to the development of cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT).
This book provides a concise account of Beck’s work against a background of his personal and professional history. The author, Frank Wills, considers the theory and practice of Beck’s cognitive therapy by firstly examining his contribution to the understanding of psychopathology, and going on to explore Beck’s suggestions about the best methods of treatment. Throughout the book a commentary of how Beck’s thinking differs from other approaches to CBT is provided, as well as a summary of the similarities and differences between Beck’s methods and other forms of treatment including psychoanalysis and humanistic therapy. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Theory. Prelude: Beck and his Group. Cognitive Therapy is Organised Around a Formulation. Different Problem Areas in Cognitive Therapy are Marked Out by Specific Cognitive Themes. Cognitive Therapy Varies According to the Areas to which it is Applied. Cognitive Functioning is Organised Around the Existence of Deep Schemas. It is Helpful to Understand the Evolutionary Underpinnings of Psychological Problems. Beck has Described a Variety of Levels and Types of Cognition. Cognitive Distortions Play a Key Role in Emotional Problems but are not Necessarily ‘Irrational’. Images Also Contain Key Elements of Cognitions Distortions. Cognition, Emotion and Behaviour Interact with Mutual and Reciprocal Influence on Each Other. Safety Behaviours, Including Avoidance, Reassurance Seeking and Hyper-vigilance, Play a Crucial Role in Maintaining Anxiety. Strategies that Address Negative Attention Bias Strengthen the Cognitive Therapy Model. Meta-Cognition – The Way People Think about Thinking – Also Influences the Way They Feel and Behave. Promoting Mindfulness of and Mindful Attention to Negative Thoughts is Likely to Form a Major Part of Cognitive Therapy in Future. Beckian Epistemology has a Clear Process for Developing Appropriate Therapeutic Knowledge for Cognitive Therapists to Follow. Protocol Development and the Specification of Skills have Proved Important Factors in Linking CBT Theory and Practice. Conclusion to Part I. Part II: Practice. Beck’s Cognitive Therapy – A Principled Model: 15 Points about the Practice Model. Cognitive Therapists Use Formulation to Focus Therapeutic Work. Cognitive Therapists, Like Other Therapists, Use Formulation to Tackle Interpersonal and Alliance Issues. Cognitive Therapy Requires a Sound Therapeutic Relationship. Cognitive Therapists Stress the Importance of Collaboration in the Therapeutic Relationship. Cognitive Therapy is Brief and Time-limited. Cognitive Therapy is Structured and Directional. Cognitive Therapy is Problem- and Goal-oriented. Cognitive Therapy Initially Emphasises the Present Time Focus. Cognitive Therapy uses an Educational Model. Homework is a Central Feature of Cognitive Therapy. Cognitive Therapists Teach Clients to Evaluate and Modify their Thoughts. Cognitive Therapy uses Various Methods to Change Cognitive Content. Cognitive Therapy uses a Variety of Methods to Change Cognitive Processes. Cognitive Therapy uses a Variety of Methods to Promote Behavioural Change. Cognitive Therapists have Developed the Measurement of Therapist Competence. Summary and Review of Part II. Conclusion.
February 2009: 192pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43951-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43952-7: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
the cbt distinctive features series
Metacognitive Therapy
Distinctive Features Peter Fisher, University of Liverpool, UK, and Adrian Wells, University of Manchester, UK “This book provides a skilful mix of theory and practice that should be essential reading for all wanting to learn more about MCT... I highly recommend it.” - Hans M. Nordahl, Norwegian University of Science and Technology, Trondheim, Norway
Metacognitive Therapy is based on the principle that worry and rumination are universal processes leading to emotional disorder. These processes are linked to erroneous beliefs about thinking and unhelpful self-regulation strategies. Metacognitive Therapy: Distinctive Features is an introduction to the theoretical foundations and therapeutic principles of metacognitive therapy. Divided into two sections, Theory and Practice and using thirty key points, the authors explore how metacognitive therapy can allow people to escape from repetitive thinking patterns that often lead to prolonged psychological distress. This book is a valuable resource for both students and practitioners wishing to develop a basic understanding of metacognitive therapy and how it compares and contrasts with traditional forms of cognitive behavioural therapy. January 2009: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43498-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43499-7: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
for a further book by Adrian Wells please see page 33
New!
Constructivist Psychotherapy Distinctive Features Robert A. Neimeyer, University of Memphis, Tennessee, USA Constructivist psychotherapy focuses on the meaning that clients attribute to their world, and the way that this shapes their life and contributes to their difficulties. In this book, Robert A. Neimeyer, a leading figure in the field, provides a clear and accessible explanation of the key features of this approach. Constructivist Psychotherapy: Distinctive Features concentrates on the 30 key commitments that distinguish constructivism from other cognitive behavioural perspectives. Divided into two sections – Theory and Practice – this straightforward book is illustrated throughout with case material and recent research findings. Neimeyer provides us with a fresh perspective on familiar material, together with a clear, concise introduction to material that the reader may be less familiar with. Contents: Part I: Theory. Constructing a World. The Function of Fiction.
Personal Knowledge. Living on the Frontier. Redefining Reality. Living in Language. Deconstructing the Self. Systems Within Systems: The Epigenetic Model. Contextualizing Disorder. Part II: Practice. Laddering Toward Core Concerns. Mapping Social Ecologies of Meaning with the Bowtie Interview. Charting Networks of Constructs Using Repertory Grids. Assessing Emotional and Relational
31
Themes Using Self-confrontation. Reflecting on the Self Via Mirror Time. Attending from Self to Other. Setting Goals. Privileging Experience over Explanation. Catching the Wave. Harnessing the Power of the Poetic. Seeking Sufficient Structure. Tracking Evolving Goals. Fostering Client Reflexivity. Befriending the Resistance. Considering Homework. Articulating the Pro-symptom Position. Re-authoring the Self-narrative. Celebrating Termination. Evaluating Whether Psychotropic Medication is Part of the Solution, or Part of the Problem. Situating Constructivist Therapy in the Wider World. Constructing an Integrative Practice. January 2009: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44233-6: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44234-3: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Dialectical Behaviour Therapy Distinctive Features Michaela A. Swales, University of Wales, Bangor, UK, and Heidi L. Heard, Consultant and Supervisor, St. Louis, USA
Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT) is a psychotherapeutic approach designed particularly to treat the problems of chronically suicidal individuals with borderline personality disorder (BPD). The therapy articulates a series of principles that effectively guide clinicians in responding to suicidal and other behaviours that challenge them when treating this population. Dialectical Behaviour Therapy highlights 30 distinctive features of the treatment and uses extensive clinical examples to demonstrate how the theory translates into practice. In Part I: The Distinctive Theoretical Features of DBT, the authors introduce us to the three foundations on which the treatment rests – behaviourism, Zen and dialectics – and how these integrate. In Part II: The Distinctive Practical Features of DBT, Swales and Heard describe both how the therapy applies these principles to the treatment of clients with borderline personality disorder and elucidate the distinctive conceptual twists in the application of cognitive and behavioural procedures within the treatment. 2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44457-6: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44458-3: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy Distinctive Features Rebecca Crane, University of Wales, Bangor, UK “A clear account of what MBCT is, both in its theoretical perspectives and its actual practices. Written in accessible language, it is an extraordinary achievement that will be highly valued by both participants in mindfulness classes and their teachers.” - Mark Williams, From the Foreword
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
32
Practical Clinical Guidebooks series
the cbt distinctive features series
Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy (MBCT) is increasingly used in therapeutic practice. It encourages clients to process experience without judgement as it arises, helping them to change their relationship with challenging thoughts and feelings, and accept that, even though difficult things may happen, it is possible to work with these in new ways.
www.routledgementalhealth.com/practical-clinical-guidebooks
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Depression
This book provides a basis for understanding the key theoretical and practical features of MBCT. Focusing on a mindfulness-based cognitive therapy programme that is offered in a group context to those who are vulnerable to depressive relapses, the text is divided into 30 distinctive features that characterise the approach. Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy: Distinctive Features provides a concise, straightforward summary for professionals and trainees in the field. Its easy-to-use format will appeal to both experienced practitioners and newcomers with an interest in MBCT. 2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44501-6: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44502-3: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy Distinctive Features Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK
Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT) encourages the client to focus on their emotional problems in order to understand, challenge and change the irrational beliefs that underpin these problems. REBT can help clients to strengthen conviction in their alternative rational beliefs by acting in ways that are consistent with them and thus encourage a healthier outlook.
A Practical Guide to Management and Treatment Thröstur Björgvinsson, Baylor College of Medicine, Texas, USA, and Johan Rosqvist, Pacific University, Oregon, USA Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Depression provides an overview of the established core techniques and strategies for using CBT with depression while drawing together the latest research and soundest thinking in the field today. Unique to this volume is the coverage of a variety of manualized approaches to therapy, allowing for CBT to be applied in a flexibly modular fashion. With an emphasis on practical guidelines to established therapeutic techniques and treatment strategies, illustrated through a number of case examples, this book provides clinical insight into how to apply it in a meaningful way to the broadly varying forms of depression. Contents: Part I: Introduction. The Nature of Depression. Models of Depression. Part II: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy: Management and Treatment. Assessment. Setting the Stage. Starting Work. Working Through. Towards Termination. Part III: Aftercare, Challenges, and Case Illustrations. Different Populations and Case Illustrations. Challenges and Future Directions. December 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95339-9: £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95340-5: £15.95
Series: Practical Clinical Guidebooks Published by Routledge
This accessible and direct guide introduces the reader to REBT while indicating how it is different from other approaches within the broad cognitive behavioural therapy spectrum. Divided into two sections; The Distinctive Theoretical Features of REBT and The Distinctive Practical Features of REBT, this book presents concise, straightforward information in 30 key points derived from the author’s own experience in the field. Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy: Distinctive Features will be invaluable to both experienced clinicians, and those new to the field. It will appeal to psychotherapists and counsellors, together with students and practitioners who are keen to learn how REBT can be differentiated from the other approaches to CBT. 2008: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43085-2: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43086-9: £9.99
The CBT Distinctive Features Series Published by Routledge
cognitive behaviour therapy arena =
news • books • journals • resources
www.cbtarena.com Brought to you by Routledge Mental Health www.routledgementalhealth.com
Forthcoming!
Cognitive Behavioral Therapy of Social Anxiety Disorder Evidence-Based and Disorder Specific Treatment Techniques Stefan G. Hofmann, and Michael W. Otto, both at Boston University, Massachusetts, USA
CBT has been demonstrated to be the most effective form of treatment for social phobia, but research has shown that conventional CBT principles and general interventions fall short of the mark. With this in mind, Hofmann and Otto have composed an organized treatment approach that includes specifically designed interventions to strengthen the relevant CBT strategies. This volume builds upon empirical research to address the psychopathology and heterogeneity of social phobia, creating a series of specific interventions with numerous case examples. Contents: Description of Disorder. Overall Description of Treatment Strategy. Session by Session Interventions. Research Basis. Clinical Cases. Complicating Factors. Maintenance and Follow-up Strategies. 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95402-0: £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95403-7: £17.95
Series: Practical Clinical Guidebooks Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
practical clinical guidebooks series
33
Perkins et al.: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Smoking Cessation
Part III: Facilitating Emotional Processing. Bringing About Lasting Change at the Deepest Level. The Role of Behavioral Experiments. Part IV: Overcoming Three Major Obstacles to Progress. Avoidance of Affect. Low Self-Esteem. Dealing with Uncertainty. Part V: Ending Treatment Productively. Creating a Therapy “Blueprint.”
Hb: 978-0-415-95462-4: 2007: 224pp. £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95463-1: 2007: 224pp. £17.95
2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-830-8: £24.00
Also in the Series
Ramsey/Rostain: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Adult ADHD Hb: 978-0-415-95500-3: 2007: 240pp. £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95501-0: 2007: 240pp. £18.95
Dugas/Robichaud: Cognitive-Behavioral Treatment for Generalized Anxiety Disorder Hb: 978-0-415-95210-1: 2006: 224pp. £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95211-8: 2006: 224pp. £17.95
Emmelkamp/Vedel: Evidence-Based Treatment for Alcohol and Drug Abuse Hb: 978-0-415-95285-9: 2006: 304pp. £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95286-6: 2006: 304pp. £17.00
Marshall et al.: Treating Sexual Offenders Hb: 978-0-415-94935-4: 2006: 264pp. £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-94936-1: 2006: 264pp. £19.95
Rosqvist: Exposure Treatments for Anxiety Disorders Hb: 978-0-415-94846-3: 2005: 280pp. £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-94847-0: 2005: 280pp. £17.50
cognitive behaviour therapy
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Anxiety Disorders Mastering Clinical Challenges Gillian Butler, Oxford Cognitive Therapy Centre, UK, Melanie Fennell, and Ann Hackmann, both at Warneford Hospital, Oxford University, UK
“This book must be read by all those who seek to help people suffering from anxiety disorders. It clearly and accessibly portrays the essence of effective CBT for anxiety while avoiding oversimplified prescriptions. The book is unique in helping clinicians to achieve the integration of clinical art and clinical science that characterizes excellent CBT... Read this book and use it!” - Paul Salkovskis, King’s College, London, UK
Helping therapists bring about enduring change when treating clients with any anxiety disorder, this invaluable book combines expert guidance, in-depth exploration, and innovative clinical strategies. The authors draw on extensive experience and research to provide a framework for constructing lucid formulations of complex cases. They identify obstacles that frequently arise during the early, middle, and later stages of treatment and present a wide range of practical solutions. The volume demonstrates clear-cut yet flexible ways to enhance client engagement, foster metacognitive awareness, facilitate emotional processing, address low self-esteem and fear of uncertainty, and much more.
Series: Guides to Individualized Evidence-Based Treatment Published by Guilford Press
Metacognitive Therapy for Anxiety and Depression Adrian Wells, University of Manchester, UK
“Wells has written a very important book, rich in clinical understanding and practical guidance. Metacognitive therapy is based on a well-developed and thoroughly tested model that addresses core disordered processes, including attentional bias and rumination. The procedures he describes will be enormously useful to therapists of all persuasions, and can form the bedrock of lowintensity and high-intensity interventions for a wide range of disorders.” - Chris R. Brewin, University College London, UK
This groundbreaking book explains the “whats” and “how-tos” of metacognitive therapy (MCT), a cutting-edge form of cognitivebehavioral therapy with a growing empirical evidence base. MCT developer Adrian Wells shows that much psychological distress results from how a person responds to negative thoughts and beliefs – for example, by ruminating or worrying – rather than the content of those thoughts. He presents innovative, practical techniques and specific protocols for addressing metacognitive processes to effectively treat generalized anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, and major depression. Contents: The Theory and Nature of Metacognitive Therapy. Assessment. Foundation Metacognitive Therapy Skills. Attention Training Techniques. Detached Mindfulness Techniques. Generalized Anxiety Disorder. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder. Major Depressive Disorder. The Evidence for Metacognitive Theory and Therapy. Concluding Thoughts. Appendices. Metacognitions Questionnaire 30 (MCQ-30). Meta-worry Questionnaire (MWQ). Thought-fusion Instrument (TFI). Attention Training Technique Summary Sheet. Self-attention Rating Scale. CAS-1. Generalized Anxiety Disorder Scale – Revised (GADS-R). Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Scale (PTSD-S). Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder Scale (OCD-S). Major Depressive Disorder Scale (MDD-S). GAD Case Formulation Interview. PTSD Case Formulation Interview. OCD Case Formulation Interview. Depression Case Formulation Interview. GAD Treatment Plan. PTSD Treatment Plan. OCD Treatment Plan. Depression Treatment Plan. New Plan Summary Sheet.
2008: 316pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-994-7: £27.50 Published by Guilford Press
for a further book by Adrian Wells please see page 31
Contents: Introduction. Part I: Setting the Scene. Treating Anxiety Disorders: The State of the Art. Part II: Deepening Understanding and Securing Engagement. Assessment: Investigating Appraisals in Depth. Case Formulation: Making Sense of Complexity. Decentering from Thoughts: Achieving Objectivity.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
cognitive behaviour therapy
34
Cognitive Behavior Therapy and Eating Disorders
A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions
Christopher G. Fairburn, University of Oxford, UK “Over the past 30 years, Fairburn has made immense contributions to our understanding and treatment of patients with eating disorders. This timely, clearly written, immensely informative, and very user-friendly book provides just what the clinician needs – a practical guide to all phases of treatment.” - Robert L. Leahy, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York Presbyterian Hospital, USA
This book provides the first comprehensive guide to the practice of “enhanced” cognitive behavior therapy (CBT-E), the leading empirically supported treatment for eating disorders. Written with the practitioner in mind, the book demonstrates how this transdiagnostic approach can be used with the full range of eating disorders seen in clinical practice. Christopher Fairburn and colleagues describe in detail how to tailor CBT-E to the needs of individual patients, and how to adapt it for adolescents and patients who require hospitalization. 2008: 324pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-709-7: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for PTSD A Case Formulation Approach Claudia Zayfert, Dartmouth Medical School, New Hampshire, USA, and Carolyn Black Becker, Trinity University, Texas, USA “Provides an excellent roadmap for the clinician. The authors outline the many options and choices that CBT practitioners face with patients with PTSD, and show how to deal with these within an individualized case formulation... I would recommend this book to any colleague or student involved in treating those who have suffered psychological trauma and its consequences.” - Nicholas Tarrier, University of Manchester, UK
Presenting clear-cut strategies for working with traumatized patients who have multiple co-occurring disorders and life problems, this highly practical manual puts an array of proven cognitive-behavioral strategies at the clinician’s fingertips. The authors illustrate the “whats,” “whys,” and “how-tos” of exposure, cognitive restructuring, and other effective techniques for treating posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD), and show how to organize interventions within a systematic yet flexible case formulation. Throughout, detailed clinical material shows exactly what the process of therapy looks like and offers guidance for overcoming treatment hurdles. Contents: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for PTSD: Overview and Empirical Foundation. Cognitive-Behavioral Conceptualization of PTSD. Assessment, Case Conceptualization, and Treatment Planning. Embarking on Treatment: Clearing the Path for Success. Psychoeducation. Introducing Exposure Therapy. Imaginal Exposure. Cognitive Restructuring. Supplemental Tools. Putting it Together. 2008: 252pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-369-3: 2007: £21.95 Pb: 978-1-60623-031-2: £16.50
Series: Guides to Individualized Evidence-Based Treatment
Forthcoming!
Edited by Nick Grey, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, and Co-Director of Centre for Anxiety Disorders and Trauma, South London and Maudsley Foundation NHS Trust, UK “A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions is the best book to date on this topic. This uniformly outstanding casebook thoughtfully illustrates creative and practical treatment guidelines derived from the latest trauma research... I wholeheartedly recommend this book to every clinician, whether novice or expert, and predict it will quickly become one of the most dog-eared books on your desk from frequent and welcome use.” - Christine A. Padesky, Co-Founder, Center for Cognitive Therapy, Huntington Beach, California USA
Many people experience traumatic events and whilst some gradually recover from such experiences, others find it more difficult and may seek professional help for a range of problems. A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions aims to help therapists who may lack specific training or who may not have an extensive range of clinical experience. The book includes descriptions and case studies of clinical cases of cognitive behavioural treatments involving people who have experienced traumatic events, including: • people with phobias, depression and paranoid delusions following traumatic experiences • people with Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) • people who have experienced multiple and prolonged traumatizations • people who are refugees or asylum-seekers. All chapters are written by experts in the field and consider what may be learned from such cases. Contents: Ehlers, Foreword. Grey, Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions: An Introduction. Moulds, Mastrodomenico, Hopwood, Bryant, Cognitive Therapy for Acute Stress Disorder. Handley, Salkovskis, Hackmann, Ehlers, Travel, Trauma and Phobia: Treating the Survivors of Transport Related Trauma. Stott, Tripping into Trauma: Cognitive-Behavioural Treatment for a Traumatic Stress Reaction Following Recreational Drug Use. Smith, Steel, ‘Suspicion is my Friend’: Cognitive Behavioural Therapy for Post-Traumatic Persecutory Delusions. Wheatley, Hackmann, Brewin, Imagery Re-scripting for Intrusive Sensory Memories in Major Depression Following Traumatic Experiences. Kennerley, Cognitive Therapy for Post-Traumatic Dissociation. Grey, McManus, Hackmann, Clark, Ehlers, Intensive Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: Case Studies. Wild, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder with Permanent Physical Injury. Liness, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Panic Disorder. Stobie, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder. Holmes, Butler, Cognitive Therapy and Suicidality in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: And Recent Thoughts on Flashbacks to Trauma Versus “Flash-forwards” to Suicide. Stallworthy, Cognitive Therapy for People with Posttraumatic Stress Disorder to Multiple Events: Working Out Where to Start. Duffy, Gillespie, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Arising from Terrorist Violence and Civil Conflict. Lee, Compassion-focused Cognitive Therapy for Shame-based Trauma Memories and Flashbacks in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Young, Cognitive Therapy for Survivors of Torture. Mueller, The Role of Narrative Exposure Therapy in Cognitive Therapy for Refugees and Asylum Seekers. d’Ardenne, Farmer, Using Interpreters in Trauma Therapy.
July 2009: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43802-5: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43803-2: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Published by Guilford Press
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
mindfulness
cognitive behaviour therapy
Forthcoming!
Imagery and the Threatened Self
35
Routledge Recommends!
The Mindful Path to Self-Compassion
Perspectives on Mental Imagery and the Self in Cognitive Therapy
Freeing Yourself from Destructive Thoughts and Emotions
Edited by Lusia Stopa, University of Southampton, UK
Christopher K. Germer, in private practice, Boston, USA
“Imagery and psychological disorders is said to be a “hot topic”. Lusia Stopa and co-authors do justice to this claim and provide an excellent overview of research and theory within this exciting new area. But this is a wholly exceptional book which also integrates research with advances and new understandings in clinical practice. The book is illustrated throughout with highly accessible and clinically relevant case material and it should be required reading for researchers and practitioners alike.” - Professor Graham Turpin,
“Self-compassion is the ground of all emotional healing, and Dr. Germer has produced an invaluable guide. Written with great clarity, psychological wisdom, and warmth, this book will serve anyone seeking practical and powerful tools that free the heart.” - Tara Brach, author of Radical Acceptance The psychological benefits of mindfulness are well established. Yet for people who struggle with difficult emotions like anxiety, guilt, anger, loneliness, sadness, or low self-esteem, mindfulness practices can be enhanced by adding a simple yet powerful ingredient: self-compassion. Without it, we all too often respond to emotional suffering with self-criticism, shame, or defensiveness – tough-to-break habits that only make suffering worse. This wise, eloquent, and practical book illuminates the nature of selfcompassion and offers easy-to-follow, scientifically grounded steps for incorporating it into daily life. Vivid examples and innovative exercises and techniques make this an ideal resource for readers new to mindfulness or those who want to take their practice to the next level.
Department of Psychology, University of Sheffield, UK
Imagery is important in cognitive therapy because images often trigger strong emotions, and imagery techniques such as imaginal reliving and imaginal rescripting are increasingly used in therapeutic treatments. Imagery and the Threatened Self considers the role that images of the self play in a number of common mental health problems and how these images can be used to help people to recover from mental health problems. Stopa and her contributors focus specifically on images of the self which are often negative and distorted and can contribute to both the cause and to the progression of clinical disorders. The book includes chapters on current theories of the self and on imagery techniques used in therapy, alongside chapters that examine the role of selfimages and how images can be used in the treatment of disorders including:
Contents: Salzberg, Foreword. Introduction. Part I: Discovering Self-
Compassion. Being Kind to Yourself. Listening to Your Body. Bringing in Difficult Emotions. What’s Self-Compassion? Pathways to SelfCompassion. Part II: Practicing Loving-kindness. Caring for Ourselves. Caring for Others. Part III: Customizing Self-Compassion. Finding Your Balance. Making Progress. Appendices.
• social phobia • eating disorders
June 2009: 306pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-284-2: £25.95 Pb: 978-1-59385-975-6: £10.95
• depression
Published by Guilford Press
• posttraumatic stress disorder
• bipolar disorder. Imagery and the Threatened Self is an original and innovative book that will appeal to both clinicians and students who are studying and practising cognitive therapy. Contents: Stopa, Imagery and the Threatened Self: An Introduction. Luke, Stopa, Psychological Theories of the Self and their Application. Stopa, How to Use Imagery in Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy. Wild, Imagery and the Self in Social Phobia. Hackmann, Day, Holmes, Agoraphobia: Imagery and the Threatened Self. Grey, Imagery and Psychological Threat to the Self in PTSD. Butler, Holmes, Imagery and the Self Following Childhood Trauma: Observations Concerning the Use of Drawings and External Images. Cooper, Imagery and the Negative Self in Eating Disorders. Gilbert, Evolved Minds and Compassion Focused Imagery in Depression. Mansell, Hodson, Imagery and Memories of the Social Self in People with Bipolar Disorders: Empirical Evidence, Phenomenology, Theory and Therapy.
June 2009: 270pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40759-5: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49430-4: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Mindfulness and the Therapeutic Relationship Edited by Steven F. Hick, Carleton University, Ontario, Canada, and Thomas Bien, in private practice, Albuquerque, New Mexico, USA
“Mindfulness is not an esoteric topic relevant only to a few therapists – it is a process that profoundly changes how we think about the nature and goals of therapeutic work itself. No recent book shows that more than this one... We have long known that a powerful therapeutic relationship is a key to success in therapy. This book begins to show how we can use ancient wisdom to cultivate that relationship.” - Steven C. Hayes, University of Nevada, Reno, USA A number of books have explored the ways psychotherapy clients can benefit from learning and practicing mindfulness. This is the first volume to focus specifically on how mindfulness can deepen the therapeutic relationship. Grounded in research, chapters demonstrate how therapists’ own mindfulness practice can help them to listen more attentively and be more fully present. Leading proponents of different treatment approaches – including behavioral,
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
36
psychodynamic, and family systems perspectives – illustrate a variety of ways that mindfulness principles can complement standard techniques and improve outcomes by strengthening the connection between therapist and client. Contents: Part I: Theory and Practice. Hick, Cultivating Therapeutic Relationships: The Role of Mindfulness. Lambert, Simon, The Therapeutic Relationship: Central and Essential in Psychotherapy Outcome. Part II: Therapeutic Presence. Bien, The Four Immeasurable Minds: Preparing to Be Present in Psychotherapy. Fulton, Anatta: Self, Non-self, and the Therapist. Walsh, Mindfulness and Empathy: A Hermeneutic Circle. Part III: Therapeutic Presence in Different Types of Treatment. Wilson, Sandoz, Mindfulness, Values, and Therapeutic Relationship in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Marlatt, Bowen, Chawla, Witkiewitz, Mindfulness-based Relapse Prevention for Substance Abusers: Therapist Training and Therapeutic Relationships. Safran, Reading, Mindfulness, Metacommunication, and Affect Regulation in Psychoanalytic Treatment. Lysack, Relational Mindfulness and Dialogic Space in Family Therapy. Part IV: Teaching and Listening. Shapiro, Izett, Meditation: A Universal Tool for Cultivating Empathy. Gehart, McCollum, Inviting Therapeutic Presence: A Mindfulness-based Approach. Kramer, Meleo-Meyer, Turner, Cultivating Mindfulness in Relationship: Insight Dialogue and the Interpersonal Mindfulness Program. Shafir, Mindful Listening for Better Outcomes. Hick, Bien, Epilogue.
2008: 240pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-820-9: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
in the Practicalsupervision Clinical Guidebooks series arts therapies series
mindfulness
Mindfulness- and Acceptance-Based Behavioral Therapies in Practice Lizabeth Roemer, University of Massachusetts, USA, and Susan M. Orsillo, Suffolk University, Boston, USA
“With the growing interest in mindfulnessand acceptance-based behavioral therapies, many practitioners and students are seeking a practical book like this one to fill a gap in their training. The volume offers a detailed, step-by-step explanation of each phase of assessment, case conceptualization, and treatment. I highly recommend this excellent, wellwritten, theoretically informed guide.” - Gabriele Melli, President, Institute
of Behavioral and Cognitive Psychology and Psychotherapy of Florence, Italy
Accessible and practical, this book provides a unified framework for integrating acceptance and mindfulness into cognitive-behavioral practice. The authors interweave elements of acceptance and commitment therapy, mindfulness-based cognitive therapy, mindfulness-based relapse prevention, and dialectical behavior therapy. They demonstrate how to conduct an assessment, develop a case formulation, and derive a flexible treatment plan for each patient. Vivid case examples and transcripts illustrate the entire process of therapy, showing how treatment can be tailored for different presenting problems and concerns. Contents: Introduction. An Acceptance-Based Behavioral Conceptualization
of Clinical Problems. Clinical Assessment of Relevant Domains. Individualized Case Formulation and Treatment Planning. Setting the Stage for Therapy. Offering the Client an Acceptance-Based Behavioral Model of Human Functioning. Mindfulness- and Acceptance-Based Strategies. Setting the Stage for Behavioral Change. Putting It All Together: Promoting Mindful, Valued Action. Evaluating Progress, Relapse Prevention, and Ending Treatment. Incorporating Other Evidence-Based Interventions with Acceptance-Based Behavioral Therapies. Lee, Fuchs, Cultural Considerations in Acceptance-Based Behavioral Therapies. Appendix: Mindfulness Books. 2008: 244pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-997-8: £24.00
Series: Guides to Individualized Evidence-Based Treatment Published by Guilford Press
www.routledgementalhealth.com/practical-clinical-guidebooks www.routledgementalhealth.com/supervision-arts-therapies
Supervision of Dramatherapy
Edited by Phil Jones, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK, and Ditty Dokter, Hertfordshire Partnership Trust, UK Supervision of Dramatherapy offers a thorough overview of dramatherapy supervision and the issues that can arise during the supervisory task. Phil Jones and Ditty Dokter bring together experts from the field to examine supervision in a range of contexts with different client groups, including dramatherapy with children, forensic work, and intercultural practice. Each chapter features: • theoretical grounding • the importance of action methods • position in the professional lifecycle • application in relation to setting and client groups. Using illustrative examples, Supervision of Dramatherapy provides practical guidance and theoretical grounding, appealing to supervisors and supervisees alike, as well as psychotherapists interested in the use of dramatic methods in the supervisory setting. Contents: Introduction. Jones, The State of the Art of Supervision: Review and Research. Dokter, Jones, Researching Contemporary Supervision: Method and Findings. Jones, From Role to Play: Research into Action Techniques in Supervision. Dokter, Training Supervision in Dramatherapy. AndersenWarren, Seymour, Theatre Model of Dramatherapy Supervision. Jenkyns, Transference and Countertransference in Relation to the Dramatic Form in Supervision Training. Dokter, Khasnavis, Intercultural Supervision: The Issue of Choice. Blatner, Collins, Using Psychodrama and Dramatherapy Methods in Supervising Dramatherapy Practicum Students. Hubbard, Applying Generic Clinical Supervision Training to Arts Therapy Supervision. Carr, Ramsden, An Exploration of Supervision in Education. Blackman, Making Space for Thought? Supervision in a Context Working with People with a Learning Disability. Stamp, Supervision in a Forensic Setting. Jones, Dokter, Information About Supervision.
2008: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44702-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44703-4: £19.99
Series: Supervision in the Arts Therapies Published by Routledge
Supervision of Music Therapy A Theoretical and Practical Handbook Edited by Helen Odell-Miller, and Eleanor Richards, both at Anglia Polytechnic University, UK
Supervision of Music Therapy discusses the theoretical bases underlying approaches to supervision in music therapy, as well as focusing on the distinctive aspects of music therapy supervision from both clinical and conceptual perspectives. In this book, leading music therapy supervisors and researchers demonstrate how music therapy trainees and practising clinicians can be supported through supervision, allowing them to develop
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
art therapy
supervision in the arts therapies series confidence and authenticity in their work. Contributors discuss supervision of clinical work with a variety of patients in a range of settings, from special education to forensic psychiatry, including work in schools, children’s services and a dedicated music therapy centre. A chapter on the academic supervision of music therapists undertaking doctoral research is provided, together with an overview of the history and continuing development of the field. Supervision of Music Therapy contributes to current debates about approaches to supervision in music therapy, and offers the reader fresh perspectives on the subject, making this a book of value to practising therapists, supervisors and students alike. Contents: Odell-Miller, Richards, Introduction. Odell-Miller, The History and Background of Supervision in Music Therapy. Richards, Whose Handicap? Issues Arising in the Supervision of Trainee Music Therapists in their First Experience of Working with Adults with Learning Disabilities. Pedersen, Music Therapy Supervision with Students and Professionals: The Use of Music and Analysis of Countertransference Experiences in the Triadic Field. Glyn, Two’s Company, Three’s a Crowd: Hatred of Triangulation in Music Therapy, and its Supervision in a Forensic Setting. John, Getting Better: Some Thoughts on the Growth of the Therapist. Odell-Miller, Krueckeberg, Music Therapy Supervision with Trainees in Adult Psychiatry. Brown, Supervision in Context: A Balancing Act. Oldfield, Supervision of Music Therapists Working with Children in Schools. Davies, Sloboda, Turbulence at the Boundary. Wigram, Supervision of PhD Doctoral Research.
2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41125-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41126-4: £19.99
Sources & Resources Second Edition Judith A. Rubin, University of Pittsburgh, USA Introduction to Art Therapy, Second Edition, clarifies the differences between artists or teachers who provide “therapeutic” art activities, psychologists or social workers who request drawings or suggest creative tasks in their work, and those who are trained as art therapists to do a kind of work which is similar, but qualitatively different. Thoroughly revised and updated, this second edition contains a DVD with still images and edited video clips; a new chapter on describing the work that art therapists do; new material on education that includes updated information on standards, ethics, and informing others; and a revised Appendix. Contents: Introduction to Revised Edition. Previews. What is Art Therapy? History. The Basics. Approaches. Assessment. Techniques. People We Serve. Problems We Address. Places We Practice. Professional Issues. What Next?
September 2009: 326pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96093-9: £29.00 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
Payne, Ed.: Supervision of Dance Movement Psychotherapy: A Practitioner’s Handbook
New Edition!
Introduction to Art Therapy
Series: Supervision in the Arts Therapies
Also in the Series
Expressive Therapies Continuum
Hb: 978-0-415-41343-5: 2008: 208pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41344-2: 2008: 208pp. £19.99
A Framework for Using Art in Therapy
Friedman/Mitchell, Eds.: Supervision of Sandplay Therapy
Lisa D. Hinz, clinical psychiatrist and a registered art therapist
Hb: 978-0-415-41089-2: 2007: 248pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41090-8: 2007: 248pp. £19.99
Schaverien/Case, Eds.: Supervision of Art Psychotherapy: A Theoretical and Practical Handbook Hb: 978-0-415-40960-5: 2007: 256pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40961-2: 2007: 256pp. £19.99
arts therapy arena news • books • journals • resources
www.artstherapyarena.com Brought to you by Routledge Mental Health www.routledgementalhealth.com
37
Expressive Therapies Continuum is distinctive in its application as a foundational theory in the field of art therapy. First developed by Vija Lusebrink, this theory can be used by persons of any orientation and has the ability to unite art therapists of varying backgrounds. The information contained in the book demonstrates how the Expressive Therapies Continuum provides a framework for organizing assessment information, the formulation of treatment goals, and planning art therapy interventions. It provides rich clinical detail and many case examples that enliven the text and promote student engagement and learning. Hinz divides the material into three parts. The first describes the historical roots of the Expressive Therapies Continuum and pays homage to contributions from the fields of art and psychology. The seven component parts of the ETC are examined in the second part, and the last part of the book is dedicated to assessment and clinical applications. This book’s easy-to-use format and effectiveness in teaching history and application make it an essential reference for therapists and students. Contents: Part I: Historical Perspectives and Foundations. Overview of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. History and Evolution of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Part II: Characteristics of the Expressive Therapies Continuum and its Components. Kinesthetic Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Sensory Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Perceptual Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Affective Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Cognitive Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Symbolic Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Creative Level of the Expressive
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
dance therapy
38
Therapies Continuum. Part III: Assessment and Clinical Applications. Assessment Within the Structure of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Individual Interventions. Couples, Families, and Groups.
dramatherapy
Dramatherapy and Social Theatre
May 2009: 303pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96347-3: £44.50 Pb: 978-0-415-99585-6: £22.00
Necessary Dialogues
Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
The Art and Science of Dance/ Movement Therapy Life is Dance Edited by Sharon Chaiklin, founding member and past president of the American Dance Therapy Association, and Hilda Wengrower, Academic Director of the DMT masters program at IL3-University of Barcelona This book is composed of a collection of articles written by experienced dance/movement therapists, and will be a valuable resource for the mental health, rehabilitation and special education fields. The material provided goes beyond the basics that characterize much of the available literature. The topics covered are intrinsic to many areas of dance/movement therapy, and each offers a theoretical perspective followed by case studies which emphasize the techniques used in the varied settings. Several different theoretical points of view are presented in the chapters, demonstrating that dance in therapy can be approached through different paths. The Art and Science of Dance/Movement Therapy offers both a broad understanding and an in-depth view of how and where dance therapy can be used to produce change. Contents: Part I: Basic Concepts of Dance/Movement Therapy. Chaiklin,
We Dance from the Moment Our Feet Touch the Earth. Wengrower, The Creative-artistic Process in Dance/Movement Therapy. Fischmann, Therapeutic Relationships and Kinesthetic Empathy. Chodorow, Dance Therapy: Motion and Emotion. Part II: The Path from Theory to Practice. Capello, BASCICS: An Intra/Interactional Model of Dance/Movement Therapy with the Adult Psychiatric Patient. Dascal, Body, Style, and Psychotherapy. Kleinman, Becoming Whole Again: Dance/Movement Therapy for Those who Suffer from Eating Disorders. Dulicai, Family Dance/Movement Therapy: A Systems Model. Tortora, Dance/Movement Psychotherapy in Early Childhood Treatment. Hill, Dancing with Hope: Dance Therapy with People with Dementia. Berrol, Dance/ Movement Therapy with Acquired Brain Trauma Rehabilitation. Part III: Aspects Integral to the Practice of Dance/Movement Therapy. Queyquep, Laban’s Movement Theories: A Dance/Movement Therapist’s Perspective. Loman, Sossin, Applying the Kestenberg Movement Profile in Dance/Movement Therapy: An Introduction. Shachar Levy, Emotrics: A Psychomotor Model for the Analysis and Interpretation of Emotive Motor Behavior. Chang, Cultural Consciousness and the Global Context of Dance/Movement Therapy. Hervey, Encouraging Research in Dance/Movement Therapy. September 2009: 300pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99657-0: £49.99 Pb: 978-0-415-99656-3: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Edited by Sue Jennings, Freelance dramatherapist, play therapist, supervisor, performer and storyteller working in the UK, Romania and Malaysia Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: Necessary Dialogues considers the nature of drama, theatre and dramatherapy examining how dramatherapy has evolved over the past decade and how the relationship between dramatherapy and social theatre has developed as a result of this. In this book Sue Jennings brings together international dramatherapists and theatre practitioners to challenge, clarify, describe and debate some of the theoretical and practical issues in dramatherapy and social theatre. Contributors cover topics including: • dramatherapy in communities • ground rules and definitions • cross-cultural perspectives • dramatherapy with adoptive and foster families • research with professional actors. Dramatherapy and Social Theatre is illustrated throughout with case vignettes providing examples of how theatre and therapeutic processes can be brought together. It will be valuable reading for both professionals and students involved in dramatherapy and theatre studies. Contents: Jennings, Prologue: Escape Unto Myself: Personal Experience and Public Performance. Part I: Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: A Debate of Ground Rules and Definitions. Tselikas, Social Theatre: An Exercise in Trusting the Art. Seymour, Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: A Question of Boundaries. Schininà, Like Ham in a Temperance Hotel: Healing, Participation, and Education in Social Theatre. Thompson, Aapo! Nathiye: Respecting Silence and the Performances of Not-telling. Bernardi, On the Dramatherapy of Communities. Part II: Theatre, Social Theatre and Change: An Exploration of Texts and Contexts. Schutzman, What a Riot! Casson, Century Theatre Therapy: Six Jacobean Healing Plays. Pitruzzella, Theatre and Therapy: A Necessary Dialogue. Magill, Marquis-Muradaz, The Making of Mickey B, a Modern Adaptation of Macbeth Filmed in a Maximum Security Prison in Northern Ireland. Chabukswar, Making, Breaking, and Making Again: Theatre in Search of Healing in India. Part III: Social Theatre, Politics and Change: A Development of Cross-cultural Perspectives. Hickson, Social Theatre: A Theatre of Empowerment to Address Bullying in Schools. Barham, Social Theatre. Vidrih, The Only Thing Better Than Playing on Stage is Playing at the Heart of Life. Valente, From Education Through Art to Social Theatre: A Personal Story from a Portuguese Point of View. Brathwaite, Trinidad’s Camboulay Street Dance-play and the Carnivalesque Placebo: A Neurotheological Interface Between Social Theatre and Post-Traumatic Slave Syndrome. Part IV: Dramatherapy and Social Theatre in Practice: Descriptions of What We Actually Do. Okumoto, Using an Art Form for Mutual Understanding and Reconciliation in East Asia: A Drama Project, “Ho’o Pono Pono: Pax Pacifica”. Somers, Drama and Well-being: Narrative Theory and the Use of Interactive Theatre in Raising Mental Health Awareness. Moore, Theatre of Attachment: Dramatherapy with Adoptive and Foster Families. Raileanu, The Puppet that Felt a Breeze of its Own Energy: Applied Social Theatre in the Field of Sexuality In Moldova. Evans, Ackerman, Tripp, Where Professional Actors are Too “Good”: The RAP (Respect and Protect) Project. Grainger, Epilogue: Talking to Actors.
July 2009: 264pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42206-2: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42207-9: £22.99 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
child and adolescent mental health
play therapy
New Edition!
The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play
39
Keeping the Baby in Mind Infant Mental Health in Practice
Second Edition
Edited by Jane Barlow, University of Warwick, UK, and P.O. Svanberg, Tyne and Wear NHS Trust, UK
Linnet McMahon, Retired Lecturer in Social Work, University of Reading, UK This completely revised and updated second edition provides a comprehensive introduction to using play to communicate with troubled or traumatized children and their families, and to heal emotional damage. The book gives examples of good practice in different settings and situations, including schools, hospitals, residential settings, families and foster carers. The book also includes a consideration of the support needs of workers and carers.
“This well researched book will be of interest to many involved with infant mental health. Those engaged in direct work with families, academics concerned with infant development or social provision and those organising or making policy about the provision of services for Under 5s will find much to inspire them in these accessibly written chapters.”
Drawing on psychodynamic, systemic and attachment theory, this book provides an integrated theory base for using play in therapeutic work with children. It emphasizes non-directive approaches to therapeutic play and play therapy, based on supporting the child’s developing self within the safe boundaries provided by the setting and the worker’s emotional holding and containment. Areas explored include:
Keeping the Baby in Mind builds on the expanding evidence pointing to the crucial importance of parents in facilitating their baby’s development, and brings together expert contributors to examine a range of innovative psychological and psychotherapeutic interventions that are currently being used to support parents and their infants. It provides not only an overview of the many projects that are now available but also makes recommendations for future practice and the way in which children’s services are organised.
• children with disabilities and illnesses • daily living with abused and traumatized children • helping troubled families • difficulties in early years • children experiencing separation, loss and bereavement • children moving to new families. The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play book is an invaluable resource for all of those using play therapy with children and will appeal not only to play therapists but also to professionals working in the broader field of therapeutic play. It will be useful whether the readers are at the beginning of their training or are wellestablished and experienced practitioners and managers. Contents: Introduction: The State of Play. The Development of Play. Approaches to Therapeutic Play. The Process of Therapeutic Play and Play Therapy. Therapeutic Play in the Early Years. Play in Helping Troubled Families. Therapeutic Play for Children with Disabilities and Illness. Therapeutic Play for Children Experiencing Separation, Loss and Bereavement in Their Families. Therapeutic Play with Children who have Experienced Continual Trauma and Loss. Therapeutic Play in Daily Living with Abused and Traumatized Children. Play in Therapeutic Work with Children Moving to New Families.
January 2009: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43941-1: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43942-8: £20.99 Published by Routledge
- Dr Janine Sternberg, Consultant Child & Adolescent Psychotherapist, Tavistock & Portman NHS Trust, UK
The book brings together interventions and ways of working that can be used both universally to support parents during the transition to parenthood, and with high-risk groups of parents where for example there may be child protection concerns or parents experience severe mental health problems. Each chapter describes the evidence supporting the need for such interventions and the approach being developed, and concludes with a description of its evaluation. Keeping the Baby in Mind marks a new and exciting phase in the development of interventions to support infant mental health and will be of interest across a wide range of disciplines from primary and community care to early years and Children’s Centre settings. Contents: Daws, Foreword. Barlow, Svanberg, Keeping the Baby in Mind. Part I: Universal Approaches. Underdown, The Power of Touch – Exploring Infant Massage. Douglas, Rheeston, The Solihull Approach: An Integrative Approach Across Agencies. Hawthorne, Promoting Development of the Early Parent-Infant Relationship Using the Neonatal Behavioural Assessment Scale. Parr, Joyce, ‘First Steps in Parenting’: Developing Nurturing Parenting Skills in Mothers and Fathers in the Pregnancy and Postnatal Period. Davis, The Family Partnership Model: Understanding the Processes of Prevention and Early Intervention. Barrows, The Importance of the Parental Couple in Parent-Infant Psychotherapy. Part II: Selective Approaches. Street, Empowering Parents Through ‘Learning Together’: The PEEP Model. Svanberg, Promoting a Secure Attachment through Early Screening and Interventions; The Sunderland Infant Programme. Rowe, Implementing the Nurse–family Partnership in England; Lessons from the Pilot Programme. Marks, Hadley, Mckay, Reay, Gelman, Working with Parents from Black and Minority Ethnic Backgrounds in Children Centres. Part III: Indicated Approaches. Baradon, Gerhardt, Tucker, Working with the Hidden Obstacles in Parent-Infant Relating; Two Parent-Infant Psychotherapy Projects. Puckering, Mellow Babies: Mellow Parenting with Parents of Infants. Pawlby, Fernyhough, Enhancing the Relationship Between Mothers with Severe Mental Illness and their Infants. Tarleton, ‘Parenting with Support’: Supporting Parents with Learning Difficulties to Parent. Svanberg, Barlow, Developing Infant-centred Services: The Way Forward.
February 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44297-8: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44298-5: £19.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
child and adolescent mental health
40
Routledge Recommends!
Through Assessment to Consultation
The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy
Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents
Psychoanalytic Approaches Second Edition Edited by Monica Lanyado, training supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK, and Ann Horne, Senior member of the British Association of Psychotherapists “This book makes me proud to be a child psychotherapist. The astonishing range of work undertaken by child psychotherapists is described clearly and with passion, and the value of it is evident. A wide range of professionals working with children and adolescents will feel they understand the children’s and young people’s experience better, and may feel empowered in their own work.” - Dilys Daws, Honorary Consultant Child Psychotherapist, Tavistock Clinic, UK
This updated edition of The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy reflects the many changes in the profession. It includes: • additional chapters on neuroscience, work with ‘looked after children’ and with foster parents, working in schools • enlarged chapters on research, attachment theory, work with parents, and developments in child and adolescent psychotherapy around the world • chapters on areas of specialist interest including violence, sexual abuse and abusing, trauma, parent-infant psychotherapy, autism, victims of political violence, delinquency, gender dysphoria. The Handbook remains accessible and jargon-free. It will be a valuable resource for all who work in allied professions where the emotional well-being of children is of concern. Contents: Horne, Lanyado, Introduction. Part I: Theoretical Foundations. Likierman, Urban, The Roots of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy in Psychoanalysis. Horne, Normal Emotional Development. Hopkins, Phillips, Contributions from Attachment Theory and Research. Music, The Contribution from Neuroscience. Midgley, Research in Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy: An Overview. Part II: Context. Crockatt, The Child Psychotherapist in the Multi-disciplinary Team. Gibbs, Race and Cultural Issues. Tischler, The International Scene. Part III: Diversity of Treatments and Settings. Lanyado, Horne, The Therapeutic Setting and Process. Green, Individual Psychotherapy: Assessment, Intensive and Non-intensive Work. Lanyado, Brief Psychotherapy and Therapeutic Consultations. How Much Therapy is ‘Good-Enough’? Rustin, Work with Parents. Onions, Parent-Infant Psychotherapy. Woods, Argent, Group Psychotherapy. McLoughlin, Working within Schools and Educational Settings. Flynn, The Challenges of In-patient Work in a Therapeutic Community. Wilson, Consultation within Residential Care. Part IV: Areas of Specialist Interest. Rhode, Child Psychotherapy for Children on the Autistic Spectrum. Lanyado, Psychotherapy with Severely Traumatised Children and Adolescents: ‘Far Beyond Words’. HunterSmallbone, Psychotherapy for Children Looked After by Local Authorities. Ironside, Working with Foster Carers. Horne, Sexual Abuse and Sexual Abusing in Childhood and Adolescence. Parsons, The Roots of Violence: Theory and Implications for Technique with Children and Adolescents. Melzak, Work with Children and Adolescents Exposed to Political Violence. Wilson, Delinquency. Mondadori, Working with People with Eating Disorders: ‘What If I Die Without Knowing Why?’ Gaffney, Reyes, Gender Identity Dysphoria. June 2009: 480pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46368-3: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46369-0: £24.99 Published by Routledge
for further books on Psychoanalysis please see page 70
Forthcoming!
Edited by Ann Horne, Senior member of the British Association of Psychotherapists, and Monica Lanyado, training supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK “This book is a welcome addition to the clinical accounts of analytic work with children, young people and their families. The understanding provided here is a timely reminder that working indirectly to help frontline staff reflect is essential if good, objective decision making is to underpin the complex situations confronting workers in a whole range of settings in Children’s services.” - Judith Trowell, University of Worcester, and
Honorary Consultant Psychiatrist, Tavistock Clinic, UK
Winnicott’s description of “doing something else” or “working as a psychoanalyst” when not engaged in the actual analysis of his patients resonates with the child psychotherapist today. Individual psychotherapy is certainly a valuable part of the work but much of the time the CPT is “doing something appropriate to the occasion”. Some of this time is spent in assessment work – for therapy, for the multiprofessional team and for other agencies – and some in consultation to colleagues and other professional staff or in a combination of the two. Drawing from the Independent tradition in psychoanalysis, Through Assessment to Consultation explores the application of psychoanalytic thinking to this daily work, reflecting on what is actually done and why. Contributors to the three sections – ‘Assessment’, ‘Overlaps’, ‘Consultation and Beyond’ – provide a variety of clinical illustrations as they describe a range of approaches and settings in the tasks of both assessment and consultation, ranging from the light impact of the analyst’s presence in the grief of post–9/11 New York to the call to political potency of ‘beyond consultation’. This book will help both new and experienced Child and Adolescent Psychotherapists re-examine their role and function in the team and in the outside world, and will also be of interest to specialist health workers, educational psychologists and those wanting to explore more Winnicottian approaches to therapeutic work. Contents: Horne, Lanyado, Introduction: ‘Appropriate to the Occasion’.
Part I: Assessment. Walker, Every Assessment Matters: The Child Psychotherapist’s Role in Assessment in Child and Adolescent Mental Health Settings. Dowling, Thinking Aloud: A Child Psychotherapist Assessing Families for Court. Parsons, Horne, Anxiety, Projection and the Quest for Magic Fixes: When One is Asked to Assess Risk. Alfillé-Cook, Peculiarities and Problems in Assessing Adolescents. Part II: Overlaps. Onions, Infant Mental Health: A Conversation with Dilys Daws. Gibbs, Reflections on Race and Culture in Therapeutic Consultation and Assessment. Hamilton, Death in the Family: Post 9/11 at Pier 94 Manhattan. Horne, From Intimacy to Acting Out: Assessment and Consultation about a Dangerous Child. Part III: Consultation and Beyond. Robson, Consultation to an Under 5s’ Service. Lanyado, The Impact of Listening on the Listener: Consultation to the Helping Professions who Work with Sexually Abused Young People. Vastardis, ‘You are Paid to be a Nuisance’: Tensions in the Role of a Clinician-manager. Wilson, Beyond Consultation: Towards YoungMinds. May 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46289-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46290-7: £19.99
Series: Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
child and adolescent mental health
Also in the Series
A Question of Technique
Hb: 978-0-415-37913-7: 2006: 272pp. £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37915-1: 2006: 272pp. £20.99
Series: Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Kids’ Club Letters Narrative Tools for Stimulating Process and Dialogue in Therapy Groups for Children and Adolescents Georgia A. DeGangi, in private practice at ITS (Integrated Therapy Services) for Children and Families, Inc., USA, and Marc A. Nemiroff, Washington School of Psychiatry, Washington, D.C., USA Kids’ Club Letters provides an innovative approach to group psychotherapy for school-aged children who experience a range of social and emotional problems. A narrative therapy approach is adapted, taking the form of letters written by the therapist in the voice of a child who is asking for advice about interpersonal or emotional problems. The child in the letter is asking for guidance from the participants in the group psychotherapy. These letters were devised and written for the purpose of structuring responses in group psychotherapy, allowing the participants to address relevant issues for them individually and at the group level. The children in the groups had previously experienced difficulty discussing these issues spontaneously. Hence the ‘Dear Group’ letter format was born. The children did not know that the therapist had written the letters. Contents: Part I: Identity Formation and Understanding Oneself. “Mirror, Mirror on the Wall: Who is the Smartest, Cleverest, Cutest, and Bravest of Them All?” Children Talk about Identity. The Square Peg in a Round Hole. Jack Sprat Got Too Fat, His Wife Got Too Lean. From Butterfly to Moth: Adolescent Metamorphosis. Back-stage or On-stage. To Be or Who to Be: The Question for Parents and the Budding Adolescent. An Unfocused Lens – The ADHD Child’s Perspective. “What’s Wrong With Me?”. “Jumping Out of My Skin”. Part II: Interpersonal Effectiveness. Living with a Short Fuse. Behind Closed Doors. Who’s the Boss? “I’m the Boss!” Alone on a Desert Island. Tell Me Master What to Do! I’ll Do Anything... To Be Popular Like You. The Sibling Battleground: Friend or Foe? Aliens and Earthlings: Which One Am I? I’m the Best! Right? Impulsivity vs. Social Inhibition: “I’m Too Scared to Speak” vs. “I Couldn’t Help Myself. Part III: Emotional Regulation. “Feeling Blue” Look Out! I’m Going to Explode! Wringing My Hands!
October 2009: 239pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99432-3: £27.95 Published by Routledge
child and adolescent mental health arena news • books • journals • resources
www.camharena.com Brought to you by Routledge Mental Health www.routledgementalhealth.com
Child Psychotherapy and Research New Approaches, Emerging Findings
Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents
Edited by Monica Lanyado, and Ann Horne
41
Edited by Nick Midgley, Anna Freud Centre, London, UK, Jan Anderson, North Essex Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, UK, Eve Grainger, North-East London NHS Foundation Trust, UK, Tanja Nesic-Vuckovic, South Essex Partnership NHS Trust, UK, and Cathy Urwin, Tavistock Clinic, London, UK “A unique, outstanding and inspiring collection of research papers in child psychotherapy.” - Dr Sebastian Kraemer, Honorary Consultant, Tavistock Clinic, London, UK
Child Psychotherapy and Research brings together some of the most exciting and innovative research activity taking place within psychoanalytic child psychotherapy today. Drawing on the expertise of an international range of contributors, this book describes work at the cutting edge of research in psychoanalytic child psychotherapy and related areas. It presents many of the emerging findings while also illustrating a whole range of methodologies – both quantitative and qualitative – that have been developed to investigate this field. The book examines the historical and philosophical background of child psychotherapy research and shows how research illuminates different clinical phenomena, the processes of psychotherapy, its evaluation and outcome. Recent developments in therapeutic work with children, including the increased focus on evidence-based practice, make research a much higher priority in the field than ever before. With this increasing significance, a whole new generation of clinicians are required to become familiar and competent with research methods and research literature. Child Psychotherapy and Research will be a vital resource for anyone involved in research and training related to psychotherapy and child mental health, as well as of great interest to a range of mental health professionals. Contents: Hobson, Preface. Urwin, Anderson, Grainger, Midgely, Nesic-Vuckovic,
Introduction. Part I: What is Child Psychotherapy Research? Editor’s Introduction. Fonagy, Research in Child Psychotherapy: Progress, Problems and Possibilities? Rustin, What Do Child Psychotherapists Know? Part II: Studying the Process of Child Psychotherapy. Editor’s Introduction. Philps, Mapping Process in Child Psychotherapy: Steps Towards Drafting a New Method for Evaluating Psychoanalytic Case Studies. Schneider, Pruetzel-Thomas, Midgley, Discovering New Ways of Seeing and Speaking About Psychotherapy Process: The Child Psychotherapy Q-set. Moran, Fonagy, Psychoanalysis and Diabetic Control: A Single-case Study. Carlberg, Exploring Change Processes in Psychodynamic Child Psychotherapy: The Therapists’ Perspective. Part III: The Routine Monitoring and Outcome of Child Psychotherapy. Editor’s Introduction. Boston, Lush, Grainger, Evaluation of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy with Fostered, Adopted and ‘In Care’ Children. Trowell, Rhode, Joffe, Childhood Depression: An Outcome Research Project. Schacter, Target, The Adult Outcome of Child Psychoanalysis: The Anna Freud Centre Long-term Follow-up Study. Urwin, A Qualitative Framework for Evaluating Clinical Effectiveness in Child Psychotherapy: The Hopes and Expectations for Treatment Approach (HETA). Part IV: Inter-disciplinary Research. Editor’s Introduction. Alvarez, Lee, Interpersonal Relatedness in Children With Autism: Clinical Complexity versus Scientific Simplicity? Anderson, The Mythic Significance of Risk-taking, Dangerous Behaviour. Hodges, Steele, Kaniuk, Hillman, Asquith, Narratives in Assessment and Research on the Development of Attachments in Maltreated Children. Mayes, Thomas, Social Neuroscience and Theories of Therapeutic Action: Some Implications for Child Psychotherapy. February 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42202-4: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42203-1: £22.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
42
CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Series
child and adolescent mental health
Researching Children’s Experiences
www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-with-children
Melissa Freeman, University of Georgia, USA, and Sandra Mathison, University of British Columbia, Canada “Working with children in a research project is different from working with adults. This book peels the layers back to help the reader understand what the differences are and how to respond to children in highly ethical ways... Readers are put right into the action through the use of reflection and description. The authors examine their own experience from many different angles, weaving together the emotional and practical aspects of doing research.”
“These authoritative, yet practical books will be of interest to all professionals who work in the field of child and adolescent mental health.” - Alan Carr
Post Traumatic Stress Disorder Cognitive Therapy with Children and Young People
- Sara McCormick Davis, University of Arkansas, Fort Smith, USA
This accessible book presents approaches to planning, carrying out, and analyzing research projects with children and youth from a social constructivist perspective. Rich, contextualized examples illustrate how to elicit and understand the lived experiences of diverse young people. Data collection methods discussed in-depth include drawing, photography, the Internet, games, interviewing, focus groups, journaling, and observation. Also covered are strategies for fostering the active contributions of children in the research process; navigating consent and ethical issues; enlisting the support of parents, school personnel, and other gatekeepers; and interpreting data. Throughout, the authors emphasize the need to attend to the social setting in which research with children is done. End-of-chapter questions and exercises encourage readers to reflect on taken-for-granted conceptions of children and childhood and to try out the book’s ideas in their own research projects. Contents: Part I: Conceptions of Children and Childhood. Historical
Perspectives of Childhood. Theories of Socialization. New Studies of Childhood. Part II: Negotiating Access for Research with Children. The Regulation of Research in the Social Sciences. Navigating Institutional Review Boards. Part III: Recruiting Child Participants. Strategies for Obtaining Parental Permission. Getting Kids to Participate After You Are “In.” Confidentiality. Part IV: Defining Researcher Roles in Research with Children. The Effect of Institutions on Researcher Roles. Presentation of Self as Researcher. Part V: Ethical Challenges in Social Constructionist Research with Children. Voluntary Participation. Communicating Responsibly. Reciprocity. Part VI: Interviewing. Interviewing as a Relationship. Developing Interview Questions and Protocols. Strategies for Eliciting Verbal Responses. Individual Interviews. Group Interviews and Focus Groups. Part VII: Art and Photography. Visual Forms of Expression and Representation. Communicating through Participant Drawings. Communicating through Photographs. Communicating through Maps. Planning for Visual Activities. Planning for Analysis of Visual Data. Part VIII: Journaling and Other Written Responses. Communicating through Writing. Written Accounts as Data. Artifacts. Technology and Writing. Part IX: Analyzing Data. Internal and External Narratives of Meaning. Analysis of Context, Contexts of Analysis. Analyzing Visual Data. Analysis Goes On and On. Part X: Children as Researchers. The Power of Children’s Voices. Why Partner with Young People? The Possibility of True Partnerships. 2008: 196pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-996-1: £35.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-995-4: £21.00
Forthcoming!
Patrick Smith, Sean Perrin, and William Yule, all at the Institute of Psychiatry, London, UK, and David M. Clark, King’s College London, UK Post traumatic stress disorder develops after exposure to one or more terrifying event that has caused, or threatened to cause the sufferer grave physical harm. This book discusses how traumafocused cognitive therapy can be used to help children and adolescents who suffer from post traumatic stress disorder. Cognitive therapy is frequently used to treat adults who suffer from PTSD with proven results. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder provides the therapist with instructions on how CT models can be used with children and young people to combat the disorder. Based on research carried out by the authors, this book covers:
• assessment procedures and measures • formulation and treatment planning • trauma focussed cognitive therapy methods • common hurdles The authors provide case studies and practical tips, as well as examples of self-report measures and handouts for young people and their parents which will help the practitioner to prepare for working with this difficult client group. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder is an accessible, practical, clinically relevant guide for professionals and trainees in child and adolescent mental health service teams who work with traumatised children and young people. Contents: Introduction to Cognitive Therapy with Children and Adolescents. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder. Assessment. Formulation and Treatment Planning. CT for PTSD Methods. CT for PTSD with Adolescents. CT for PTSD with Young Children. Common Hurdles in Treatment. Comorbidity. Future Issues. Appendices.
July 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39163-4: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39164-1: £19.99
Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Published by Routledge
Published by Guilford Press
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
cBT with children, adolescents and families series
Eating Disorders Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Simon G. Gowers, University of Liverpool, UK, and Lynne Green, clinical psychologist, Cheshire and Merseyside Eating Disorders Service for Adolescents, Chester, UK
Eating Disorders comprise a range of physical, psychological and behavioural features that often have an impact on social functioning and can invade most areas of the sufferer’s life. Although eating and weight disorders are common in children and adolescents, there is a scarcity of practical guidance on treatment methods for eating disorders in young people. In this book, Simon Gowers and Lynne Green bring together up-todate research, clinical examples and useful tips to guide practitioners in working with young people, as well as helping families of children and adolescents to deal with their difficulties. Eating Disorders provides the clinician with an introduction about how CBT can be used to challenge beliefs about control, restraint, weight and shape allowing young people to manage their eating disorder. Chapters cover: • preparing for therapy • a CBT treatment programme • applications and challenges. This practical text will be essential reading for mental health professionals, paediatric teams and those in primary care, working with children and adolescents with eating disorders. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Eating Disorders and their Management. The Role of CBT in the Treatment of Eating Disorders in Children and Adolescents. Part II: Preparing for Therapy. Assessment and Formulation. Engaging and Motivating Young People. The Role of the Family. Part III: A CBT Treatment Programme. Stage 1: Planning and Establishing Principles, Embarking on Change. Stage 2: Tackling Problem Eating, Challenging Compensatory Behaviours. Stage 3: Treatment Monitoring and Review. Stage 4: Addressing Unhelpful Cognitions and Solving Problems Maintaining the Eating Disorder. Stage 5: Relapse Prevention and Discharge Planning. Part IV: Applications and Challenges. In-patient Management, Groups and Self Help. Future Challenges.
March 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44462-0: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44463-7: £19.99
Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Published by Routledge
Depression Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Chrissie Verduyn, Central Manchester and Manchester Children’s University Hospitals NHS Trust, UK, Julia Rogers, Berkshire Healthcare NHS Foundation Trust, UK, and Alison Wood, in private practice, Manchester, UK
Depression: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Adolescents provides an accessible guide to recognising and treating depression in young people. Based on a successful
43
manual developed for research trials, this book presents an overview of a cognitive behavioural model for working with this age group, as well as practical ideas about how to start therapy. Topics covered include: • engaging young people • setting goals for therapy • cognitive behaviour assessment and formulation • solutions for problems practitioners may face • encouraging parents and agencies to support therapy. Depression includes case examples and practical tips to prepare the practitioner for working with young people. Information is presented in a readable and practical style making this book ideal for professionals working in child and adolescent mental health services, as well as those in training. It will also be a useful guide for people working in community services for young people. Contents: Depression in Adolescence. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy. Cognitive Behavioural Assessment and Formulation. Starting Therapy. Early Stages of Therapy. Cognitive Techniques. General Cognitive Behavioural Techniques. Ending Therapy. Working with the Wider System. Special Issues. Common Problems.
March 2009: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39977-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39978-4: £19.99
Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Published by Routledge
Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Edited by Polly Waite, and Tim Williams, both at the University of Reading, UK
Obsessive Compulsive Disorder (OCD) is characterised by a person’s obsessive, distressing, intrusive thoughts and their related compulsions. It affects an estimated one percent of teenagers and has been detected in children as young as three years old. In this concise, accessible book experienced contributors provide detailed guidance on carrying out assessments and treatment for children and young people with OCD from a cognitive behavioural perspective. This approach has been developed from extensive research and clinical work with young people with OCD and associated problems. The book includes: • an overview of OCD • an introduction to CBT and its relevance to OCD in young people • assessment and treatment methods • case studies and clinical vignettes • worksheets for use with the client. This straightforward text will provide essential direction for practitioners and trainees in a range of professions including psychiatry, psychotherapy, counselling, nursing, education and social work. Contents: Waite, Williams, Introduction to Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. Creswell, Waite, The Use of CBT with Children and Adolescents. Gallop, Cognitive Behavioural Assessment of OCD in Children and Adolescents. Waite, Gallop, Atkinson, Planning and Carrying Out Treatment. Atkinson, CBT with
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
44
cBT with children, adolescents and families series
Clinical Psychology: A Modular Course Series
Younger Children. Waite, CBT with Adolescents. Stobie, Working with Families. Salkovskis, Waite, Williams, Issues and Future Directions in Childhood OCD. Appendices. January 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40388-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40389-4: £19.99
www.psypress.com/clinicalmodular
New Edition!
Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families
Childhood Disorders
Published by Routledge
Second Edition
Anxiety
Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Paul Stallard, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, Avon and Wiltshire Mental Health Partnership NHS Trust, UK Cognitive behavioural therapy has proven to be an effective treatment for anxiety disorders in children and young people. This book provides an overview of CBT and explores how it can be used to help children with anxiety disorders. In Anxiety: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Paul Stallard describes the nature and extent of anxiety problems that are suffered in childhood and discusses evidence for the effectiveness of the cognitive behavioural model as a method of treatment. This concise and accessible book, written specifically for the clinician, provides a clear outline of how CBT can be used with children suffering from anxiety disorders in an easy to follow format. The book provides many ideas that can be incorporated into everyday practice, as well as clinical vignettes, case examples, and worksheets for use with the client.
Philip C. Kendall, Temple University, Philadelphia, USA, and Jonathan S. Comer, Columbia University Clinic for Anxiety and Related Disorders, USA In this revised edition of Childhood Disorders Philip Kendall and Jonathan Comer present current information about the full range of psychological disorders that occur in childhood, and discuss the major models that guide the thinking about each disorder. Specific criteria for diagnosis is presented alongside the latest research findings to provide an overview of methods used for treating childhood disorders. Each chapter in this second edition is fully updated and includes information on the changes in the prevalence of childhood disorders and causes for this, as well as brand new sections on substance use and abuse, and post traumatic stress disorders in childhood with a focus towards reactions to terrorism and natural disaster. Childhood Disorders, second edition will prove essential reading for undergraduates, as well as being a useful introduction for professionals in related fields. Contents: Getting to Know the Children. Models of Childhood Disorders. Issues Facing the Disorders of Childhood. Conduct Disorders. Attention-Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder. Anxiety Disorders. Depression. Eating Disorders. Mental Retardation and Learning Disabilities. Pervasive Developmental Disorders. Tics and Elimination Disorders. Questions for Your Consideration.
This straightforward text will prove essential reading for professionals involved with children who have significant anxiety problems including mental health workers, social services staff and those working in educational settings.
March 2010: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48641-5: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48642-2: £15.95
Contents: Anxiety Problems in Childhood. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy. Dysfunctional Cognitions and Processes. Parental Behaviour and Childhood Anxiety. Assessment and Problem Formulation. Psycho-education, Goal Setting and Problem Formulations. Involving Parents. Emotional Recognition and Management. Cognitive Enhancement. Problem Solving, Exposure and Relapse Prevention. Common Problems. Materials and Worksheets. References.
Published by Psychology Press
Series: Clinical Psychology: A Modular Course
Also in the Series Hammen/Watkins: Depression, Second Edition
2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-37256-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37255-8: £19.99
Hb: 978-0-415-41972-7: 2007: 272pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41973-4: 2007: 272pp. £15.95
Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families
Hb: 978-0-415-38518-3: 2007: 272pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38519-0: 2007: 272pp. £15.95
Published by Routledge
For free downloadable resources for books in this series please visit www.routledgementalhealth.com/cbt-with-children for further books on Cognitive Behaviour Therapy please see page 25
Emmelkamp/Kamphuis: Personality Disorders
Grilo: Eating and Weight Disorders Hb: 978-1-84169-547-1: 2006: 256pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-548-8: 2006: 256pp. £15.95
Rachman: Anxiety, Second Edition Hb: 978-1-84169-515-0: 2004: 224pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-516-7: 2004: 224pp. £15.95
Teesson et al.: Addictions Hb: 978-1-84169-313-2: 2002: 152pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-314-9: 2002: 152pp. £15.95
Birchwood/Jackson: Schizophrenia Pb: 978-0-86377-553-6: 2001: 192pp. £15.95
Resick: Stress and Trauma Hb: 978-1-84169-163-3: 2000: 216pp. £45.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-190-9: 2000: 216pp. £15.95
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
child and adolescent clinical psychology and psychiatry
Abnormal Child Psychology
A Developmental Perspective Linda Wilmshurst, Elon University, North Carolina, USA Abnormal Child Psychology: A Developmental Perspective is intended for undergraduate and Masters-level students enrolled in courses in Abnormal Child and Adolescent Psychology. The text provides students with a learning model which incorporates three essential cornerstones, which are pivotal to understanding child and adolescent psychopathology: the K3 paradigm that consists of knowledge of developmental expectations, knowledge of the sources of influence, and knowledge of the theoretical models. selected contents: Part I: The Foundations of Abnormal Child Psychology: A Developmental Perspective. Part II: Emotional, Behavioral and Learning Difficulties in Children and Youth: Their Nature and Their Course. Part IA: Internalizing Problems: An Introduction. Part IB: Externalizing Problems: An Introduction. Part II: Problems of Attention and Learning: An Introduction. Part III: Problems of Late Childhood or Adolescence: An Introduction. Part IV: Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities and Pervasive Developmental Disorders: An Introduction.
2008: 648pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95363-4: £43.00 Published by Routledge
Straight Talk about Psychiatric Medications for Kids Third Edition Timothy E. Wilens, Harvard Medical School, Massachusetts, USA
“Dr. Wilens has done it again! This authoritative resource is particularly timely – the topic of medications for kids is increasingly in the news, but it can be hard for parents to find the unbiased, clear, and thoughtful information they need when making decisions about their own child’s care. I highly recommend this practical book.” - Joseph Biederman, Chief, Clinical and Research Program in Pediatric Psychopharmacology, Massachusetts General Hospital, USA
Deciding whether to give a child medication for an emotional or behavioral problem is a difficult choice. Parents wonder: Will it really help? How long will it be needed? Are there alternatives? What about side effects? Do news stories about FDA black box warnings trump the doctor’s assurances that medications are safe and effective? From noted Harvard psychiatrist Timothy E. Wilens, this bestselling guide has already empowered many tens of thousands of parents to become active, informed managers of their children’s care. The newly updated third edition details the latest advances in treating specific disorders and offers up-to-date answers to parents’ frequently asked questions. Contents: Introduction. Part I: What Every Parent Should Know about
Psychiatric Medications for Children. The Preliminaries: Building a Foundation of Knowledge. The Psychopharmacological Evaluation: Finding Out What’s Wrong. The Diagnosis and Treatment Plan: Laying Out a Strategy to Help Your Child. Treatment and Beyond: Collaborating in Your Child’s Ongoing Care. Part II: Common Childhood Psychiatric Disorders. Attentional and Disruptive Behavioral Disorders. Autism and Pervasive Developmental Disorders. The Mood Disorders. Anxiety-related Disorders. Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders. Disorders of Known Medical and Neurological Origin. Other
45
Mental Health Disturbances Affecting Children and Adolescents. Part III: The Psychotropic Medications. The Stimulants and Nonstimulants for ADHD. The Antidepressants. The Mood Stabilizers. The Anxiety-breaking Medications. The Antihypertensives. The Antipsychotics. Medications for Sleep, Bedwetting, and Other Problems. Appendix: Representative Medication Preparations and Sizes Used for the Treatment of Childhood Emotional and Behavioral Disorders; Example of a Completed Medication Log; Medication Log; Resources. 2008: 325pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-882-7: £25.95 Pb: 978-1-59385-842-1: £12.50 Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
Handbook of Developmental Disabilities Edited by Samuel L. Odom, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, USA, Robert H. Horner, University of Oregon, USA, Martha E. Snell, University of Virginia, USA, and Jan Blacher, University of California, USA “Odom and his colleagues have assembled some of the very best minds in the field of developmental disabilities to provide a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of fundamental issues. Spanning topics from genetics to intervention to family issues, the Handbook is an outstanding resource for graduate students and professionals.” - Geraldine Dawson, University of Washington, USA This authoritative Handbook reviews the breadth of current knowledge about developmental disabilities: neuroscientific and genetic foundations; the impact on health, learning, and behavior; and effective educational and clinical practices. Leading authorities analyze what works in intervening with diverse children and families, from infancy through the school years and the transition to adulthood. Chapters present established and emerging approaches to promoting communication and language abilities, academic skills, positive social relationships, and vocational and independent living skills. selected Contents: Part I: Foundations. Part II: Current Issues in Health,
Neuroscience, and Genetics. Part III: Early Intervention. Part IV: School-age Education and Intervention. Part V: Postschool and Adult Issues. Part VI: Behavior Supports. Part VII: Family Issues. Part VIII: International Perspectives and Future Directions. April 2009: 654pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-485-0: 2007: £55.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-248-4: £28.50 Published by Guilford Press
Social Responsibility Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults A Multicultural Treatment Manual for Harmful Behavior
James M. Yokley, MetroHealth Medical Center, Cleveland, Ohio, USA Social Responsibility Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults is a crucial treatment manual that can be used by mental health professionals whose caseload includes a multicultural population of adolescents and young adults who exhibit multiple forms of harmful behavior. This unique therapy enhances relapse prevention in harmful
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
child and adolescent forensic psychiatry
46
behavior treatment by addressing the target behavior problem, negative social influence problem, and dose-response problem, along with acknowledging that harmful behavior is multicultural and addressing the key criticisms of multicultural therapy through a theory-driven treatment approach that utilizes methods and procedures from existing evidence-based treatments with known multicultural applications. This text provides a comprehensive explanation of Social Responsibility Therapy, its advantages, and the intervention evidence-base for multiple forms of harmful behavior.
Contents: Social Responsibility Therapy Overview, Intervention Evidence Base and Multicultural Approach. Client Awareness Training: The Problem Development Triad. Social Responsibility Therapy Implementation Methods and Treatment Protocol. Research Support for Social Responsibility Therapy Methods and Procedures.
Cynthia Cupit Swenson, and Scott W. Henggeler, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA, Ida S. Taylor, Director of Gethsemani Community Center, North Charleston, USA, Oliver W. Addison, a leader in Union Heights for 38 years and served on the neighborhood council for over 20 years “This book contains unusually informative, insightful, and practical information on developing and implementing effective juvenile delinquency programs in very troubled neighborhoods. Remarkably, it will appeal to practitioners, students, and researchers alike – a very rare quality. This is the most user-friendly book of its type I have seen.”
2008: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3120-4: £56.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3121-1: £29.95 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Multisystemic Therapy for Antisocial Behavior in Children and Adolescents Second Edition Scott W. Henggeler, and Sonja K. Schoenwald, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA, Charles M. Borduin, University of Missouri–Columbia, USA, Melisa D. Rowland, and Phillippe B. Cunningham, both at Medical University of South Carolina, USA “This impressive second edition builds upon new research and clinical experience to expand and enrich a classic guide. I enthusiastically recommend this book to all of my colleagues in the mental health field. It is an excellent text for family therapy courses and for courses on child and adolescent treatment in psychology, social work, counseling and marriage and family therapy training programs.” - Nancy Boyd-Franklin, Rutgers, The State University of New Jersey, USA
Multisystemic therapy (MST) has grown dramatically since the initial publication of this comprehensive manual. Today, over 400 MST programs operate in more than 30 states and 10 countries, supported by a strong empirical evidence base. This book explains the principles of MST and provides clear guidelines for clinical assessment and intervention with delinquent youth and their families. Practitioners are guided to implement proven strategies for engaging clients and helping them to address the root causes of antisocial behavior, improve family functioning and peer relationships, enhance school performance, and build meaningful social supports.
Multisystemic Therapy and Neighborhood Partnerships Reducing Adolescent Violence and Substance Abuse
- James C. Howell, University of South Carolina, USA
Based on the proven technology of Multisystemic Therapy (MST), this unique book provides an exemplary approach to empowering communities to reduce youth violence and substance abuse and promote school success. Effective clinical strategies for working with at-risk youth are embedded in a comprehensive framework that enlists the talents and resources of neighborhood residents, community organisations, and outside stakeholders. Contents: Neighborhood Solutions for Neighborhood Problems: The Introduction. Neighborhood Solutions Timeline. Part I: The Empirical and Clinical Background for the Neighborhood Solutions Project. The Causes and Consequences of Youth Violence, Substance Abuse, and Community Violence. Evidence-based Treatments: What Works, What Doesn’t, and Why. Multisystemic Therapy: The Model. Part II: Implementing Prevention and Intervention Programs in Collaboration with Neighborhood Residents. Implementing a Neighborhood-based Project. The MST Approach for Reducing Youth Antisocial Behavior. The MST Approach for Treating Adolescent Substance Abuse and Dependence. The MST Approach for Reducing School Problems and School Expulsion. Neighborhood-designed Prevention Activities for Promoting Health and Wellness. Jenkins, Neighborhood-based Health Services. Laurie, Ward, Roper, Neighborhood-based Law Enforcement. Part III: Attaining and Sustaining Neighborhood-based Programs. Swenson, Smith, Funding Clinical Services and Neighborhood-based Programs. Summary and Conclusions.
April 2009: 272pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-109-5: 2004: £27.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-269-9: £16.99 Published by Guilford Press
April 2009: 324pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-071-8: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
The Juvenile Sex Offender
Contents: The Multisystemic Therapy Theory of Change: Conceptual and
Empirical Bases. Clinical Foundations, with Elena Hontoria Tuerk. Family Interventions. Peer Interventions. Promoting Educational and Vocational Success, with Cindy M. Schaeffer. When and How to Conduct Individually Oriented Interventions. Building Social Supports for Families. Treating Substance Abuse. MST Outcomes. Quality Assurance and Improvement: Fundamental to MST Programs Worldwide.
New in Paperback!
Second Edition Edited by Howard E. Barbaree, Centre for Addiction and Mental Health, University of Toronto, Canada, and William L. Marshall, Rockwood Psychological Services, Canada “Excellent... Shows how far our understanding of the juvenile sex offender has progressed. The editors have brought together the leaders in the field to review the broad knowledge base on this topic... Mental health and criminal justice professionals reading this text will greatly improve their understanding of the juvenile sex offender.” - Gene G. Abel, Behavioral Medicine Institute of Atlanta, USA
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Child and Adolescent Clinical Problems
child and adolescent forensic psychiatry From leading scientists and practitioners, this authoritative work examines what is known about the nature and development of juvenile sexual offending, the consequences for both victims and perpetrators, and approaches to assessment, intervention, and relapse prevention. Pathways of normal sexual development are described, and the biological, social, and psychological processes that lead to sexual conduct problems are investigated. The book explores how juvenile offenders are dealt with in the mental health and criminal justice systems and reviews available psychological and pharmacological treatment approaches. Contents: Barbaree, Marshall, An Introduction to the Juvenile Sex Offender: Terms, Concepts and Definitions. Bancroft, Normal Sexual Development. Barbaree, Langton, The Effects of Child Sexual Abuse and Family Environment. Blanchard, Cantor, Robichaud, Biological Factors in the Development of Sexual Deviance and Aggression in Males. Smallbone, Social and Psychological Factors in the Development of Delinquency and Sexual Deviance. White, Kadlec, Sechrist, Adolescent Sexual Aggression Within Heterosexual Relationships. Hunter, Becker, Lexier, The Female Juvenile Sex Offender. Seto, Lalumière, Conduct Problems and Juvenile Sexual Offending. O’Reilly, Carr, Assessment and Treatment of Criminogenic Needs. Worling, Långström, Risk of Sexual Recidivism in Adolescents Who Offend Sexually: Correlates and Assessment. Langton, Barbaree, Conceptual Issues in Treatment Evaluation Research with Juvenile Sexual Offenders. Letourneau, Legal Consequences to Juvenile Sex Offending in the United States. Burton, Smith-Darden, Frankel, Research on Adolescent Sexual Abuser Treatment Programs. Thakker, Ward, Tidmarsh, A Reevaluation of Relapse Prevention With Adolescents Who Sexually Offend: A Good Lives Model. Koss, Bachar, Hopkins, Disposition and Treatment of Juvenile Sex Offenders from the Perspective of Restorative Justice. Bradford, Fedoroff, The Pharmacological Treatment of the Juvenile Sex Offender.
2008: 396pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-198-9: 2005: £34.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-978-7: £18.95 Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
The Art and Science of Child Custody Evaluations Jonathan W. Gould, in private practice, North Carolina, USA, and David A. Martindale, in private practice, New Jersey, USA “Gould and Martindale have given mental health professionals a thoughtful, thorough, and impressively evidence-based overview of the what, how, and why of child custody evaluations... This book should be read by students and professionals not only for the information it offers, but also for its cautions – ethical, practical, and human.” - Robert E. Emery, University of Virginia, USA
Addressing key topics in child custody evaluation, this book provides essential knowledge for practitioners who want to meet the highest standards for both scientific validity and legal admissibility. The authors are leading experts who describe the latest data-based approaches to understanding and assessing relevant child, parent, and family factors. Going beyond the basics, the book gives in-depth attention to controversial, frequently encountered issues, such as how to evaluate allegations of domestic violence, child sexual abuse, and child alienation. selected Contents: Part I: Child Custody Evaluations and the Best Interests of
the Child. Part II: The Art of Child Custody Evaluations. Part III: The Science of Child Custody Evaluations: Factors to Assess in Child Custody Evaluations. Part IV: The Art and Science of Child Custody Evaluations: Assessing Allegations of Maltreatment. April 2009: 450pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-488-1: 2007: £27.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-261-3: £18.50
47
Addictions
Adolescent Substance Abuse Psychiatric Comorbidity and High Risk Behaviors Edited by Yifrah Kaminer, University of Connecticut Health Center, Farmington, Connecticut, USA, and Oscar G. Bukstein, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pennsylvania, USA
Dual diagnosis of adolescent substance use disorders and comorbid psychiatric disorders must be treated simultaneously to be effective. Adolescent Substance Abuse presents leading experts offering insightful viewpoints and dynamic suggestions on how to best provide simultaneous treatment and integrated services to these youths. The book covers the state of the art in the field of substance use disorders, and reviews different psychiatric disorders and high risk behaviors, and then addresses the issue of integrated services and ethical, legal, and policy issues pertaining to this population. This book comprehensively discusses the magnitude, etiology, and characteristics of problems and substance abuse disorders (SUD), and extensively explains ways to assess, treat, and develop services for adolescents. This unique text closely examines the assessment and treatment of psychiatric comorbid disorders among adolescents such as depression, anxiety disorders, ADHD, and high risk behaviors including suicidal behavior, self-harm behavior, and gambling behavior. Contents: Kaminer, Bukstein, Introduction. Tarter, Vanyukov, Kirisci, Etiology of Substance Use Disorder: Developmental Perspective. Chung, Adolescent Substance Use, Abuse, and Dependence: Prevalence, Course, and Outcomes. Winters, Stinchfielf, Bukstein, Assessing Adolescent Substance Use and Abuse. Fishman, Treatment Planning, Matching, and Placement for Adolescents with Substance Use Disorders. Slesnick, Kaminer, Kelly, Most Common Psychosocial Interventions for Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Upadhyaya, Deas, Pharmacological Interventions for Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Stein, Hesselbrock, Bukstein, Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Wilens, Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Cornelius, Clark, Depressive Disorders and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Goldstein, Bukstein, Bipolar Disorder and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Clark, Thatcher, Cornelius, Anxiety Disorders and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Hawke, Albert, Ford, Trauma and Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder in Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Goldston, Daniel, Mathias, Dougherty, Suicidal and Nonsuicidal SelfHarm Behaviors in Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Milin, Comorbidity of Schizophrenia and Substance Use Disorders in Adolescents and Young Adults. Bulik, Shroff, Eating Disorders and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Derevensky, Gambling Behaviors and Adolescent Substance Use Disorders. Libby, Riggs, Integrated Substance Use and Mental Health Services for Adolescents: Challenges and Opportunities. White, Popovits, Donohue, Ethical, Legal, and Policy Issues in the Treatment of Co-occurring Substance Use and Psychiatric Disorders Among Adolescents.
2008: 528pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3171-6: £56.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3172-3: £37.50 Published by Routledge
for further books on Addictions please see page 87
Published by Guilford Press
for further books on Forensic Psychiatry please see page 85 FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
ADHD
48
Forthcoming!
Treating ADHD and Comorbid Disorders Psychosocial and Psychopharmacological Interventions Steven R. Pliszka, University of Texas at San Antonio, USA “This book is a true gem. Synthesizing diagnostic, etiological, and treatment research on ADHD and comorbid disorders, Pliszka provides a concise yet sophisticated summary of up-to-date findings.” - James T. McCracken, Division of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, UCLA Semel Institute, USA
Children and adolescents with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) frequently experience co-occurring problems with aggression, mood swings, tics, anxiety, or depression. Organized around detailed case presentations, this highly informative book helps the clinician make sound decisions when assessing and treating the full range of ADHD comorbidities. Experienced child psychiatrist Steven Pliszka offers straightforward guidance on how to navigate diagnostic challenges, develop an individualized medication regimen, minimize health risks and side effects, collaborate successfully with parents, and tailor psychosocial treatments to each family’s needs. A reproducible structured interview facilitates sorting out symptoms and distinguishing between different comorbid disorders.
Autism how to craft a complete, scientifically grounded, and clinically useful portrait of a child’s strengths and difficulties in social behavior, language and communication, intellectual functioning, motor skills, and other key areas of impairment and comorbidity. Leading experts illustrate ways in which clinical and school practitioners can integrate data from a variety of sources to improve the accuracy of diagnosis and inform the development of individualized interventions. Contents: Goldstein, Ozonoff, Historical Perspective and Overview. Wing, Potter, The Epidemiology of Autism Spectrum Disorders: Is the Prevalence Rising? Naglieri, Chambers, Psychometric Issues and Current Scales for Assessing Autism Spectrum Disorders. Klin, Subtyping the Autism Spectrum Disorders: Theoretical, Research, and Clinical Considerations. Shea, Mesibov, Age-related Issues in the Assessment of Autism Spectrum Disorders. Gamliel, Yirmiya, Assessment of Social Behavior in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Paul, Wilson, Assessing Speech, Language, and Communication in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Klinger, O’Kelley, Mussey, Assessment of Intellectual Functioning in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Corbett, Carmean, Fein, Assessment of Neuropsychological Functioning in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Deprey, Ozonoff, Assessment of Comorbid Psychiatric Conditions in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Hogan, Marcus, From Assessment to Intervention. Harris, Bruey, Palmieri, Handleman, Assessment of Students with Autism Spectrum Disorders in the Schools. Goldstein, Ozonoff, Clark, Cook, Alternative Methods, Challenging Issues, and Best Practices in the Assessment of Autism Spectrum Disorders.
2008: 384pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-983-1: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
A Damaging Delusion
Contents: Overview of Comorbid Disorders in ADHD. Oppositional Defiant
and Conduct Disorders. Impulsive Aggression. Bipolar Disorder. Depressive Disorders. Anxiety Disorders. Tic and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorders. Intellectual Disability and Autism Spectrum Disorders. Appendix IA: Structured Clinical Interview for Parents. Appendix IB: Child and Adolescent Clinician Interview. Appendix II: Brief Update on Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology.
Michael Fitzpatrick, Barton House Health Centre, UK “In his book, Defeating Autism, Michael Fitzpatrick, a physician and himself the father of an autistic son, explores the therapies that have been proffered for autistic children with clarity and compassion. This is a must read for any parent trying to wade through the Arabian bazaar of autism therapies.” - Paul A. Offit,
July 2009: 242pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-266-8: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
Autism
Assessment of Autism Spectrum Disorders Edited by Sam Goldstein, University of Utah School of Medicine, Salt Lake City, USA, Jack A. Naglieri, George Mason University, Virginia, USA, and Sally Ozonoff, University of California–Davis Medical Center, Sacramento, USA
“This unique resource comprehensively reviews the science and practice of assessment of children with autism spectrum disorders. The list of editors and authors reads like a ‘who’s who’ of the autism field. This book will be an invaluable resource for graduate students and trainees in psychology, psychiatry, speech pathology, and education. It will also serve as a wonderful reference for experienced researchers and practitioners.” - Tony Charman, UCL Institute of Child Health, London, UK
Significant progress has been made in assessing children with autism spectrum disorders, but, until now, the field has lacked a single, comprehensive resource that assembles current best practices within a unified assessment framework. This authoritative book demonstrates
Defeating Autism
Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia, USA
In Defeating Autism, Michael Fitzpatrick, a family doctor and father of a son with autism, questions the scientific basis of environmental explanations of autism and exposes the incoherence of unorthodox ‘biomedical’ theories and therapies. This book reveals that these therapies are far from pioneering interventions and they remain unsubstantiated by scientific authorities. Campaigns promising to ‘defeat or cure autism now’ have attracted much support among parents struggling with their difficult children. But the crusade against autism risks dehumanising and stigmatising those who are identified as autistic and their families. This compelling book is essential reading for students and professionals working in the field of autism, as well as academics concerned with the public understanding of science and the treatment of scientific and medical controversies in the media. Contents: Introduction. Introduction: When Quackery Kills. Toxic Childhood. Age of Autism. Angry Parents. Unorthodox Biomedics. Genes or Toxins. MMR Ten Years On. Mercury and Beyond. From Diet to Detox. Treatment Issues. Conclusion: Being Appropriately Critical.
2008: 166pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44980-9: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44981-6: £19.99 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
behavioural and emotional disorders
New in Paperback!
Behavioral and Emotional Disorders in Adolescents Nature, Assessment, and Treatment Edited by David A. Wolfe, University of Toronto, and University of Western Ontario, Canada, and Eric J. Mash, University of Calgary, Canada “Superb... Within an integrative biopsychosocial framework, the outstanding contributors provide comprehensive coverage of adolescent disorders and interventions. Chapters effectively describe the state of knowledge about this unique and challenging period of development... Well written for students as well as for fledgling and seasoned professionals.” - Michael C. Roberts, University of Kansas, USA Systematic, authoritative, and timely, this is an outstanding reference and text for anyone working with or studying adolescents. More than 50 leading experts comprehensively review current knowledge on adolescent externalizing disorders, internalizing disorders, developmental disorders, personality and health-related disorders, gender identity and sexual disorders, and maltreatment and trauma. Chapters identify the core features of each disorder; explore its etiology, course, and outcome. selected Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: Externalizing Disorders. Part III: Internalizing Disorders. Part IV: Developmental Disorders. Part V: Personality and Health-related Disorders. Part VI: Gender Identity and Sexual Disorders. Part VII: Maltreatment and Trauma.
January 2009: 719pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-225-2: 2006: £54.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-115-9: £28.50 Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
Pathways to Change Brief Therapy with Difficult Adolescents Second Edition Matthew D. Selekman, Partners for Collaborative Solutions, Evanston, USA “Selekman charts new territories by describing in detail how to use an amazing variety of therapeutic techniques in a truly integrative, context-sensitive, researchbased practice. Psychotherapy students will be able to see how techniques and concepts of the major family therapy and psychotherapeutic approaches can be blended together in an elegant, effective, and creative way.” - Mark Beyebach, Pontificia University of Salamanca, Spain This innovative, practical guide presents an effective brief therapy model for working with challenging adolescents and their families. Matthew Selekman demonstrates powerful ways to help families gain new perspectives on longstanding problems and co-construct realistic, well-formulated goals, even when past treatment experiences have left them feeling demoralized. Solution-oriented techniques and strategies are augmented by ideas and findings from other therapeutic traditions, with a focus on engagement and relationship building. Contents: An Evolving Solution-oriented Therapy Approach with Difficult Adolescents. Guiding Assumptions with an Eye on Solutions. The Improvisational Therapist: Staying Alive and Creating Possibilities Outside
49
the Comfort Zone with Challenging Families. The First Family Interview: Co-creating a Context for Change. Guidelines for Fostering Cooperative Relationships with Difficult Parents. Effective Engagement Strategies with Difficult Adolescents. The No-problem Problem Mandated Family. Co-creating a Climate Ripe for Transformative Dialogues with Helping Allies from Larger Systems. The Second and Subsequent Sessions: Guidelines for Consolidating Gains and Matching Therapeutic Experiments with Family Members’ Learning Styles and Cooperative Response Patterns. The Solution-oriented Parenting Group: Empowering Parents to Be the Agents of Change. Solution-oriented Brief Family Therapy and Beyond. 2008: 292pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-959-3: 2005: £30.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-979-4: £16.50 Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Treating Problem Behaviors A Trauma-Informed Approach Ricky Greenwald, Founder, Executive Director and faculty chair, Child Trauma Institute, Greenfield, Massachusetts, USA The book is designed as a user-friendly textbook/manual for mental health professionals. It teaches a trauma-informed treatment approach as an organizing framework for a series of empirically supported interventions including motivational interviewing, cognitive-behavioral skills training, trauma resolution, and relapse prevention. Although it notes the importance of a systemic treatment approach, the focus is on the individual component of treatment. Contents: Introduction. Trauma-informed Treatment for Problem Behaviors. Initial Interview. History. Motivation. Treatment Contract. Avoid High Risk. Self Control Skills. More Skills and Strategies. Reduce Stress. Trauma Resolution. Anticipate Future Challenges. Challenging Cases. Appendices.
July 2009: 376pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99801-7: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Residential Treatment of Adolescents Integrative Principles and Practices
Don Pazaratz, President and Founder, Warren Youth Services In Residential Treatment of Adolescents, Pazaratz discusses how practitioners can remain emotionally available for the needs of their residents without feeling overwhelmed. Readers will be apprised of ways to deal judiciously with residents who try to circumvent, con, play workers off each other, and even attempt to seduce or manipulate the worker. Each chapter instructs readers to observe their clients and comprehend how they relate to the total environment, in order to determine what the resident is feeling and how he or she makes use of personal resources. Ultimately, Pazaratz demonstrates that effective treatment staff do not create dependent youth, make treatment oppressive, or enact a role based upon giving consequences. Instead, the reader will learn to integrate diverse intervention strategies into the resident’s normal cycle of daily life and how to interact within a team structure.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
mood disorders
50
Contents: Principles and Practices of Residential Treatment and of the Four Phase System. Evaluation. Psychosocial Assessment by Child and Youth Care Workers. Group Living. Family Work in Residential Treatment. Modifying Behaviour Through the Use of a Level/Reinforcement System. The Role of Direct Care Staff in Residential Treatment. Positive Discipline. Therapeutic Programming. The Role of Education in Residential Treatment. Residential Treatment of a Disturbed Adolescent: A Case Study.
April 2009: 242pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99708-9: £24.97 Published by Routledge
Handbook of Depression in Adolescents
Edited by Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University, Connecticut, USA, and Lori M. Hilt, University of Wisconsin, USA This Handbook offers authoritative reviews of research on the nature, causes, and treatments for depression in adolescents. It covers the breadth of this research, focusing on etiology, predictors, and the interplay of biological, psychological, and social factors in adolescent depression. Highlighting both recent studies on treatment of adolescent depression and the prevention programs directed at high-risk youth, the book also covers assessment, diagnosis, and epidemiology, and related and comorbid conditions. Handbook of Depression in Adolescents is an invaluable and comprehensive resource for students and practitioners alike. selected Contents: Assessment, Diagnosis, and Epidemiology. Related Conditions. Biological Factors. Psychosocial Factors. Treatment of Adolescent Depression. Prevention of Adolescent Depression.
physical abuse and trauma provides suggestions for preventing child maltreatment. This is an invaluable resource to workers who are mandated reporters of child maltreatment and/or anyone interested in the problem. May 2009: 312pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6244-7: £32.50 Published by Psychology Press
Handbook of Social Work in Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse
Edited by Carolyn Hilarski, SUNY at Buffalo, USA, John S. Wodarski, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, USA, and Marvin D. Feit, Norfolk State University, Virginia, USA The Handbook of Social Work in Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse is a comprehensive guide that provides the latest information on assessment, management, prevention, and policy. Through insightful and accessible discussions, this collection of essays encompasses the full spectrum of child and adolescent sexual abuse to shed needed light on an affecting issue. selected Contents: Hilarski, Historical Overview. Hilarski, Child and
Adolescent Sexual Abuse. Harrington, Hisle-Gorman, Dia, Family Dysfunction: Theoretical Explanations and Ethnic Considerations. Gannon, Gilchrist, Wade, Intrafamilial Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse. Hilarski, The Nonfamily Sex Offender. Devilly, Varker, Cook, Yap, Current Empirical Assessment Methods. Nurcombe, Treatment for the Sexually Abused Child. Nelson-Gardell, Treatment for Sexually Abused Adolescents. Alaggia, Knott, Treatment for the Nonoffending Caregiver. Renk, Baksh, Donnelly, Roddenberry, Prevention Endeavors. Goldsmith, Tang, Freyd, Policy and Practice Implications.
January 2009: 712pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6235-5: £99.50
2008: 302pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3201-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3202-7: £29.95
Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
for further books on Mood Disorders please see page 93 Physical Abuse and trauma
Child Abuse and Neglect Monica L. McCoy, Converse College, Spartenburg, South Carolina, USA, and Stefanie M. Keen, University of South Carolina Upstate, Spartanburg, USA
“The author writes as if she was having a conversation with the reader... the legal cases bring to life some of the controversial issues... [it] paints a clear picture of the child protection system and what actually transpires when an incident is reported and the roles and functions of the caseworkers.” - Alice Yick Flanagan, Capella University, Minneapolis, USA
This book examines child abuse and neglect – the latest research and laws, what it entails, and how to recognize and report it. “Focus on Research Boxes”, “Case Examples”, and “Legal Examples” and “Focus on Law” sections that explain judicial rulings are sprinkled throughout. Discussion questions, key terms, and a glossary of terms are included. The book concludes with a clinical psychologist’s review of what happens to a child after an abuse report is filed and
for further books on Social Work please see page 21
Forthcoming!
Memory Matters Contexts for Understanding Sexual Abuse Recollections Edited by Janice Haaken, Portland State University, Oregon, USA, and Paula Reavey, London South Bank University, UK “Memory Matters provides an exhaustive overview and thorough grounding for anyone wishing to find out about research on memory and abuse, or to undertake such research themselves. I have rarely seen such an impressive, comprehensive anthology.” - Lynne Segal, Professor of Gender and Psychology, Birkbeck College, UK
This book is grounded in the debates of the 1980s and 90s that surrounded recollections of childhood sexual abuse, particularly those that emerged in the context of psychotherapy. When growing numbers of therapists claimed that they were recovering deeply repressed memories of early sexual violations in their female clients, a wave of alarmed critics countered that therapists were implanting the very memories they were discovering. In looking back at this volatile and heated controversy, Memory Matters takes up disturbing questions that linger concerning memory, sexuality, and childhood.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
physical abuse and trauma Contents: Haaken, Reavey, Why Memory Continues to Matter: Binding Truth to
Context. Part I: Looking Back on the Recovered Memory Debate: Claims and Counter-claims. Ashmore, Brown, On Changing One’s Mind Twice: The Strange Credibility of Retracting Recovered Memories. Ost, Nunkoosing, Reconstructing Bartlett and Revisiting Retractions of Contested Claims of Abuse. Motzkau, Speaking Up Against Justice: Credibility, Suggestibility and Children’s Memory on Trial. Kitzinger, Transformations of Public and Private Knowledge: Audience Reception, Feminism and the Experience of Childhood Sexual Abuse. Woodiwiss, ‘Alternative Memories’ and the Construction of a Sexual Abuse Narrative. Part II: Widening the Lens: Cultural Contexts for Remembering Child Sexual Abuse. Reavey, The Spaces of Memory: Rethinking Agency Through Materiality. Robson, ‘Truth,’ Memory and Narrative in Memoirs of Child Sexual Abuse. Fyson, Cromby, Memory, Sexual Abuse and the Politics of Learning Disability. Campbell, Memory, Truth and the Search for an Authentic Past. Burman, Therapy as Memorywork: Dilemmas of Discovery, Recovery and Construction. Haaken, Transformative Remembering: Feminism, Psychoanalysis and Recollections of Abuse. July 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44491-0: £39.95 Published by Routledge
self-harm
Treating Traumatized Children Risk, Resilience and Recovery Edited by Danny Brom, and Ruth Pat-Horenczyk, both at the Israel Center for the Treatment of Psychotrauma, Israel, and Julian D. Ford, University of Connecticut, USA
”An excellent and diverse set of reviews that puts resiliency on the child trauma map, and provides promising directions for research, policy, and practice.”
- Ricky Greenwald, Founder/Executive Director, Child Trauma Institute, USA
Young People and Sexual Exploitation
While recent years have seen a vast increase in the literature on adult trauma, the interest in childhood trauma has only recently started to gain momentum, encouraging new research and the need for evidence-based interventions. Here the editors have brought together an international list of contributors to look at both innovative and established treatment of trauma in a range of contexts, and provide up-to-date coverage of what is on offer in terms of prevention, assessment, treatment and research.
Hard to Reach and Hard to Hear
2008: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42636-7: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47150-3: £24.99
Forthcoming!
Jennifer Pearce, University of Bedfordshire, UK This book draws on young people’s voices and experiences to explore the difficulties that arise for researchers and for practitioners in working with sexually exploited young people. Presenting innovative ways of developing theory, policy, research and practice, she introduces child-centred theories of risk, agency, resilience and vulnerability. August 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40715-1: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40716-8: £21.99 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
for further books on Trauma please see page 101 Self-Harm
Edited by Mary K. Nixon, University of Victoria Island Medical Program, Canada, and Nancy L. Heath, McGill University, Montreal, Canada
Also of Interest Forthcoming!
Preventing Child Maltreatment Community Approaches Edited by Kenneth A. Dodge, and Doriane Lambelet Coleman “In this volume, an interdisciplinary group of outstanding scholars demonstrates that our lack of progress in curbing child abuse is due to not properly conceptualizing this saddest of all social problems. This brilliant and convincing work makes clear that we must move from the simplistic view that the primary cause of abuse is misbehaving or pathological parents to an ecological model in which families receive appropriate attention from community support networks.” - Edward Zigler, Yale University,
Self-Injury in Youth The Essential Guide to Assessment and Intervention
for further books on Abuse please see page 96
51
This edited volume features evidence-based reviews and practical approaches for the professional in the hospital, clinic, community and school, with case examples throughout. Divided into five major sections, the book offers background historical and cultural information, discussion of self-injury etiology, assessment and intervention/prevention issues, and relevant resources for those working with youths who self-injure. selected Contents: Part I: Background Information. Part II: Etiology of SelfInjury. Part III: Effective Practice for Self-Injury in Youth.
2008: 368pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95725-0: £28.00 Published by Routledge
for further books on Self-Harm please see page 100
Connecticut, USA August 2009: 204pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-973-2: £30.50
Duke Series in Child Development and Public Policy Published by Guilford Press
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
child and adolescent development
52
Forthcoming!
New in Paperback!
A Clinician’s Guide to Normal Cognitive Development in Childhood
Handbook of Socialization
Edited by Elisabeth Sandberg, Suffolk University, Boston, USA, and Becky Spritz, Roger Williams University, Rhode Island, USA A Clinician’s Guide to Normal Cognitive Development in Childhood provides students and professionals with an accessible set of descriptions of normal childhood cognition, accompanied by suggestions for how to think about normal development in a clinical context. Each sub-topic within cognitive development is described using succinct presentations of the empirical data about normal development in that area, followed by a discussion of the clinical implications. Chapters conclude with a list of suggested readings pertaining to both typical and atypical development for readers who wish to explore the topic in greater depth. This is a much-needed resource so that clinicians may learn the unique peculiarities of cognitive processes in order to avoid pathologizing what might be normal developmental phenomena, and will help them identify when development is not proceeding normally.
Theory and Research
Contents: Spritz, Sandberg, The Case for Children’s Cognitive Development: A Clinical-developmental Perspective. Part I: Communicating with Children. Haskill, Corts, Acquiring Language. Skelley, Crnic, Communicating about Internal States. Golden, General Guidelines for Talking with Children. Part II: Understanding Other’s Perspective. Fireman, Kose, Perspective Talking. Spritz, Fergusson, Bankoff, False Beliefs and the Development of Deception. Part III: Children’s Memory. Reeder, Turner, Martin, Memory Development in Childhood. Sandberg, Spritz, Remembering. Gregory, Carol, Compo, Talking with Children about Past Events: Children’s Memory and Suggestibility. Part IV: Developing Reason and Executive Control. Sandberg, McCullough, The Development of Reasoning Skills. White-Ajmani, O’Connell, Moral Reasoning. Holler, Greene, Developmental Changes in Children’s Executive Functioning. Viola, Knowing What We Know: The Developing Child and the Developing Clinician.
December 2009: 210pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99183-4: £21.99
Edited by Joan E. Grusec, University of Toronto, Canada, and Paul D. Hastings, Concordia University, Montreal, Canada “Remarkable... A comprehensive, contemporary, scholarly overview of the dynamic and complex ways in which environmental forces interact with biological factors to shape children’s lives. Professionals and graduate students who seek a more profound understanding of the roles of parents, family, peers, institutions, and cultures will find it indispensable.” - Carolyn Zahn-Waxler, University of Wisconsin-Madison, USA
Bringing together leading authorities, this Handbook reviews the breadth of current knowledge on socialization processes from earliest childhood through adolescence and beyond. Contributors present cutting-edge theories and findings pertaining to family, peer, school, community, media, and other influences on individual development. The important, growing areas of genetics and biology, cultural psychology, and affective science are given particular attention. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Historical and Methodological Perspectives on Socialization. Part II: Socialization Within Biological Frameworks. Part III: Socialization Across the Lifespan. Part IV: Socialization Within the Family. Part V: Socialization Outside the Family. Part VI: Class and Cultural Perspectives on Socialization. Part VII: Targets of Socialization.
2008: 720pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-332-7: 2006: £57.50 Pb: 978-1-59385-977-0: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
The Development of the Person
Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
The Development of Emotional Intelligence Nadja Reissland, University of Aberdeen, UK How do children learn about the expression and meaning of emotions – both happy and sad? This book will answer questions on the foundation of emotional intelligence and examine how children become emotionally literate as they are socialised into their family environment from birth to 2 years of age. In order to examine the development of emotional intelligence the authors present a case study of the first use and development of “emotion words” from both the baby’s and the parent’s point of view. The data, based on daily tape-recorded “conversations” between a baby daughter and her father, demonstrates how over a two-year period a child learns to express and understand emotions in social interaction. This capacity to reason with emotion will be examined through four areas: perceiving emotion, integrating emotion, understanding emotion and managing emotion.
New in Paperback!
The Minnesota Study of Risk and Adaptation from Birth to Adulthood L. Alan Sroufe, Byron Egeland, Elizabeth A. Carlson, and W. Andrew Collins, all at the University of Minneapolis, USA “Four stars for this remarkable book!” - Eleanor E. Maccoby, Stanford University, California, USA
The definitive work on a groundbreaking study, this essential volume provides a coherent picture of the complexity of development from birth to adulthood. Explicated are both the methodology of the Minnesota study and its far-reaching contributions to understanding how we become who we are. The book marshals a vast body of data on the ways in which individuals’ strengths and vulnerabilities are shaped by myriad influences, including early experiences and family and peer relationships throughout childhood and adolescence, variations in child characteristics and abilities, and socioeconomic conditions. Implications for clinical intervention and prevention are also addressed.
January 2010: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-35951-1: £44.95 Pb: 978-0-415-35952-8: £17.95
May 2009: 384pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-158-3: 2005: £34.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-249-1: £21.00
Series: Concepts in Developmental Psychology
Published by Guilford Press
Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Studies in Adolescent Development Series
The Adolescence and Society Series
www.psypress.com/siad
www.psypress.com/adolescence-and-society
Forthcoming!
Forthcoming!
Siblings in Adolescence Angela Ittel, Technical University of Berlin, Germany, Tina Kretschmer, and Alison Pike, both at the University of Sussex, UK While there is a body of literature on siblings in childhood, research on adolescent siblings is scarce. Although several sub-disciplines of psychology and social science, such as behavioral genetics and family psychology, have provided some empirical research on the role of adolescent siblings, this research is often narrow both in the thematic and methodological approach. Consequently, there currently exists no model that encompasses these different approaches into a coherent picture on the significance of adolescent siblings. Siblings in Adolescence aims to address this gap. It presents a comprehensive overview of these existing studies of adolescent research and generates a developmental framework of the study on siblings by establishing links between these current findings. January 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-703-1: £39.95
Series: Studies in Adolescent Development Published by Psychology Press
Forthcoming!
Divergent Perspectives on Emerging Adulthood Stage or Process? Jeffrey Arnett, Clark University, Massachusetts, USA, Marion Kloep, and Leo B. Hendry, both at the University of Glamorgan, UK, and Jennifer Tanner, Clark University, Massachusetts, USA Divergent Perspectives on Emerging Adulthood critically examines young peoples’ transitions from adolescence to early adulthood and describes the varying experiences of growing towards adulthood across both the USA and Europe. The book addresses different theoretical approaches to understanding this phase of the lifespan and concludes by integrating perspectives to offer an interactive, inter-disciplinary framework from which future research and policy making can develop. Contents: Introduction: Changing Societies, Changing Transitions. Transitions from Adolescence to Adulthood: A Stage Perspective. Transitions from Adolescence to Adulthood: A Systematic View. Lifestyles in Emerging Adulthood: Why We Need a New Stage. Lifestyles in Emerging Adulthood: Who Needs Stages Anyway? Rejoinders to Chapter 2 and 4. Rejoinders to Chapters 3 and 5. Conclusions: Closing the Gap? January 2010: 208pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-739-0: £39.95
Series: Studies in Adolescent Development Published by Psychology Press
Also in the Series
53
Moving Out, Moving On Young People’s Pathways In and Through Homelessness Shelley Mallett, Doreen Rosenthal, Deb Keys, all at the University of Melbourne, Australia, and Roger Averill, Freelance writer, researcher and editor Based on one of the largest ever longitudinal studies of homeless young people, this book examines the personal, familial and structural factors that impact on homeless young people’s long-term outcomes. Whilst telling the personal stories of young people’s experiences, the book refers to the wider research and policy literature on youth homelessness, engaging with key debates about the causes and meanings of homelessness in western societies. The book addresses important issues such as employment and education, engagement with services, social support, connection to family and friends, as well as personal factors including physical and mental health, sexual practices and drug use. October 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47029-2: £44.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47030-8: £19.95
Series: Adolescence and Society Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Frydenberg: Adolescent Coping: Advances in Theory, Research and Practice Hb: 978-0-415-40571-3: 2008: 360pp. £49.95 Pb: 978-0-415-40572-0: 2008: 360pp. £21.50
Cotterell: Social Networks in Youth and Adolescence Hb: 978-0-415-35949-8: 2007: 328pp. £49.95 Pb: 978-0-415-35950-4: 2007: 328pp. £21.50
Moore/Rosenthal: Sexuality in Adolescence: Current Trends, Second Edition Hb: 978-0-415-34462-3: 2006: 304pp. £44.95 Pb: 978-0-415-34496-8: 2006: 304pp. £22.50
Kroger: Identity in Adolescence: The Balance Between Self and Other, Third Edition Hb: 978-0-415-28106-5: 2004: 288pp. £39.95 Pb: 978-0-415-28107-2: 2004: 288pp. £16.95
Coleman/Hendry: The Nature of Adolescence, Third Edition Pb: 978-0-415-19898-1: 1999: 232pp. £17.50
Scabini et al.: The Transition to Adulthood and Family Relations: An Intergenerational Perspective
Heaven: Adolescent Health: The Role of Individual Differences
Hb: 978-1-84169-380-4: 2006: 168pp. £39.95
Hb: 978-0-415-11578-0: 1996: 224pp. £47.50
Spruijt-Metz: Adolescence, Affect and Health Hb: 978-0-86377-518-5: 1999: 221pp. £35.00
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
54
child and adolescent development
Forthcoming!
Mental Health and Emerging Adulthood among Homeless Young People Les B. Whitbeck, University of NebraskaLincoln, USA “The design of the study... is simply unique... I am deeply impressed with the breadth of coverage... The book can be used at both the (upper) undergraduate and graduate level... the book reports the results of a unique longitudinal study on homeless and runaway adolescents, a topic of evident societal concern.” - Luc Goossens, Catholic University of Leuven, Belgium Findings from a three-year study of homeless and runaway adolescents that examined the developmental consequences of chronic runaway episodes and homelessness on emerging adulthood are examined in this compelling new book. A follow up to author Whitbeck’s highly respected No Where to Grow: Homeless and Runaway Adolescents and Their Families, this book examines the only longitudinal study of this high risk, hard to access population. The progress of homeless and runaway adolescents is chronicled across time in an attempt to evaluate the occurrence and persistence of mental and substance abuse disorders from mid adolescence into early adulthood. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Emerging Adulthood among Runaway and Homeless Youth. Part II: Mental Health and Emerging Adulthood among Homeless and Runaway Adolescents. Part III: Unintentional and Intentional Injuries from Adolescent to Early Adulthood. Part IV: Adult Roles: Social Networks, Intimate Relationships, Economic Adjustment, and Emerging Adulthood. Part V: Lost Opportunities – New Opportunities.
June 2009: 313pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-751-2: £35.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-752-9: £18.99 Published by Psychology Press
School-based practice in Action Series
Forthcoming!
Resilient Playgrounds Beth Doll, University of Nebraska-Lincoln, School Psychology Program, USA, and Katherine Brehm, school psychologist, Ysleta School District in El Paso, Texas, USA In Resilient Playgrounds, Doll and Brehm apply a data-based evaluation and problem-solving method to the playground environment, allowing school-based mental health professionals to work with teachers and administrators to provide and promote safer, more engaging, and more nurturing recess environments. The authors argue that a child’s experience during the recess period, while only a relatively short time out of the day, can have a real and drastic impact on learning, behavior, and development in other areas. The aim of the book is to provide the tools to evaluate recess experiences, and strategies to implement more nurturing environments, without negating the positive value of the unstructured playtime. Written for school-based mental health professionals of all backgrounds and levels of training, the book provides a vehicle for broader team building
school-based practice in action series within the schools, working with teachers, administrators, parents, and school grounds staff to provide the best possible recess experience. Contents: Introduction to Resilient Playgrounds. The Interface Between Children’s Peer Relationships and Playground Environments. Guidelines for Applying the Data-based Problem Solving Model to School Playgrounds. Strategies for Playground Intervention. Evaluating the Impact on the school. Illustrative Case Examples. Concluding Comments. Practitioner Resources.
January 2010: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96087-8: £59.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96088-5: £21.95
Series: School-Based Practice in Action Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Comprehensive Planning for Safe Learning Environments A School Professional’s Guide to Integrating Physical and Psychological Safety – Prevention through Recovery Melissa A. Reeves, Winthrop University, South Carolina, USA, Linda M. Kanan, Intervention Coordinator in the Cherry Creek School District, USA, and Amy E. Plog, Director of Research for Creating Caring Communities, USA The school violence events that occurred in the 2006-2007 school year and the March 2009 shooting tragedy in Germany have renewed concerns about schools all across the country. The need, therefore, for a book on planning and implementing school safety measures would seem to be vital at this point in time. Reeves, Kanan, and Plog have created just such a guide, providing important information that can help prevent incidents of school violence for all educators involved in crisis prevention, preparedness, response, and recovery. This book is divided into three sections: The first discusses systemic factors for establishing a safe school climate. Topics covered include obtaining support from key school and community stakeholders, important legal and governmental guidelines regarding school safety programs, and relevant financial and risk management considerations. The next section addresses physical safety in schools, focusing on establishing a safe learning environment for students through specific preparedness planning efforts; also included is a discussion on the integration of a multi-hazards approach with the more traditional school safety and crisis response approaches. The third and final section covers psychological safety, providing information on prevention and early-intervention strategies, as well as managing risk behaviors of students through established threat and suicide assessment procedures. Contents: Part I: Establishing a Safe School Climate. Introduction and Overview to Establishing a Safe School. Obtaining Support from Key Stakeholders. Part II: Physical Safety: Multi-hazards Prevention and Preparedness. Integrating a Multi-hazards Approach to Establish a Safe Learning Environment. Establishing an Effective School Crisis Plan. Monitoring Crisis Planning and Preparation. Part III: Psychological Safety: Multi-level Prevention and Intervention. Universal Prevention and Preparedness. Early and Targeted Interventions. Managing Risky Behaviors and Intensive Interventions. Crisis Management and Recovery Efforts.
January 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99834-5: £53.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99835-2: £19.00
Series: School-Based Practice in Action Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
school-based mental health and learning disabilities
school-based practice in action series
Assessment and Intervention for Executive Function Difficulties
George McCloskey, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA, Lisa A. Perkins, in private practice, Family Study Center, Connecticut, USA, and Bob Van Diviner, Milton Hershey School, Philadelphia, USA In Assessment and Intervention for Executive Function Difficulties, McCloskey, Perkins, and Diviner provide a unique blend of theory, research, and practice that offers clinicians an overarching framework for the concept of executive functions (EFs) in educational settings. The conceptual model of executive functions is detailed, including their role in behavior, learning, and production across all settings. The heart of the book focuses on the practical issues involved in the use of assessment tools, tests, report writing, and the implementation and follow-up of targeted interventions using the EF model.
February 2009: 392pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95783-0: £56.95 Pb: 978-0-415-95784-7: £21.95
Series: School-Based Practice in Action Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Burns/Gibbons: Implementing Response-toIntervention in Elementary and Secondary Schools: Procedures to Assure Scientific-Based Principles Hb: 978-0-415-96391-6: 2008: 264pp. £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96392-3: 2008: 264pp. £22.50
School-Based Mental Health A Practitioner’s Guide to Comparative Practices Ray W. Christner, and Rosemary B. Mennuti, both at the Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA
This volume provides school-based practitioners with a comprehensive and comparative guide to the strategic interventions, therapeutic modalities, and treatment approaches that are most commonly and effectively used in educational settings. Three main sections of the text present a foundation of universal interventions, targeted interventions, and alternative interventions appropriate for use in schools. Unifying the chapters are two central case examples, allowing the reader to see and evaluate the strengths and potential challenges of each technique in a familiar situation. This emphasis on case examples and the comparative structure of the volume will provide a level of hands-on and practical learning that is helpful for both students and mental health practitioners. Contents: An Overview of School-based Practice. Part I: Foundation of Universal Interventions. Problem-solving Approaches in Prevention. Building Resiliency in Schools. School-wide Behavioral Support. Minimizing Barriers to Learning. Part II: Selected and Targeted Interventions. Cognitive-
55
Behavioral Approaches. Individual Behavior Supports. Reality Therapy. Client-centered Therapy. Family System Interventions. Adlerian/Constructivist Approaches. Part III: Alternative Interventions. Play Therapy. Art Therapy. Movement Therapy. Mindfulness Interventions. Part IV: Summary. Integrating Perspectives into Practice. February 2009: 456pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95558-4: £28.00 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Professional School Counseling Best Practices for Working in the Schools Third Edition Rosemary A. Thompson, Regent University, Virginia, USA Today’s children and adolescents are constantly facing new and unique challenges, and school counselors must respond to this by expanding their role and function within the school. Rosemary Thompson has created this practical and highly useful guidebook to address these issues, as well as the necessary steps school counselors need to take in order to adapt and effectively deal with them. This revised and expanded edition of Thompson’s invaluable text explores these vital and necessary changes while emphasizing the inherent benefits of and need for professional counseling in our schools, making it an essential resource for every school counselor. Topics addressed include working with the demographic changes occurring in contemporary society, working with minority and disenfranchised students, the need for social justice in closing achievement gaps, crisis prevention and recovery, and academic and career planning. May 2010: 480pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99849-9: £24.95 Published by Routledge
New in Paperback!
Preschool Assessment Principles and Practice Marla R. Brassard, and Ann E. Boehm, both at Columbia University, New York, USA “Drs. Brassard and Boehm have done a masterful job compiling information on child, parent and family, and environmental assessment scales and procedures. This book will doubtless become the most-used resource on preschool assessment by both students and practitioners.” - Carl J. Dunst, Research Scientist, Orelena Hawks Puckett Institute, Asheville, North Carolina, USA
Comprehensive and user friendly, this ideal professional reference and graduate text provides a developmentally informed framework for assessing 3- to 6-year-olds in accordance with current best practices and IDEA guidelines. The authors are leading clinician-researchers who take the reader step-by-step through selecting appropriate measures, integrating data from a variety of sources, and using the results to plan and evaluate effective interventions and learning experiences. 2008: 658pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-333-4: 2007: £47.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-030-5: £30.00 Published by Guilford Press
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
school-based mental health and learning disabilities
56
New in Paperback!
Authentic Assessment for Early Childhood Intervention
The Revolutionary “Executive Skills” Approach to Helping Kids Reach Their Potential Peg Dawson, and Richard Guare, both at the Center for Learning and Attention Disorders, New Hampshire, USA
Best Practices Stephen J. Bagnato, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, USA “An incredibly helpful resource for professionals struggling to understand the educational, developmental, medical, and mental health needs of young children and their families... Replete with helpful examples, resource information, and practice guidelines.” - Judith J. Carta, Juniper Gardens Children’s Project, University of Kansas, USA
Meeting a crucial need, this book provides clear recommendations for authentic developmental assessment of children from infancy to age 6, including those with developmental delays and disabilities. It describes principles and strategies for collecting information about children’s everyday activities in the home, preschool, and community, which provides a valid basis for intervention planning and progress monitoring. Throughout, the book emphasizes the importance of enlisting parents as partners with practitioners and teachers in observation and team-based decision making. April 2009: 315pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-474-4: 2007: £30.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-250-7: £16.99
Series: Guilford School Practitioner Published by Guilford Press
New in Paperback!
Ordinary Families, Special Children A Systems Approach to Childhood Disability Third Edition Milton Seligman, University of Pittsburgh School of Education, USA, and Rosalyn Benjamin Darling, Indiana University of Pennsylvania, USA “Seligman and Darling effectively blend clinical insight, current research, and cultural sensitivity in this substantive and exciting third edition... this extraordinary book is sufficiently accessible for students and will also be appreciated by professionals in the field.” - Jan Blacher, University of California, Riverside, USA
This popular clinical reference and text provides a multisystems perspective on childhood disability and its effects on family life. The volume examines how child, family, ecological, and sociocultural variables intertwine to shape the ways families respond to disability, and how professionals can promote coping, adaptation, and empowerment. Accessible and engaging, the book integrates theory and research with vignettes and firsthand reflections from family members. Selected Contents: Part I: Conceptual Framework. Part II: The Family Life
Cycle. Part III: The Family System. Part IV: Approaches to Intervention. April 2009: 434pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-362-4: 2007: £27.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-317-7: £16.99 Published by Guilford Press
Smart but Scattered
“Drs. Dawson and Guare translate cuttingedge research into meaningful, practical, wellorganized, and easy-to-implement strategies that parents can use to enhance a child’s natural executive abilities. This brilliant book is by far the best on the topic that I have read to date.” - Russell A. Barkley, author of Taking Charge of ADHD
Scientists who study child development have recently found that kids who are “smart but scattered” lack or lag behind in crucial executive skills – the core, brain-based habits of mind required to “execute” tasks like getting organized, staying focused, and controlling emotions. Drawing on this revolutionary discovery, school psychologist Peg Dawson and neuropsychologist Richard Guare have developed an innovative program that parents and teachers can use to strengthen kids’ abilities to plan ahead, be efficient, follow through, and get things done. Smart but Scattered provides ways to assess children’s strengths and weaknesses and offers guidance on day-to-day issues like following instructions in the classroom, doing homework, completing chores, and reducing performance anxiety. Contents: Introduction. Part I: What Makes Your Child Smart But
Scattered. How Did Such a Smart Kid End Up So Scattered? Identifying Your Child’s Strengths and Weaknesses. How Your Own Executive Strengths and Weaknesses Matter. Matching the Child to the Task. Part II: Laying a Foundation That Can Help. Ten Principles for Improving Your Child’s Executive Skills. Modifying the Environment: A is for Antecedent. Teaching Executive Skills Directly: B is for Behavior. Motivating Your Child to Learn and Use Executive Skills: C is for Consequence. Part III: Putting it all Together. Advance Organizer. Ready-made Plans for Teaching Your Child to Complete Daily Routines. Building Response Inhibition. Enhancing Working Memory. Improving Emotional Control. Strengthening Sustained Attention. Teaching Task Initiation. Promoting Planning and Prioritizing. Fostering Organization. Instilling Time Management. Encouraging Flexibility. Increasing Goal-directed Persistence. Cultivating Metacognition. When What You Do is Not Enough. Working with the School. What’s Ahead? 2008: 314pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-987-9: £24.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-445-4: £10.95 Published by Guilford Press
Adolescents and Adults with Learning Disabilities and ADHD Assessment and Accommodation Noël Gregg, University of Georgia, Athens, USA
“An exceptionally well-written, detailed, authoritative, and science-based review of appropriate educational accommodations for teens and adults with ADHD and/or LD... It is the best contemporary treatment of this topic available... Highly readable, instructive, and punctuated with informative case examples.” - Russell A. Barkley, Medical University of South Carolina and State University of New York Upstate Medical University at Syracuse, USA
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
school-based mental health and learning disabilities Most of the literature on learning disabilities and attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) focuses on the needs of elementaryage children, but older students with these conditions also require significant support. Comprehensive and authoritative, this book helps educators and clinicians navigate the maze of laws, policies, and scientific research relating to diagnostic and intervention decision making for adolescents and adults. Leading expert Noël Gregg provides clear guidance on how to conduct and document evidencebased assessments and select appropriate instructional and testing accommodations. Featuring helpful case vignettes, decision-making flowcharts, and coverage of the latest assistive technologies, the book gives special attention to supporting students during the crucial transition from high school to higher education or vocational settings. Contents: Why Are Accommodations Important? Documentation for Accommodation Access. Broad and Specific Cognitive Processing. Social, Emotional, and Behavioral Assessment and Accommodation. Reading Assessment and Accommodation. Writing Assessment and Accommodation. Different Symbol Systems: Mathematics, Science, and Second Languages. Accommodations on Large-scale Assessments.
March 2009: 316pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-034-3: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
New Edition!
Diagnosing Learning Disorders A Neuropsychological Framework Second Edition Bruce F. Pennington, University of Denver, USA “Superb. A ‘must’ for educators, psychologists, and others who care about learning disabilities and want to learn about the very latest scientific knowledge and its implications for clinical practice. Pennington is a trusted expert in learning disabilities, one of only a small cadre of distinguished scholar-clinicians who not only know and create the science, but also work closely with children and adults who are affected.” - Sally E. Shaywitz, Yale University School of Medicine, Connecticut, USA
From a trusted expert in the field, this authoritative work provides an accessible overview of what learning disorders are, how they develop, and how to diagnose and treat them effectively. The second edition has now been substantially revised and expanded to reflect significant clinical and research advances. The author presents the most current neuroscientific knowledge on a range of conditions, including dyslexia, autism spectrum disorders, attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, and others. Practitioners gain vital insights and tools for making sense of children’s impairments and strengths, collecting and interpreting diagnostic data from a variety of sources, and linking diagnosis to evidence-based interventions. Contents: Part I: Basic Concepts. How Learning Disorders Develop. Neuropsychological Constructs. Issues in Syndrome Validation. Less Wellvalidated Learning Disorders. Differential Diagnosis. Part II: Reviews of Disorders. Dyslexia, with Robin L. Peterson and Lauren M. McGrath. Speech and Language Disorders, with Robin L. Peterson and Lauren M. McGrath. Autism Spectrum Disorder, with Lauren M. McGrath and Robin L. Peterson. Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder, with Lauren M. McGrath and Robin L. Peterson. Intellectual Disability, with Lauren M. McGrath and Robin L. Peterson. Developmental Coordination Disorder. Mathematics Disorder. Nonverbal Learning Disability. Part III: Implications for Practice and Policy. Evidencebased Practice: Barriers and Benefits. Controversial Therapies. Appendices.
2008: 354pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-714-1: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
57
Effective School Interventions Evidence-Based Strategies for Improving Student Outcomes Second Edition Natalie Rathvon, The George Washington University, Washington D.C., USA
“This second edition is an essential text for professionals working with school-age children or consultants assisting classroom teachers. The empirical citations provided for each intervention will assist school personnel in the identification of RTI-compatible interventions. In addition, I highly recommend this text as a learning tool for graduate students in school psychology, special education, teacher education, and educational administration programs.” - Merilee McCurdy, University of Nebraska, Lincoln, USA
Now in a substantially revised and expanded second edition, this highly practical resource and text presents 70 interventions that have been demonstrated to improve the classroom learning environment, academic achievement, and student behavior and social competence. Each intervention is presented in a brief, standardized format with step-by-step procedures that can easily be implemented by Pre-K-12 teachers and other school-based professionals. The volume includes best-practice guidelines for designing, implementing, and evaluating evidence-based school interventions, as well as strategies for combining multiple interventions to create a comprehensive program at the individual, class, or schoolwide level. Reflecting significant developments in research and practice, the second edition is designed for full compatibility with a response-to-intervention framework, and 42 of the interventions are entirely new. Contents: Part I: The Intervention Assistance Approach to Improving Student Outcomes. Introduction. The Intervention-oriented Approach to Improving Student Outcomes. Part II: Evidence-based School Interventions. Proactive Interventions: Strategies That Create a Productive, Disruption-free Classroom Environment. Interventions to Improve Academic Performance. Interventions to Improve Behavior and Enhance Social Competence. Interventions to Improve Outcomes for Preschool Children.
2008: 460pp. Hb: 978-1-57230-967-8: £32.00 Published by Guilford Press
Schoolwide Prevention Models Lessons Learned in Elementary Schools Edited by Charles R. Greenwood, University of Kansas, USA, Thomas R. Kratochwill, University of Wisconsin-Madison, USA, and Melissa Clements, MGT of America, Tallahassee, USA
“This book presents case studies from real schools, featuring students with real reading and social-behavioral difficulties. It would make an excellent graduate text for classes in general education, special education, and school psychology. Students will benefit from the numerous examples of intervention efforts and the nuances of the RTI models presented.” - Frank M. Gresham, Louisiana State University, USA Showcasing evidence-based models for schoolwide prevention of reading and behavior problems, this book is highly informative, practical, and grounded in research. Chapters first identify the core
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
school-based mental health and learning disabilities
58
features of effective three-tier prevention models and explain their role within a response-to-intervention framework. In-depth case studies then illustrate the experience of implementing distinct models (targeting reading problems, behavior problems, or both) in actual schools across the country. The cases yield vital insights into the process of choosing the right prevention model for a particular school; coordinating faculty teams and building their skills; and conducting universal screening, progress monitoring, and data-based decision making to improve student outcomes. Contents: Part I: Background and Rationale. Greenwood, Horner, Kratochwill, Introduction. Chard, Harn, Sugai, Horner, Simmons, Kame’enui, Core Features of Multi-tiered Systems of Reading and Behavioral Support. Part II: Case Studies. Nelson, Hurley, Synhorst, Epstein, Nebraska Threetiered Behavioral Prevention Model Case Study. Tobin, Dickey, Horner, Sugai, Comprehensive Implementation of the Three-tiered Prevention Approach to Schoolwide Behavioral Support: An Oregon Case Study. Vaughn, LinanThompson, Woodruff, Murray, Wanzek, Scammacca, Roberts, Elbaum, Effects of Professional Development on Improving At-risk Students’ Performance in Reading. Chard, Harn, Project CIRCUITS: Center for Improving Reading Competence Using Intensive Treatments Schoolwide. Algozzine, Cooke, White, Helf, Algozzine, McClanahan, The North Carolina Reading and Behavior Center’s K–3 Prevention Model: Eastside Elementary School Case Study. Abbott, Greenwood, Bannister, Kaufman, Veerkamp, Fillingin, The Kansas Reading and Behavior Center’s K–3 Prevention Model. Part III: Implications and Conclusions. Clements, Kratochwill, Multi-tiered Prevention Models: Implications and Future Perspectives.
2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-839-1: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
Inclusive Assessment and Accountability A Guide to Accommodations for Students with Diverse Needs
Sara E. Bolt, Michigan State University, USA, and Andrew T. Roach, Georgia State University, USA “It gave me great pleasure to read this book... I have no doubt that educators will find this resource extremely useful as they make decisions about instruction and assessment for these students, who previously were often excluded from assessments.” - Martha L. Thurlow, Director, National Center on
Single-Case Design for Measuring Response to Intervention T. Chris Riley-Tillman, East Carolina University, Greenville, USA, and Matthew K. Burns, University of Minnesota, Twin Cities, USA “Riley-Tillman and Burns fill a significant void in the education literature, providing a pragmatic set of methods that are necessary to help educators create effective interventions. This book is highly relevant to school psychologists, special educators, and other school professionals involved in documenting students’ academic, social, and behavioral changes.” - John S. Carlson, Michigan State University, USA This user-friendly, practical book is the first guide to single-case design written specifically for practitioners using response-to-intervention (RTI) models in schools. It provides essential skills for analyzing and presenting data to support valid educational decision making. Step-by-step explanations and many illustrative examples render complex concepts accessible and applicable to day-to-day work with elementary and secondary students. Contents: Introduction to Design and Analysis for Educational Intervention. The Nuts and Bolts of Single-case Design. The Classic A-B-A-B Design. Complex Single-case Designs. Visual Analysis and Interpretation Strategies for Singlecase Design. Advanced Empirical Analyses of Single-case Data in Practice and Research. Brief Experimental Analysis. A Response-to-Intervention Model Incorporating Experimental Design. Appendices.
April 2009: 214pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-106-7: £21.95
Series: Practical Intervention in the Schools Published by Guilford Press
Contents: No Child Left Behind and Standards-based Reform and Accountability. Making Participation Decisions for Diverse Students. Testing Accommodations for Students with Disabilities. Testing Accommodations for English Language Learners. Alternate Assessments for Students with Disabilities. Facilitating and Evaluating Access to the General Education Curriculum. Universal Design for Instruction and Assessment. Conclusions.
January 2009: 158pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-019-0: £21.00
Series: Practical Intervention in the Schools Published by Guilford Press
Bullying Prevention and Intervention Realistic Strategies for Schools Susan M. Swearer, University of Nebraska– Lincoln, USA, Dorothy L. Espelage, University of Illinois, Urbana–Champaign, USA, and Scott A. Napolitano, in private practice, Lincoln, USA
Educational Outcomes, University of Minnesota, USA
Practitioners need reliable methods for accurately measuring the progress of all K–12 students, including those facing obstacles to ordinary testing, in district- and statewide assessments. This important book provides step-by-step guidelines for choosing appropriate accommodations and alternative testing practices for students with mild to severe disabilities as well as English language learners. The authors also outline strategies, including universal design principles for instruction and assessment, to ensure that students with diverse needs are given access to the general education curriculum.
Evaluating Educational Interventions
“Swearer et al., leaders in the area of bullying prevention, have prepared an excellent resource for helping educators and practitioners understand bullying and its remediation. This welldocumented book provides an easy-to-read review of the extent of the problem, the policies that schools and communities have used to address it, and ways to develop effective local solutions.” - Andy Horne, University of Georgia, USA
Grounded in research and extensive experience in schools, this engaging book describes practical ways to combat bullying at the school, class, and individual levels. Step-by-step strategies are presented for developing school- and district-wide policies, coordinating team-based prevention efforts, and implementing targeted interventions with students at risk. Special topics include how to involve teachers, parents, and peers in making schools safer and ways to address the root causes of bullying and victimization. Contents: Bullying Behaviors in Elementary, Middle, and High Schools. Social-ecological Problems Associated with Bullying Behaviors. Understanding Bullying as a Social Relationship Problem. Swearer, Limber, Alley, Developing and Implementing an Effective Anti-bullying Policy. Alley, Limber, Legal Issues
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
school-based mental health and learning disabilities for School Personnel. Using Your Own Resources to Combat Bullying. Practical Strategies to Reduce Bullying. The Impact of Technology on Relationships. Evaluating Your Efforts. March 2009: 170pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-021-3: £21.00
Series: Practical Intervention in the Schools Published by Guilford Press
New Edition!
Conducting SchoolBased Functional Behavioral Assessments A Practitioner’s Guide Second Edition Mark W. Steege, University of Southern Maine, USA, and T. Steuart Watson, Miami University, Ohio, USA “Steege and Watson successfully meet their goal of helping school-based practitioners conduct FBAs that are both legally defensible and grounded in best practices... The inclusion of numerous case examples, sample reports, and practical tools makes this second edition a valuable resource.” - Marie C. McGrath, Immaculata University, Pennsylvania, USA
Explaining the “whats,” “whys,” and “how-tos” of functional behavioral assessment, this practical and engaging book is packed with realworld tools and examples. Effective procedures are presented for evaluating challenging behavior in K–12 students, organizing assessment data, and using the results to craft individualized behavior support plans. Contents: Introduction to Functional Behavioral Assessment. Genesis of Functional Behavioral Assessment. Legal Aspects of Functional Behavioral Assessment. Everything You Always Wanted to Know about the Conceptual Foundations of Functional Behavioral Assessments... But Were Afraid to Ask: Or, Basic Principles of Functional Behavioral Assessment. Key Elements of Functional Behavioral Assessment. Observing and Recording Behavior. Indirect Functional Behavioral Assessment. Direct Descriptive Functional Behavioral Assessment. Brief Functional Analysis of Behavior. Behavior-analytic Problemsolving Model. Function-based Interventions. Sample Functional Behavioral Assessment Reports. Direct Behavioral Consultation: Or, “How Do We Get People to Implement Interventions Accurately and Consistently?”
March 2009: 270pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-027-5: £24.00
Series: Practical Intervention in the Schools Published by Guilford Press
Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Emotional and Behavioral Disorders School-Based Practice Edited by Matthew J. Mayer, RutgersThe State University of New Jersey, USA, Richard Van Acker, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA, John E. Lochman, University of Alabama, USA, and Frank M. Gresham, Louisiana State University, USA
“Filling a critical void in the literature, this book illuminates the exciting potential of cognitive-behavioral interventions in school-based practice. The volume is current, comprehensive, and reader friendly... The impressive
59
collection of scholar–authors steers clear of hyperbole in favor of more dispassionate examinations of what the science is saying. Their approach leaves the reader informed, optimistic, and energized.” - Jim Larson, University of Wisconsin-Whitewater, USA
Evidence based and practical, this book presents state-of-the-science approaches for helping K–12 students who struggle with aggressive behaviors, anxiety, depression, ADHD, and autism. It explains the fundamentals of cognitive-behavioral intervention and reviews exemplary programs that offer powerful new ways to reach at-risk children and adolescents. Leading authorities thoroughly describe the process of assessment, treatment planning, implementation, and program evaluation. Contents: Part I: Foundations of Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions. Mayer, Van Acker, Historical Roots, Theoretical and Applied Developments, and Critical Issues in Cognitive-Behavioral Modification. Lochman, Gresham, Intervention Development, Assessment, Planning, and Adaptation: The Importance of Developmental Models. Gresham, Lochman, Methodological Issues in Research Using Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions. Van Acker, Mayer, Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions and the Social Context of the School: A Stranger in a Strange Land. Part II: Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Anger/Aggression. Smith, Graber, Daunic, Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Anger and Aggression: Review of Research and Research-to-practice Issues. Nelson III, Schultz, Managing Anger and Aggression in Students with Externalizing Behavior Problems: Focus on Exemplary Programs. Part III: Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Anxiety/Phobic Disorders. Weissman, Antinoro, Chu, Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Anxious Youth in School Settings: Advances and Challenges. Schoenfield, Morris, CognitiveBehavioral Treatment for Childhood Anxiety Disorders: Exemplary Programs. Part IV: Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Depression. Maag, Swearer, Toland, Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Depression in Children and Adolescents: Meta-analysis, Promising Programs, and Implications for School Personnel. Stark, Herren, Fisher, Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Depression During Childhood. Part V: Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions Addressing Other Needs. DuPaul, Arbolino, Booster, Attention-Deficit/ Hyperactivity Disorder. Klinger, Williams, Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Students with Autism Spectrum Disorders, VI. The Future of CognitiveBehavioral Interventions. Abdul-Adil, Tolan, Guerra, The Cognitive–Ecological Model: Paradigm and Promise for the Future. Gerber, Solari, Future Challenges to Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions in Practice and Policy.
2008: 420pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-976-3: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
Developing Schoolwide Programs to Prevent and Manage Problem Behaviors A Step-by-Step Approach
Kathleen Lynne Lane, Peabody College of Vanderbilt University, Tennessee, USA, Jemma Robertson Kalberg, Seneca Center, California, USA, and Holly Mariah Menzies, California State University, Los Angeles, USA “This is a great resource for schools learning about, developing, or refining an integrated primary prevention program. The authors address many details that are not available elsewhere, and provide practical tools and examples... The chapter previews and summaries are very effective, and the concluding chapter on frequently asked questions is terrific.” - John Umbreit, Special Education Program, University of Arizona, Tucson, USA
Packed with hands-on tools and grounded in the latest research, this important resource provides guidelines for designing, implementing, and evaluating a schoolwide primary prevention program. The authors’ team-based, school-tested approach includes behavioral, academic, and social components that can be tailored to address any
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
school-based mental health and learning disabilities
60
school’s needs. Each chapter presents real-world examples alongside essential information about how to prevent the development of antisocial behavior in grades K-12.
Contents: Preventing and Managing Problem Behavior in Our Schools: A Formidable Task. Primary Prevention Across the K-12 Grade Span: Developing a Solid Foundation. A Closer Look at the Positive Behavior Support Model. Designing and Implementing Primary Prevention Models. Assessment and Screening at the Primary Level. Determining How Well the Program is Working: Monitoring Outcomes and Identifying Nonresponsive Students. Getting Started in Your School: Frequently Asked Questions.
A Resource for School Psychologists, School Counselors, Special Educators, and Other Mental Health Professionals
March 2009: 196pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-032-9: £21.95 Published by Guilford Press
Helping At-Risk Students A Group Counseling Approach for Grades 6-9 Second Edition
Jill Waterman, in private practice, Denver, USA, and Elizabeth Walker, University of California, USA “Helping At-Risk Students provides effective and practical techniques for addressing the complex developmental and mental health challenges of youth in a group context... Covering everything from the referral and recruitment of group members to the exploration of group dynamics and process issues, this book has become an essential part of my arsenal of therapeutic resources.” - Erika Van Buren, District of Columbia Department of Mental Health, Washington, USA
Engaging, activity based, and effective, this widely used group counseling curriculum (the SPARK program) is designed for flexible implementation in school or clinical settings. The program helps youth build skills for school success and social-emotional growth while exploring such crucial topics as personal goals, ethnic identity and prejudice, peer pressure, violence prevention, and family relationships. Contents: Part I: Guidelines for Setting Up and Leading Groups. Goals of the SPARK Program. Getting Started. Selecting Group Members. Structure of the Groups. Group Leaders. Presenting the Groups to Prospective Members. Pregroup Individual Interviews and/or Questionnnaires. Group Counseling Techniques. Developing Trust and Understanding Confidentiality. Building Group Cohesion. Group Process. Developmental Considerations. Maintaining Order and Leader Sanity. Uses and Parameters of Check-in and Check-out. Issues in Ending the Groups. Dilemmas for Group Leaders. Handling Issues of Child Abuse and Suicidality. Suicidality. Balancing the Needs of Individual Group Members with the Requirements of the Psychoeducational Curriculum. Dealing with Members Who Do Not Participate. Dealing with Chronically Disruptive Members. Parameters of the Group Leader Role. Adapting the Curriculum for Full Classroom Use. Part II: The SPARK Curriculum. Overview of Module Content. Recruitment Criteria. Module One: Trust-building and Communication Skills. Module Two: Anger Management and Emotion Regulation Skills. Module Three: Ethnic Identity and Anti-prejudice. Module Four: Educational Aspirations. Module Five: Peer Pressure, Bullying, and Gangs. Module Six: Male-female Relationships. Module Seven: Exposure to Violence and Posttraumatic Stress Reactions. Module Eight: Family Relationships. Termination Session: The Party. Part III: Effectiveness of SPARK Groups. Characteristics of Participating Group Members. Family Structure and Distress. Outcome of the SPARK Groups. Time 1 and Time 2 Differences for Those in the Treatment Group. Time 1 and Time 2 Differences for Those in the Control Group. Comparisons between the Treatment and Control Groups. Pilot Evaluations of New and Revised Modules in this Edition. Summary and Conclusions. Information Regarding Data Analyses. Appendices.
February 2009: 272pp. Pb: 978-1-60623-002-2: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
Theory and Cases in School-Based Consultation
Laura M. Crothers, Tammy L. Hughes, and Karen A. Morine, all at Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, USA Foreword by William Erchul This casebook provides an applied perspective regarding school-based consultation, including an overview of mental health consultation, behavioral consultation, social learning theory consultation, Adlerian consultation, and ecological/organizational consultation. Along with relevant discussion of the issues in each case study, critical thinking questions are included for discussion among students and educators regarding school-based consultation. This text includes many more and diverse case examples than the competing casebooks available, and is designed to be used in conjunction with any of the established primary texts in Consultation. School-Based mental health professionals, educators, and graduate students will find Theory and Cases in SchoolBased Consultation an indispensable guide in their work and study. 2008: 192pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96337-4: £21.95 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community Foundations of Professional Practice Volume 1 Edited by Enedina Vazquez, New Mexico State University, USA, Tony Crespi, University of Hartford, Connecticut, USA, and Cyndi Riccio, Texas A&M University, USA Co-published with The Trainers of School Psychologists Volume 1 of the Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community focuses on the professional issues and topics that form the core of the university curriculum for the school psychology specialist degree. Four main sections review contemporary university training programs, foundations of school education, key areas of responsibility for schoolbased mental health professionals, and a look to the future of training for school psychologists. Contents: Part I: Contemporary School Psychology Training: The
University. Riccio, Garcia-Vasquez, Crespi, Why School Psychology as a Profession: Introduction and Overview. Fagan, Putting School Psychology Training into Historical Perspective: What’s New? What’s Old? Kaufman, DeOrnellas, Maricle, What is So Special about the Specialist Degree? Givner, Combined-integrated Training: An Alternative to Traditional School Psychology Training Models. Part II: Foundations of Training. Nastasi, How Much Theory Do We Teach? Williams, Epifanio, Sinko, Teaching Legal and Ethical Issues. Arroyos-Jurado, Fernandez, Navarro, Multiculturalism and Diversity: Implications for Training of School Psychologists. Lowell, Rimmer, Zeeman, Preparing Students for Leadership Roles. Part III: Training for Assessment and Evidence-based Practice. Tomes, Culture and Psychoeducational Assessment: Cognition and Achievement. Hughes, McGoey, Owen, The Importance of Personality Assessment in School
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
school-based mental health and learning disabilities Psychology Training Programs. Fiorello, Hale, Decker, Coleman, Neuropsychology in School Psychology. Part IV: Training for Intervention: Systems, Settings, and Special Populations. Mennuti, Christner, School-Based Mental Health: Training School Psychologists for Comprehensive Service Delivery. Rosenfeld, Levinsohn-Klyap, Cramer, Educating Consultants for Practice in Schools. Crespi, Lovelace, Adult Incarceration and Children’s Psychiatric Hospitalization: Training School Psychologists for Non-traditional Settings. McCormick, Fournier, Training for Work with Special Populations: Children with Emotional and Behavioral Disorders. Phelps, Training for Work with Special Populations: Children with Chronic Illness. Part V: School Psychology Training: Rooted in the Past, Practicing in the Present, and Contemplating the Future: Summary and Conclusions. Garcia-Vazquez, Crespi, Riccio, Hughes, Kaufman, Into the Future: New Directions for Education and Training. January 2010: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96260-5: £34.00 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Handbook of Education, Training and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community Bridging the Training and Practice Gap: Building Collaborative University/Field Practices Volume 2 Edited by Judith Kaufman, Fairleigh Dickinson University, USA, and Tammy Hughes, Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, USA Co-published with The Trainers of School Psychologists Volume 2 of the Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community bridges the gap from the classroom education to the field-based training of new professionals. Supervision is at the center of this process, and a major part of this volume focuses on the role of the supervisor as trainer in different contexts. A series of chapters are also devoted to some of the most difficult situations that can unexpectedly confront the school psychologist in practice, and a third part considers the credentialing and continuing education issues of the school psychologist throughout the course of a career. Contents: Part I: Contemporary School Psychology Training: University/
Field Collaboration. Hughes, Kaufman, Miller, Is Everything Old New Again: School Psychology Training Past, Present, and Future. Part II: What About Supervision Anyway? Trainers as Supervisors. Kaufman, Contemporary Issues in Supervision. Welsh, Meche, Broussard, Competency Based School Psychology Practica: A Collaborative Training Model. Herbert, Patterson, Collaborative Supervision of Internship Experiences. Gordon, Zacarrio, Supervision of School Psychology Interns in a Pediatric Hospital. Hatzichristou, Lampropoulou, Lykitsakou, Dimitropoulou, Promoting University and Schools Partnership: Transnational Considerations and Future Directions. Part III: Difficult Dialogues. Lopez, Rogers, Multicultural Competence and Diversity: University and Field Collaboration. Cruise, Swerdlick, Problematic Behaviors: Mediating Differences and Negotiating Change. Dailor, Jacob, Ethical and Legal Challenges: Negotiating Change. Kaufman, Hughes, Dealing with Harassment, Abuse and Other Difficult Topics. Theodore, Hughes, Kaufman, Developing Professional Identity: Values, Behaviors and Reputation. Jacob, Drevon, Abbuh, Taton, Preparing School Psychologists to Address the Needs of Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, Transgender, and Questioning (GLBTQ) Youth. Part IV: Professional Issues. Crespi, Professional Credentialing: Options and Needs. Snyder, Cash, Valley-Gray, Cunnigham, Continuing Education: Fostering Life Long Learning. Brock, Martinez, Navarro, Teran, Collaboration in School-Based Crisis Intervention. Levinson, Black, Rafoth, Slonim, Community Collaboration and University-based Clinics. Part V: Into the Future. Hughes, Kaufman, Hoover, Creating Congruent Change in Training and Field Based Practice. Hughes, Kaufman, Riccio, Crespi, GarciaVasquez, Envisioning the Future: Looking into the Crystal Ball. January 2010: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96279-7: £35.00
the peer power program
61
Handbook of Peer Interactions, Relationships, and Groups
Edited by Kenneth H. Rubin, University of Maryland, College Park, USA, William M. Bukowski, Concordia University, Montreal, Canada, and Brett Laursen, Florida Atlantic University, Fort Lauderdale, USA “Outstanding. The relationships of children and adolescents with their peers are examined with exceptional thoroughness and authority by the key researchers in the field... A splendid addition to the literature.” - Judith F. Dunn, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College London, UK This comprehensive, authoritative Handbook covers the breadth of theories, methods, and empirically based findings on the ways in which children and adolescents contribute to one another’s development. Leading researchers review current knowledge on the dynamics of peer interactions and relationships from infancy through adolescence. selected Contents: Part I: Introduction: History and Theory. Part II: Social Behaviors, Interactions, Relationships, and Groups: What Should be Measured, How, and Why? Part III: Infancy and Early Childhood. Part IV: Middle Childhood and Early Adolescence. Part V: Distal Correlates of Children’s Peer Relationships. Part VI: Proximal Correlates of Children’s Social Skills and Peer Relationships. Part VII: Childhood Peer Experiences and Later Adjustment. Part VIII: Translation and Policy.
January 2009: 654pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-441-6: £57.50 Published by Guilford Press
Peer Programs An In-Depth Look at Peer Programs: Planning, Implementation, and Administration Second Edition
Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA, and David R. Black, Purdue University, USA Peer Programs explains the value of and techniques for helping non-professionals learn to help others oneon-one, in small groups and in groups of classroom size. Intended to be of use to those responsible for planning, implementing and/or administering peer programs, this text should also convince those who are not directly involved that peer helping is a worthwhile undertaking – reducing drug and alcohol abuse, dropouts, violence and conflict, HIV and AIDS, pregnancy, stress and negative peer pressure. This book is an indispensable guide for learning important aspects of training peer helpers and as a resource book for a wide range of professional peer helpers. Contents: An Open Letter to the Peer Program Professional. Peer Helping and its Components. Why Peer Programs Now? The Future of Helping. Highlights of Peer Resource Literature. Development of the Peer Program Professional. Steps to a Successful Peer Program. Training Model and Procedures. Utilization of Peer Helpers and Advanced Training. Evaluation of the Program. Building a Team. Programmatic Standards.
2008: 352pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96236-0: £28.00 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
the peer power program
62
Peer Power, Book One
Strategies for the Professional Leader: Becoming an Effective Peer Helper and Conflict Mediator Fourth Edition Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA The professional strategies book provides the program leader/facilitator with clear and easy to follow guidelines for implementing the Peer Power Program. After an overview of the peer program philosophy, training structure, and goals, the leader’s guide proceeds through the thirteen Modules that are found in the student Workbook. For each exercise in the student Workbook, this leader’s guide provides instructions for introducing and implementing the exercise, time and materials requirements, description of its purpose and goal, and homework assignments. Contents: Introduction. Unit A: Setting the Stage. Module 1: What is Peer
Helping. Module 2: Understanding Yourself and Others. Module 3: Let’s Look at Helping. Module 4: Communication Stoppers. Unit B: Developing Skills. Module 5: Attending Skill. Module 6: Empathy Skill. Module 7: Summarizing Skill. Module 8: Questioning Skill. Module 9: Genuineness Skill. Module 10: Assertiveness Skill. Module 11: Confrontation Skill. Module 12: Problem-solving Skill. Unit C: Implementing a Program. Module 13: Strategy Development. Strategy Development 1: Putting Peer Helping into Action. Strategy Development 2: Ethical Considerations in Peer Counseling/Peer Helping. Strategy Development 3: What Next? NAPP Programmatic Standards and Ethics. January 2009: 240pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96231-5: £18.50 Published by Routledge
Workbook: Becoming an Effective Peer Helper and Conflict Mediator Fourth Edition Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA Peer Power, Book One, Workbook brings the participating students through a series of thirteen Modules, introducing the group to the Peer Power Program, the role of the peer helper, the eight core skills, and strategies for implementing the peer work into practice. The Workbook provides clear instructions for the skills-focused, guided exercises, in a format that is accessible and enjoyable for students in the Peer Power Program. Contents: List of Rating Scales. List of Rating Flow Sheets. Introductory Comments to the Trainee. Overview of Peer Helping Training Program. Roles of Peer Helpers. Unit A: Setting the Stage. Module 1: What is Peer Helping. Module 2: Understanding Yourself and Others. Module 3: Let’s Look at Helping. Module 4: Communication Stoppers. Unit B: Developing Skills. Module 5: Attending Skill. Module 6: Empathy Skill. Module 7: Summarizing Skill. Module 8: Questioning Skill. Module 9: Genuineness Skill. Module 10: Assertiveness Skill. Module 11: Confrontation Skill. Module 12: Problem-solving Skill. Unit C: Implementing a Program. Module 13: Strategy Development. Strategy Development 1: Putting Peer Helping into Action. Strategy Development 2: Ethical Considerations in Peer Counseling/Peer Helping. Strategy Development 3: What Next? January 2009: 384pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96232-2: £18.50 Published by Routledge
Workbook: Applying Peer Helper Skills Third Edition Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA Picking up where Book One left off, the Peer Power, Book Two, Workbook brings the participating students through a series of additional Modules, focusing on how to apply the core skills learned in the first half of the program in real life situations. This volume covers topics such as alcohol and drug use, conflict mediation, eating disorders, suicide prevention, classroom leadership, bullying, and self-esteem issues. The Workbook provides clear instructions for the skills-focused, guided exercises, in a format that is accessible and enjoyable for students in the Peer Power Program. Contents: Introduction. Modules: Drugs and Alcohol Abuse – Intervention and Prevention. Stress Management – Taking Care of You! Leadership Training. Peer Helping through Tutoring. Peer Helping through Group Work/ Peer Education. Eating Disorder – Prevention and Intervention. Peer Helping through Mentoring. Peer Helping through Highway Traffic Safety. Suicide Prevention. Coping with Loss. Peer Helping through Bullying Reduction. Peer Helping through Reducing Sex-related problems. Peer Helping through Advocating for Safer, Healthier Environments. Comments on Self-evaluation. Self-evaluation for the Peer Counselor/Helper. Additional Reading. Filmstrips.
January 2009: 416pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96234-6: £18.50
Peer Power, Book Two Strategies for the Professional Leader: Applying Peer Helper Skills
Peer Power, Book Two
Peer Power, Book One
Third Edition Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA The professional strategies book provides the program leader/facilitator with clear and easy to follow guidelines for implementing the Peer Power Program. Picking up where Book One left off, the leader’s guide to Book Two proceeds through the same series of Modules that are found in the Book Two student Workbook. For each exercise in the student Workbook, this leader’s guide provides instructions for introducing and implementing the exercise, time and materials requirements, description of its purpose and goal, and homework assignments. Contents: Introduction. Modules: Drugs and Alcohol Abuse – Intervention and Prevention. Stress Management – Taking Care of You! Leadership Training. Peer Helping through Tutoring. Peer Helping through Group Work/ Peer Education. Eating Disorder – Prevention and Intervention. Peer Helping through Mentoring. Peer Helping through Highway Traffic Safety. Suicide Prevention. Coping with Loss. Peer Helping through Bullying Reduction. Peer Helping through Reducing Sex-related Problems. Peer Helping through Advocating for Safer, Healthier Environments.
January 2009: 208pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96233-9: £18.50 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
family therapy and counselling Series www.routledgementalhealth.com/family-therapy-and-counseling
family therapy
Family Therapy
100 Key Points and Techniques
Forthcoming!
Mark Rivett, Cardiff and Vale NHS Trust, UK, and Eddy Street, Child and Adolescent Mental Health Service, UK “This book is excellent – clear, well organised, and very easy to find your way about!”
Attachment Expanding the Cultural Connections Edited by Phyllis Erdman, Washington State University, USA, and Kok-Mun Ng, University of North Carolina, USA Attachment: Expanding the Cultural Connections presents a current analysis of the theory and application of attachment within crosscultural settings. It is a compilation of research, clinical applications, and theoretical conceptualizations, and is intended for clinicians and researchers in counseling/family therapy/psychology as well as a graduate level course in family therapy/psychology. selected Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: Expanding the Cultural Context of Attachment Theory. Part III: Assessing Attachment Theory in Cultural Contexts. Part IV: Current Research in Specific Cultural Contexts and Cross Cultural Comparisons. Part V: Clinical Implications.
- Arlene Vetere, University of Surrey, UK
Family therapy is increasingly recognised as one of the evidence based psychotherapies. In contemporary therapeutic practice, family therapy is helpful across the age span and for distress caused by family conflict, trauma and mental health difficulties. Because of this, many psychotherapists integrate elements of family therapy within their approaches. Family Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques provides a concise and jargon-free guide to 100 of the fundamental ideas and techniques of this approach.
June 2010: 350pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99059-2: £31.50
Divided into helpful sections, it covers:
Series: Family Therapy and Counselling
• essential family therapy practice
Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Castaldo: Divorced, without Children: Solution Focused Therapy with Women at Midlife Hb: 978-0-415-95585-0: 2008: 256pp. £22.50
Kerr et al.: Family Art Therapy: Foundations of Theory and Practice Hb: 978-0-415-95464-8: 2007: 264pp. £24.95
Onedera, Ed.: The Role of Religion in Marriage and Family Counseling Hb: 978-0-415-95499-0: 2007: 304pp. £24.95
Peluso, Ed.: Infidelity: A Practitioner’s Guide to Working with Couples in Crisis 978-0-415-95390-0: 2007: 352pp. £30.00
Sori, Ed.: Engaging Children in Family Therapy: Creating Approaches to Integrating Theory and Research in Clinical Practice Hb: 978-0-415-94981-1: 2006: 304pp. £25.00
Smith/Montilla, Eds.: Counseling and Family Therapy with Latino Populations: Strategies that Work Hb: 978-0-415-95109-8: 2005: 256pp. £21.99
Crenshaw: Treating Families and Children in the Child Protective System: Strategies for Systemic Advocacy and Family Healing Hb: 978-0-415-94870-8: 2004: 304pp. £26.50
Sperry: Assessment of Couples and Families: Contemporary Cutting Edge Strategies Hb: 978-0-415-94657-5: 2004: 304pp. £28.99
Ng, Ed.: Global Perspectives in Family Therapy: Development, Practice, Trends Hb: 978-1-58391-311-6: 2003: 240pp. £28.50
Erdman/Caffery, Eds.: Attachment and Family Systems: Conceptual, Empirical, and Therapeutic Relatedness
63
• family therapy theory • using family therapy techniques • common challenges in family therapy • contemporary debates and issues • self issues for family therapists. Family Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques is an invaluable resource for psychotherapists and counsellors in training and in practice. As well as appealing to established family therapists, this latest addition to the 100 Key Points series will also find an audience with other mental health professionals working with families and interested in learning more about family therapy techniques. selected Contents: Part I: Systems Theory. Part II: Complexities and Debates. Part III: Beginning Therapy. Part IV: The Therapist’s Techniques. Part V: Developing Interventions. Part VI: Techniques from Schools of Family Therapy. Part VII: Ending Therapy. Part VIII: The Self of the Therapist. Part IX: Dealing with Common Challenges in Family Therapy. Part X: Family Therapy in Contexts. Part XI: Debates and Issues.
May 2009: 328pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41038-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41039-7: £12.99
Series: 100 Key Points Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/100-key-points for a further book in this series please see page 6 family therapy arena news • books • journals • resources
www.familytherapyarena.com Brought to you by Routledge Mental Health www.routledgementalhealth.com
Hb: 978-1-58391-351-2: 2002: 280pp. £31.50
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
family therapy
64
New Edition!
Essential Skills in Family Therapy From the First Interview to Termination Second Edition JoEllen Patterson, Lee Williams, Todd M. Edwards, and Larry Chamow, all at the University of San Diego, USA, and Claudia Grauf-Grounds, Seattle Pacific University, USA “Patterson et al. provide exactly the kind of hands-on, ‘what-to-do’ guidance that every beginning family therapist needs. Even better than the original text, the second edition succinctly covers all the most important topics in family therapy practice... This is the best available book of its kind for the beginning family therapist.” - Jay Lebow, The Family Institute at Northwestern University, USA
Readable and concise yet immensely informative, this bestselling text prepares students and new therapists to work confidently and effectively in real-world clinical practice with families. The authors offer wise and compassionate guidance on everything from intake and assessment to treatment planning, the nuts and bolts of specific interventions, the nuances of establishing therapeutic relationships, and how to troubleshoot when treatment gets “stuck.” They help the novice clinician navigate typical dilemmas and concerns, and spell out the basics of therapist self-care. Contents: Sprenkle, Foreword. The Beginning Family Therapist: Taking On the Challenge. Before the Initial Interview. The Initial Interview. Guidelines for Conducting Assessment. Developing a Treatment Focus. Basic Treatment Skills and Interventions. Working with Families and Children. Working with Couples. When a Family Member Has a Mental Illness. Getting Unstuck in Therapy. Termination. Family Therapy in the Future: Pertinent Issues for Beginning Clinicians. September 2009: 300pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-305-4: £25.95
The Guilford Family Therapy Series Published by Guilford Press
Re-Visioning Family Therapy Race, Culture, and Gender in Clinical Practice Second Edition
Edited by Monica McGoldrick, Director of the Multicultural Family Institute, Highland Park, New Jersey, USA, and Kenneth V. Hardy, Syracuse University, New York, USA “This really is a terrific volume! The title aptly describes how McGoldrick, Hardy, and their contributing authors are ‘re-visioning’ family therapy to reflect complex contemporary issues and approaches. This state-ofthe-art work is a ‘must have’ for anyone who practices or teaches family therapy.” - Beverly Greene, St. John’s University, USA Now in a significantly revised and expanded second edition, this groundbreaking work illuminates how racism, sexism, and other forms of oppression constrain the lives of diverse clients – and family therapy itself. Practitioners and students gain vital tools for reevaluating prevailing conceptions of family health and pathology; tapping into clients’ cultural resources; and developing more inclusive theories and therapeutic practices. From leaders in the field, the second edition features many new chapters, case examples, and specific recommendations for culturally competent assessment, treatment, and clinical training.
Contents: Part I: Theoretical Perspectives. McGoldrick, Hardy, Introduction:
Re-Visioning Family Therapy from a Multicultural Perspective. Falicov, Transnational Journeys. Sluzki, Migration and the Disruption of the Social Network. Laszloffy, Social Class: Implications for Family Therapy. Walsh, Spirituality, Healing, and Resilience. Hardy, Race, Reality, and Relationships: Implications for Family Therapists. McAdams-Mahmoud, Understanding Families in the Context of Cultural Adaptations to Oppression. Part II: Cultural Legacies and Stories: Therapists’ Experiences. McGoldrick, Finding a Place Called “Home.” Pinderhughes, Black Genealogy Revisited: Restorying an African American Family. Colon, The Discovery of My Multicultural Identity. J. Mahboubi, N. Mahboubi, Our Iranian-African American Interracial Family. Watson, Voluntary Childlessness and Motherhood: Afterthoughts. Kliman, Trimble, Grieving in Network and Community: Bearing Witness to the Loss of Our Son. Folwarski, Going Home: One Orphan’s Journey from Chicago to Poland and Back. Berndt, Legacies of White Privilege. Lawless, Transforming a Racist Legacy. Fish, The Semitism Schism: Jewish-Palestinian Legacies in a Family Therapy Training Context. Abudabbeh, My Evolving Identity from Arab to Palestinian to Muslim. Domokos-Cheng Ham, Biracial Legitimacy: Embracing Marginality. Part III: Racial Identity and Racism: Implications for Therapy. Hardy, Laszloffy, The Dynamics of a Pro-racist Ideology: Implications for Family Therapists. McIntosh, White Privilege and Male Privilege: A Personal Account of Coming to See Correspondences through Work in Women’s Studies. Vecchio, Dismantling White Male Privilege within Family Therapy. Preto, Latinas in the United States: Bridging Two Worlds. Laszloffy, Therapy with Mixed-race Families. Part IV: Implications for Clinical Practice. Nealy, Working with LGBT Families. Green, Gay and Lesbian Couples: Successful Coping with Minority Stress. Mirkin, Kamya, Working with Immigrant and Refugee Families. McCarthy, Byrne, A Fifth-province Approach to Intracultural Issues in an Irish Context: Marginal Illuminations. Boyd-Franklin, Working with African Americans and Trauma: Lessons for Clinicians from Hurricane Katrina. Akinyela, Once They Come: Testimony Therapy and Healing Questions for African American Couple. Hines, Climbing Up the Rough Side of the Mountain: Hope, Culture, and Therapy. Shibusawa, Interracial Asian Couples: Beyond Black and White. Fraenkel, Carmichael, Working with Families Who Are Homeless. La Due, Coyote Returns: A Reconciliation Between History and Hope. Part V: Implications for Training. Akamatsu, Teaching White Students about Racism and its Implications in Practice. Mock, Visionary Social Justice: Narratives of Diversity, Social Location, and Personal Compassion. Hardy, McGoldrick, Re-Visioning Training. Hardy, Becoming a GEMM Therapist: Work Harder, Be Smarter, and Never Discuss Race. 2008: 483pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-427-0: £33.00 Published by Guilford Press
New Edition!
Spiritual Resources in Family Therapy Second Edition Edited by Froma Walsh, University of Chicago, and Chicago Center for Family Health, USA “A vital contribution to the growing literature on spirituality and psychotherapy. This excellent volume reminds us that spirituality is, at its heart, all about relationships... I highly recommend this updated second edition.” - Kenneth I. Pargament, Bowling Green State University, USA Exploring the role of spirituality in couple and family relationships, this successful text and practitioner guide illustrates ways to tap spiritual resources for coping, healing, and resilience. Leading experts in family therapy and pastoral care discuss how faith beliefs and practices can foster personal and relational well-being, how religious conflicts or a spiritual void can contribute to distress, and what therapists can gain from reflecting on their own spiritual journeys. Rich with insights for working with multifaith and culturally diverse clients, the second edition has been thoroughly revised and updated with the latest ideas, findings, and clinical applications.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
family therapy Contents: Part I: Overview. Walsh, Religion, Spirituality, and the Family:
Multifaith Perspectives. Walsh, Integrating Spirituality in Family Therapy: Wellsprings for Health, Healing, and Resilience. Part II: Spiritual Resources in Families: Tapping the Wellsprings. Wright, Spirituality, Suffering, and Beliefs: The Soul of Healing with Families. Walsh, Spiritual Resources in Family Adaptation to Death and Loss. Wolin, Muller, Taylor, Wolin, Raganathan, Saymah, Zeyada, Religious Perspectives on Resilience: Buddhism, Christianity, Judaism, Hinduism, and Islam. Aponte, The Stresses of Poverty and the Comfort of Spirituality. Boyd-Franklin, Lockwood, Spirituality and Religion: Implications for Psychotherapy with African American Clients and Families. Falicov, Religion and Spiritual Traditions in Immigrant Families: Significance for Latino Health and Mental Health. Fishbane, “Honor Your Father and Your Mother”: Intergenerational Values and Jewish Tradition. Anderson, A Spirituality for Family Living. Part III: Spirituality in Therapeutic Practice. Doherty, Morality and Spirituality in Therapy. Imber-Black, Rituals and Spirituality in Family Therapy. Gale, Meditation and Relational Connectedness: Practices for Couples and Families. Barrett, Healing from Relational Trauma: The Quest for Spirituality. Kamya, Healing from Refugee Trauma: The Significance of Spiritual Beliefs, Faith Community, and Faith-based Services. Hargrave, Froeschle, Castillo, Forgiveness and Spirituality: Elements of Healing in Relationships. Elliott, Opening Therapy to Conversations with a Personal God. Weingarten, Stretching to Meet What’s Given: Opportunities for a Spiritual Practice. Roberts, Heart and Soul: Experiential Exercises for Therapists and Clients. Perry, Rolland, The Therapeutic Benefits of a Justice-seeking Spirituality: Empowerment, Healing, and Hope. February 2009: 412pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-022-0: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
for further books on Spirituality please see page 22
Systemic Therapy and Attachment Narratives Applications in a Range of Clinical Settings Rudi Dallos, University of Plymouth, UK, and Arlene Vetere, University of Surrey, UK “This book is a treasure and will benefit all family therapists, researchers and trainees. I learned a lot which has widened my perspectives of the field.” - John Byng-Hall,
From the Foreword
Professional interest in the clinical applications of attachment theory continues to grow and evolve, and at the same time narrative approaches are also gaining ground. This book explores how attachment-based ideas can be used in clinical practice by offering a practical and sophisticated exposition of clinical approaches. Bringing together three main systems of thought and psychotherapeutic practice – systemic theory, attachment theory and narrative theory – practitioners are shown how to use these ideas in their work through the integrated approach of ‘attachment narrative therapy’. Systemic Therapy and Attachment Narratives provides practical guidance for a range of mental health professionals enabling them to apply this approach in a range of contexts. Contents: Byng-Hall, Foreword. Introduction. Systemic Therapy and Attachment
Narratives: Guiding Framework for Formulation and Therapy. Lifecycle Transitions and Attachment Narratives. Emotion Regulation: Aggression, ADHD and Violence in Families. Love and Sexuality: Systemic Therapy and Attachment Narratives: Applications with Couples. Working with Trauma and Dissociation. Loss, Grief and Attachment. Problems of Addiction: Alcohol Dependency and Eating Distress. Formats for Exploration. Reflections and Conclusions. February 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41657-3: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41658-0: £19.99 Published by Routledge
for further books on Attachment please see page 90
parenting
65
Families in a Global Context
Edited by Charles B. Hennon, Miami University, USA, and Stephan M. Wilson, Oklahoma State University, USA How are families the same or different around the world? Families in a Global Context puts the similarities and differences into perspective, presenting an in-depth comparative analysis of family life in 17 countries around the world. Contributors discuss different countries’ family life by using a standard framework to review major influences and patterns. 2008: 624pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2707-8: £72.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-2708-5: £35.95 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Introduction to Family Processes Fifth Edition Randall D. Day, Brigham Young University, Utah, USA What goes on “behind closed doors” in families is examined in this text. Through an engaging, story telling style, Randy Day introduces readers to the family processes approach – the strategies and behavior patterns families use to achieve goals. It examines emotions in families, communication, relationship formation and dissolution, family rituals and secrets, ideological concerns, and power and conflict. October 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-761-1: £32.50 Published by Routledge
Parenting
What Every Man Should Know about Being a Dad
David Cohen, Writer, psychologist and film maker Written by psychologist and father of two, David Cohen, this book provides a guide for men on how to be a good dad and a supportive partner. Dealing directly with the key issues and the many stresses that fathers can face, it looks at the psychological research on child development, parenting and fathering in particular. It examines such thorny topics as step-fatherhood, the changing relationship between partners and sex after babies. It also offers valuable advice on problems all dads will face – how to bond, how to provide sensible discipline, learning to play and managing teenage tantrums and traumas. Written in a light and anecdotal style, this book tells men everything they need to know about being a dad. Contents: Joy. You Are Not a Spare Part Whatever Psychologists Say. Fathers Have a History. The Only True Immortality – For a Man. In at the Birth. Love at First Cry. Tensions for Parents. The Newborn Baby is No Fool. How the Baby’s Mind Develops and the Eternal Puzzle: Nature or Nurture? Sex and Personality. The Toddler’s Brain. Lies, Games and the Imagination, Oh and the Small Matter
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
parenting
66
of Big Dragons: How Children Don’t Lie Brilliantly. Sex and Young Children. The Arts and Smarts of Discipline. School. Modern Stepfamily Life. Can We See Inside the Teenage Mind? Stress and Mental Health. The Worst: Depression, Attempted Suicide, Suicide. Savvy Kids Don’t Come Cheap. Who is the Child?
couples therapy
Winner of the 2009 Smart Marriages® Impact Award!
Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style
June 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48616-3: £19.95 Pb: 978-0-415-48617-0: £8.99
Sharing, Desire, Pleasure, and Satisfaction
Series: Parent and Child Published by Routledge
Barry W. McCarthy, American University, Washington DC., USA, and Emily McCarthy, writer
Parenting with Reason
Evidence-Based Approaches to Parenting Dilemmas Esther Yoder Strahan, Heidelberg College, Germany, Wallace E. Dixon, Jr., and J. Burton Banks, both at East Tennessee State University, USA Parenting with Reason cuts through the masses of often confusing and contradictory advice found in parenting self-help books to provide a rich common-sense manual on “evidence-based parenting”. Grounded in the best research available, it provides parents with the evidence to back up the “tough parenting decisions” that they face. Written in an accessible, entertaining tone the book is ideal reading for new or prospective parents. The research is grounded in objective, scientific evidence which paediatricians and family health providers will also be able to utilize and endorse. Contents: A History of Science and Parenting Advice. Sleep and its Controversies. Breastfeeding vs. Bottle – Dilemmas in Infant Nutrition. Diet Dilemmas and Childhood Obesity. The “Mozart Effect,” Baby Einsteins, and other Media-related MythInformation. Understanding and Dealing with Temperament. Medical Decisions for the Faint of Heart. What Goes in Must Come Out: Medical Perspectives on Toilet Training. How to Discipline your Child. Violence in the Media. Parents’ Psychological Health: Effects on Children. Your Child’s Psychological Health: Nurturing Strengths and Handling Problems. Neuropsychology for Parents: ADHD and Head Injuries. Parenting Adolescents: Handling the Transitions from Childhood to Adulthood. Children, Family Structure, and Life Choices.
September 2009: 348pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41328-2: £34.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41329-9: £9.99
“Once again the McCarthy’s have created a classic, easy to read, and relevant guide to a great sex life that is tailored to your personal style and taste. Great insights, compelling stories and fun exercises make this a must read book.” - Dr. Sue Johnson, author of Becoming an Emotionally Focused Couple Therapist: The Workbook, and The Practice of Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy: Creating Connection
The quality of most couple sex doesn’t measure up to the much distorted image of the perfect romantic love/passionate sex encounter portrayed in popular culture. In Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style renowned marital and sex therapist Barry McCarthy and his wife Emily McCarthy urge couples to ignore what they see on TV, in books, or online, and discover their own unique sexual style. Based on three years of research and treating more than 4,000 individuals and couples, Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style provides information, guidelines, exercises, and case studies that will help readers find their own sexual voice and develop a mutually satisfying sexual style. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Developing a Healthy Couple Sexuality.
Establishing Positive, Realistic Sexual Expectations. Determining Your Couple Sexual Style. Communicating Your Sexuality: The Five Dimensions of Touch. Successfully Implementing Your Couple Sexual Style. Part II: Enhancing Desire and Satisfaction. Keeping Your Sexual Options Open. Building Bridges to Desire. Indulging in Eroticism and Sexual Fantasies. Optimizing Sexual Intercourse. Savoring Orgasm and Afterplay. Part III: Surmounting Sexual Challenges. Overcoming Sexual Inhibitions. Dealing with Illness and Sex. Looking for Help from Pro-sex Medications. Confronting Sex and Aging. Part IV: Maintaining Healthy Couple Sexuality. Nurturing Sexuality as Intimate, Erotic Friends. Maintaining Sexual Vitality. Appendices. March 2009: 152pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99469-9: £9.99
Series: Parent and Child
Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/barry-mccarthy
The Parent Survival Guide
From Chaos to Harmony in Ten Weeks or Less Theresa Kellam, in private practice, Texas, USA In The Parent Survival Guide, Theresa Kellam presents a way to strengthen the relationship with the child that simultaneously promotes the parent’s own emotional healing and wellness. Through a series of guided exercises, Kellam gives parents the skills they need to participate in special playtimes with their children that promote emotional health, growth, and communication.
Also by Barry and Emily McCarthy Bestseller! Rekindling Desire: A Step-by-Step Program to Help Low-Sex and No-Sex Marriages Pb: 978-0-415-93551-7: 2003: 224pp. £12.50
Getting it Right This Time: How to Create a Loving and Lasting Marriage Pb: 978-0-415-95169-2: 2005: 224pp. £11.00
Getting It Right the First Time: Creating a Healthy Marriage Pb: 978-0-415-94829-6: 2004: 232pp. £14.95
2008: 264pp. Pb: 978-0-415-98934-3: £14.95 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
couples therapy
Forthcoming!
A Therapist at Work with Sexual Secrets
Focus. Trepper, Reyger, Yalowitz, Ford, Solution-Focused Brief Therapy for the Treatment of Sexual Disorders. Weeks, Gambescia, Hertlein, Sex Therapy: A Panoramic View. Epilogue: A Personal Note on Being a Sex Therapist. February 2009: 423pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3668-1: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3669-8: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Gale Holtz Golden, in private practice, Vermont, USA
In the Grip of Desire
In the Grip of Desire gives both the professional and lay reader the rare opportunity to experience the sequestered world of the therapist as she works with people who have sexual secrets and behaviors. Referencing the academic literature and research, using rich case material, and a broad use of literary references, the book unpretentiously demonstrates the basic concepts and issues in treating compelling and legal sexual behaviors. The book also offers a uniquely jargon-free, human view of the subject. Golden compassionately and non-judgmentally speaks to the universality of the experience of sexual obsessions and compelling sexual behaviors and their impact on relationships, families, and society. Contents: Introduction. Above All Do No Harm. Transparent. The Dance of Denial and the Silent Dialogue. Anamnesis: Past History in Present Time. Treatment: A Time for Thinking and a Time for Action. “I Sing the Body Electric:” Techno-sex in the Post-Modern World. Some Call it Love: Women and the Need for Connection. Stabilizing the Family System. Rapprochement and Relapses: “There is Still a Future.” “Cradlers of Secrets.”
July 2009: 262pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99157-5: £24.99 Published by Routledge
67
Systemic Sex Therapy Edited by Katherine M. Hertlein, and Gerald R. Weeks, both at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, USA, and Nancy Gambescia, in private practice, Philadelphia, USA
Systemic Sex Therapy serves as an introduction to the field of sex therapy from a systems perspective. It is an excellent resource for graduate students in marriage and family therapy programs or students and professionals who want a truly fresh perspective on sex therapy. This approach moves beyond traditional behavioral approaches to incorporate individual, couple, and intergenerational factors in etiology and treatment. Unlike current books on the market that are outdated, too advanced, simplistic, unfocused, or too diffuse in content, Systemic Sex Therapy is comprehensive, concise, highly focused on treatment, user-friendly, and contains features not found in other sex therapy texts, such as a systemic/behavioral focus, clinical innovation, and a greater focus on implementation rather than competing works. Contents: Ridley, What Every Sex Therapist Needs to Know. Kleinplatz, The Profession of Sex Therapy. Hertlein, Weeks, Toward a New Paradigm in Sex Therapy. Weeks, Hertlein, Gambescia, The Treatment of Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder. Gambescia, Sendak, Weeks, The Treatment of Erectile Dysfunction. Betchen, Premature Ejaculation: An Integrative, Intersystems Approach for Couples. Foley, The Complex Etiology of Delayed Ejaculation: Assessment and Treatment Implications. Wylie, Hallam-Jones, Inhibited Arousal in Women. McCabe, Anorgasmia in Women. Meana, Painful Intercourse: Dyspareunia and Vaginismus. Turner, Uncovering and Treating Sex Addiction in Couples Therapy. Hertlein, Weeks, Gambescia, An Integrative Approach to Infidelity Treatment. Verhulst, Reynolds, Sexual Pharmacology: Love Potions, Pills, and Poisons. Weeks, Gambescia, A Systemic Approach to Sensate
Companion Volume to Systemic Sex Therapy!
A Clinician’s Guide to Systemic Sex Therapy Katherine M. Hertlein, and Gerald R. Weeks, both at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, USA, and Shelley K. Sendak, teaches courses in women’s studies, women’s sexuality, and sexual minority health A Clinician’s Guide to Systemic Sex Therapy provides readers with an integrative and comprehensive theory in guiding their clinical practice. Pragmatically oriented, this text walks clinicians through diagnosis and treatment with resources such as tables, graphs, flow charts, and implementation strategies. Acknowledging that information needs to be guided by a theory that can be translated into practice, the authors use the Intersystems approach to provide a comprehensive perspective in understanding and improving intimate and sexual relationships for clients. Contents: Conducting Sex Therapy Step-by-Step from an Intersystems Approach. The Intersystems Approach to Sex Therapy. Assessment Within the Intersystems Approach. Step-by-step Diagnosis of Sexual Dysfunctions. Case Formulation. Treatment Principles, Strategies, and Techniques. Factors Complicating Treatment. Working with Particular Populations. Practical Issues and Resources for Sex Therapy. Practice and Ethical Issues. Formalized Assessments and Inventories in Sex Therapy. Handouts, Exercises, and Worksheets. Psychoeducational Resources in Sex Therapy. April 2009: 193pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3822-7: £38.99 Pb: 978-0-7890-3823-4: £16.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Premature Ejaculation The New Neuroscientific and Drug Treatment Approach Marcel Waldinger, General Hospital, Leyenburg, The Netherlands Marcel Waldinger is one of the leading PE researchers in the world, and a staunch proponent of the neurobiological origin theory of the disorder. Based on his own research, findings, and experience, Dr. Waldinger carefully examines the current PE literature, existing theory, and treatment strategies (both behavioral and the recent psycho-pharmacological), before presenting his own theory of the basis of PE. After presenting the multidisciplinary support of his theory, the author considers future treatment strategies and the implications of current pharmaceutical research and impending products. Selected Contents: What is Premature Ejaculation? Psychotherapy of Premature Ejaculation. Definition and Classification of Premature Ejaculation. Drug Treatment of Premature Ejaculation. Neuropharmacology of Premature Ejaculation. Animal Models of Premature Ejaculation. Physiology of Ejaculation. July 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95163-0: £37.95 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
couples therapy
68
Clinical Handbook of Couple Therapy
Doing Couple Therapy
Fourth Edition
Craft and Creativity in Work with Intimate Partners
Edited by Alan S. Gurman, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, USA “Gurman has been the leading authority on couple therapy as the field has matured over the past three decades. The fourth edition of this classic Handbook presents the wide array of approaches that have been developed... This text is indispensable for clinical training and practice.” - Froma Walsh, University of Chicago, and Codirector, Chicago Center for Family Health, USA
Lauded as “the definitive handbook of couple therapy,” this authoritative work provides a definitive overview of the major models of couple therapy and their clinical applications. In the newly revised and expanded fourth edition, leaders in the field describe the history, theoretical and empirical underpinnings, and methods of each approach. The treatment of specific problems and populations is then addressed, complete with detailed illustrations of therapeutic strategies and techniques. Designed for optimal utility as a practical reference and text, the fourth edition is revised throughout with clinical, conceptual, and research advances. Contents: Gurman, A Framework for the Comparative Study of Couple Therapy: History, Models, and Applications. Part I: Models of Couple Therapy. Behavioral Approaches. Baucom, Epstein, LaTaillade, Kirby, CognitiveBehavioral Couple Therapy. Dimidjian, Martell, Christensen, Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy. Humanistic-existential Approaches. Johnson, Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy. J. M. Gottman, J. S. Gottman, Gottman Method Couple Therapy. Psychodynamic and Transgenerational Approaches. J. Scharff, D. Scharff, Object Relations Couple Therapy. Roberto-Forman, Transgenerational Couple Therapy. Social Constructionist Approaches. Freedman, Combs, Narrative Couple Therapy. Hoyt, Solutionfocused Couple Therapy. Systemic Approaches. Shoham, Rohrbaugh, Cleary, Brief Strategic Couple Therapy. Simon, Structural Couple Therapy. Integrative Approaches. Snyder, Mitchell, Affective-reconstructive Couple Therapy: A Pluralistic, Developmental Approach. Gurman, Integrative Couple Therapy: A Depth-behavioral Approach. Part II: Applications of Couple Therapy: Special Populations, Problems, and Issues. Rupture and Repair of Relational Bonds: Affairs, Divorce, Violence, and Remarriage. Gordon, Baucom, Snyder, Dixon, Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Affairs. Lebow, Separation and Divorce Issues in Couple Therapy. O’Leary, Couple Therapy and Physical Aggression. Bray, Couple Therapy with Remarried Partners. Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Psychiatric and Medical Disorders. Birchler, Fals-Stewart, O’Farrell, Couple Therapy for Alcoholism and Drug Abuse. Beach, Dreifuss, Franklin, Kamen, Gabriel, Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Depression. Fruzzetti, Fantozzi, Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Borderline Personality and Related Disorders. McCarthy, Thestrup, Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Sexual Dysfunction. Ruddy, McDaniel, Couple Therapy and Medical Issues: Working with Couples Facing Illness. Couple Therapy in Broader Context. Knudson-Martin, Gender Issues in the Practice of Couple Therapy. Green, Mitchell, Gay and Lesbian Couples in Therapy: Minority Stress, Relational Ambiguity, and Families of Choice. Boyd-Franklin, Kelly, Durham, African American Couples in Therapy. Gottlieb, Lasser, Simpson, Legal and Ethical Issues in Couple Therapy.
2008: 736pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-821-6: £57.50 Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Robert Taibbi, in private practice, Charlottesville, USA “A gift for seasoned therapists and beginners alike... In very clear, engaging writing, Taibbi presents a comprehensive, integrated model of couple treatment... Despite specializing in couples work for the past 20 years, I found Taibbi’s approach compelling and refreshing.” - David Treadway, in private practice, Weston,
Massachusetts, USA
Wise, compassionate, and highly practical, this engaging text covers the entire process of therapeutic work with couples, from opening sessions and assessment through skills building, addressing core issues, and termination. Students and novice couple therapists learn effective strategies for intervening with couples of any age who are struggling with acute crises or longstanding conflicts and power struggles. Rich with sensitive, detailed case material, the book features numerous exercises that help readers identify and develop their own strengths as practitioners. Self-care strategies and tips for getting the most out of supervision are provided. Contents: Into the Fray: Theoretical Foundation and Overview. The Basics: Clinical Goals and Tasks. Beginnings: Presentations, Assessments, and Goals. Beginnings in Action. Clearing the Clutter: Improving Communication Skills. Drilling Down: Core Issues. Termination. Of Money, Sex, and Children: Handling the Power Issues. The Challenges of the Early Years. Re-creating the Vision. Battle and Loss: Managing the Teenage Years. One Big Happy Family: Working with Stepfamilies. The Challenges of Old Age. One Helping Two, Two Helping One: Working with Individuals in Relationships. Life in the Details: The Nuts and Bolts of Couple Therapy.
June 2009: 276pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-244-6: £24.00
The Guilford Family Therapy Series Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Common Dilemmas in Couples Therapy Judith P. Leavitt, psychologist and co-founder at Sundance Counseling and Consulting, Wayland, Massachusetts, USA Common Dilemmas in Couples Therapy addresses four common problems that couples therapists face everyday in their offices, problems that leave therapists exhausted, drained, challenged, alive, racing, and on edge. These dilemmas encompass not only the difficult challenges therapists face everyday, but also the passions and profound disappointments of human intimate partnerships. The purpose of this book is not only to explore and give case illustrations of these dilemmas, but also to give therapists strategies to use and help them understand and handle their own profound experiences while doing this work. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Dealing with a Difficult Partner. Part II: Secrets in Couples Therapy. Part III: Dealing with a Partner Who Won’t/Can’t Change. Part IV: The Break Up of a Couple Relationship.
October 2009: 214pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99990-8: £38.99 Pb: 978-0-415-80001-3: £19.50 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
couples therapy
The Spiritual Work of Marriage
David C. Olsen, Executive Director, Samaritan Counseling Center, USA
Denise Cullington, psychoanalyst, in private practice, Oxford, UK “A wise and practical book for managing heartbreak and change.” - Dorothy Rowe Breaking Up Blues is an indispensable, practical self-help book for those going through break-up and divorce. Leaver or left, breaking up is much more painful than you’d ever expect. There are so many pitfalls that can leave you stuck in bitterness and rage, emotional emptiness, or in endless depression. Time on its own does not necessarily heal all. Written by a psychoanalyst, who has her own experience of break up, Denise Cullington is sympathetic but challenging. She takes you gently but firmly through the areas we would rather not think about – feelings of failure and of guilt; of hatred and envy; of sadness and loss – and shows the cost of pushing such feelings out of conscious mind.
The Spiritual Work of Marriage comprehensively discusses an issue that is central to addressing committed relationships and intimacy – the difficult, and yet very common, spiritual work that exists within marriage. This insightful guide goes deeper into ways to improve marital intimacy by explaining its spiritual dimension and describing a variety of spiritual themes that every couple deals with and must resolve. The book contains practical case study material, questions for group discussion, and a series of spiritual and theological theories tied to powerful marital dynamics. Contents: Introduction. The Longing to be Known. The Idolatry of
Attempting to Change Your Partner. The Sins of the Fathers and the Longing for Redemption. Repentance and Relationships: You Really Do Have to Say “I’m Sorry.” Intimacy and Forgiveness. Salvation, Marriage, and Grace.
2008: 112pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3632-2: £25.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3633-9: £12.95 Published by Routledge
for further books on Spirituality please see page 22
69
Helping Couples Get Past the Affair A Clinician’s Guide
Donald H. Baucom, University of North Carolina, USA, Douglas K. Snyder, Texas A&M University, USA, and Kristina Coop Gordon, University of Tennessee, USA “This book offers a lucid, fascinating, and muchneeded map to the difficult terrain of affairs: how they occur and how to deal with them. It is comprehensive and full of clinical examples. Clinicians everywhere will find this book invaluable.” - Susan M. Johnson, University of Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
From leading marital therapists and researchers, this unique book presents a three-stage therapy approach for clinicians working with couples struggling in the aftermath of infidelity. The book provides empirically grounded strategies for helping clients overcome the initial shock, understand what happened and why, think clearly about their best interests before they act, and move on emotionally, whether or not they ultimately reconcile. The volume is loaded with vivid clinical examples and carefully designed exercises for use both during sessions and at home. Contents: Part I: Preparing for Treatment. Conceptualizing an Integrative Treatment for Affair Couples. Initial Assessment and Formulation. Creating a Therapeutic Environment. Part II: Stage 1 of Treatment. Damage Control. Restoring Equilibrium. Addressing Emotional Upheaval. Part III: Stage 2 of Treatment. Preparing the Couple to Examine Contributing Factors. Examining Relationship Factors. Examining Outside Factors. Examining Individual Partner Factors. Complex Affairs. Tying It All Together: Creating a Formulation of How the Affair Occurred. Part IV: Stage 3 of Treatment. Addressing Issues of Forgiveness and Barriers to Moving Forward. Moving Forward. Concluding Comments.
April 2009: 368pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-067-1: £25.95 Published by Guilford Press
Breaking Up Blues A Guide to Survival and Growth
selected Contents: Part I: Prelude to Break Up. Part II: The Trauma of Breakup. Part III: Toolkits. Part IV: Emotional Toolkit. Part V: Children. Part VI: A Wider Focus. Part VII: The Future.
2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45546-6: £40.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45547-3: £9.99 Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/breaking-up-blues
Intercultural Couples Exploring Diversity in Intimate Relationships
Edited by Terri A. Karis, University of Wisconsin-Stout, USA, and Kyle D. Killian, York University, Toronto, Canada While cross-cultural relations were once assumed to be inherently problematic, in recent years these couples have increased in both numbers and social acceptance, and there is now a growing awareness of how little we really know about them. Addressing this gap in our knowledge, this book presents 12 chapters focusing on cross-cultural couple formations. Contents: Killian, Introduction. Theoretical Frameworks for Understanding Intercultural Couples. Rosenblatt, A Systems Theory Analysis of Intercultural Couple Relationships. Leeds-Horwitz, Ambiguity as a Solution to the “Problem” of Intercultural Weddings. Ting-Toomey, A Mindful Approach to Managing Conflict in Intercultural Intimate Couples. Examining Prevalent Assumptions about Intercultural Relationships. Piller, “I Always Wanted to Marry a Cowboy”: Bilingual Couples, Language, and Desire. Grearson, Smith, The Luckiest Girls in the World. Karis, “We’re Just a Couple of People”: An Exploration of Why Some Black-White Couples Reject the Terms Cross-cultrual and Interracial. Agathangelou, Killian, Electronic Attachments: Desire, the Other, and the Internet Marital Trade in the 21st Century. Particular Cultural Combinations. Visson, Russian-American Marriages: Cultures and Conflicts. Llerena-Quinn, Bacigalupe, Constructions of Difference Among Latino/Latina Immigrant and Non-Hispanic White Couples. Rastogi, Asian Indians in Intercultural Marriages: Intersections of Acculturation, Gender, and Exogamy. Daneshpour, Bridges Crossed, Paths Traveled: Muslim Intercultural Couples. Gaines, Ramkissoon, U.S./Caribbean Couples: Perspectives from Caribbean Psychology and Mainstream Social Psychology.
February 2009: 274pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2939-3: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-2940-9: £21.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
psychoanalysis
couples therapy
70
Married Women Who Love Women
Second Edition Carren Strock, sociologist and author This book is about women in heterosexual marriages who discover or come to terms with their lesbianism or bisexuality. It answers questions such as how women make this discovery, what they do once they realize their same-gender sexuality, how family and friends deal with the situation, and what happens to marriages and families. This second edition contains a new introduction, three new chapters, a glossary of gay-related terms, and a new list of additional reading. Contents: New Introduction. Original Introduction. Part I: The Discovery. Awakening. What Am I? What Now? Part II: A New Life. Do I Tell My Husband or Not? The Husbands. What Do the Kids Think? Coming Out to Friends and Family. Part III: Options. The Reality of Marriage. Redefined Marriages. The Single Lovers of Married Women. Labeling: Lesbian or Bisexual. Part IV: Selfhood. Sexual Intimacy. New Beginnings. Appendix: Where to Turn for Help and Information. Glossary: Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Terminology.
2008: 231pp. Hb: 978-1-56023-790-7: £37.50 Pb: 978-1-56023-791-4: £15.50 Published by Routledge
When the Opposite Sex Isn’t
The Infinite Question
Christopher Bollas, Psychoanalyst, Member of the British Psychoanalytical Society, UK In his latest book Christopher Bollas uses detailed studies of real clinical practice to illuminate a theory of psychoanalysis which privileges the human impulse to question. From earliest childhood to the end of our lives, we are driven by this impulse in its varying forms, and The Infinite Question illustrates how Freud’s free associative method provides both patient and analyst with answers and, in turn, with an ongoing interplay of further questions. At the book’s core are transcripts of real analytical sessions, accompanied by parallel commentaries which highlight key aspects of the free associative method in practice. These transcripts are contextualised by further discussion of the cases themselves, as well as a wider theoretical framework which places its emphasis on Freud’s theory of the logic of sequence: by learning to listen to this free associative logic, Bollas argues, we can discover a richer and more complex unconscious voice than if we rely solely on Freud’s theory of repressed ideas. Bollas demonstrates, in an eloquent and persuasive manner, how the Freudian position of evenly suspended attentiveness enables the analyst’s unconscious to catch the drift of the patient’s own unconscious. He also shows that to stimulate further questioning is often of more benefit to the analytical process than to jump to an interpretation. Yet whatever fascinating course a session may take, neither the patient nor the analyst can halt the progress of the selfpropelling interrogative drive.
Sexual Orientation in Maleto-Female Transgender People
Contents: Introduction. This World Without End. A Specially Intrinsic Connection. Weaving in the Factory of Thought. Listening. To Catch the Drift. Scoring the Unconscious. ‘Arlene’. ‘Caroline’. ‘Annie’. Unconscious Work. The Infinite Question. Appendix.
Sandra L. Samons, licensed clinical social worker and marriage and family therapist
2008: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47391-0: £40.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47392-7: £12.99
“When the Opposite Sex Isn’t is unlike typical psychological accounts. Instead of cramming trans individuals into pre-existing etiological theories and taxonomies, Samons provides insights into transgender people’s lives and includes numerous helpful anecdotes that demystify their experience.” - Julia Serano, author of Whipping Girl: A Transsexual Woman on Sexism and the Scapegoating of Feminity
When there is uncertainty about the gender identity or social gender role of an individual, determining exactly who the opposite sex is can be a complicated question for both the transgender person and for those who seek to relate to her. Written in both an enlightened and a reader friendly style interspersed with vignettes, When the Opposite Sex Isn’t offers a combination of insights and common sense understanding of the diversity of the human condition together with concepts of gender and sexuality that expand the horizons of any mental health professional, regardless of the clinical focus of his or her work. Contents: Introduction. Beyond Vocabulary. Sex and Gender. The Birth of the Research Project at Hand. Findings About Sexual Orientation in MTF Transgender People. Approaches to Therapy With Transgender Clients. Transgender Children and Transgender Parents. Wives and Partners. Some Further Comments on Transgender and Findings of the Current Research. Where Do We Go From Here? Appendices.
2008: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3446-5: £52.99 Pb: 978-0-7890-3447-2: £27.99 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
Companion Volume to The Infinite Question!
The Evocative Object World Christopher Bollas, Psychoanalyst, Member of the British Psychoanalytical Society, UK Containing the essay Free Association In The Evocative Object World Christopher Bollas builds on Freud’s account of dream formation, combining it with perceptive clinical, theoretical and cultural insights to show how the psychoanalytical method can provide a rich understanding of what has traditionally been regarded as ‘the outside world’. Moving from the fundamentals of the free associative technique, through an examination of how architecture and the built environment interact with individual and societal dream life, Bollas extends the work of psychoanalysis beyond relations with literature and culture to the actual objects which surround us. As with the evocative external structures of our environment, Bollas describes how the family, with its inherited genetic structures, likewise constitutes a pre-existent unconscious formation into which we are placed, and demonstrates that there is more to this multifaceted unit than the traditional psychoanalytical notion of the Oedipal triangle.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
psychoanalysis In the process, Bollas also provides a fascinating and comprehensive review of how his own theories have evolved over the past three decades: a period during which, in his view, Western society has increasingly neglected – or even become actively hostile towards – unconscious life.
2008: 136pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47393-4: £40.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47394-1: £12.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Containing States of Mind Exploring Bion’s ‘Container Model’ in Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy Duncan Cartwright, University of Kwa-Zulu Natal, South Africa “Bion’s concept of the “container and the contained” has become one of his most well-known and used ideas – to the point that it has become taken for granted (“saturated,” in Bion’s terms). Duncan Cartwright has given this concept new life... A number of works on Bion have been published recently, this one is in my opinion one of the finest and most useful.” - James Grotstein, Training and Supervising
Gemma Corradi Fiumara, The Third University of Rome, Italy “Dr. Corradi Fiumara seeks to lift psychoanalytic thinking from the creature-driven level of psychic determinism to the higher level of subjective, spontaneous, ineffability, unpredictability, humanness – as metapsychological constructs. I found this to be an exciting and innovative work.” - James Grotstein, author of Beam of Intense Darkness
Psychoanalytic theory frequently explains psychopathology from the perspectives of either inadequate early care or as the result of environmental factors. In this book the author suggests that poor mental health can be a result of our incapacity to respond to internal and external stimuli, and indicates that spontaneity is essential in the development of many aspects of the self. It is not what happens to us, but how we react to events, that forms who we are. Spontaneity presents an original approach to issues of agency, spontaneity and creativity in psychoanalysis. Contents: Introductory Remarks. Rethinking Internalization. The Function of Paradox. Subjective Agency – And Passivity. The Problem of Entitlement. Actions and Reactions. The Question of Forgiveness. The Quest of Responsibility. Empathy and Sympathy. Self Formation and Self Decreation.
March 2009: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-49268-3: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49269-0: £22.99 Published by Routledge
As well as addressing key theoretical problems, Containing States of Mind is a clinical text that renders complex ideas accessible and useful for psychotherapeutic and analytic practice and as such will be essential reading for all those involved in the fields of psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Contents: Encountering Unbearable States of Mind. Projective Identification, Countertransference and the Containing Function. The Analyst’s Containing Mind. Polarities of the Containing Connection. Notes on Interpretation. Speculations About Proto-containing Experiences. Modes of Interaction. Idealizing the Container. Some Aspects of Beta-mentality on Mimicry and Thinking in a Technological Age. Beta-mentality in Violent Men. The Autistic Mode in Agoraphobic Syndrome. The Dead Alive Self in Borderline States.
August 2009: 280pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-878-4: £60.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-879-1: £22.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Thinking for Clinicians Philosophical Resources for Contemporary Psychoanalysis and the Humanistic Psychotherapies
Analyst and Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, UCLA, USA
In Containing States of Mind Duncan Cartwright explores and develops some of the implications Bion’s container model has on clinical practice. He argues that the analyst or therapist best fulfils a containing function by negotiating irreconcilable internal tensions between his role as ‘dream object’ and ‘proper object’. The container model is also used to illustrate different ‘modes of interaction’ in the analytic field, the nature of particular pathological states and some of the key dilemmas faced in attempting to make unbearable mental states more bearable.
Spontaneity A Psychoanalytic Inquiry
Throughout this engaging and accessible text, Bollas rejects the simplistic notion that mental life is unconsciously determined. Instead he provides a compelling study of how unconscious life is shaped by a diverse array of both internal and external factors, and how the work of the Freudian pair provides the best means to gain insight into our dreams, our surroundings, our families – and our mental life as a whole. Contents: Introduction. Free Association. Architecture and the Unconscious. The Evocative Object World. The Fourth Object and Beyond.
71
Donna M. Orange, Institute for the Psychoanalytic Study of Subjectivity, New York, USA Whether they are supervisees entering analytic training or veteran analysts with twenty years of private practice, many capable psychoanalysts express frustration or doubt when trying to locate their work within the vast, sometimes intimidating realm of clinical theory. To that end, Thinking for Clinicians aims to provide analysts of all shapes and sizes with the tools and context for working critically within psychoanalytic theory and practice. It does this by familiarizing the reader not only with the philosophical backgrounds of the pioneers of psychoanalysis and other humanistic psychotherapies, but also through detailed chapters on some of the thinkers whose work is especially relevant for contemporary theoretical and clinical writing. Contents: Introduction: Psychotherapy in a Socratic Spirit. Martin Buber: The Dialogic We. Ludwig Wittgenstein: Nothing is Hidden. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: Embodied Intersubjectivity. Emmanuel Levinas: Trauma in the Face of the Other. Hans-Georg Gadamer: Understanding the Situation with the Other.
October 2009: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-492-1: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-493-8: £18.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
psychoanalysis
72
Beyond Postmodernism
New Dimensions in Clinical Theory and Practice Edited by Roger Frie, Long Island University, New York, USA, and Donna Orange, Institute for the Psychoanalytic Study of Subjectivity, New York, USA Beyond Postmodernism identifies ways in which psychoanalysis has moved beyond the postmodern debate and discusses how this can be applied to contemporary practice. Roger Frie and Donna Orange bring together many of the leading authorities on psychoanalytic theory and practice to provide a broad scope of psychoanalytic viewpoints and perspectives on the growing interdisciplinary discourse among psychoanalysis, continental philosophy, social theory and philosophy of mind. Contents: Frie, Introduction: Coherence or Fragmentation? Modernism,
Postmodernism, and the Search for Continuity. Part I: Psychoanalytic Encounters with Postmodernism. Eagle, Postmodern Influences on Contemporary Psychoanalysis. Frederickson, Multiplicity and Relational Psychoanalysis: A Heideggerian Response. Teicholz, A Strange Convergence: Postmodern Theory, Infant Research, and Psychoanalysis. Wilkinson, Primary Process of Deconstruction: Towards a Derridian Psychotherapy. Part II: Psychoanalysis Beyond Postmodernism. Orange, Toward the Art of the Living Dialogue: Between Constructivism and Hermeneutics in Psychoanalytic Thinking. Stolorow, Trauma and Human Existence: The Mutual Enrichment of Heidegger’s Existential Analytic and a Psychoanalytic Understanding of Trauma. Frie, Reconfiguring Psychological Agency: Postmodernism, Recursivity, and the Politics of Change. Coburn, Attitudes in Psychoanalytic Complexity: An Alternative to Postmodernism in Psychoanalysis. Elliott, Identity, Identification, Imagination: Psychoanalysis and Modern European Thought after the Postmodern Turn. Modell, Naturalizing Relational Psychoanalytic Theory. Orange, Postscript: From Postmodern Skepticism to the Search for Psychoanalytic Understanding. January 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46687-5: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46688-2: £22.99 Published by Routledge
NeuroAnalysis
Bridging the Gap Between Neuroscience, Psychoanalysis and Psychiatry Avi Peled, Shaar-Menashe Mental Health Centre, Israel NeuroAnalysis investigates using the neural network and neural computation models to bridge the divide between psychology, psychoanalysis, and neuroscience when diagnosing mental health disorders and prescribing treatment. Avi Peled builds on Freud’s early attempts to explain the neural basis of mental health by introducing neural computation as a bridging science to explain psychiatric disorders. Peled describes the brain as a complex system of interconnected units and goes on to suggest that conscious experience, feelings, and mood are emergent properties arising from these complex organisations. 2008: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45132-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45133-8: £20.99 Published by Routledge
How to Talk to a Narcissist
Joan Lachkar, in private practice, California, USA Much has been written about narcissism, addressing not only its theoretical aspects, its psychodynamics and the defense mechanisms within the spectrum of various kinds of narcissists. Yet, little if anything has been written about how to actually communicate with one, or what Lachkar refers to as the “Language of Empathology.” This book focuses on specific communication styles in addressing patients with severe narcissistic personality pathology. 2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95855-4: £26.95 Published by Routledge
Building Out into the Dark Theory and Observation in Science and Psychoanalysis
Robert Caper, University of California, Los Angeles, USA In this book, Robert Caper provides the reader with an introduction to psychoanalysis focusing explicitly on whether psychoanalysis is part of the sciences, and if not, where it belongs. Many psychoanalysts, beginning with Freud, have considered their discipline a science. In this book Caper examines this claim and investigates the relationship of theory to observation in both philosophy and the experimental sciences and explores how these observations differ from those made in psychoanalytic interpretation. Contents: Introduction. Psychoanalysis and Science. Psychoanalysis and Science: Rules and Games. The Origins of Psychoanalysis in the Art of Medicine. Psychoanalytic Observation. Room for Doubt. Psychoanalytic Reasoning: Finding the Context. Terror and the Archaic Superego. Psychoanalysis, the Individual and the Group. Psychoanalytic Work.
2008: 120pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46680-6: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46681-3: £18.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
The Zen Impulse and the Psychoanalytic Encounter Paul C. Cooper, Dean of Training, National Psychological Association for Psychoanalysis Although psychoanalysis and Zen Buddhism derive from theoretical and philosophical assumptions worlds apart, both experientially-based traditions share at their heart a desire for the understanding, development, and growth of the human experience. Paul Cooper utilizes detailed clinical vignettes to contextualize the implications of Zen Buddhism in the therapeutic setting to demonstrate how its practices and beliefs inform, relate to, and enhance transformative psychoanalytic practice.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
psychoanalysis The basic concepts of Zen, such as the identity of the relative and the absolute and the foundational principles of emptiness and dependentarising, are given special attention as they relate to the psychoanalytic concepts of the unconscious and its processes, transference and countertransference, formulations of self, and more.
A Journey of Self-Discovery Danielle Quinodoz, in private practice, Geneva, Switzerland Translated by David Alcorn
Published by Routledge
Mirroring and Attunement Self-Realization in Psychoanalysis and Art
Kenneth Wright, in private psychoanalytic practice, Suffolk, UK “This lucidly written account of seminal concepts from Bion, Stern, Winnicott, brings them vividly to life through being integrated into an interdisciplinary work that incorporates ideas from art, poetry, and philosophy and makes it recommended reading for practitioners and students of psychoanalysis and psychotherapy.” - Ann Casement, Fellow of the Royal Anthropological Institute, UK
Mirroring and Attunement offers a new approach to psychoanalysis, artistic creation and religion. Viewing these activities from a broadly relational perspective, Wright proposes that each provides a medium for creative dialogue: the artist discovers himself within his self-created forms, the religious person through an internal dialogue with ‘God’, and the analysand through the inter-subjective medium of the analysis. Building on the work of Winnicott, Stern and Langer, the author argues that each activity is rooted in the infant’s preverbal relationship with the mother who ‘holds’ the emerging self in an ambience of mirroring forms, thereby providing a ‘place’ for the self to ‘be’. He suggests that the need for subjective reflection persists throughout the life cycle and that psychoanalysis, artistic creation and religion can be seen as cultural attempts to provide the self with resonant containment. April 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46829-9: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46830-5: £22.99 Published by Routledge
The Dead Father A Psychoanalytic Inquiry
Edited by Lila J. Kalinich, Columbia University Psychoanalytic Center, New York, USA, and Stuart W. Taylor, Columbia College, New York, USA This book constructs a much needed framework to allow psychoanalysts to consider the difficulties of a generation without a solid anchor in the Father. The Dead Father provides a necessary addition to decades of work on the role of the mother in development. The editors bring together world renowned scholars to discuss current observations in their fields. 2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44994-6: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44995-3: £21.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Growing Old
March 2010: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99764-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99765-2: £21.99
73
In this book psychoanalyst Danielle Quinodoz highlights the value of old age and the fact that although many elderly people have suffered losses, either of their own good health or through bereavement, most have managed to retain the most important thing – their sense of self. Quinodoz argues that growing old provides us with the opportunity to learn more about ourselves and instead of facing it with dread, it should be celebrated. Throughout Growing Old the author draws on both her clinical experience of working with the elderly, and her own personal experience of growing old. This makes it an interesting read for both practicing psychoanalysts, and those who wish to gain a greater insight of the natural progression into later life. October 2009: 264pp. Hb: 978-0-415-54565-5: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54566-2: £14.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
The Gendered Unconscious Can Gender Discourses Subvert Psychoanalysis? Louise Gyler, in private practice, Sydney, Australia Feminist interventions in psychoanalysis have often attempted either to subvert or re-frame the masculinist and phallocentric biases of Freud’s psychoanalysis. This book investigates the nature of these interventions by comparing the status and treatment of women in two different psychoanalytic models: the Kleinian and the feminist psychoanalytic models. July 2009: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40170-8: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40171-5: £14.95
Series: Women and Psychology Published by Routledge
Maternal Encounters The Ethics of Interruption Lisa Baraitser, Birkbeck, University of London, UK “This is an extremely unusual, subtle and important book... Maternal Encounters is a remarkable achievement.” - Stephen Frosh, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK
Motherhood can catapult us into a state of internal disarray, whilst it can also provide us with a unique chance to make ourselves anew. How then do we understand this radical potential for transformation in maternal experience?
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
psychoanalysis
74
In Maternal Encounters, Baraitser takes up this question through the analysis of a series of maternal anecdotes, charting key destabilizing moments in the life of one mother, and using these as key points through which to think through questions of female subjectivity, relationality, ethics and otherness.
The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series www.routledgementalhealth.com/nlp/teachingseries.asp
Routledge Recommends!
2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45500-8: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45501-5: £14.95
Reading French Psychoanalysis
Series: Women and Psychology
Edited by Dana Birksted-Breen, and Sara Flanders, both Training and Supervising Analysts, British Psychoanalytical Society, and Alain Gibeault, Training and Supervising Analyst, Paris Psychoanalytical Society
Published by Routledge
for further books in this series please see pages 93, 96
The Secret Language of Intimacy
Releasing the Hidden Power in Couple Relationships Robert G. Lee, in private practice, Boston, USA “Every therapist will work more thoughtfully and creatively after they read The Secret Language of Intimacy. This book helped me think more clearly to develop an attitude of interest, acceptance and possibility – even for the most despairing of couples.” - Lynne Jacobs, Co-founder, Pacific
Gestalt Institute, USA
In The Secret Language of Intimacy, shame and its consequences are foregrounded as a major, if not the major, impediment to the healthy functioning in the relationships of couples. In the first part of the book, Robert Lee presents the “Secret Language of Intimacy Workshop,” developed and presented for the first time at the 1998 Annual Conference of the Association for the Advancement of Gestalt Therapy. Lee not only describes how the hidden forces of shame and belonging regulate couple dynamics, but also how the workshop itself has facilitated the acceptance of these forces and promoted therapeutic resolution, utilizing clinical vignettes. Contents: Part I: The Secret Language of Intimacy Workshop. Introduction. Shame and Belonging. Shame Attacks. Couple Shame Cycles. Support and Demos. Part II: Contributors’ Essays. Lobb, Being at the Contact Boundary with the Other: The Challenge of Every Couple. Balandrazo, Madero, Work with Couples in Mexico from a Gestalt Approach. Lynch, Lynch, Understanding the Complexity of Intimacy. O’Neill, O’Neill, The Secret Life of Us. Staemmler, Joint Constructions: On the Subject Matter of Gestalt Therapy, Exemplified by Gender-specific Misunderstandings with Regard to Intimacy. 2008: 286pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99214-5: £22.00 Published by Gestalt Press, and Distributed by Routledge
Related books Lanyado/Horne, Eds.: The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy: Psychoanalytic Approaches, Second Edition
In this book, Dana Birksted-Breen and Sara Flanders of the British Psychoanalytical Society, and Alain Gibeault of the Paris Psychoanalytical Society provide an overview of how French psychoanalysis has developed since Lacan. Focusing primarily on the work of psychoanalysts from the French Psychoanalytical Association and from the Paris Psychoanalytical Society, the two British psychoanalysts view the evolution of theory as it appears to them from the outside, while the French psychoanalyst explains and elaborates from inside the French psychoanalytic discourse. Seminal and representative papers have been chosen to illuminate what is special about French thinking. A substantial general introduction argues in favour of the specificity of ‘French psychoanalysis’, tracing its early influences and highlighting specific contemporary developments. Sections are made up of introductory material by Alain Gibeault, followed by illustrative papers in the following categories: • the history of psychoanalysis in France • forefathers and filiations • the setting and process of psychoanalysis • phantasy and representation • the body and the drives • masculine and feminine sexuality • psychosis. An excellent introduction to French psychoanalytical debate, Reading French Psychoanalysis sheds a complementary light on thinking that has evolved differently in England and North America. Contents: Birksted-Breen, Flanders, General Introduction. Part I: History of Psychoanalysis in France. Part II: The Pioneers and Their Legacy. Part III: The Setting and the Process of Psychoanalysis. Part IV: Phantasy and Representation. Part V: The Body and The Drives. Part VI: Masculine and Feminine Sexuality. Part VII: Psychosis.
September 2009: 688pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48502-9: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48503-6: £39.95
The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series Published by Routledge
Also in the Series
Horne/Lanyado, Eds.: Through Assessment to Consultation: Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents
Quinodoz: Listening to Hanna Segal: Her Contribution to Psychoanalysis
please see page 40
Quinodoz: Reading Freud: A Chronological Exploration of Freud’s Writings
Hb: 978-0-415-44493-4: 2007: 184pp. £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44085-1: 2007: 184pp. £19.95
Hb: 978-1-58391-746-6: 2005: 320pp. £60.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-747-3: 2005: 320pp. £20.99
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
the new library of psychoanalysis series
Melanie Klein in Berlin Her First Psychoanalyses of Children
Claudia Frank, in private practice, Stuttgart, Germany Edited and with a Preface by Elizabeth Spillius, Training and Supervising Psychoanalyst, British Psychoanalytical Society, UK Translated by Sophie Leighton, and Sue Young “This book is the work of a true scholar. And we all have much reason to thank Claudia for making us aware of the results of her meticulous comparison of Klein’s published papers, her unpublished papers and her clinical treatment notes.” - Elizabeth Spillius, From the Preface In this book Claudia Frank discusses how Melanie Klein began to develop her psychoanalysis of children. Melanie Klein in Berlin: Her First Psychoanalyses of Children offers a detailed comparative analysis of both published and unpublished material from the Melanie Klein archives. By using previously unpublished studies, Frank demonstrates how Klein enriched the concept of negative transference and laid the basis for the innovations on both technique and theory that eventually led not only to changes in child analysis, but also changes in the analysis of adults. Frank also uncovers the influence that this had on Klein’s later theories of the paranoid-schizoid and depressive positions, and on her understanding of psychotic anxieties. The first seven chapters in the book provide an explanation of the essence of Klein’s approach to child psychoanalysis. Part II provides a translation of Klein’s unpublished notes on the treatments of four of the children she analysed in Berlin: 7-year-old Grete, 2-year-old Rita, 7-year-old Inge and 6-year-old Erna. Contents: Spillius, Preface. Part I: Introduction. Melanie Klein’s Psychoanalytic
Clinical Work in Berlin. Grete: One of Melanie Klein’s Very First Little Girl Patients in Berlin. Rita: Klein’s Youngest Patient. The Beginning of the Play Technique: Inge and, Perhaps, Ernst? Erna: The Most Extensive Child Analysis of the Berlin Years. Conclusion. Part II: Notes to this Edition. Treatment Notes on Grete. Treatment Notes on Rita. Treatment Notes on Inge. Treatment Notes on Erna. March 2009: 504pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48497-8: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48498-5: £24.99
Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
The Psychotic Wavelength A Psychoanalytic Perspective for Psychiatry Richard Lucas, was a consultant psychiatrist at St. Ann’s Hospital, London, UK, and a member of the British Psychoanalytical Society “In this admirably lucid book Dr Richard Lucas demonstrates that psychoanalysis has much to contribute to the treatment of seriously disturbed and disturbing psychiatric patients... I sincerely hope it will be read by a wide, professional, national and international audience and will become essential reading for junior psychiatrists and nursing staff in particular.” - Carine Minne, From the Foreword The Psychotic Wavelength provides a psychoanalytical framework for clinicians to use in everyday general psychiatric practice and discusses how psychoanalytic ideas can be of great value when used in the
75
treatment of seriously disturbed and disturbing psychiatric patients with psychoses, including both schizophrenia and the affective disorders. In this book Richard Lucas suggests that when clinicians are faced with psychotic patients, the primary concern should be to make sense of what is happening during their breakdown. He refers to this as tuning into the psychotic wavelength, a process that allows the clinician to distinguish between, and appropriately address, the psychotic and non-psychotic parts of the personality. He argues that if the clinician can find and identify the psychotic wavelength he can more effectively help the patient to come to terms with the realities of living with a psychotic disorder. selected Contents: Minne, Foreword. Part I: Making the Case for a
Psychoanalytic Perspective on Psychosis. Part II: Psychoanalytic Theories about Psychosis: A Selective Review. Part III: Tuning into The Psychotic Wavelength. Part IV: The Psychotic Wavelength in Affective Disorders. Part V: Implications for Management and Education. July 2009: 352pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48468-8: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48469-5: £22.99
Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis Published by Routledge
Doubt, Conviction and the Analytic Process Selected Papers of Michael Feldman Michael Feldman, Training Analyst, British Psychoanalytical Society Edited by Betty Joseph
In this profound and subtle study, a practising psychoanalyst explores the dynamics of the interaction between the patient and the analyst. Michael Feldman draws the reader into experiencing how the clinical interaction unfolds within a session. In doing so, he develops some of the implications of the important pioneering work of such analysts as Klein, Rosenfeld and Joseph, showing in fine detail some of the ways in which the patient feels driven to communicate to the analyst, not only in order to be understood by him, but also in order to affect him. The author’s detailed descriptions of the clinical process allows the reader to follow the actual process that enables the patient to get into contact with thoughts and feelings of which he or she was previously unconscious or only vaguely aware. Feldman makes the reader aware of the constant dynamic interaction between the patient and the analyst, each affecting the other. He shows how the analyst has to find a balance between doubt, uncertainty and confusion in himself and through this process may arrive at an understanding of what is happening, and by formulating this understanding the analyst can make a significant contribution to the process of psychic change. Contents: Schafer, Preface. Joseph, Introduction. Feldman, The Oedipus Complex: Manifestations in the Inner World and the Therapeutic Situation. Splitting and Projective Identification. Projective Identification: The Analyst’s Involvement. The Dynamics of Reassurance. The Illumination of History. Manifestation of the Death Instinct in the Consulting Room. Envy and the Negative Therapeutic Reaction. Addressing Parts of the Self. ‘I Was Thinking….’ The Defensive Use of Compliance. Grievance: The Underlying Oedipal Configuration. Filled with Doubt. The Problem of Conviction in the Session.
February 2009: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47934-9: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47935-6: £22.99
Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
the new library of psychoanalysis series
76
Rediscovering Psychoanalysis
Thinking and Dreaming, Learning and Forgetting
Contents: Screenplays and Film Sets. Digressions on Interpretation. Psychosomatic Pathology or Metaphor: Problems of the Boundary. Homosexualities: A Field Ripe for Ploughing. A Model of the Mind and its Clinical Implications: How to Turn Back in Order to Move Forward. Instructions for Seafarers and the Shipwrecked: Signals from the Analytic Field and Emotional Transformations. The Patient’s Response to Interpretations and Events in the Field. Terminations Orthodox and Unorthodox. Narcissism and Frontier Areas.
Thomas H. Ogden, Director, Centre for the Advanced Study of the Psychoses, San Francisco, USA
2008: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42991-7: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42992-4: £22.99
Rediscovering Psychoanalysis demonstrates how, by attending to one’s own idiosyncratic ways of thinking, feeling, and responding to patients, the psychoanalyst can develop a “style” of his or her own, a way of practicing that is a living process originating, to a large degree, from the personality and experience of the analyst. This book approaches rediscovering psychoanalysis from four vantage points derived from the author’s experience as a clinician, a supervisor, a teacher, and a reader of psychoanalysis. Thomas Ogden begins by presenting his experience of creating psychoanalysis freshly in the form of “talking-as-dreaming” in the analytic session; this is followed by an exploration of supervising and teaching psychoanalysis in a way that is distinctly one’s own and unique to each supervisee and seminar group. Ogden goes on to rediscover psychoanalysis in this book as he continues his series of close readings of seminal analytic works. Here, he makes original theoretical contributions through the exploration, explication, and extension of the work of Bion, Loewald, and Searles.
Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis Published by Routledge
for further books in this series please visit www.routledgementalhealth.com/nlp
psychoanalysis in a new key book series www.routledgementalhealth.com/psychoanalysis-new-key
Partners in Thought
Contents: Rediscovering Psychoanalysis. On Talking-As-Dreaming. On
Working with Unformulated Experience, Dissociation, and Enactment
Psychoanalytic Supervision. On Teaching Psychoanalysis. Elements of Analytic Style: Bion’s Clinical Seminars. Bion’s Four Principles of Mental Functioning. Reading Loewald: Oedipus Reconceived. Reading Harold Searles. 2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46862-6: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46863-3: £22.99
Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis Published by Routledge
Mind Works Technique and Creativity in Psychoanalysis Antonino Ferro, Analyst and Supervisor, in private practice, Pavia, Italy In Mind Works Antonino Ferro uses clinical material such as detailed reports of sessions, together with client’s analytic histories, to develop Bion’s original findings and illustrate complex concepts in the field of psychoanalytic technique. These concepts include:
• interpretive modalities • the end of analysis • psychosomatic pathologies • narcissism. Mind Works: Technique and Creativity in Psychoanalysis also suggests that dreaming is a fundamental moment in analytic work, and Ferro discusses how dreams can go beyond the present to become a continuous act of the mind in the waking state, allowing internal and external stimuli to be transformed into thoughts and emotions. Focusing on how the minds of the analyst and the analysand work in psychoanalysis, this book will appeal to psychoanalysts, psychotherapists, and psychiatrists.
Forthcoming!
Donnel B. Stern, William Alanson White Institute, New York, USA Building on the groundbreaking work of Unformulated Experience (1997), Donnel B. Stern continues his exploration of the creation of meaning in clinical psychoanalysis with Partners in Thought. The chapters in this fascinating book are undergirded by the concept that the meanings which arise from unformulated experience are catalyzed by the states of relatedness in which the meanings emerge. In hermeneutic terms, what takes place in the consulting room is a particular kind of conversation, one in which patient and analyst serve as one another’s partner in thought, an emotionally responsive witness to the other’s experience. Enactment, which Stern theorizes as the interpersonalization of dissociation, interrupts this crucial kind of exchange, and the eventual breach of enactments frees analyst and patient to resume it. Later chapters compare his views to the ideas of others, considering mentalization theory and the work of the Boston Change Process Study Group. Contents: Introduction: The Embodiment of Meaning in Relatedness. The Conversation and its Interruptions. The Fusion of Horizons: Dissociation, Enactment, and Understanding. The Eye Sees Itself: Dissociation, Enactment, and the Achievement of Conflict. Partners in Thought: A Clinical Process Theory of Narrative. Shall the Twain Meet? Metaphor, Dissociation, and Co-occurrence. Opening What Has Been Closed, Relaxing What Has Been Clenched: Dissociation and Enactment over Time in Committed Relationships. Enactment in Dissociation Theory and Mentalization Theory: A Clinical Comparison. “One Never Knows, Does One?” Thoughts on the Work of the Boston Change Process Study Group.
November 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99969-4: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99970-0: £21.99
Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
psychoanalysis in a new key book series
Heterosexual Masculinities
Contemporary Perspectives from Psychoanalytic Gender Theory Edited by Bruce Reis, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA, and Robert Grossmark, City University of New York, USA Heterosexual Masculinities rethinks a psychoanalytic tradition that has long thought masculinity as a sort of brittle defense against femininity, softness, and emotionality. Reflecting current trends in psychoanalytic thinking, this book seeks to understand heterosexual masculinity as fluid, multiple, and emergent. The contributors to this insightful volume take new perspectives on relations between men, men’s positions as fathers in relation to their sons and daughters, the clinical encounter with heterosexual men, the social contexts of masculinity, and the multiplicity of heterosexual masculine subjectivities. Contents: Person, Masculinities, Plural. Masculinity and its Discontents. Diamond, Making Room for the “Mother” Inside the Male – An Essential Achievement for the Healthy Male Gender Identity. Reis, Names of the Father. Grossmark, Two Men Talking: The Emergence of Multiple Masculinities in Psychoanalytic Treatment. Hirsch, Imperfect Love, Imperfect Lives: Making Love, Making Sex, Making Moral Judgments. Kaftal, On Intimacy Between Men. Cornell, An Eruption of Erotic Vitality Between a Male Analyst and a Male Patient. Rozmarin, David and Jonathan. Adams, Psychotherapy with Poor African-American Men: Challenges Around the Construction of Masculinities. Harris, “Fathers” and “Daughters.” Rothschild, Finding a Father: Repetition, Difference, and Fantasy in Finding Nemo. Fogel, Interiority and Inner Genital Space in Men: What Else Can be Lost in Castration?
April 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-501-0: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-502-7: £21.99
Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series Published by Routledge
Sex Changes Transformations in Society and Psychoanalysis Mark J. Blechner, William Alanson White Institute, New York, USA “With Sex Changes, Mark Blechner... blends an intimate, deeply moving biographical account with a theoretically sophisticated, scholarly, jargon-free narrative. All practicing therapists should read this book.” - Lewis Aron, Director, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA
In the 1950s, ambitious women were often seen as psychopathological and were told by psychoanalysts that they had penis envy that needed treatment; today, a woman has campaigned for President of the United States. Mark Blechner has lived and worked through these startling changes in society, and Sex Changes collects papers he has written over the last 45 years on sex, gender, and sexuality. Interspersed with these papers are reflections on the changes that have occurred during that time period, both within the scope of society at large as well as in his personal experiences inside and outside of the therapeutic setting. Contents: Part I: Psychoanalysis, Sexuality, and Prejudice. Homosexuality
and the Rorschach Test. Psychoanalysis In and Out of the Closet. The Experience of Hating and Being Hated. Homophobia in Psychoanalytic Writing and Practice: A Comment on Trop and Stolorow (1992) and Hanna (1992). The
77
Interaction of Societal Prejudice with Psychodiagnosis and Treatment Aims. The Closeting of History. Selective Inattention and Bigotry: A Discussion of the Film Trembling Before G-d. Part II: Sex, Gender, and the Good Life. Maleness and Masculinity. Disgust, Desire, and Fascination: Psychoanalytic, Cultural, Historical, and Neurobiological Perspectives. The Gay Harry Stack Sullivan: Interactions Between His Life, Clinical Work, and Theory. AIDS. Intimacy, Pleasure, Risk, and Safety. Love, Sex, Romance, and Psychoanalytic Goals. Polymorphous without Perversity: A Queer View of Desire. Erotic and Antierotic Transference. The Political is Psychoanalytic: On Same-sex Marriage. April 2009: 192pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99434-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99435-4: £21.99
Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series Published by Routledge
The Consulting Room and Beyond
Psychoanalytic Work and Its Reverberations in the Analyst’s Life Therese Ragen, New York University Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA Foreword by Donnel Stern “... Ragen’s blend of therapeutic sophistication, personal candor, and breathtaking writing illuminates the truth of what is most fundamental to being an effective psychotherapist – one’s openness to being a human being.” - Philip M. Bromberg, Author, Standing in the Spaces and Awakening the Dreamer
The Consulting Room and Beyond is not a typical example of clinical writing in the field of psychoanalysis. Therese Ragen, pushing the boundaries of the genre, thoughtfully explores in a very immediate way the intersubjective nature of psychoanalysis, particularly looking at the role of the psychoanalyst’s subjectivity, both how it influences and is influenced by the psychoanalytic relationship. The profound ways in which analyst and patient affect each other are captured as the author moves from a moment with a patient, to one of her own memories, to a dream, to a professional consultation and back to the session with the patient. 2008: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-471-6: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-472-3: £18.99
Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Buechler: Making a Difference in Patients’ Lives: Emotional Experience in the Therapeutic Setting Hb: 978-0-88163-443-3: 2008: 336pp. £56.50 Pb: 978-0-88163-494-5: 2008: 336pp. £21.99
Hirsch: Coasting in the Countertransference: Conflicts of Self Interest between Analyst and Patient Hb: 978-0-88163-455-6: 2008: 240pp. £56.50 Pb: 978-0-88163-480-8: 2008: 240pp. £21.99
Boulanger: Wounded by Reality: Understanding and Treating Adult Onset Trauma Hb: 978-0-88163-430-3: 2007: 250pp. £24.95
Stein: Prologue to Violence: Child Abuse, Dissociation, and Crime Hb: 978-0-88163-416-7: 2006: 168pp. £20.99
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
relational perspectives book series
78
www.routledgementalhealth.com/relational-perspectives
Brown, Ed.: What Do Mothers Want?: Developmental Perspectives, Clinical Challenges Hb: 978-0-88163-400-6: 2005: 304pp. £37.50
Levenson: The Fallacy of Understanding & The Ambiguity of Change Pb: 978-0-88163-452-5: 2005: 416pp. £31.00
Tauber/Green: Prelogical Experience: An Inquiry into Dreams and Other Creative Processes Pb: 978-0-88163-450-1: 2005: 216pp. £22.50
Buechler: Clinical Values: Emotions That Guide Psychoanalytic Treatment Pb: 978-0-88163-377-1: 2004: 206pp. £22.00
Race, Class, and Culture. Social Class. Whiteness. Psychoanalysis in Black and White. Culture, Ethnicity, and Psychoanalysis. Part III: Thinking Systematically and Psychoanalytically at the Same Time. A Psychoanalytic Look at the Bifurcation of Public and Private Practice. Thinking Systematically and Psychoanalytically at the Same Time: Psychoanalyzing the Context. Toward Overcoming the Split between the Psychic and the Social: Bringing Psychoanalysis to Community-based Clinical Work. A Psychoanalyticsystemic Perspective on Psychotherapy with Children and Families. Part IV: Psychoanalysis and Society. Manic Society: Toward the Depressive Position. Psychoanalysis in the Political World: The Case of the American Psychological Association and Torture. Psychoanalysis in the Political World: Suicide Bombing. Psychoanalysis as a Potential Force for Social Change. December 2009: 336pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-499-0: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-500-3: £22.99
Relational Perspectives Book Series
Forthcoming!
Published by Routledge
The Hero in the Mirror
From Fear to Fortitude
A Contemporary Psychoanalytic Journey
Sue Grand, New York University Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA Recent socio-political conditions have moved psychoanalysis into an ongoing consideration of the nature of terror. In her previous book, The Reproduction of Evil, Sue Grand examined the perpetrator of ‘evil’: the way a history of trauma was transmuted into a repetition of trauma. In this book, she offers a phenomenology of terror – through a look at war, genocide, terrorism, torture, as well as familial abuse – and query the conditions through which an individual (or group) retains its humanity through acts of rescue, resistance and memorial activity. January 2010: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-437-2: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-482-2: £21.99
Relational Perspectives Book Series Published by Routledge
New Edition!
The Analyst in the Inner City Race, Culture, and Class through a Psychoanalytic Lens Second Edition Neil Altman, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA In 1995, Neil Altman did what few psychoanalysts did or even dared to do: he brought the theory and practice of psychoanalysis out of the cozy confines of the consulting room and into the realms of the marginalized, to the very individuals who this theory and practice often overlooked. In doing so, he brought together psychoanalytic and social theory, and examined how divisions of race, class and culture reflect and influence splits in the developing self. Much like the original, this second edition of The Analyst in the Inner City opens up with updated, detailed clinical vignettes and case presentations, which illustrate the challenges of working within this clinical milieu. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Background. Clinical Experiences from a Public Clinic. Theoretical, Historical, and Sociological Background. Part II:
Dare to Be Human
Michael Shoshani Rosenbaum, Bar-Ilan University School of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, Israel “A wonderful book, truly a magnificent achievement. This is one of the best integrations of contemporary theory that I have ever come across. I wholeheartedly recommend this book for every teacher and supervisor, as well as student and candidate of psychotherapy and psychoanalysis.” Lewis Aron, Director, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA
Daniel is 35, successful, a high level professional and an accomplished academic – yet he is also a virgin, who fears that he will spend the rest of his life alone. More importantly, Daniel has existed in an emotional bubble all of his life, and has had no intimate friendships. In other words, he is not fully alive, and seeks psychotherapy because he is haunted by not understanding what is wrong with him. He is attractive to women, yet as soon as a woman tries to get close to him, he runs away. Lacking an inner foundation, he fears that women will annihilate him, like his overbearing mother who abused him as a child. Quite simply, this book is an unprecedented achievement, taking the reader into actual psychoanalytic sessions and sharing with the reader Michael Shoshani Rosenbaum’s dialogues with Daniel, vividly illustrating his pain and struggle to transcend his existential plight. Furthermore, as the author of two sections of the book, Daniel himself provides a rare, insightful view from the other side of the couch. Contents: Introduction. Daniel’s Subterranean Bunker. From Liquid to Solid. From “Togetherness of One” to “Togetherness of Two”. Overcoming Perceived Betrayals: Escape from the Symbiotic Prison. From Immortal to Mortal. Ending and Separation. Epilogue, Part I and II. Theoretical Discussion: Thoughts on Insides and Outsides. April 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99797-3: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99798-0: £21.99
Relational Perspectives Book Series Published by Routledge
for further books in this series please visit www.routledgementalhealth.com/relational-perspectives
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
jung and analytical psychology
Routledge Recommends!
Film After Jung Post-Jungian Approaches to Film Theory Greg Singh, Buckinghamshire New University, UK “You will find this book indispensable. Not only does Greg Singh share his comprehensive grasp of theorists from both sides... but he makes more of each of them through his inter-textual discoveries which take Jungian film theorising to a brand new level.”
Contents: Introduction. The Possessions at Loudun: Tracking the Discourse of Possession. The Anthropology of Possession: Studying the Other. Possession Enters the Discourse of Psychiatry: Recuperation or Epistemological Break? Reading Jung’s Equivocal Language. Jung’s Concept of Possession and the Practice of Psychotherapy. The Suffering of Myrtle Gordon: Cassavetes’s Opening Night and Chaikin’s Open Theatre. Closing.
May 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44651-8: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44652-5: £21.99 Published by Routledge
Contents: Hauke, Foreword. Preface: The Image and The Material. Part I: Film Theory: A Critical Historiography. Film Matters, but How? and Why? Film as Film; Film as Art; Film as Authored Artefact. Film and Audience, a ‘Felt’ Relation: The Politics of Cine-subjectivity. The Film as Political: Phenomenology and the Material World of the Film. Part II: Applying Key Jungian Concepts in Film Theory. Refitting the Notion of the Gaze: The ‘I’ That Sees and the ‘Eye’ That is Seen. Contrasexuality and Identification: Difference, Sameness, and Gender in Film. Narrative and Myth, Heroes and Villains, Film and Television. Synchronicity and Space-time Transgression in Film and Video: Three Case Studies in Time Sculpture and Capture.
June 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43089-0: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43090-6: £17.99 Published by Routledge
Possession Jung’s Comparative Anatomy of the Psyche
Craig E. Stephenson, graduate of the C. G. Jung Institute, Zurich, Switzerland This illuminating study, addressed both to readers new to Jung and to those already familiar with his work, offers fresh insights into a fundamental concept of analytical psychology. Anatomizing Jung’s concept of possession reinvests Jungian psychotherapy with its positive potential for practice. Analogizing the concept – lining it up comparatively beside the history of religion, anthropology, psychiatry, and even drama and film criticism – offers not a naïve syncretism, but enlightening possibilities along the borders of these diverse disciplines. An original, wide-ranging exploration of phenomena both ancient and modern, this book offers a conceptual bridge between psychology and anthropology, it challenges psychiatry to culturally contextualize its diagnostic manual, and it posits a much more fluid, pluralistic and embodied notion of selfhood.
Self and No-Self Continuing the Dialogue Between Buddhism and Psychotherapy
- Christopher Hauke, From the Foreword
Film After Jung provides the reader with an overview of the history of film theory and delves into analytical psychology to consider the reaction that popular film can evoke through emotional and empathetic engagement with its audience. It also considers the potential for Post-Jungian contributions to film studies, and the ways in which these can help to enrich the lives of those undergoing clinical analysis. Film After Jung encourages students of film and psychology to explore the insights and experiences of everyday life that film has to offer by applying Post-Jungian concepts to film, image construction, narrative, and issues in cultural theory.
79
Edited by Dale Mathers, in private practice, UK, Melvin E. Miller, Norwich University, Vermont, USA, and Osamu Ando, Hanazono University, Japan This collection explores the growing interface between Eastern and Western concepts of what it is to be human from analytical psychology, psychoanalytic and Buddhist perspectives. The relationship between these different approaches has been discussed for decades, with each discipline inviting its followers to explore the depths of the psyche and confront the sometimes difficult psychological experiences that can emerge during any in depth exploration of mental processes. Self and No-Self considers topics discussed at the Self and No-Self conference in Kyoto, Japan in 2006. International experts from practical and theoretical backgrounds compare and contrast Buddhist and psychological traditions, providing a fresh insight on the relationship between the two. This book explains how a Buddhist approach can be integrated into the clinical setting and will interest seasoned practitioners and theoreticians from analytical psychology, psychoanalytic and Buddhist backgrounds, as well as novices in either field. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Miller, Buddhism and Psychotherapy: A
Dialogue. Ando, Psychotherapy and Buddhism: A Psychological Consideration of Key Points of Contact. Gunn, Two Arrows Meeting in Mid-air. Part II: Buddhist Theory and Practice. Magid, Desire and the Self: Reflections on J. M. Coetzee’s Slow Man. Yasunaga Roshi, Zen and Amaeru: A Psychological Approach to Zen. Pawle, The Ego in the Psychology of Zen: Understanding Reports of Japanese Zen Masters on the Experience of No-Self. Part III: Bridges. Austin, Our Sense of Self: Implications of Recent Brain Imaging Research for its Changes During Absorption and Kensho. Perelman, Similarities, Differences and Implications in the Patient / Analyst and Student / Spiritual Teacher Relationship. Part IV: Psychotherapy Theory. Miller, No Self and the Emptying God: Dwelling in the Emptying Place. Young-Eisendrath, Empty Rowboats: No-blame and Other Therapeutic Effects of No-Self in Long-term Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. Tift, Experience of Self in Zen and Christian Mysticism. Part V: Psychotherapy Practice. Van Zyl, Polarity Processing: Self/ No-Self, The Transcendent Function and Wholeness. Mathers, Stop Running. Mace, Mindfulness and the Technology of Healing. Wallace, Dying to be Born: Transformative Surrender within Analytical Psychology from a Clinician’s Perspective. Part VI: Mysticism and Spirituality. Shimizu, Experience of Self in Zen and Christian Mysticism. Kron, Self / No Self in the Therapeutic Dialogue According to Martin Buber’s Dialogue Philosophy. Muramoto, Muso Soseki (1275-1351): The Art of Surviving the World Full of Conflicts. Part VII: Myth and Fairytale. Nakamura, The Image of Mahavairocana-tatha-gata Emerging from the Therapist at a Crucial Point of Therapy. May 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43605-2: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43606-9: £22.99 Published by Routledge
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
jung and analytical psychology
80
Vision and Supervision
Jungian and Post-Jungian Perspectives Edited by Dale Mathers, in private practice, UK “The articles in this volume are full of zest and imagination, and they manage at once to capture much of the urgency, the excitement, and the challenge of the questions that face the therapy profession in the present multifaceted, multicultural, multidisciplinary world... it is with great pleasure that I recommend these highly instructive and imaginative essays.” - Murray Stein, From the Foreword Supervision in analytical psychology is a topic that until recently has been largely neglected. Vision and Supervision draws on archetypal, classical, and developmental post-Jungian theory to explore supervision from a variety of different avenues. Supervision is a critical issue for therapists in many training programmes. Quality of training and of therapeutic treatment is paramount, and increasingly the therapy profession is having to devise ways of assessing and monitoring themselves and each other. In this book, Dale Mathers and his contributors emphasise a model of supervision based on parallel process, symbol formation and classical Jungian analysis rather than developmental psychology or psychoanalytic theory, to show how respect for diversity can innovate the practice of supervision. Written by experienced clinicians, Vision and Supervision brings insights from analytical psychology to the supervisory task and encourages the supervisor to pay as much attention to what does not happen in a session as to what does. It offers a fresh perspective for analysts and psychotherapists alike, as well as other mental health professionals involved in the supervisory process. Contents: Stein, Foreword. D. Mathers, Introduction. Part I: Strange Effects
at Boundaries. Stokes, Boundaries: Separation, Merger, Mutuality. PalmerBarnes, Ethics. D. Mathers, Difficult Patients. Part II: Individuation. Stone, Individuation. Bierschenk, The Spirit of Enquiry. C. Mathers, Mind the Gap: The Symbolic Container, Dreams and Transformation. Wainwright, Representation, Evocation and Witness: Clinical Scenes and Styles of Presentation. Part III: The Collective. Bamber, Working with Organisations. Maitra, Multicultural Perspectives. Heuer, Spooky Action at Distance: Parallel Process in Jungian Analysis and Supervision. Hall, Afterword. 2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41579-8: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41580-4: £21.99 Published by Routledge
backgrounds. Globalization is present in the clinical office as well as in the wider world and the transformations presently being wrought in the areas of cultural and national identity also impact on clinical work. This book will be of interest to Jungian analysts as well as psychotherapists and mental health professionals, especially those who are addressing transcultural and multicultural issues including voluntary or enforced migration. It will also appeal to urban planners, architects and those interested in environmental issues. Contents: Introduction: Beginning with One’s Self. Soul, Earth and Migration in Contemporary Society. On Carl Gustav Jung’s “Mind and Earth”. The Place of Origins. Space, Genius Loci and Sacrality of Place. Maps and Geography: Reality and Fantasy. The Journey. Exile, Nostalgia, Return. The Foreign Patient. Bibliography. Angelini, “Animated” Places: Rooting and Impermanence. D’Andreamatteo, The Garden, Psychic Landscape. Buttarini, The Dark Places, or on the Evil of Innocence. Scarpelli, The Earth, The Song, The Symbol. Prameshuber, Exile: An Impossible Return? Mondo, Places of Healing. Tomasi, Body and Psyche: Compenetration of Opposites. Perez, “Every Rose is Telling of the Secrets of the Universal”: Symbols and the Natural World. Peat, “Gentle Action” Environmental Sustainability in Soul and Earth.
2008: 344pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46148-1: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46149-8: £22.99 Published by Routledge
Childhood Re-imagined Images and Narratives of Development in Analytical Psychology Shiho Main, University of Essex, UK
“Shiho Main has given us the most important Jungian work on childhood in recent years. Unlike other writers she manages to bridge the ‘developmental’ and the symbolic archetypal and bring the concept of the child up-to-date socially and politically. Seldom is Jungian writing so comprehensive and informing. This is essential reading for psychotherapists, psychologists, trainees and everyone concerned with what ‘childhood’ means in our time.” - Christopher Hauke, IAAP Jungian
analyst and senior lecturer at Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK
Childhood Re-imagined considers Carl Jung’s psychological approach to childhood and argues that his symbolic view deserves a place between the more traditional scientific and social-constructionist views of development. Divided into four sections this book covers: • Jung on development • theoretical and methodological discussion • the developmental school of analytical psychology
On Soul and Earth The Psychic Value of Place Elena Liotta, Jungian Analyst, in private practice, Italy On Soul and Earth offers an original perspective on the relationship between the environment and the human psyche. Physical spaces contribute to the building of identity through personal experience and memory. Places evoke emotions and carry their own special meanings.
Elena Liotta and her contributors also explore the neglected topics of migration and travel. The author has extensive clinical experience of working with patients from a wide variety of national and cultural
• towards a Jungian developmental psychology. This book discusses how Jung’s view of development in terms of individuation is relevant to child development, particularly the notion of regression and Jung’s distinction between the child archetype and the actual child. It shows how Jung’s understanding of the historically controversial notion of recapitulation differs from that of other psychologists of his time and aligns him with contemporary, postmodern critiques of development. The book goes on to investigate Fordham’s notion of individuation in childhood, and the significance of this, together with Jung’s approach, to Jungian developmental psychology and to wider interdisciplinary issues such as children’s rights. Main also examines the plausibility and usefulness of both Jung’s and Fordham’s approaches as forms of qualitative psychology. Through its detailed scholarly examination of Jungian texts and concepts Childhood Re-imagined clarifies the notion of development
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
clinical psychology and psychiatry
jung and analytical psychology used within analytical psychology and stimulates discussion of further connections between analytical psychology and other contemporary discourses. It will be of particular interest to those involved in analytical psychology, Jungian studies and childhood studies. Contents: Part I: Jung on Development. Psychological Development. Regression. Symbolic Child Psychology. Part II: Theoretical and Methodological Discussions on Development. ‘Recapitulation’ and ‘Development’ in Analytical Psychology. Methodological Issues in Developmental Psychology and Analytical Psychology. Part III: The Developmental School of Analytical Psychology. Jung, Fordham, and the ‘Developmental School’. The Children’s Rights Movement and Fordham’s Work with Children. Part IV: Towards a Jungian Developmental Psychology. Jung as a Qualitative Psychologist. Conclusion.
2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-38495-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38496-4: £21.99 Published by Routledge
The Child That Haunts Us
Symbols and Images in Fairytale and Miniature Literature Susan Hancock, National Centre for Research in Children’s Literature, Roehampton University, UK “In this scholarly and important study of children’s literature, Susan Hancock decisively explores the mysteries and contradictions surrounding the adult perceptions of childhood. The Child That Haunts Us is a brilliant fusion of Jungian criticism and insightful historical analysis. This is an invaluable book for clinicians and the humanities alike.”
- Susan Rowland, University of Greenwich, UK
The Child That Haunts Us focuses on the symbolic use of the child archetype through the exploration of miniature characters from the realms of children’s literature. Jung argued that the child archetype should never be mistaken for the ‘real’ child. In this book Susan Hancock considers how the child is portrayed in literature and fairytale and explores the suggestion from Jung and Bachelard that the symbolic resonance of the miniature is inversely proportionate to its size. We encounter many instances where the miniature characters are a visibly vulnerable ‘other’, yet often these occur in association with images of the supernatural, as the desired or feared object of adult imagination. In The Child That Haunts Us it is emphasised that the treatment by any society, past or present, of its smallest and most vulnerable members is truly revealing of the values it really holds. This original and sensitive exploration will be of particular interest to undergraduate and postgraduate students as well as academics engaged in Jungian studies, children’s literature, childhood studies and those with an interest in socio-cultural constructions of childhood. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Fairytale Manikins. Nineteenth-Century Female Miniatures. Part II: Odysseys and the Motherland. Post-war Britain and Europe. Suffering Children. Conclusion.
2008: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44775-1: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44776-8: £18.99 Published by Routledge
81
Staff Support Groups in the Helping Professions Principles, Practice and Pitfalls
Edited by Phil Hartley, Adult Psychotherapist and Group Analyst, NHS UK, and David Kennard, Clinical Psychologist and Group Analyst, UK “I wish this book had been written decades ago, before I started having to learn for myself the pitfalls and advantages of this work. I guess many readers will have the sense that so many of us have had to do this work without turning to an established body of knowledge and experience. We have each had to re-invent the wheel for ourselves. Now – here is the wheel, at last.” - Bob Hinshelwood, From the Foreword Staff burnout and work-related stress in mental health professionals cost the National Health Service not only millions of pounds each year, but also impact upon the welfare of those being cared for. Staff Support Groups in the Helping Professions takes the lead from recent Department of Health initiatives, promoting the use of staff support groups to foster emotional resilience, deal with potential conflict and support reflective practice. In this book Hartley, Kennard and their contributors explore the influences that help and hinder the setting up and running of staff support groups, and attempt to counter the often negative stigma that the term ‘staff support’ can evoke. They demonstrate that such support groups can be a sophisticated and valuable intervention that needs careful preparation and skilful management to succeed, and will in turn not only benefit the individual, but also the department as a whole and those that they care for. Contents: Hinshelwood, Introduction. Hartley, Kennard, Part I: What Staff
Support Groups Are For. Why it Can be Difficult to Ask for Support, Especially if You Work in a Caring Profession. Ten Keys to a Successful Staff Support Group. Setting Up a Staff Support Group. The Role of the Facilitator. Common Problems and Ways of Responding to Them. Ending a Staff Support Group. Do Staff Support Groups Work? McGowan, Part II: On Learning From the Short Life of a Staff Support Group in an Acute Admission Inpatient Mental Health Setting. Maher, Authority and Control: Working with Staff Groups in Children’s Homes. Powell, The Insider as Facilitator: Conducting a Group for Hospital Clinical Team Leaders. Wojciechowska, Managing Personal and Professional Boundaries. Humphreys, Working with Disturbed States of Mind. Winship, Working with Staff Dynamics in an Educational Setting: The Staff Support Group that Wasn’t To Be. April 2009: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44773-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44774-4: £19.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Prime Time Maximizing the Therapeutic Experience, A Primer for Psychiatric Clinicians Frederick G. Guggenheim, Brown Medical School, Rhode Island, USA Prime Time gives pointers from an experienced clinician on how to deal more effectively and efficiently within time constraints. It is designed to assist psychiatrists with medication and evaluation, and to allow for psychotherapy in addition to the requisite psychopharmacology. The primer provides a number of short cuts
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
clinical psychology and psychiatry
82
and clinical maneuvers in initiating and ending sessions that can help promote positive transference, assist effective flow of information, and aid in closing out the session without falling behind schedule.
Principles and Practice of Psychiatric Rehabilitation
Contents: Introduction. Part I: Ways to Make the Twenty Minute Hour
Work for You. Beginnings – Not a Moment to Spare. Measuring Symptoms. Setting the Contract. Decisions, Decisions. Psychoeducation/Teaching. Shortcuts: How to End on Time. Early and Later Pitfalls. Terminating Treatment. Part II: QUICK GRAB Answers for Specific Problems. Working with the Depressed Patient. Working with the Bipolar Patient. Working with the Anxious Patient. Working with the Traumatized Patient. Working with the Angry or Violent Patient. Working with the Somatizing Patient. Working with the Patient with Mild Schizophrenia. Working with the Questionably Psychotic Patient. Working with the Adolescent Patient. Working with the Elderly Patient. Working with the Borderline Personality Patient. Working with the Mildly Retarded Patient. Working with the Suicidal Patient. Working with the Pregnant Patient. Working with the Divorcing Patient. When Your patient (or you) are being Stalked. When Tragedy Befalls You, or Your Patient. The Vulnerable Clinician. Part III: Useful References. June 2009: 252pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80203-1: £43.99 Pb: 978-0-415-80109-6: £13.99 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Reaching Out The Psychology of Assertive Outreach Edited by Caroline Cupitt, consultant clinical psychologist with Oxleas NHS Foundation Trust, UK Assertive outreach is a means of helping people with severe and persistent mental health difficulties who have not engaged with conventional mental health services. Reaching Out examines the application of psychological approaches in assertive outreach – a process which involves forming new relationships and offering hope to people who have been alienated from traditional methods. Reaching Out begins with a discussion of topics including: • engagement • team approaches • assessments • team case formulation • managing stress and burnout for staff. The second half of the book focuses on the task of delivering psychological therapies and considers a range of techniques including psychodynamic therapy, family therapy, cognitive behaviour therapy and community approaches. Reaching Out: The Psychology of Assertive Outreach demonstrates that the relationship between staff and service users can be essential to the process of recovery and personal growth. Contents: Cupitt, Introduction. Part I: Taking a Psychological Approach. Gillespie, Meaden, Psychological Processes in Engagement. Cupitt, Gillham, Law, The Team Approach: Containment or Chaos? Meaden, Making Assessment and Outcomes Meaningful. Whomsley, Team Case Formulation. Gray, Mulligan, Staff Stress and Burnout. Part II: Applying Models of Psychological Therapy. Gillham, Law, Hickley, A Psychodynamic Perspective. Meddings, Gordon, Owen, Family and Systemic Work. Cupitt, Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy. Meddings, Shaw, Diamond, Community Psychology. Gray, Johanson, Ethics and Professional Issues: The Universal and the Particular. Cupitt, Conclusion.
September 2009: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45406-3: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45407-0: £22.99
New in Paperback!
An Empirical Approach Patrick W. Corrigan, Illinois Institute of Technology, USA, Kim T. Mueser, Dartmouth Medical School, New Hampshire, USA, Gary R. Bond, Indiana University-Purdue University, Indianapolis, USA, Robert E. Drake, Dartmouth Medical School, New Hampshire, USA, and Phyllis Solomon, University of Pennsylvania, USA “This is an exceptionally good book, and one of the few that can genuinely be recommended to all psychiatric trainees and every library... Lucidly written and carefully designed to enhance its readability and usefulness... This is probably the best account of the evidence base for contemporary rehabilitation practice to date and a commendable starting place for further study or research.” - British Journal of Psychiatry This comprehensive, authoritative work provides a state-of-the-art review of current knowledge and best practices for helping adults with psychiatric disabilities move forward in their recovery process. The authors draw on extensive research and clinical expertise to accessibly describe the “whats,” “whys,” and “how-tos” of psychiatric rehabilitation. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Who Are People with Psychiatric Disabilities? Stigma and Mental Illness. Definition of Psychiatric Rehabilitation. Part II: Service Approaches. Rehabilitation Assessment. Illness Self-management. Case Management. Medications and Psychiatric Rehabilitation. Housing. Employment and Education. Social Functioning. Family Interventions. Psychosis and Cognitive Impairment. Managing Criminal Justice Involvement. Part III: Special Populations and Problems. Trauma and Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Dual Diagnosis. Physical Health and Medical Care. Peer Services and Supports. Managing Aggressive Behavior. Part IV: System Considerations. Erasing Stigma and Promoting Empowerment. Cultural Competence in Psychiatric Rehabilitation. Policy.
July 2009: 562pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-489-8: 2007: £50.00 Pb: 978-1-60623-344-3: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
The End of Stigma? Changes in the Social Experience of Long-Term Illness
Gill Green, University of Essex, UK Award-winning author Gill Green presents a groundbreaking and timely contribution to understanding the roots of contemporary experiences of stigma. Centred on an analysis of a range of inter-related studies of illness and stigma conducted in recent years, she examines the cases of HIV, multiple sclerosis and mental illness, including substance misuse, to provide new insights into stigma in health. February 2009: 176pp. Hb: 978-0-415-37624-2: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37625-9: £21.99 Published by Routledge
Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
clinical psychology and psychiatry
Forthcoming!
Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders DSM-V and Beyond Edited by Paul F. Dell, Trauma Recovery Center, Norfolk, USA, and John A. O’Neil, McGill University, Montreal, Canada Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders is a book that has no real predecessor in the dissociative disorders field. It reports the most recent scientific findings and conceptualizations about dissociation, defines and establishes the boundaries of current knowledge in the dissociative disorders field, identifies and carefully articulates the field’s current points of confusion, gaps in knowledge, and conjectures, clarifies the different aspects and implications of dissociation, and sets forth a research agenda for the next decade. In many respects, Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders both defines and redefines the field. selected Contents: Part I: Dissociation: An Overview. Part II: Developmental
Approaches to Dissociation. Part III: Normal and Exceptional Dissociation. Part IV: Acute Dissociation. Part V: Chronic Dissociation. Part VI: Neurobiology of Dissociation. Part VII: The DSM-IV Dissociative Disorders. Part VIII: Dissociation in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Part IX: Dissociation in Borderline Personality Disorder and Substance Dependence. Part X: Dissociation and Psychosis. Part XI: Assessment and Measurement of Dissociation. Part XII: Treatment of Dissociation. Part XIII: Toward a Clarified Understanding of Dissociation. June 2009: 898pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95785-4: £60.00 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Managing Pain Before It Manages You Third Edition Margaret A. Caudill, Vermont Department of Health, USA “This book continues to be the gold standard for the self-management of pain. It is informative, easy to read, and encouraging. An invaluable guide for anyone who wishes to take charge of his or her life despite persistent pain.” - Dennis C. Turk, coauthor of The Pain Survival Guide
Updated and expanded with the latest clinically proven strategies, the third edition of this bestselling workbook enables chronic pain sufferers to take charge of their symptoms and get their lives back. This award-winning book by pain specialist Dr. Margaret A. Caudill has already helped more than 150,000 readers. Drawing on the recent explosion in knowledge about pain, the revised edition delivers powerful ways to decrease pain-related distress. Useful worksheets and guided self-explorations help readers understand their pain process, recognize factors that exacerbate or relieve symptoms, and learn how to manage thoughts and emotions related to pain. The book now includes free MP3 audio downloads of relaxation exercises proven to relieve stress, providing a convenient way to ease painrelated anxiety. Contents: Benson, Foreword. Preface to the Third Edition. Before You Begin: How This Book Can Help You. Beginning to Take Control of Your Pain. Understanding Pain. The Mind-body Connection. The Body-mind Connection. The Power of the Mind. Adopting Healthy Attitudes. Nutrition and Pain.
83
Effective Communication. Effective Problem Solving. The End of the Beginning. Appendix A: Common Chronic Pain Conditions. Appendix B: Complementary Alternative Medicine. Appendix C: Working Comfortably. Appendix D: Choosing Pain Medicine for Osteoarthritis. Appendix E: Worksheets and Other Materials. Internet Resources. Bibliography. MP3 Audio Downloads: 1. Ocean Sounds: Coupling Breathing with Imagination (Approx. 20 minutes). 2. Creating a Safe Place (Approx. 20 minutes). 3. Pain Control Visualization (Approx. 20 minutes). 2008: 272pp. Pb: 978-1-59385-982-4: £15.95 Published by Guilford Press
Imagery for Pain Relief A Scientifically Grounded Guidebook for Clinicians David Pincus, Chapman University in Orange, California, USA, and Anees A. Sheikh, Marquette University, Wisconsin, USA
Imagery for Pain Relief, the first book of its kind, familiarizes the reader with basic scientific information about pain and mental imagery and shows why imagery is a valuable tool for pain management. Scientifically grounded and easy-to-read, it provides readers with a wealth of practical information, including imagery techniques that have been successfully used in the past. This is a useful text not only for physicians and clinical psychologists, but also for counselors, social workers, nurses, and graduate students in all health related fields, including sports medicine. Contents: Rossi, Foreword. Pain: A Primer. Imagery: More Than Make-believe. Imagery for Pain Relief: How Does it Work? The Process of Image Therapy. Pain Management: Simple Techniques. Pain Management: Deeper Techniques. Pain Management: Deepest Techniques. Imagery for Children in Pain. The Gift of Pain and Suffering.
May 2009: 310pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99702-7: £33.50 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Self-Esteem Across the Lifespan Issues and Interventions Edited by Mary Guindon, Johns Hopkins University, Maryland, USA This book provides an overview of the self-esteem construct and defines it, reviews its history, explains its development, draws comparisons of it across gender, racial, and ethnic groups, and discusses its significance in counseling and therapy. It is organized around the five developmental stages of life: childhood, adolescence, early adulthood, midlife, and late life. Each chapter incorporates principles of self-esteem to target an identified self-esteem issue at one of these developmental stages and provide intervention strategies suitable for enhancing or changing self-esteem. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Guindon, What is Self-Esteem? Guindon, What Do We Know About Self-Esteem Interventions? Part II: Childhood: Introduction. Green, Kolos, Facilitating Self-Esteem in Elementary School-aged Children: A Child-centered Play Therapy Approach. Burke, Pilecki, The Effects of Intrafamilial Trauma on Self-Esteem Development. Mellin, Children of Families Affected by a Parental Mental Illness. Muratori, Fostering Healthy Self-Esteem in Gifted and Talented Children. Part III: Adolescence: Introduction. Richman, Hope, Mihalas, Assessment and Treatment of Self-Esteem in Adolescents with ADHD. Smith, Body Image, Eating Disorders and Self-Esteem Problems During Adolescence. Crenshaw, Lee, At-risk Adolescents: Self-Esteem, Youth Violence, and Teen Pregnancy. Bailey, Bradbury-Bailey, Promoting the Self-Esteem of
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
clinical psychology and psychiatry
84
African American Adolescent Boys. Herlihy, Watson, Issues of African American Girls. Part IV: Early Adulthood: Introduction. Hunt, Young Women and Self-Esteem. Giordano, Rush, Self-Esteem and Sexuality: An Exploration of Differentiation and Attachment. Hunt, Guindon, Alcohol and Other Drug Abuse and Addiction in Young Adults. Part V: Midlife: Introduction. Whitman, Lesbians and Gay Men at Midlife. Niles, Jacob, Nichols, Career Development Issues in Midlife. Brickwedde, Chronic Health Issues. Part VI: Late Life: Introduction. Richmond, Guindon, Self-Esteem and the Third Phase of Life. Kim, Park, Asian American Elders in the US Culture. Gladding, Martin, Creativity and Self-Esteem Later in Life. Part VII: Conclusion. Guindon, Summary and Implications for the Future. Appendices. December 2009: 384pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99699-0: £24.95 Published by Routledge
Mental Health in a Multi-Ethnic Society
A Multidisciplinary Handbook Second Edition Edited by Suman Fernando, Chase Farm Hospital, Enfield, UK, and Frank Keating, Royal Holloway University of London, UK “This second edition of Suman Fernando’s book, now co-edited by Frank Keating, is a must read for those interested in cultural influences on the expression and management of mental distress in diverse societies.” - Kamaldeep Bhui, Honorary Consultant Psychiatrist East London NHS Foundation Trust, UK
This new edition of Mental Health in a Multi-Ethnic Society is an authoritative, comprehensive guide on issues around race, culture and mental health service provision. It has been updated to reflect the changes in the UK over the last ten years and features entirely new chapters by over twenty authors, expanding the range of topics by including issues of particular concern for women, family therapy, and mental health of refugees and asylum seekers. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Current Scene. Meanings and Realities.
Race Relations, Mental Health and Human Rights – The Legal Framework. Inequalities and the Politics of ‘Race’ in Mental Health. Black and Minority Ethnic Women. Race Equality Training in the UK: An Historical Overview. Part II: Confronting Issues. Management Approaches to Effecting Change. Innovation in the Voluntary Sector. The Challenges of Race Equality and Cultural Capability (RECC) Training. Developing Psychological Services for Refugee Survivors of Torture. Black Service ‘User Involvement’ – Rhetoric or Reality? A Programme for Changing Attitudes in the Statutory Sector: Dialogue is Critical. Part III: Making It Happen. Working Therapeutically with Hidden Dimensions of Racism. The Marlborough Cultural Therapy Centre. Mental Health Services for Chinese People. Counselling and Day Care for South Asian People. African and Caribbean Mental Health Service in Manchester. The Sanctuary Practice in Hackney. A Movement Led by Black Service Users in South London. Part IV: Lessons for the Future. The Way Ahead. 2008: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41486-9: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41487-6: £21.99 Published by Routledge
Psychodynamic Therapy
Conceptual and Empirical Foundations Steven K. Huprich, Eastern Michigan University, USA Psychodynamic Therapy reintroduces psychoanalytic and psychodynamic theory to the practice of clinical psychology in ways that are easily understandable, practical, and immediate in their application. Huprich readily demonstrates that, contrary to what is misconstrued and taught as relic and historical artifact, Sigmund Freud’s ideas and their evolution offer a comprehensive, useful framework from which clinical psychology and psychiatry can benefit. There are more theories and approaches to psychotherapy today than ever before. Psychodynamic Therapy attests to the fact that psychoanalytic and psychodynamic theory has more to offer clinicians and patients than any other theory. Through this book, readers will gain a greater appreciation for what psychodynamic theory offers and how they may apply these ideas toward effective clinical practice. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Theoretical Underpinnings. Basic Principles of Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic Theory. The Evolution of Theory I: Drive, Ego, Object, and Self. The Evolution of Theory II: Integration and Expansion. Part II: Treatment Principles and Empirical Support. Basic Principles of Treatment. Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic Psychotherapy. Theories and Empirical Studies of Therapeutic Action. Cognitive Neuroscience. Part III: Therapeutic Process. Diagnosis and Assessment. Case Study.
2008: 273pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6400-7: £56.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6401-4: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Clinical Tests and Assessments Forthcoming!
Clinical Applications of the Personality Assessment Inventory Edited by Mark A. Blais, Matthew R. Baity, and Christopher J. Hopwood, all at Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, USA Clinical Applications of the Personality Assessment Inventory covers the various uses of a commonly employed multi-scale self-report inventory of psychological functioning. This book has gathered the leading experts in psychological assessment practice and research to describe the uses of this flexible instrument across the settings and applications for which it has been and might be used. Contents: Blais, Baity, Hopwood, Introduction. Kurtz, Outpatient Assessment.
Seifert, Inpatient Assessment. Edens, Forensic Assessment. Calhoun, The Assessment of Veterans. Khadivi, Substance Abuse Settings. Smith, Neuropsychological Assessment. Clark, Medical Settings. Roberts, Personnel Selection. Loving, Parenting Capacity Evaluations. Frank, Personal Injury Evaluations. Rogers, Cross-cultural Applications. Trull, Personality Research. Krishnamurthy, Assessing Adolescents. Case Illustration: PAI Perspectives on a Clinical Case. January 2010: 550pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99323-4: £38.95 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
forensic psychiatry
New Edition!
Psychiatry in Law / Law in Psychiatry Second Edition Ralph Slovenko, Wayne State University, Michigan, USA “A veritable tour de force. Every forensic psychiatric topic is covered and made easily understandable, no matter how complicated. A must read for every aspiring forensic mental
health professional.” - Abraham L. Halpern, Professor Emeritus of Psychiatry, New York Medical College, Valhalla, USA
Psychiatry in Law/Law in Psychiatry, Second Edition, is a sweeping, up-to-date examination of the infiltration of psychiatry into law and the growing intervention of law into psychiatry. Unmatched in breadth and coverage, and thoroughly updated from the first editon, this comprehensive text and reference is an essential resource for psychiatry residents, law students, and practitioners alike. Contents: Psychiatry in Law. Part I: Expert Testimony. Experts in the Adversary System. Obligations and Responsibilities of Lawyers and Experts. Restrictions on Expert Testimony. Holding the Expert Accountable. Part II: Evidentiary Issues. Testimonial Privilege. Witnesses and the Credibility of Testimony. Propensity and Other Acts Evidence. Syndrome Evidence. The Role of Psychiatric Diagnosis in the Law. Part III: Criminal Cases. Competency to Stand Trial and Other Competencies. Criminal Responsibility. Diminished Capacity. Juvenile Justice. Imposing and Carrying Out of the Death Penalty. Measurement of Evil. Part IV: Sexual Deviation. Sex Offender Legislation. Homosexuality: From Condemnation to Celebration. Part V: Civil Cases. Tort Liability of the Mentally Incompetent and Their Caretakers. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Workers’ Compensation. Duty to Minimize Damages. Child Custody. Contractual Capacity. Testamentary Capacity. Law in Psychiatry. Part I: Hospitalization of the Mentally Ill. Civil Commitment. Failure to Treat and Related Issues. Part II: Psychiatric Malpractice. Malpractice, Nonmedical Negligence, or Breach of Contract? Establishing Malpractice Liability. An Overview of Psychiatric Malpractice. Admission or Apology in Liability Prevention. Breach of Confidentiality. Informed Consent. Contributory Fault of the Patient in a Malpractice Action. The Boundary Violation of Undue Familiarity. Experimentation and Clinical Trials. Suicide. Duty of Therapists to Third Parties. Regulation of the Practice of Psychotherapy. Indices.
May 2009: 618pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99491-0: £108.00 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Ethical and Legal Issues for Mental Health Professionals in Forensic Settings Edited by Steven F. Bucky, and Joanne E. Callan, both at Alliant International University, San Diego, USA, and George Stricker, Argosy University, Washington D.C., USA Ethical and Legal Issues for Mental Health Professionals: in Forensic Settings comprehensively focuses on the integration of ethical, legal, and clinical issues for practicing mental health professionals dealing with legal processes in forensic settings. This unique text is organized around the most current ethical and legal standards as defined by the mental health professionals of psychology, social work, marriage and
85
family therapy, and psychiatry. Respected well-known authorities with diverse backgrounds, expertise, and professional experience offer a far-reaching discussion of ethical and legal issues important for every mental health professional to know. This is an essential text for all mental health professionals, including psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, counselors, therapists, and graduate students in mental health and related fields. Contents: Bucky, Introduction. Part I: The Mental Health Professional and the Legal System: Court Situations. Bersoff, Depositions: Discovery, Procedures, and Practice Pointers. Stein, Personal Injury: Consultation, Evaluation, and the Expert Witness. Thatcher, Preparing for Court Testimony. Part II: Forensic Assessment and Techniques. Wiens, Mueller, How to Complete and Use a Psychological Evaluation in an Ethical Manner. Gold, Evaluating Child Custody Cases: Techniques and Maintaining Objectivity. Lee, Acting as a Special Master in High-conflict Postdivorce Child Custody Cases. Romanoff, Ethics in Performing Criminal Forensic Evaluations. Part III: Mental Health Professionals and Litigation. Caudill, When a Mental Health Professional is in Litigation. Bogie, Marine, Civil Lawsuits/Malpractice Professional Liability Claims Process and Claims History. Dalenberg, Carlson, Caudill, Ethical and Legal Issues in the Treatment of Patients/Plaintiffs With Recovered Memories of Trauma and Patients/Plaintiffs With “False Memories” of Trauma. Grenier, Golub, American Psychological Association and State Ethics Committees.
June 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3816-6: £47.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3817-3: £16.50 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Principles and Practice of Trial Consultation Stanley L. Brodsky, University of Alabama, USA “Brodsky has done it again. Nobody writes with more simple elegance and clarity about complicated and sophisticated issues in psychology and law... this book marks a true developmental milestone.” - Joel A. Dvoskin, past president, American Psychology-Law Society; University of Arizona, USA
A concise, pragmatic guide to a growing area of professional practice, this book describes the multiple roles of the trial consultant and provides tools for carrying them out competently and ethically. Leading authority Stanley Brodsky uses examples from actual trials and depositions to illustrate how knowledge and skills from psychology and related fields are applied in the legal context. He shows how to use scientific methods and findings to assist with jury selection, help attorneys focus their arguments, prepare witnesses for the rigors of cross-examination, and conduct change-of-venue evaluations. Contents: Part I: Essential Issues in Trial Consultation. Introduction to Trial Consultation. The Case Conceptualization. Toolbox for Trial Consultants. Part II: Preparation of Witnesses and Attorneys. Witness Preparation for Testifying in Court. Preparation and Examination of Expert Witnesses. Witness Preparation: Findings from the Lab. Part III: Jury Selection Principles and Case Studies. Jury Selection: Basic Approaches. Jury Selection: Internet Sex Offenders and Juror Sexual Values. No Questions but Deselection Questions. Jury Selection: Reversals. Part IV: Changes of Venue. Change of Venue Consultations. Surveys of Pretrial Bias: A Case Report. Part V: Putting it Together. Trial Consultation in a Capital Murder Case: Integrating the Components of Trial Consultation. Trial Consultation in Eminent Domain Cases. Where Next for Trial Consulting?: Emerging Trends and Limitations.
July 2009: 226pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-173-9: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
86
maudsley monographs series
forensic psychiatry
www.routledgementalhealth.com/maudsley
Forthcoming!
Psychological Science in the Courtroom Consensus and Controversy Edited by Jennifer L. Skeem, University of California, Irvine, USA, Kevin S. Douglas, Simon Fraser University, British Columbia, Canada, and Scott O. Lilienfeld, Emory University, Atlanta, USA “Outstanding. Skeem et al. present essential information in areas ranging from eyewitness testimony and memory bias to interviewing, interrogation, criminal profiling, and polygraphy. The contributors are top experts in the field whose chapters are comprehensive and scholarly, but also accessible and engaging to read. Discussions of key controversies, myths, and misconceptions – alongside coverage of established facts and knowledge gaps– bring an intriguing spice to the mix. Forensic psychologists will find this volume indispensable. Its content and accessibility also make it a superb choice as a text for courses in law and psychology.” - Christopher J. Patrick, University of Minnesota, USA This rigorous yet reader-friendly book reviews the state of the science on a broad range of psychological issues commonly encountered in the forensic context. The goal is to help professionals and students differentiate between supported and unsupported psychological techniques – and steer clear of those that may be misleading or legally inadmissible. Leading contributors focus on controversial issues surrounding recovered memories, projective techniques, lie detection, child witnesses, offender rehabilitation, psychopathy, violence risk assessment, and more. With a focus on real-world legal situations, the book offers guidelines for presenting scientific evidence accurately and effectively in courtroom testimony and written reports. Contents: Part I: Psychological Science and its Application in Courts
of Law. Faigman, Monahan, Standards of Legal Admissibility and Their Implications for Psychological Sciences. McAuliff, Groscup, Daubert and Psychological Science in Court: Judging Validity from the Bench, Bar, and Jury Box. Part II: Memory and Suggestibility. Davis, Loftus, The Scientific Status of “Repressed” and “Recovered” Memories. Lynn, Boycheva, Deming, Lilienfeld, Hallquist, Forensic Hypnosis: The State of the Science. Cutler, Wells, Eyewitness Testimony Regarding Eyewitness Identification. Redlich, Meissner, Techniques and Controversies in the Interrogation of Suspects: The Artful Practice versus the Scientific Study. Bruck, Ceci, Reliability of Child Witnesses’ Reports. Part III: Specific Tests and Techniques. Edens, Skeem, Kennealey, The Psychopathy Checklist (PCL) in the Courtroom: Consensus and Controversies. Wood, Nezworski, Lilienfeld, Garb, Projective Techniques in the Courtroom. Iacono, Psychophysiological Detection of Deception and Guilty Knowledge. Part IV: Forensic Evaluation of Psycholegal Issues. Kocsis, Criminal Profiling: Facts, Fictions, and Courtroom Admissibility. Koch, Nader, Haring, The Science and Pseudoscience of Assessing Psychological Injuries. O’Donohue, Beitz, Tolle, Controversies in Child Custody Evaluation. Poythress, Zapf, Controversies in Evaluating Competency to Stand Trial. Part V: Courtroom Sentencing: Risk and Rehabilitation. Heilbrun, Douglas, Yasuhara, Violence Risk Assessment: Core Controversies. Skeem, Polaschek, Manchak, Appropriate Treatment Works, But How?: Rehabilitating General, Psychopathic, and High-risk Offenders. Petrila, Concluding Thoughts and Future Directions: Finding Common Ground between Scientific Psychology and the Law. July 2009: 418pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-251-4: £34.00 Published by Guilford Press
for books on Child and Adolescent Forensic Psychiatry please see page 46
The Maudsley Family Study of Psychosis A Quest for Intermediate Phenotypes Edited by Colm McDonald, National University of Ireland, Ireland
The Maudsley Family Study of Psychosis investigates the genetically produced markers of abnormal brain structure and function (‘intermediate phenotypes’) which underlie the clinical syndrome of schizophrenia, and more recently bipolar disorder. In this book, key findings of this important research program, and their implications for this field, are discussed in detail. Contributors outline research examining brain structure and functioning in patients with schizophrenia and their unaffected first degree relatives, incorporating detailed clinical assessments, magnetic resonance imaging, electrophysiology, eye tracking measures and neuropsychology. 2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-734-5: £24.95
Series: Maudsley Monographs Published by Psychology Press
Also in the Series Marks et al.: Hands-on Help Hb: 978-1-84169-679-9: 2007: 296pp. £24.95
Bhugra: Mad Tales from Bollywood Hb: 978-184169-646-1: 2006: 328pp. £24.95
Jones/Wessely: Shell Shock to PTSD Hb: 978-1-84169-580-8: 2005: 320pp. £24.95
Bhugra: Culture and Self-Harm Hb: 978-1-84169-521-1: 2004: 312pp. £24.95
Freeman/Garety: Paranoia Hb: 978-1-84169-522-8: 2004: 208pp. £24.95
Melzer et al.: Social Inequalities and the Distribution of the Common Mental Disorders Hb: 978-1-84169-385-9: 2003: 256pp. £24.95
Jenkins et al: Developing a National Mental Health Policy Hb: 978-1-84169-295-1: 2002: 232pp. £29.95
Castle et al: Psychosis in the Inner City Hb: 978-0-86377-516-1: 1998: 224pp. £24.95
Goldberg/Thornicroft: Mental Health in our Future Cities Hb: 978-0-86377-546-8: 1998: 304pp. £29.95
Patel: Culture and Common Mental Disorders in Sub-Saharan Africa Hb: 978-0-86377-530-7: 1998: 144pp. £29.95
Bond et al: Aggression Hb: 978-0-86377-482-9: 1997: 160pp. £29.95
Garety/Hemsley: Delusions Pb: 978-0-86377-785-1: 1997: 192pp. £19.95
Buchanan: Compliance with Treatment in Schizophrenia Hb: 978-0-86377-422-5: 1996: 96pp. £24.95
Grubin: Fitness to Plead in England and Wales Hb: 978-0-86377-424-9: 1996: 144pp. £29.95
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
neuropsychiatry
Clinical Problems Addictions
A Dented Image Journeys of Recovery from Subarachnoid Haemorrhage
Responding to Drug Misuse
“This is an excellent, well written blend of personal experience, academic information and the experiences of others regarding life after subarachnoid haemorrhage.” - Dr Trevor
Research and Policy Priorities in Health and Social Care
Powell, Consultant Clinical Neuropsychologist, Berkshire Healthcare NHS Foundation Trust, UK
SELECTED Contents: Part I: Setting the Scene. Part II: Recovery. Part III: Family, Friends and Work. Part IV: Making Sense of It All. 2008: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-38671-5: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38672-2: £14.99 Published by Routledge
The Human Amygdala Edited by Paul J. Whalen, Dartmouth College, New Hampshire, USA, and Elizabeth A. Phelps, New York University, USA “This superbly edited volume captures the exciting progress in understanding the human amygdala that has occurred over the past decade... It will interest a wide audience of researchers and trainees.” - Trevor W. Robbins, University of Cambridge, UK
This comprehensive volume brings together leading authorities to synthesize current knowledge on the amygdala and its role in psychological function and dysfunction. Initial chapters discuss how animal models have paved the way for work with human subjects. The final section presents key advances in understanding specific clinical disorders: anxiety disorders, depression, schizophrenia, autism, and Alzheimer’s disease. March 2009: 429pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-033-6: £50.00 Published by Guilford Press
Also of Interest
Forthcoming!
Alison Wertheimer, writer, researcher and counsellor
In Britain, 8,500 people a year experience subarachnoid haemorrhages, around 50% survive. Many have a good neurological recovery but the psychosocial impact can be much longer lasting. Here Alison Wertheimer, a survivor, draws from her own and others experiences and recent research findings to produce a guide for those who are on the road to recovering from a subarachnoid haemorrhage. Wertheimer covers topics including leaving neurocare, physical, sensory and cognitive effects, returning to work, life changes and emotional impact, making this book essential for survivors, family, friends, health professionals and rehabilitation teams.
Asian American Psychology Current Perspectives Edited by Nita Tewari, and Alvin N. Alvarez 2008: 704pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-769-7: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6008-5: £44.00 Published by Psychology Press
87
Edited by Susanne MacGregor, London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, University of London, UK “This is an excellent collection of relevant empirically-based research which should be used to inform contemporary drugs misuse policy in the UK.” - Elizabeth Ettorre, University of Liverpool, UK Responding to Drug Misuse provides a unique insight into the current shape of the drugs treatment system in England. Reporting findings from research linked to the government’s ten year drugs strategy Tackling Drugs to Build a Better Britain, the book places these in the context of policy, practice, and service development. It goes on to discuss the implications of these findings for the government’s new strategy Drugs: Protecting Families and Communities. Throughout the book contributors reflect on current debates on drug strategies and social policy. Contents: MacGregor, Policy Responses to the Drugs Problem. Duke, The Focus on Crime and Coercion in UK Drugs Policy. Macleod, Drug-taking and its Psycho-social Consequences. Raistrick, Tober, Godfrey, Parrott, Treatment as Usual. Weaver, Goyder, Hart, Fehler, Metrebian, Crawford, Care Co-ordination in Drug Treatment Services. Donmall, Millar, The Effect of Waiting for Treatment. Radcliffe, Stevens, Early Exit: Estimating and Explaining Early Exit from Drug Treatment. Neale, Godfrey, Parrott, Sheard, Tompkins, Barriers to the Effective Treatment of Injecting Drug Users. Metrebian, Sell, Shanahan, Carnwath, Alcorn, Ruben, Mehdikhani, Stimson, Prescribing Injectable Opiates for the Treatment of Opiate Dependence. Kouimtsidis, Drummond, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Opiate Misusers in Methadone Maintenance Treatment. Crawford, Patterson, Agath, Weaver, Involving Service Users in Efforts to Improve the Quality of Drug Misuse Services. Weaver, Charles, Barnes, Tyrer, Co-morbidity in Treatment Populations. Frisher, Crome, Martino, Bashford, Croft, Epidemiology of Drug Misuse and Psychiatric Co-morbidity in Primary Care. Orford, Copello, Simon, Waheed, Fazil, Graham, Mahmood, McNeil, Roberts, Offering a Service to BME Family Members Affected by Close Relatives’ Drug Problems. Clay, Corlyon, A Review of Services for Children and Young People with Drugs Misusing Carers. Kroll, Taylor, Dilemmas in Intervening Effectively in Families Where There is Parental Drug Misuse. MacGregor, Evidence and New Policy Questions.
October 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47470-2: £39.95 Published by Routledge
Social Behaviour and Network Therapy for Alcohol Problems Alex Copello, and Jim Orford, both at the University of Birmingham, UK, Ray Hodgson, Formerly University of Wales College of Medicine, UK, and Gillian Tober, Leeds Addiction Unit, UK
“The authors of this manual are the leading practitioners in England in SBNT. The National Treatment Agency (NTA) hopes that this book is used by clinicians to implement evidence-based practice and improve treatment for alcohol and drug users.” - Annette Dale Perera, Director of Quality, National Treatment Agency (NTA)
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
Addictions
88
Social Behaviour and Network Therapy for Alcohol Problems serves as a manual for clinicians working with people with alcohol problems. The manual is based on previous research in addiction treatment, including family and social network interventions, as well the author’s own work developing and evaluating Social Behaviour and Network Therapy (SBNT) for example in the United Kingdom Alcohol Treatment Trial (UKATT). Containing a range of ideas the book is guided by a key principle: the development of social support for a positive change in drinking behaviour. Contents: Part I: Background, Evidence Base, Treatment Content and Format. Manual Format: Theoretical and Research Basis for SBNT. The Therapist. The Treatment. Part II: Core Components of Social Behaviour and Network Therapy. Phase 1: Identifying the Social Network. The First Session: Setting the Scene. Phase 2: Core Topics. Core Topic: Communication. Core Topic: Coping. Core Topic: Enhancing Social Support. Core Topic: Network Based Relapse Management. Phase 3: Final Meeting. Planning for the Future and Termination. Part III: Elective Topics, Training and Common Questions. Elective Topics. Appendices: Handouts/Prompt Sheets.
approaches towards combating the negative effects of drunkenness; encourages the development of more effective communication strategies to effect behavioral change among the general public; and clarifies aims and objectives for reducing the incidence and prevalence of intoxication and drunkenness in society. May 2010: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99213-8: £33.00
International Center for Alcohol Policies Series on Alcohol in Society Published by Routledge
The Culture of Extreme Drinking Edited by Marjana Martinic, Vice President for Public Health, International Center for Alcohol Policies (ICAP), Washington, USA, and Fiona Measham, Lancaster University, UK
June 2009: 176pp. Pb: 978-1-58391-803-6: £22.99 Published by Routledge
Solution-Focused Substance Abuse Treatment
Teri Pichot, Jefferson County Department of Health and Environment, Missouri, USA, with Sara A. Smock, Texas Tech University, USA Solution-Focused Substance Abuse Treatment describes the standard of care for substance abuse treatment, and clearly demonstrates how Solution-Focused Brief Therapy exceeds this standard. It then shows how this approach can be effectively used in substance abuse evaluation, case management, as well as individual and group treatment. Applications to adolescence as well as cultural relevance are addressed. It provides both beginning and advanced concepts to address the questions of even the most advanced clinician. This informal and easy reading style is inviting to readers of all levels of sophistication. Contents: Substance Abuse Treatment: An Overview. Solution-Focused Brief Therapy: The Basics. Beyond the Solution-Focused Basics. Assessment and Evaluation. Case Management and Individual Work With Clients. SolutionFocused Group Therapy. A More In-depth Look at Working With Groups. Additional Applications and Practice Issues. Forms and Handouts. Appendix.
May 2009: 254pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3722-0: £38.99 Pb: 978-0-7890-3723-7: £19.50 Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
400 Rabbits The Pleasure and Pain of Drunkenness Edited by Anne Fox, Vice President, for Public Health, International Center for Alcohol Policies (ICAP), Washington, USA, and Mike MacAvoy, chief executive officer of DrinkWise Australia Interpretations by different disciplines about the terms intoxication and drunkenness are often inconsistent, creating confusion and inefficiencies in their efforts to combat the negative effects of these behaviors. With this in mind, ICAP and DrinkWise Australia collaborated on a joint project which seeks to resolve this issue by preparing a publication that provides consensus on the nature of intoxication and drunkenness. 400 Rabbits promotes more streamlined
Swimming with Crocodiles
Swimming with Crocodiles is the ninth volume in the ICAP Book Series on Alcohol in Society. The authors discuss the factors that motivate extreme drinking, address the developmental, cultural and historical contexts that have surrounded it, and offer a new approach to addressing this behavior through prevention and policy. The centerpiece of the book is a series of focus groups conducted with young people in Brazil, China, Italy, Nigeria, Russia, South Africa, and the United Kingdom, which examines their views on extreme drinking, motivations behind it and the cultural similarities and differences that exist, conferring at once risk and protective factors. 2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95548-5: £37.95
International Center for Alcohol Policies Series on Alcohol in Society Published by Routledge
Handbook of the Medical Consequences of Alcohol and Drug Abuse Second Edition
Edited by John Brick, Fellow, American Psychological Association Executive Director Intoxikon International The Handbook of the Medical Consequences of Alcohol and Drug Abuse, Second Edition is the newly-updated classic reference text that provides even more detailed and expanded information on the pharmacological, toxicological, and neuropsychological consequences of alcohol and drug abuse. Eight new chapters of crucial information have been added. Written by leading experts in the fields of medical physiology, psychopharmacology, and neuropsychology, this valuable resource provides the detailed alcohol and drug information health professionals in all fields need to know. This text provides reviews of the cardiovascular, neurological, pulmonary, gastrointestinal, psychological, and hepatic effects of commonly abused drugs. 2008: 642pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3573-8: £99.50 Pb: 978-0-7890-3574-5: £55.00 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
Addictions
New in Paperback!
Treating Alcohol and Drug Problems in Psychotherapy Practice Doing What Works Arnold M. Washton, Recovery Options, New York, and Princeton, New Jersey, USA, and Joan E. Zweben, University of California, San Francisco, USA “Finally, office-based therapists do not have to avoid or refer clients with substance use disorders and can get the detailed, practical, and sciencebased information they need to work with them... Every mental health practitioner should read this guide and keep it at hand.” - Carlo C. DiClemente, University of Maryland-Baltimore County, USA
Written specifically for the office-based psychotherapist, this practical guide describes how to detect, assess, diagnose, and treat clients presenting with a range of alcohol and drug problems. Detailed is an integrated, flexible psychotherapeutic approach that emphasizes building a strong therapeutic relationship, engaging clients “where they are,” and addressing substance use within the larger context of clients’ lives. 2008: 312pp. Hb: 978-1-57230-077-4: 2006: £30.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-980-0: £16.50 Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Methamphetamine Addiction From Basic Science to Treatment Edited by John M. Roll, Washington State University College of Nursing in Spokane, USA, Richard A. Rawson, University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA) Integrated Substance Abuse Programs, USA, Walter Ling, and Steven Shoptaw, both at David Geffen School of Medicine at UCLA, USA “This definitive, timely book broadens the understanding of methamphetamine addiction and its treatment... Grounded in research data and clinical experience, the book will be of immense value to practitioners, researchers, and students.” - Arnold M. Washton, Executive
Director, Recovery Options, New York, and Princeton, New Jersey, USA
Separating myth from fact, this authoritative work reviews the breadth of current knowledge about methamphetamine addiction and describes the most promising available treatment approaches. Leading experts present state-of-the-art information on the effects of methamphetamine on the brain, body, and users’ mental health and behavior. Contents: Roll, Rawson, Shoptaw, Ling, Introduction. Rutkowski, Maxwell,
Epidemiology of Methamphetamine Use: A Global Perspective. Hanson, Fleckenstein, Basic Neuropharmacological Mechanisms of Methamphetamine. Payer, London, Methamphetamine and the Brain: Findings from Brain Imaging Studies. Rush, Stoops, Ling, Behavioral Pharmacology and Psychiatric Consequences of Methamphetamine. Mooney, Glasner-Edwards, Rawson, Ling, Medical Effects of Methamphetamine Use. Shoptaw, King, Landstrom, Bholat, Heinzerling, Roll, Public Health Issues Surrounding Methamphetamine Dependence. Farabee, Hawken, Methamphetamine and Crime. Thompson, Sowell, Roll, Effects of Methamphetamine on Communities. Shoptaw, Rawson, Worley, Lefkowith, Roll, Psychosocial and Behavioral Treatment of Methamphetamine Dependence. Vocci, Elkashef, Appel, Pharmacological
89
Treatment of Methamphetamine Addiction. Pasic, Ries, Treatment of Methamphetamine Addiction That Co-occurs with Serious Mental Illness. Schuster, Johanson, Roll, Conclusion. June 2009: 258pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-252-1: £27.00 Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Women and Addiction A Comprehensive Handbook Edited by Kathleen T. Brady, and Sudie E. Back, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA, and Shelley F. Greenfield, Harvard Medical School, Massachusetts, USA “The once-neglected field of research in addiction and its treatment in women has flourished in the past 20 years, making this book a ‘must read’ for clinicians.” - Richard Frances, New York University Medical School, USA
For many years, addiction research focused almost exclusively on men. Yet scientific awareness of sex and gender differences in substance use disorders has grown tremendously in recent decades. This volume brings together leading authorities to review the state of the science and identify key directions for research and clinical practice. Concise, focused chapters illuminate how biological and psychosocial factors influence the etiology and epidemiology of substance use disorders in women; their clinical presentation, course, and psychiatric comorbidities; treatment access; and treatment effectiveness. Contents: Part I: Overview. Zilberman, Substance Abuse across the Lifespan
in Women. Reed, Evans, Research Design and Methodology in Studies of Women and Addiction. Part II: Biological Issues. Newman, Mello, Neuroactive Gonadal Steroid Hormones and Drug Addiction in Women. Fox, Sinha, Stress, Neuroendocrine Response, and Addiction in Women. Kalaydjian, Merikangas, Sex Differences in the Transmission of Substance Use Disorders. Pigott, Walker, Teitelbaum, Lu, Sex Differences and Neurotransmitter Systems in Addiction. DeVane, Sex Differences in Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics. Sava, McCaffrey, Yurgelun-Todd, Gender, Cognition, and Addiction. Elton, Kilts, The Roles of Sex Differences in the Drug Addiction Process. Part III: Cooccurring Psychiatric Disorders. Goldstein, Comorbidity of Substance Use with Independent Mood and Anxiety Disorders in Women: Results from the National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions. Pettinati, Plebani, Depression and Substance Use Disorders in Women. Brady, Hartwell, Gender, Anxiety, and Substance Use Disorders. Cohen, Gordon, Co-occurring Eating and Substance Use Disorders. Hien, Trauma, Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, and Addiction among Women. Nguyen, Brown, Psychotic Disorders in Women with Substance Abuse. Burckell, McMain, Concurrent Personality Disorders and Substance Use Disorders in Women. Part IV: Treatment Outcome. Greenfield, Pirard, Gender-specific Treatment for Women with Substance Use Disorders. Grella, Treatment Seeking and Utilization among Women with Substance Use Disorders. Fals-Stewart, Lam, Kelley, Behavioral Couple Therapy: Partner-involved Treatment for Substance-abusing Women. Part V: Specific Substances. Stewart, Gavric, Collins, Women, Girls, and Alcohol. Perkins, Treatment of Nicotine Dependence in Women. Back, Payne, Gender and Prescription Opioid Addiction. McRae-Clark, Price, Women and Marijuana Dependence: Issues and Opportunities. Lynch, Potenza, Cosgrove, Mazure, Sex Differences in Vulnerability to Stimulant Abuse: A Translational Perspective. Part VI: Special Populations. Upadhyaya, Gray, Adolescent Substance Use and the Role of Gender. Bhuvaneswar, Chang, Substance Use in Pregnancy. Conner, Le Fauve, Wallace, Ethnic and Cultural Correlates of Addiction among Diverse Women. Irwin, Substance Use Disorders among Sexual-minority Women. Part VII: Social and Policy Issues. Waldrop, Violence and Victimization among Women with Substance Use Disorders. Brendel, Soulier, Legal Issues, Addiction, and Gender. June 2009: 526pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-107-4: £43.50 Published by Guilford Press
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
addictions
90
Forthcoming!
Women, Girls, and Addiction Celebrating the Feminine in Counseling Treatment and Recovery Cynthia A. Briggs, Winona State University, Minnesota, USA, and Jennifer L. Pepperell, Minnesota State University – Mankato, USA Women, Girls, and Addiction is the first book on the efficacy of treatment approaches and interventions that are tailored to working with addicted women, and the first publication of any kind to provide a feminist approach to understanding the experience of addiction from the female perspective. Part I of the book provides an overview of feminist theory and addiction counseling, followed by an historical look at women and addiction (research, treatment, demographics). The three chapters in Part II give an in-depth look at the biological, psychological, and social factors of the experience of addiction as unique in women. The final part of the book presents a series of chapters spanning the lifespan, which each feature age-specific special issues, treatment strategies, interventions, and commonly encountered topics in therapy with the population.
attachment From panic attacks to chronic worry, it is estimated that the UK has as many as 20 million sufferers of an anxiety condition, making it one of the most common reasons people seek psychological help. Now, anxiety experts Martin M. Antony and Peter Norton provide sufferers with a state-of-the-art program for conquering their worries, phobias, and obsessions. The Anti-Anxiety Workbook offers an unrivalled toolkit of proven strategies drawn from cognitive-behavioral therapy, the most effective treatment for anxiety. Readers use convenient selfassessment worksheets to identify their worry triggers and keep track of their anxious moments in weekly journals. Hands-on exercises help them change the beliefs and behaviors that cause anxiety and worsen symptoms. Contents: Introduction: The Faces of Anxiety. Part I: The Prep. Anxiety:
The Big Picture. Getting to Know Your Anxiety. Getting Ready for Treatment. Part II: The Program. Changing Your Anxious Thinking. Eliminating the Safety Net. Confronting Feared Objects and Situations. Confronting Scary Thoughts, Memories, Images, and Urges. Confronting Frightening Feelings and Sensations. Learning to Relax: Relaxation, Meditation, and Acceptance. Medications and Herbal Remedies. Part III: In the Long Run. Creating an AntiAnxiety Lifestyle. Overcoming Treatment Obstacles. Living without Anxiety. A Guide for Family and Friends. Appendix: Helpful Resources. 2008: 264pp. Pb: 978-1-59385-993-0: £13.50 Published by Guilford Press
Attachment
Contents: Part I: Overview of Women, Girls and Addiction. Feminist
Theory and Addiction Counseling. Women, Girls, and Addiction: An Historical Perspective. Part II: Biopsychosocial Influences. Biological Factors. Psychological Factors. Social Factors. Part III: Prevention, Treatment, and Relapse Prevention Across the Lifespan. Children and Adolescents. Adult Women. Women in Late Adulthood. August 2009: 220pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99352-4: £18.00 Published by Routledge
for books on Child and Adolescent Addictions please see page 47 Also of Interest
Rassool: Alcohol and Drug Misuse: A Handbook for Students and Health Professionals Hb: 978-0-415-40965-0: 2008: 480pp. £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40967-4: 2008: 480pp. £25.99 Published by Routledge
Attachment Theory and Research in Clinical Work with Adults Edited by Joseph H. Obegi, Alliant University, San Diego, USA, and Ety Berant, Bar-Ilan University, Ramat Gan, Israel
“This comprehensive volume stands as the state-of-the-art guide to the clinical applications of attachment theory... Obegi and Berant have brought together the leading experts in each area of practice and scholarship. At a time when psychotherapists are concerned to establish meaningful links with empirical research, this impressive book is especially necessary.” - Lewis Aron, Director, Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, New York University, USA
Anxiety Disorders
The Anti-Anxiety Workbook Proven Strategies to Overcome Worry, Phobias, Panic, and Obsessions Martin M. Antony, Ryerson University, Ontario, Canada, and Peter J. Norton, University of Houston, Texas, USA
“Everyone with anxiety problems should read this book! It tells you why you have anxiety and exactly, step by step, what you should do about it. It is reader friendly, easy to understand, and based on cutting-edge research. Truly a ‘must read’.”
Written with the practicing psychotherapist in mind, this invaluable book presents cutting-edge knowledge on adult attachment and explores the implications for day-to-day clinical practice. Leading experts illustrate how theory and research in this dynamic area can inform assessment, case formulation, and clinical decision making. The book puts such concepts as the secure base, mentalization, and attachment styles in a new light by focusing on their utility for understanding the therapeutic relationship and processes of change. It offers recommendations for incorporating attachment ideas and tools into specific treatment approaches, with separate chapters on psychoanalytic, interpersonal, cognitive-behavioral, and emotionfocused therapies. selected Contents: Obegi, Berant, Introduction. Part I: Theoretical Foundations. Part II: Assessing Attachment. Part III: Clinical Utility. Part IV: Integration with Clinical Approaches. Part V: Future Directions.
February 2009: 529pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-998-5: £37.50 Published by Guilford Press
- Judith S. Beck, Beck Institute for Cognitive Therapy and Research, USA
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
attachment
New Edition!
Handbook of Attachment Theory, Research, and Clinical Applications Second Edition Edited by Jude Cassidy, University of Maryland, USA, and Phillip R. Shaver, University of California, USA “From its first appearance, the Handbook defied superlatives and instantly established itself as the attachment ‘bible,’ which no self-respecting child development researcher, couple counselor, or progressive psychotherapist could afford to be without. This new edition surpasses even its predecessor, with stellar contributors combining cutting-edge research findings and penetrating clinical observation.” - Jeremy Holmes, University of Exeter, UK From foremost authorities, this comprehensive work is more than just the standard reference on attachment – it has “become indispensable” in the field. Coverage includes the origins and development of attachment theory; biological and evolutionary perspectives; and the role of attachment processes in personality, relationships, and mental health across the lifespan.
eating disorders
minimised and indicates skills and knowledge that can be taught to the carer for both managing their personal reaction to the illness, and for providing a practically and emotionally supportive environment that is conducive to change. Contents: Part I: Introduction to Collaborative Care Between Carers
of People with Eating Disorders and Professional Services. Treasure, Introduction. Treasure, Schmidt, Eating Disorders and the Concept of Working with Families and Other Carers. Kamerling, Smith, The Carers’ Perspective. Baldock, An Ethico-legal Account of Working with Carers in Eating Disorders. Part II: Introduction to the Theoretical Underpinning. Treasure, How Do Families Cope When a Relative has an Eating Disorder. Treasure, Williams, Schmidt, Family Processes as Maintaining Factors for Eating Disorders. Treasure, Understanding Models of Health Behaviours and the Processes Used to Facilitate Change. Treasure, Changing Behaviours in the Family. Part III: Different Forms of Intervention. Treasure, Working with Carers on an Outpatient Basis: The Assessment of the Family. Treasure, Whitney, Writing as a Tool for Developing Reflective Capacity and Emotional Processing. Treasure, Sepulveda, Whittaker, Todd, Lopez, Family and Carer Workshops. Whitaker, Treasure, Todd, An Intensive Three-day Programme with Families Preparing for Transition from Inpatient to Outpatient Care. Macdonald, Grover, Coaching Methods of Supportive Skillsbased Training for Carers. Part IV: Special Cases. Treasure, Micali, Monneyron, Reproductive Function and Parenting in People with an Eating Disorder History. Kyriacou, Treasure, Raenker, The Influence and Importance of Parents in Care and Treatment of an Eating Disorder. Part V: Conclusion and Appendices. Treasure, Macdonald, Goddard, What the Patients Say: An Examination of What Patients Think about Family Interventions. Todd, Whitaker, Macdonald, The Professional Perspective. Appendices.
selected Contents: Part I: Overview of Attachment Theory. Part II: Biological Perspectives. Part III: Attachment in Infancy and Childhood. Part IV: Attachment in Adolescence and Adulthood. Part V: Psychopathology and Clinical Applications of Attachment Theory and Research. Part VI: Systems, Culture, and Context.
September 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48424-4: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48425-1: £24.99 Published by Routledge
2008: 1,020pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-874-2: £84.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-028-2: £37.50 Published by Guilford Press
EATING DISORDERS
Forthcoming!
The Clinician’s Guide to Collaborative Caring in Eating Disorders The New Maudsley Method Edited by Janet Treasure, Guy’s Hospital, King’s College London, UK, Ulrike Schmidt, Maudsley Hospital and the Institute of Psychiatry, London UK, and Pam Macdonald, PhD student, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College, London, UK “This book is a valuable companion piece to Treasure et al.’s existing volume, providing useful information, resources and skills for clinicians. However, this book’s biggest contribution is the way in which it stresses that clinicians should see the family as a resource (rather than a nuisance or an irrelevance).” - Professor Glenn Waller, Vincent Square Eating
Disorders Service, CNWL NHS Foundation Trust
Caring for a loved one with an eating disorder is a difficult task; carers often find it hard to cope, and this can contribute to the maintenance of the disorder. The Clinician’s Guide to Collaborative Caring in Eating Disorders shows how active collaboration between professional and non-professional carers can maximise the quality of life for both the sufferer and all other family members. The book provides straightforward guidance for clinicians who work with families and carers. It suggests ways of ensuring that interpersonal elements that can maintain eating disorders are
91
Forthcoming!
Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Binge Eating and Bulimia Debra L. Safer, Stanford University Medical Center, California, USA, Christy F. Telch, in private practice, California, USA, and Eunice Y. Chen, University of Chicago, USA Foreword by Marsha M. Linehan “Safer et al. have done pioneering work adapting dialectical behavior therapy to the treatment of eating disorders. This book provides a comprehensive yet practical and user-friendly guide for clinicians working with these patients... Very highly recommended.”
- James E. Mitchell, University of North Dakota School of Medicine and Health Sciences, USA
This groundbreaking book gives clinicians a new set of tools for helping people overcome binge-eating disorder and bulimia. It presents an adaptation of dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) developed expressly for this population. What makes this research-based approach unique is its focus on disordered eating as a problem of emotional dysregulation. Featuring vivid case examples and 30 reproducibles, the book shows how to put an end to binge eating and purging by teaching clients more adaptive ways to manage painful emotions. Contents: Introduction. Binge-Eating Disorder and Bulimia Nervosa: Why Dialectical Behavior Therapy? Orientation for Therapists. The Pretreatment Stage: The Pretreatment Interview and Introductory Sessions. Mindfulness Core Skills. Emotion Regulation Skills. Distress Tolerance Skills. Final Sessions: Review and Relapse Prevention. Illustrative Case Examples. Future Directions. Appendix. Information for Researchers.
July 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-265-1: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
eating disorders
92
The Invisible Man
A Self-help Guide for Men With Eating Disorders, Compulsive Exercise and Bigorexia John F. Morgan, Yorkshire Centre for Eating Disorders, Leeds, UK “In ‘The Invisible Man’, John Morgan makes a powerful case for meeting the particular needs of men affected by eating disorders. It can be difficult for anyone to seek help – but the problem is so much greater for young men who develop what many people mistakenly consider is a female problem. Morgan combines theory and practical help in a highly readable style.” - Susan Ringwood, Chief Executive Officer of BEAT Increasingly boys and men are suffering with eating disorders and related body image problems. Some have full-blown conditions such as anorexia nervosa, bulimia, binge eating, compulsive exercising or bigorexia. The Invisible Man applies the latest research to produce a practical, problem-focused self-help manual for men with eating disorders and body image problems.
gerontology body-management and food are understood, represented and regulated within the dominant cultural milieu of the early twenty-first century. Critical Feminist Approaches to Eating Dis/Orders addresses these developments, exploring how eating disordered subjectivities, experiences and body-management practices are theorised and researched within postmodern and post-structuralist feminist frameworks. Selected Contents: Katzman, Foreword. Part I: Theorising Eating Dis/Orders
in a Changing World. Part II: Interrogating Cultural Contexts of Dis/Ordered Eating. Part III: In/Visible Bodies and Embodiment. Part IV: Critiquing the Discourses and Discursive Practices of Treatment. Part V: Critical Interventions. May 2009: 280pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41811-9: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41810-2: £15.95 Published by Routledge
An Active Learning Experience Second Edition Chandra M. Mehrotra, College of St. Scholastica, Minnesota, USA, and Lisa S. Wagner, University of San Francisco, USA
2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-149-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-150-1: £12.99 Published by Routledge
Effective Clinical Practice in the Treatment of Eating Disorders The Heart of the Matter
Edited by Margo Maine, Founding Member, Academy for Eating Disorders, William N. Davis, in private practice, New York and Pennsylvania, USA, and Jane Shure, Kripalu Center, Lenox, USA This book is the first to address what really happens behind closed doors during eating disorders treatment, as most writing has only addressed theoretical approaches and behavioral strategies. The field has long needed a book that describes the heart of the matter: the therapeutic interventions and interactions that comprise life-changing treatment for this life-threatening disorder. 2008: 251pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96461-6: £24.95 Published by Routledge
Critical Feminist Approaches to Eating Dis/Orders Edited by Helen Malson, Centre for Appearance Research, University of the West of England, Bristol, UK, and Maree Burns, Eating Difficulties Education Network, New Zealand Over the past decade there have been significant shifts both in feminist approaches to the field of eating disorders and in the ways in which gender, bodies, body-weight,
Aging and Diversity
This new edition has been completely rewritten and includes chapters that address key topics in diversity and aging: research methods, psychological aging; health beliefs, behaviors, and services; health disparities; informal and formal care for older persons; work and retirement; religious affiliation and spirituality; and death, dying, and bereavement. Taking a broad view of diversity, Mehrotra and Wagner discuss elements of diversity such as gender, race or ethnicity and religious affiliation. Contents: Introduction to the Second Edition. Aging and Diversity. Research Methods. Psychology and Aging. Health Beliefs, Behaviors, and Services. Inequalities in Health. Informal and Formal Care for Older Persons. Work, Retirement, and Leisure. Religious Affiliation and Spirituality. Death, Dying, and Bereavement.
February 2009: 432pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95213-2: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95214-9: £24.95 Published by Routledge
Dementia From Diagnosis to Management – A Functional Approach Michelle S. Bourgeois, Florida State University, USA, and Ellen Hickey, Dalhousie University, Nova Scotia, Canada
This timely volume aims to serve as a reference manual and the starting point for those who want to provide life-enhancing services to persons with dementia, and to inspire the continued generation of quality research to demonstrate the value of cognitive-communication intervention. Students, researchers, and practitioners in communication sciences and disorders will find this book immensely important. Contents: Introduction: History and Philosophy of Treatment in Dementia. Diagnosis of Dementia: Clinical and Pathophysiological Signs of Various Etiologies. Cognitive, Language, and Behavioral Characteristics across the
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
mood disorders Stages of Dementia. Assessment: Cognitive, Communicative and Behavioral Characteristics. Treatment: Solutions to Cognitive- and Communication-based Problems. Management: A Multidisciplinary Focus. Management of Eating and Swallowing Challenges. Quality of Life Issues. Caregiver and Family Issues. Impact on Staff: Training and Supervision Issues. Treatment Settings, Goals, and Documentation Issues. April 2009: 432pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5606-4: £40.00 Published by Psychology Press
Handbook of Depression Second Edition Edited by Ian H. Gotlib, Stanford University, California, USA, and Constance L. Hammen, University of California, Los Angeles, USA
“Gotlib and Hammen have assembled an outstanding group of experts on depressive disorders. This fully updated second edition offers comprehensive, authoritative coverage of diagnosis, epidemiology, genetics, neurobiology, affective neuroscience, treatment, and illness across the lifespan... It is the reference for scientific and practical knowledge on depression.” - Richard C. Shelton, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, USA
Bringing together the field’s leading authorities, this acclaimed work is widely regarded as the standard reference on depression and mood disorders. The Handbook provides comprehensive coverage of the epidemiology, course, and outcome of depressive disorders; issues in assessment and diagnosis; psychological and biological risk factors; effective approaches to prevention and treatment; and the nature of depression in specific populations. Each chapter offers a definitive statement of current theories, methods, and research findings, while also identifying key questions that remain unanswered. Contents: Gotlib, Hammen, Introduction. Part I: Descriptive Aspects of
Depression. Kessler, Wang, Epidemiology of Depression. Boland, Keller, Course and Outcome of Depression. A. M. Nezu, C. M. Nezu, Friedman, Lee, Assessment of Depression. Ingram, Siegle, Methodological Issues in the Study of Depression. Klein, Durbin, Shankman, Personality and Mood Disorders. Freedland, Carney, Depression and Medical Illness. Johnson, Cuellar, Miller, Bipolar and Unipolar Depression: A Comparison of Clinical Phenomenology, Biological Vulnerability, and Psychosocial Predictors. Part II: Vulnerability, Risk, and Models of Depression. Levinson, Genetics of Major Depression. Thase, Neurobiological Aspects of Depression. Davidson, Pizzagalli, Nitschke, Representation and Regulation of Emotion in Depression: Perspectives from Affective Neuroscience. Goodman, Brand, Depression and Early Adverse Experiences. Hammen, Children of Depressed Parents. Joormann, Cognitive Aspects of Depression. Joiner, Jr., Timmons, Depression in its Interpersonal Context. Monroe, Slavich, Georgiades, The Social Environment and Life Stress in Depression. Part III: Depression in Specific Populations. Chentsova-Dutton, Tsai, Understanding Depression across Cultures. Nolen-Hoeksema, Hilt, Gender Differences in Depression. Garber, Gallerani, Frankel, Depression in Children. Rudolph, Adolescent Depression. Davila, Stroud, Starr, Depression in Couples and Families. Blazer, Hybels, Depression in Later Life: Epidemiology, Assessment, Impact, and Treatment. Berman, Depression and Suicide. Part IV: Prevention and Treatment of Depression. Muñoz, Le, Clarke, Barrera, Torres, Preventing First Onset and Recurrence of Major Depressive Episodes. Gitlin, Pharmacotherapy and Other Somatic Treatments for Depression. Hollon, Dimidjian, Cognitive and Behavioral Treatment of Depression. Miklowitz, Pharmacotherapy and Psychosocial Treatments for Bipolar Disorder. Beach, Jones, Franklin, Marital, Family, and Interpersonal Therapies for Depression in Adults. Kaslow, Davis, Oyeshiku Smith, Biological and Psychosocial Interventions for Depression in Children and Adolescents. Hammen, Gotlib, Closing Comments and Future Directions. 2008: 708pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-450-8: £50.00 Published by Guilford Press
93
Women and Depression Recovery and Resistance
Michelle N. Lafrance, St. Thomas University, New Brunswick, Canada Women and Depression: Recovery and Resistance takes a welcome look at women’s experiences of living well after depression. Lafrance argues that the social construction of femininity is dangerous for women’s health, and ultimately, central to their experiences of depression. Beginning with a critical examination of the ways in which women’s depression is a product of the social, political, and interpersonal realities of their everyday lives, the analysis moves on to explore an often ignored aspect of women’s experience – how women manage to ‘recover’ and be well after depression. Contents: Studying Women’s Experiences of Recovery from Depression. Narratives of Depression. Recovery from Depression. Struggling to Self-care: The Material and Discursive Context of Women’s Health Practices. Conclusion: Implications for Usefulness. 2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40430-3: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40431-0: £16.95
Series: Women and Psychology Published by Routledge
for further books in this series please see pages 73, 96
Therapy and the Postpartum Woman Notes on Healing Postpartum Depression for Clinicians and the Women Who Seek their Help
Karen Kleiman, Founder, Postpartum Stress Center, USA “Therapy and the Postpartum Woman is an essential resource for clinicians who work with postpartum women and the clients they serve... Kleiman’s book creates a stellar benchmark for treatment quality and more efficacious outcomes.”
- Susan Stone, president, Postpartum Support International, and psychotherapist specializing in women’s reproductive mental health
This book provides a comprehensive look at effective therapy for postpartum depression. Using a blend of professional objectivity, evidence-based research, and personal, straight-forward suggestions gathered from years of experience, this book brings the reader into the private world of therapy with the postpartum woman. 2008: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98996-1: £24.95 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Depression in New Mothers Causes, Consequences, and Treatment Alternatives Second Edition Kathleen Kendall-Tackett, University of New Hampshire, USA Depression in New Mothers provides a comprehensive approach to treating PPD in an easy-to-use format. It reviews the research and brings together the evidence-base for understanding the causes and for assessing the different treatment options.
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
mood disorders
94
Invaluable in treating the mothers who come to you for help, this helpful guide dispels the myths that hinder effective treatment and presents up-to-date information on the impact of maternal depression on the health of the mother, as well as the health and well-being of the infant. December 2009: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-77838-1: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77839-8: £21.99 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
The Other Depression Bipolar Disorder Second Edition Robert Grieco, Trinity Family Practice, a Division of Tri-State Medical, Heritage Valley Health System, USA, and Laura Edwards, writer and a graduate of Bryn Mawr College, Pennsylvania, USA In The Other Depression, Grieco and Edwards help people understand and destigmatize those afflicted with bipolar disorder. Topics discussed include the genetic signature and environmental stresses and underpinnings of this disease, along with how it alters the functioning of the brain, and how it can be treated. The authors also introduce resources available to bipolar people and their families and suggest strategies for coping and getting on with life. Contents: Introduction. Discovering Bipolar Disorder. A Different Kind of
Depression. The Bipolar Spectrum. Five Keys to Diagnosing Bipolar Disorder. The Bipolar Personality. Depression. Mania. Mixed States. Bipolar II. Could My Depression Be Bipolar? Associated Physical and Psychiatric Illness. Bipolar Disorder in Children. Bipolar Disorder in Adolescents. Bipolar Disorder in the Elderly. Seasonal Depression. Suicide. Drug Therapy for Bipolar Disorder. Winning the Peace. Do Antidepressants Cause Suicide? The Science of Bipolar Disorder. Bipolar Disorder and Creativity. The Epidemiology of Bipolar Disorder. When a Loved One has Bipolar Disorder. Living with Bipolar Disorder. Appendices. November 2009: 170pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99876-5: £49.50 Pb: 978-0-415-99877-2: £13.95 Published by Routledge
New Edition!
Bipolar Disorder A Clinician’s Guide to Treatment Management Second Edition Edited by Lakshmi N. Yatham, University of British Columbia, Canada, and Vivek Kusumakar, Dalhousie University, Nova Scotia, Canada This essential text provides clinicians with an extraordinarily wellbalanced and comprehensive overview of rational and researchinformed contemporary clinical practice in the assessment and medical management of patients with bipolar disorder. With the advent of a new generation of treatments, there is a resurgence of interest in the pharmacological treatment of bipolar disorders. In Bipolar Disorder, clinicians who are faced with making choices from a variety of treatments are instructed how to mold their practice around the long-term symptomatic and functional needs of their patients. With a focus on pharmacotherapy, the foundation of symptomatic treatment, Bipolar Disorder provides the most recent analysis of the data regarding efficacy and safety of medications along with practical guidelines with which treatment choices can be made.
Contents: Kusumakar, Yatham, Diagnosis and Treatment of Hypomania and Mania. Muzina, Kemp, Yatham, Calabrese, Bipolar Depression: Diagnosis and Treatment. Kupka, Frye, Diagnosis and Treatment of Rapid Cycling Bipolar Disorder. Ng, Cahill, Malhi, Berk, Bipolar II Disorder: Assessment and Treatment. Estevez, Suppes, Maintenance Treatment in Bipolar I Disorder. Taylor, Steiner, Soares, Bipolar Disorders in Women: Special Issues. Berwaerts, Kutcher, Kusumakar, Bipolar Disorder in Children and Adolescents. Singh, Kusumakar, Sajtovic, Bipolar Disorder in the Elderly. Goldberg, Comorbidity in Bipolar Disorder: Assessment and Treatment. Levine, Chengappa, Lithium in the Treatment of Bipolar Disorder. Bond, Vieta, Tohen, Yatham, Antipsychotic Medications in Bipolar Disorders: A Critical Review of Randomized Controlled Trials. Gijsman, Nolen, Antidepressants for Bipolar Disorder: A Review of Efficacy. Yatham, Kusumakar, Anticonvulsants in Treatment of Bipolar Disorder: A Review of Efficacy. Lam, Chan, Howard, Somatic Treatments for Bipolar Disorder. Ketter, Wang, Psychotropic Medications in Bipolar Disorder: Pharmacodynamics, Pharmacokinetics, Drug Interactions, Adverse Effects and their Management. Scott, Colom, Practical Issues in Psychological Approaches to Individuals with Bipolar Disorder. Miklowitz, Psychosocial Interventions for Bipolar Disorder: A Critical Review of Evidence for Efficacy. Quiroz, Post, Novel Treatments in Bipolar Disorder: Future Directions.
May 2009: 644pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96136-3: £46.95 Published by Routledge
Routledge Recommends!
When Someone You Love is Bipolar Help and Support for You and Your Partner Cynthia G. Last, in private practice, Boca Raton, Florida, USA “This book is a ‘must read’ for loved ones of bipolar sufferers. Dr. Last’s candid sharing of her own personal struggles, and her therapeutic insight and recommendations, will resonate deeply with readers.” - Mary A. Fristad, coauthor of Raising a Moody Child
What happens when “in sickness and in health” meets the turbulent challenges of bipolar disorder? In this wise, candid, and compassionate book written expressly for the spouse or partner, Dr. Cynthia Last shares her heartfelt insights as a highly regarded therapist/researcher and a bipolar sufferer. Readers learn how to help their loved one come to terms with a bipolar diagnosis and find effective treatment – and how to work together to get control over the mood swings and live life to the fullest. Vivid examples from Dr. Last’s own experience and the couples she has treated illuminate ways to resolve painful relationship conflicts caused by the illness. Contents: Rubin, Foreword. Introduction. Does Someone You Love Have Bipolar Disorder? What You Can Expect: The Course of Bipolar Illness. “It’s Not Me!”: When Your Partner is in Denial. What You Need to Know about Your Partner’s Treatment. You, Your Loved One, and the Doctors: The Team Approach to Getting and Staying Well. Helping Your Partner Stick with Medication. Other Things You and Your Partner Can Do to Prevent Mood Episodes. Strategies for Dealing with the Ups Together. Strategies for Dealing with the Downs Together. Taking Care of Yourself and Your Relationship. Resources.
June 2009: 306pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-124-1: £25.95 Pb: 978-1-59385-608-3: £10.95 Published by Guilford Press
for books on Child and Adolescent Mood Disorders please see page 50
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
obsessive compulsive disorder
Routledge Recommends!
Getting Over OCD A 10-Step Workbook for Taking Back Your Life Jonathan S. Abramowitz, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA “OCD can make you feel alone, misunderstood, and trapped. With Getting Over OCD, all that will change. Dr. Abramowitz, a world renowned expert, coaches you through a program that can free you from your struggle with obsessions and compulsions... his warm and reassuring voice, coupled with a comprehensive, scientifically proven, step-by-step format, will keep you supported and motivated.” - Reid Wilson,
personality disorders
Contents: Introduction. Part I: Definitions. Making the Diagnosis. The Boundaries of BPD. Personality and Development. Part II: Causes. Risk Factors. A General Model. Part III: Treatment. Outcome. Pharmacotherapy. Psychotherapy. Guidelines for Management. Therapeutic Interventions. Problems in Therapy. Suicidality and Hospitalization. Research Directions.
2008: 272pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-834-6: £24.00 Published by Guilford Press
Contents: Introduction. Part I: Getting to Know the Enemy. Step 1: OCD
101: Learning about the Symptoms, Causes, and Treatments. Step 2: Analyzing Your Own OCD Symptoms. Step 3: Understanding OCD’s Battle Plan. Part II: Getting Ready. Step 4: Customizing Your Action Plan. Step 5: Strengthening Your Resolve to Move Forward. Part III: Your Treatment Program. Gathering Your Forces. Step 6: Attacking OCD at its Foundation: Thinking Errors. Step 7: Defeating Avoidance Behavior. Step 8: Defeating Obsessional Thoughts, Doubts, and Images. Step 9: Defeating Your Compulsive Urges. Putting It All Together. Step 10: Ending Your Program and Staying Well. July 2009: 307pp. Pb: 978-1-59385-999-2: £13.50
The Guilford Self-Help Workbook Series Published by Guilford Press
Personality Disorders
Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder A Guide to Evidence-Based Practice Joel Paris, McGill University, Montreal, Canada “An invaluable resource that is filled with authentic information from one of the world’s experts on this widespread and disabling condition... This book is an essential addition to my ‘borderline library’!” - John M. Oldham,
Senior Vice-President and Chief of Staff, Menninger Clinic, USA
Organizing a vast body of scientific literature, this indispensable book presents the state of the art in understanding borderline personality disorder (BPD) and distills key treatment principles that therapists need to know. Rather than advocating a particular approach, Joel Paris examines a range of therapies and identifies the core ingredients of effective intervention. He offers specific guidance for meeting the needs of this challenging population, including ways to improve diagnosis and promote emotion regulation and impulse control.
Borderline Personality Disorder Meeting the Challenges to Successful Treatment Edited by Perry D. Hoffman, President of the National Education Alliance for Borderline Personality Disorder, Inc., New York, USA, and Penny Steiner-Grossman, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, New York, USA
author of Don’t Panic
Unwanted, repetitive thoughts and actions disrupt millions of lives and cause tremendous suffering and distress. But OCD can be beat – and there’s no more trusted authority than Dr. Jonathan Abramowitz to show how. Structured to mirror the steps of cognitive-behavioral therapy, the most effective treatment for the disorder, this engaging workbook is packed with selfassessment and planning tools; carefully sequenced exercises; and informative examples that sufferers will relate to.
95
Borderline Personality Disorder brings together over two dozen of the field’s leading experts in one enlightening text. The book also offers mental health providers a view of BPD from the perspectives of sufferers as well as family members to foster an understanding of the experiences of relatives who are often devastated by their loved ones’ struggles with this common disorder. Borderline Personality Disorder provides social workers and other mental health clinicians with practical access to the knowledge necessary for effective treatment. Contents: Hoffman, Steiner-Grossman, Introduction. Gunderson, Borderline Personality Disorder: An Overview. Hersh, Confronting Myths and Stereotypes About Borderline Personality Disorder. Goodman, Triebwasser, New, Biological Underpinnings of Borderline Personality Disorder. Case Study: The Case of Joan. Smith, BPD and the Need for Community: A Social Worker’s Perspective. Friedman, Borderline Personality Disorder and Hospitalization. Miller, Neft, Golombeck, Borderline Personality Disorder and Adolescence. Paris, An Evidence-based Approach to Managing Suicidal Behavior in Patients with BPD. Koons, Dialectical Behavior Therapy. Schulz, Rafferty, Combined Medication and Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Borderline Personality Disorder. Appelbaum, Supportive Psychotherapy for Borderline Patients. Yeomans, Delaney, Transference-focused Psychotherapy for BPD. Blum, Black, Systems Training for Emotional Predictability and Problem Solving (STEPPS) for the Treatment of BPD. Bateman, Fonagy, Mentalization-based Treatment for BPD. Buteau, Dawkins, Hoffman, In Their Own Words: Improving Services and Hopefulness for Families Dealing with BPD. Fruzzetti, Shenk, Fostering Validating Responses in Families. Penney, Family Connections: An Education and Skills Training Program for Family Member Well Being: A Leader’s Perspective. Van Gelder, Inhabited by a Cry: Living with Borderline Personality Disorder. 2008: 275pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3233-1: £53.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3234-8: £25.00 Published by Routledge
Integrated Treatment for Co-Occurring Disorders Personality Disorders and Addiction Sharon C. Ekleberry, Community Services Board, Transformation Initiatives, USA
Integrated Treatment for Co-Occurring Disorders addresses a complex client population, which presents service providers with significant professional challenges. Underlying personality
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
physical and sexual abuse
96
disorders compromise treatment effectiveness for medical, other psychiatric, or trauma services, as well as the ability these individuals have in adhering to probation, parole, or court-ordered treatment requirements. This book brings focus to the specifics of assessment and treatment for this type of co-occurring disorder and suggests that greater adaptability, fewer self-sabotaging behaviors, and an abstinent lifestyle are all possible. Recovery from both disorders is the journey these individuals take toward greater maturation, reliable impulse control, and coping skills that are not dependent upon the evasion of the demands of living or use of substances to manage stress or uncomfortable affect.
Adulthood. Introduction. Symptoms and Diagnoses. Focus on Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder. Focus on Personality Disorder. Putting it all Together – A Joined Up Approach. Review and Exercise. Part IV: Psychological Therapy. Introduction. Psychological Therapies. Some Ground-rules for Psychological Therapy. More Issues to Consider Before Starting Therapy. Review and Some Final Thoughts. Further Information, Links and Contacts.
Contents: Integrated Treatment for Individuals with Co-Occurring Personality and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster A: The Paranoid Personality Disorder (PPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster A: The Schizoid Personality Disorder (SPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster A: The Schizotypal Personality Disorder (StPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster B: The Antisocial Personality Disorder (APD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster B: The Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster B: The Histrionic Personality Disorder (HPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster B: The Narcissistic Personality Disorder (NPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster C: The Avoidant Personality Disorder (AvPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster C: The Dependent Personality Disorder (DPD) and Substance Use Disorders. Cluster C: The Obsessive-Compulsive Personality Disorder (OCPD) and Substance Use Disorders. The Depressive Personality Disorder (DpPD) and Substance Use Disorders: Appendix B in the DSM-IV-TR. Passive-aggressive (Negativistic) Personality Disorder (PAPD) and Substance Use Disorders: Appendix. Final Thoughts and Future Directions.
2008: 202pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3692-6: £56.50 Pb: 978-0-7890-3693-3: £19.95 Published by Routledge
Physical and Sexual Abuse
2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42482-0: £50.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42483-7: £12.99 Published by Routledge
Understanding the Effects of Child Sexual Abuse Feminist Revolutions in Theory, Research and Practice
Sam Warner, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK “An elegantly written and practically useful text for students of gender and welfare in a variety of disciplines... Its conclusions and recommendations for ethical practice in the area of sexual abuse show considerable sagacity and are practical, pragmatic and compassionate.” - Professor Sue White, Lancaster University, UK Child sexual abuse is a global problem that negatively affects many women and girls. As such, it has long been of concern to feminists, and more recently mental health activists. Understanding the Effects of Child Sexual Abuse draws on this revolutionary legacy, feminism and poststructuralism to critically examine current perceptions of women, girls and child sexual abuse in psychology, psychiatry and the mass media.
Moving On After Childhood Sexual Abuse
2008: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-36027-2: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-36028-9: £16.95
Understanding the Effects and Preparing for Therapy
Published by Routledge
Jonathan Willows, Sussex Partnership NHS Trust, UK This self-help guide allows those who have experienced childhood sexual abuse to consider the impact that it has had on their adult lives from a new perspective, helping them to understand the effects, and prepare for therapy.
Series: Women and Psychology
for further books in this series please see pages 73, 93
The Partners of Child Sex Offenders Tell Their Stories Terry Philpot, Freelance journalist “Through sensitive interviews, Terry Philpot reveals the range of feelings and emotions experienced by mothers whose male partners have sexually abused children... This is a valuable contribution to a long neglected aspect of sex abuse.” - Sir Roger Singleton, CBE, Chair of the
Based on known reactions to physical and emotional trauma, the book explains how a broad range of difficulties in adulthood can result from sexual abuse in childhood. The reader is invited to think about how psychological therapy can be particularly helpful in reducing these difficulties and promoting change. Ground rules for therapy are provided, as well as guidance on how to get the most from the therapy process. Moving On After Childhood Sexual Abuse provides a clear explanation of the developmental effects of childhood sexual abuse as well as the role of psychological therapy. Contents: Part I: Childhood Sexual Abuse, An Introduction and
Overview. Introduction: About This Book and How to Use It. Childhood Sexual Abuse – A Definition and Overview. The Impact of Childhood Sexual Abuse Upon the Individual. Beyond the Individual, Child Sexual Abuse and Society. Review and Exercise. Part II: Childhood Sexual Abuse and Child Development. An Introduction to Child Development. Models of Child Development. What Happens if Things Go Wrong? Risk Factors and a Useful Summary. Review and Exercise. Part III: Childhood Sexual Abuse and
Understanding Child Abuse
Independent Safeguarding Authority
Understanding Child Abuse is the first book to look at women whose partners are child sex offenders. Much of the book is devoted to the voices of the women themselves, telling their stories and how they feel about the situations in which they found themselves, how they coped, and how they remade their lives and those of their families. 2008: 150pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40949-0: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45600-5: £19.99 Published by Routledge
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
physical and sexual abuse
97
Sex-Offender Therapy
Forthcoming!
A “How-To” Workbook for Therapists Treating Sexually Aggressive Adults, Adolescents, and Children
Domestic Violence and Psychology
Rudy Flora, in private practice, Virginia, USA, Joseph T. Duehl, Veterans Administration, Virginia, USA, Wanda Fisher, Smyth County Counseling Center, Virginia, USA, Sandra Halsey, in private practice, Virginia, USA, Michael Keohane, The Highland Community Services Board, Virginia, USA, Barbara L. Maberry, and Jeffery A. McCorkindale, both in private practice, and Leroy C. Parson, School Guidance Counselor, Virginia, USA Sex-Offender Therapy is a practical workbook for clinicians who deal with sexually aggressive adults, adolescents, and children. This invaluable professional resource focuses on how to treat patients – male and female – impaired by sexual addiction, sexual disorders, sex offending, and other sexual misconduct behaviors. Contents: Introduction. Sexual Recovery Therapy. Using Sexual Recovery
Techniques. Clinical Sex Disorders. Acknowledgment. The Stand-up Presentation. The Four-phase Program. Working with Difficult Sex Offenders. Trauma. The Cost of Offending. Adult Male Patients. Adult Female Patients. Antisocial Disordered Patients. Triggers. The Clinical Interview and Reportwriting. The Penile Plethysmography. The Polygraph. Relapse-prevention Plan. The Treatment of Sexually Aggressive Youth. Sexual Recovery for Children and Adolescents. Sexually Aggressive Children and Adolescents. Defense Behaviors. Dual-diagnosis Patients. Self-esteem. Group Therapy. Sexual Addiction. Family Reunification. Risk Assessment. The Internet. The Therapist’s Role in Teaching Protection Methods to Children and Adults. Conclusion. Appendices. 2008: 304pp. Pb: 978-0-7890-3123-5: £31.00 Published by Routledge
schizophrenia and psychosis
Domestic Violence Treatment for Abusive Women A Treatment Manual
Ellen L. Bowen, in private practice, USA In Domestic Violence Treatment for Abusive Women, Bowen challenges us to re-think our gender and violence constructs and guides clinicians through the emerging field of treatment of female abusers. Unlike other books designed for male clients that may be adapted to women, this book is specifically written for use with women, with handouts and exercises created from the author’s own clinical experience. It is deliberately designed to give clinicians knowledge to deal with all aspects of female domestic violence. Contents: Part I: Theory. Understanding Domestic Violence. Theoretical Foundations for Treatment. Effective Treatment. Diagnostic Issues and Categories. Practice Issues, Cultural Competence, Ethical Considerations. Use of this Therapy with Other Groups. Part II: Practice. Before Group: Setting the Stage for Change to Occur. Record Keeping and Administration Forms. Facilitating the Group: Getting Started. Using Binder Handouts to Facilitate Growth and Change. Appendices.
January 2009: 214pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3810-4: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3811-1: £19.99 Published by Routledge
A Critical Perspective Paula Nicolson, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK Domestic Violence and Psychology rethinks the way psychological knowledge of domestic violence has typically been constructed. The book puts forward a psychological perspective which is both critical of the traditional ‘woman blaming’ stance, as well as being at odds with the feminist position that men are wholly to blame for domestic abuse. Drawing on the work of scholars including Giddens, Foucault, Klein and Winnicott, and using interview and survey data to illustrate its arguments, Domestic Violence and Psychology develops a theoretical framework for examining the context, intentions and experiences in the lives of women in abusive relationships, the men who abuse and the children who suffer in the abusive family. January 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-38371-4: £45.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38372-1: £14.95
Series: Women and Psychology Published by Routledge
Forthcoming!
Violence and Abuse Issues Cross-Cultural Perspectives for Health and Social Services Edited by Lee Ann Hoff, Life Crisis Institute, USA Health and social service providers are in pivotal positions to provide preventive and restorative services to those affected by violent and abusive behaviour. This comprehensive textbook presents theoretical background and practical strategies for doing so, providing a solid knowledge base for good practice in this area. June 2009: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46571-7: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46572-4: £21.99 Published by Routledge
for books on Child and Adolescent Abuse please see page 50 Schizophrenia and Psychosis
Schizophrenia Cognitive Theory, Research, and Therapy Aaron T. Beck, University of Pennsylvania, USA, Neil A. Rector, University of Toronto, Canada, Neal Stolar, and Paul Grant, both at the University of Pennsylvania, USA “... This book is a masterpiece that challenges conventional thinking and describes one of the most exciting developments in psychiatry today. It is essential reading for all mental health
professionals.” - Richard Bentall, University of Bangor, UK From Aaron T. Beck and colleagues, this is the definitive work on the cognitive model of schizophrenia and its treatment. The volume integrates cognitive-behavioral and biological knowledge into a state-
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
98
isps series
schizophrenia and psychosis
of-the-science conceptual framework. It comprehensively examines the origins, development, and maintenance of key symptom areas: delusions, hallucinations, negative symptoms, and formal thought disorder. Treatment chapters then offer concrete guidance for addressing each type of symptom, complete with case examples and session outlines. Contents: Overview of Schizophrenia. Biological Contributions. A Cognitive Conceptualization of Delusions. A Cognitive Model of Auditory Hallucinations. A Cognitive Conceptualization of Negative Symptoms. A Cognitive Conceptualization of Formal Thought Disorder. Assessment. Engagement and Fostering the Therapeutic Relationship. Cognitive Assessment and Therapy of Delusions. Cognitive Assessment and Therapy of Auditory Hallucinations. Cognitive Assessment and Therapy of Negative Symptoms. Cognitive Assessment and Therapy of Formal Thought Disorder. Cognitive Therapy and Pharmacotherapy. An Integrative Cognitive Model of Schizophrenia. Appendices. Appendix A: Beck Cognitive Insight Scale (BCIS). Appendix B: Scoring and Interpretation of the Beck Cognitive Insight Scale (BCIS). Appendix C: Suggested Outline for Initial Psychological/Psychiatric Evaluation. Appendix D: Cognitive Assessment of Psychosis Inventory (CAPI). Appendix E: Cognitive Triads for Delusional Beliefs. Appendix F: Common Cognitive Distortions also Seen in Patients with Psychosis. Appendix G: Cognitive Distortions Specific to Psychosis. Appendix H: Thought Disorder Rating Scale (THORATS).
2008: 418pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-018-3: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
Schizophrenia: The Positive Perspective
Explorations at the Outer Reaches of Human Experience Second Edition Peter K. Chadwick, Retired, formerly of Birkbeck College Faculty of Continuing Education and The Open University, UK “This excellent book is written by a psychologist who has experienced psychosis. His own case history and that of others should be essential reading for both trainees and graduates in the Mental Health Field.” - Brian Martindale, Consultant Psychiatrist, Early Intervention in Psychosis Service, Northumberland Tyne and Wear NHS Trust, UK
This fully revised second edition of Schizophrenia: The Positive Perspective uses biographical sketches and essays to discuss schizophrenia and related conditions, providing advice on methods of coping, routes to growth, recovery and well-being, and how schizophrenia can be viewed in a positive light. It also explores the insights of R.D. Laing and discusses how they can be applied to contemporary ideas and research. Schizophrenia: The Positive Perspective encourages hope, confidence and increased self-esteem in schizophrenia sufferers and raises new questions about how schizophrenia should be evaluated. Contents: Introduction: In Defence of Spirituality, Mysticism and Madness. Demystifying Madness and Mystifying Sanity. Parker, Cannabis and Altered States – A Positive View. Hammond, Cannabis and Altered States – The Dark Side. Getting in to Psychosis: The Story from the Inside. Getting Out of Psychosis: Hints and Strategies. Thinking at The Borderline: The ‘Deep Music’ Theory of Reality. Desmond: Comedian Mystic. Ivo: Fugitive from Crassness. Denys: Adventures in Meaning. Reflections on the Biographical Sketches. On the Acceptance and Emotional Understanding of Psychotic Thought. Issues in Diagnosis, Therapy and Understanding. Conclusions and Overview.
2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45907-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45908-2: £21.99 Published by Routledge
www.routledgementalhealth.com/isps
Psychotherapeutic Approaches to Schizophrenic Psychoses Past, Present and Future
Edited by Yrjö O. Alanen, University of Turku, Finland, Manuel González de Chávez, Complutense Madris University, Spain, Ann-Louise S. Silver, University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, Maryland, USA, and Brian Martindale, South Tyne and Wearside, Mental Health NHS Trust, UK “I am delighted to bring to the attention of psychiatrists and other mental health professionals across the world the work reflected in this book, as I am convinced that these approaches with their humanistic core have much to offer for upgrading person-centered clinical care for people experiencing psychoses.” - Professor Juan E. Mezzich, President of the World Psychiatric Association
Psychotherapeutic Approaches to Schizophrenic Psychoses brings together professionals from around the world to provide an extensive overview of the treatment of schizophrenia and psychosis. Divided into three parts – past, present and future – the book begins by examining the history of the treatment of schizophrenia and psychosis, with reference to Freud, Jung, Harry Stack Sullivan and Adolf Meyer, amongst others. Part II then takes a geographical look at treatment and its evolution in different parts of the world including the UK, USA, Northern Europe and Eastern Asia. Finally, Part III covers the range of interventions, from pharmacological treatments to psychoanalytic psychotherapy to CBT, with the aim of helping to shape the future integration of treatment. With contributions from leading figures in the field, this book will provide a varied examination of treatment, and spark much-needed debate about its future. Contents: Part I: The Past. Early History of the Treatment of Schizophrenic Psychoses and the Pioneers of the Psychotherapeutic Approach. Alanen, Can We Approach Schizophrenic Patients from a Psychological Basis? Chávez, Treatment of Psychoses Before the Twentieth Century. Alanen, The Schreber Case and Freud’s Two-edged Influence on the Psychoanalytic Approach to Psychoses. Hoffmann, The Burghölzli School: Bleuler, Jung, Spielrein, Binswanger and Others. Alanen, The Pioneering Work of Paul Federn. Silver, Pioneers of the Psychoanalytically Oriented Treatment of Psychosis in the United States. Part II: From Past to Present. Developments in Different Parts of the World from the 1940s to the Present. United Sates of America. Silver, Stedman, Psychodynamic Developments in the United States, 1940s to the Present. Great Britain. Jackson, The Contribution of Kleinian Developments in Psychoanalysis to the Treatment of Psychotic Cases. Kennard, Psychological Therapies for Schizophrenic Psychoses in the U.K. German-speaking Central Europe. Hoffmann, The Development of Psychosis Psychotherapy in Switzerland. Mentzos, The Development of Psychosis Psychotherapy in Germany and Austria. France. Gaudilliére, Davoine, The Contribution of Some French Psychoanalysts to the Clinical and Theoretical Approach to Transference in the Psychodynamic Treatment of Psychosis. Itlay. Alessandrini, Di Giannantonio, The Psychiatric Care Reform Bill and Development of Psychotherapeutic Approaches to Psychosis in Italy. Northern Europe. Aaltonen, Alanen, Cullberg, Haugsgjerd, Levander, Rosenbaum, Developments in the Scandinavian Countries. Levander, Cullberg, Sweden: From Bjerre to the Parachute Project. Haugsgjerd, Norway: Wards for Intensive Psychotherapy. Rosenbaum, Denmark: Progress by Means of Project Work. Aaltonen, Alanen, Finland: Continuous Efforts to a Shared Space of Understanding. Summary. Eastern Europe. Bomba, Did Iron Curtain Influence the Use of Psychotherapy in the Treatment of People Diagnosed as Having Schizophrenic Disorder. Eastern Asia. Chua, Developments in Eastern Asia: Focus on Singapore. Huh, Taopsychotherapy in Korea. New Zealand. Geekie, Taitimu, Rook, Read, Ang, Randal, A History of Treatment Approaches to Psychosis in New Zealand.
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
isps series Part III: From Present to Future. Different Modalities of Treatment and Interventions: Their Present State and Views for Future. Koehler, Silver, Psychodynamic Treatment of Psychosis in the U.S.A.: Promoting Development Beyond Biological Reductionism. Stierlin, The Family in Schizophrenic Disorder: Systemic Approaches. Chávez, Group Psychotherapy and Schizophrenia. Dudley, Brabban, Turkington, Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy for Psychosis. Hietala, Psychopharmacological Treatment and Psychotherapy in Schizophrenic Psychoses. Räkköläinen, Aaltonen, The Principles of Using and Not-using of Neuroleptics in the Finnish Need-adapted Approach to the Treatment of Schizophrenic Psychoses. Larsen, Prevention and Early Intervention in Psychosis. Harding, McCrory, Psychotherapy and Rehabilitation: A Comparison between Psychotherapeutic Approaches and Psychiatric Rehabilitation for Persons with Serious and Persistent Mental Illness: A Call for More Integrative Strategies. Aderhold, Soteria Model – A Treatment Model and Reform Movement in Psychiatry. Whitaker, Deinstitutionalization and Neuroleptics: The Myth and the Reality. Alanen, Chávez, Silver, Martindale, Further Development of Treatment Approaches to Schizophrenic Psychoses: An Integrated View. Appendices. May 2009: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44012-7: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44013-4: £24.99
Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses Published by Routledge
Making Sense of Madness Contesting the Meaning of Schizophrenia
Jim Geekie, clinical psychologist for Auckland District Health Board, New Zealand, and John Read, University of Auckland, New Zealand “Jim Geekie and John Read have written a fascinating book about what psychiatrists call ‘schizophrenia’... This is a ‘must read’ for all mental health professionals and everyone else interested in madness.” - Professor Paul J. Fink, Past President American Psychiatric Association, Temple University School of Medicine, USA
The experience of madness – which might also be referred to more formally as ‘schizophrenia’ or ‘psychosis’ – consists of a complex, confusing, and often distressing collection of experiences, such as hearing voices or developing unusual, seemingly unfounded beliefs. Madness, in its various forms and guises, seems to be a ubiquitous feature of being human, yet our ability to make sense of madness, and our knowledge of how to help those who are so troubled is limited. Making Sense of Madness explores the subjective experiences of madness. Using clients’ stories and verbatim descriptions, it argues that the experience of ‘madness’ is an integral part of what it is to be human, and that greater focus on subjective experiences can contribute to professional understandings and ways of helping those who might be troubled by these experiences. Contents: Introduction. The Subjective Experience of Madness. Making Sense of Madness I: Subjective Experience. Making Sense of Madness II: Lay Understandings. What Does the Public Think About ‘Schizophrenia’? Making Sense of Madness III: Scientific/Professional Understandings of ‘Madness’. Bringing It All Together. What ‘Schizophrenia’ Really Is. Where to From Here? May 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46195-5: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46196-2: £19.99
Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses Published by Routledge
99
Beyond Medication
Therapeutic Engagement and the Recovery from Psychosis Edited by David Garfield, Rosalind Franklin University of Medicine and Science, USA, and Daniel Mackler, in private practice, New York, USA “This superbly executed work is as courageous as it is timely. At last psychoanalytically informed psychotherapy is being recommended and justified for the treatment of psychotic patients – over and above – and often instead of – psychopharmacology!” - James Grotstein, David Geffen School of Medicine, UCLA, USA
Beyond Medication focuses on the creation and evolution of the therapeutic relationship as the agent of change in the recovery from psychosis. Organized from the clinician’s point of view, this practical guidebook moves directly into the heart of the therapeutic process with a sequence of chapters that outline the progressive steps of engagement necessary to recovery. Both the editors and contributors challenge the established medical model by placing the therapeutic relationship at the centre of the treatment process, thus supplanting medication as the single most important element in recovery. Contents: Karon, Silver, Foreword. Part I: Engaging the Patient. Garfield,
Dorman, Strengthening the Patient. Faulconer, Silver, The Initial Engagement in the Psychotherapy of Psychosis, With and Without an Asylum. Prouty, Making Contact with the Chronically Regressed Patient. Schwartz, Summers, The Role of the Therapeutic Alliance in the Treatment of Seriously Disturbed Individuals. Part II: The Elements of Change. Summers, Sustaining Relationships: Cure, Care, and Recovery. Kipp, Sustaining Relationships in Milieu Treatment: A Corollary to Summers. Koehler, The Process of Therapeutic Change: Trauma, Dissociation, and Therapeutic Symbiosis. Gibbs, Technical Challenges in the Psychoanalytic Treatment of Psychotic Depression. Mackler, Practicing the “Impossible Profession” in Impossible Places. Part III: Listening to the Patient: Stories of What Really Works. Penney, Leaving Schizophrenia: The Returning Home of the Awakened Mind. Greenberg, Life in the Mines: A Retrospective on my Therapy. Foltz, The Experience of Being Medicated in Schizophrenia: A Subjective Inquiry and Implications for Psychotherapy. Part IV: Concluding Chapter. Steinman, Sustaining the Therapeutic Approach: Therapists May Need Help Too! 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46386-7: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46387-4: £19.99
Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses Published by Routledge
Also in the Series Gale et al., Eds.: Therapeutic Communities for Psychosis: Philosophy, History and Clinical Practice Hb: 978-0-415-44053-0: 2008: 296pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44054-7: 2008: 296pp. £19.99
Gleeson et al., Eds.: Psychotherapies for the Psychoses: Theoretical, Cultural and Clinical Integration Hb: 978-0-415-41191-2: 2008: 288pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41192-9: 2008: 288pp. £19.99
Hardcastle et al., Eds: Experiences of Mental Health In-patient Care: Narratives from Service Users, Carers and Professionals Hb: 978-0-415-41081-6: 2007: 248pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41082-3: 2007: 248pp. £19.99
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
100
schizophrenia and psychosis
Bloch Thorsen et al.: Family and Multi-Family Work with Psychosis: A Guide for Professionals Hb: 978-1-58391-726-8: 2006: 152pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-727-5: 2006: 152pp. £19.99
Cullberg: Psychoses: An Integrative Perspective Hb: 978-1-58391-992-7: 2006: 368pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-993-4: 2006: 368pp. £20.99
Johannessen et al., Eds.: Evolving Psychosis: Different Stages, Different Treatments Hb: 978-1-58391-722-0: 2006: 320pp. £55.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-723-7: 2006: 320pp. £20.99
Read et al., Eds.: Models of Madness: Psychological, Social and Biological Approaches to Schizophrenia Pb: 978-1-58391-906-4: 2004: 400pp. £20.99
Narrative CBT for Psychosis John Rhodes, Consultant Psychologist, Brent, CNWL Trust, UK, Simon Jakes, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, Campbelltown Hospital, South West Sydney, Australia “Narrative CBT for Psychosis is a clearly written text describing the potential for integrating solution-focused and narrative-based approaches with CBT for psychosis.” - David Kingdon, Professor of Mental Health Care Delivery, University of Southampton, UK
Designed to meet the complex needs of patients with psychosis, Narrative CBT for Psychosis combines narrative and solution-focused therapy with established techniques from CBT into one integrated flexible approach. In this book John Rhodes and Simon Jakes bring the practitioner up to date, as treatment and practice evolve to draw on other therapeutic approaches, creating an approach which is client centred and nonconfrontational. The book contains many tried and tested practical ideas for helping clients, with several chapters including detailed and illuminating case studies. Contents: Narrative CBT for Psychosis. Understanding Psychosis and Implications
for Therapy. Assessment, Engagement and Case-conceptualisation. Finding Solutions. Working with Personal Meaning. Narrative and Trauma. Alternative Perspectives. Voices and Visions. Movement to Recovery and Ending Therapy. January 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40730-4: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47572-3: £24.99 Published by Routledge
Self-Harm and suicide
Forthcoming!
Managing Self-Harm Psychological Perspectives Edited by Anna Motz, Consultant Clinical and Forensic Psychologist with the Thames Valley Forensic Services, UK “Caring for people who harm themselves is hard work. This excellent collection of papers, ably edited by Anna Motz, will help those of us who do this difficult work to do it better.” - Dr Gwen
self-harm and suicide Self-harm often arises at moments of despair, or intensity and its reasons are not necessarily available to the conscious mind; Managing Self-Harm explores unconscious meanings for self-harming and the sense in which it is a language of the body, and is designed to help clinicians, people who self-harm and their families and carers to understand its causes, meaning and treatment. Each chapter integrates theory along with clinical illustration, enabling the direct experiences of those who self-harm to be heard and reflecting the populations that are most likely to self-harm. This book does not offer a prescription for self-harm cessation but rather describes therapeutic approaches to working with self-harm, and outlines the complex, subtle and meaningful interactions between those who engage in self-harm and those who seek to understand it. With a specialist interest in women’s self harm, Managing Self-Harm will be essential reading to all mental health professionals including clinical psychologists, psychotherapists, psychiatrists and social workers. Contents: Motz, Introduction. Part I: Understanding Self-Harm. Motz,
Self-Harm as a Sign of Hope. Motz, Jones, The Paradox of Self-Harm. Part II: The Wider Context: Systemic Issues and Self-Harm. Scanlon, Adlam, “Why Do You Treat Me This Way?” Reciprocal Violence and the Mythology of Self-Harm. Norris, Maher, The Trap: Self-Harm and Young People in Foster Care and Residential Settings. Grocutt, Self-Harm and Attachment. Part III: Women, Self-Harm and Treatment Issues. Kleinot, Speaking with the Body. Greenwood, Absences, Transitions and Endings: Threats to Successful Treatment. Lawday, Self-Harm in Women’s Secure Services: Reflections and Strategies for Treatment Design. Grocutt, Self-Harm Cessation in Secure Units. Motz, Conclusion: “If You Prick Us Do We Not Bleed?” The Meaning and Management of Self-Harm. July 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-704-6: £55.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-705-3: £19.99 Published by Routledge
New in Paperback!
Treating Self-Injury A Practical Guide Barent W. Walsh, The Bridge of Central Massachusetts, Inc., Worcester, USA “Comprehensive and highly readable, this book provides what has long been needed – a thorough, compassionate, and practical guide to understanding, evaluating, and treating the complex and multifaceted behavior that is selfinjury. Walsh’s book is sure to become an invaluable and indispensable resource.” - Caroline Kettlewell, author of Skin Game: A Memoir Uniquely practical and comprehensive, this timely guide addresses a problem that is on the rise, particularly among adolescents and young adults. Practitioners gain a wealth of knowledge about the variety and causes of self-injurious behavior and how to recognize it in people at risk, ranging from those who do not have psychiatric diagnoses to those with eating or mood disorders, posttraumatic stress disorder, personality disorders, or psychoses. Illustrated with detailed case examples, clear guidelines are presented for assessing clients and conducting evidence-based interventions using replacement skills training, cognitive-behavioral therapy, exposure treatment, psychopharmacology, and family- and school-based strategies. 2008: 317pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-216-0: 2005: £30.00 Pb: 978-1-59385-981-7: £16.50 Published by Guilford Press
Adshead, Consultant Forensic Psychotherapist, Broadmoor Hospital, UK
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
self-harm and suicide
Hope in Action Solution-Focused Conversations About Suicide
Heather Fiske, University of Toronto, Canada Hope in Action is a unique resource providing fresh approaches to treating individuals and families where suicide is an issue. This comprehensive book provides a thorough grounding in using a solution-focused therapy approach to elicit and reinforce hope and reasons for living. Strategies are demonstrated with stories, case vignettes, and transcripts. Contents: Korman, Foreword. Preface: Stories of Hope and Healing. Introduction: How to Use This Book. Part I: Foundations. What Works? Building on What We Know to Develop Practice Principles. Putting Principles into Practice: Asking Useful Questions. Part II: Applications. Three Conversations About Dying and Living. Solution-Focused Approaches to Crisis. Befriending the Black Dog: Solutions for Depression. Chronic Attempts at Solution: Working with People Who Have Made Repeated Suicide Attempts. Even the Children: Preventing Suicide Among Young People. Hope and Energy: Preventing Adolescent Suicide. Teamwork with Natural Systems I: Collaborating with Clients’ Parents and Peers. Teamwork with Natural Systems II: Family and Couple Therapy. Teamwork with Unnatural Systems: Collaborating with Our Colleagues. Teamwork in Communities. Survivor Wisdom: News of a Difference. Walking the Talk: The Hopeful Therapist. Conclusion: Take This Story. Appendices. 2008: 368pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3393-2: £47.50 Pb: 978-0-7890-3394-9: £28.00 Published by Routledge
for books on Child and Adolescent Self-Harm please see page 51 Stress and Trauma
New Edition!
Effective Treatments for PTSD Practice Guidelines from the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies Second Edition Edited by Edna B. Foa, University of Pennsylvania, USA, Terence M. Keane, Director of the National Center for PTSD, VA Boston Healthcare System, USA, Matthew J. Friedman, Executive Director of the National Center for PTSD, White River Junction VA Medical Center, USA, and Judith A. Cohen, Allegheny General Hospital, Pittsburgh, USA “Foa et al. help clinicians figure out what kinds of interventions will be most helpful for a wide range of clients suffering from PTSD – an area where science-based guidance is urgently needed. They offer specific guidelines for designing and implementing treatments and managing crisis situations, all backed by clinical research. Frankly, Foa and her colleagues are the best in the business!” - Marsha M. Linehan, University of Washington, USA
Developed under the auspices of the PTSD Treatment Guidelines Task Force of the International Society for Traumatic Stress Studies, this tightly edited work is the definitive best-practice reference for practitioners caring for any trauma population. Leading clinical scientists thoroughly review the clinical and research literature on widely used therapeutic approaches.
stress and trauma
101
Contents: Foa, Keane, Friedman, Cohen, Introduction. Part I: Assessment and Diagnosis of PTSD. Weathers, Keane, Foa, Assessment and Diagnosis of Adults. Balaban, Assessment of Children. Part II: Early Interventions: Treatment of ASD and Prevention of Chronic PTSD. Bisson, McFarlane, Rose, Ruzek, Watson, Psychological Debriefing for Adults. Brymer, Steinberg, Vernberg, Layne, Watson, Jacobs, Ruzek, Pynoos, Acute Interventions for Children and Adolescents Exposed to Trauma. Litz, Bryant, Early Cognitive-Behavioral Interventions for Adults. Part III: Treatment Approaches for Chronic PTSD. Cahill, Rothbaum, Resick, Follette, Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Adults. Cohen, Mannarino, Deblinger, Berliner, Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Children and Adolescents. Friedman, Davidson, Stein, Psychopharmacotherapy for Adults. Donnelly, Psychopharmacotherapy for Children and Adolescents. Spates, Koch, Cusack, Pagoto, Waller, Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing. Shea, McDevitt-Murphy, Ready, Schnurr, Group Therapy. Jaycox, Stein, Amaya-Jackson, School-based Treatment for Children and Adolescents. Kudler, Krupnick, Blank, Jr., Herman, Horowitz, Psychodynamic Therapy for Adults. Lieberman, Ippen, Marans, Psychodynamic Therapy for Child Trauma. Glynn, Drebing, Penk, Psychosocial Rehabilitation. Cardeña, Maldonado, van der Hart, Spiegel, Hypnosis. Riggs, Monson, Glynn, Canterino, Couple and Family Therapy for Adults. Johnson, Lahad, Gray, Creative Therapies for Adults. Goodman, Chapman, Gantt, Creative Arts Therapies for Children. Najavits, Ryngala, Back, Bolton, Mueser, Brady, Treatment of PTSD and Comorbid Disorders. Part IV: Treatment Guidelines. Psychological Debriefing for Adults. Acute Interventions for Children and Adolescents. Early CognitiveBehavioral Interventions for Adults. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Adults. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Children and Adolescents. Pharmacotherapy for Adults. Pharmacotherapy for Children and Adolescents. Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing. Group Therapy. School-based Treatment for Children and Adolescents. Psychodynamic Therapy for Adults. Psychodynamic Therapy for Children. Psychosocial Rehabilitation. Hypnosis. Couple and Family Therapy for Adults. Creative Therapies for Adults. Creative Therapies for Children. Treatment of PTSD and Comorbid Disorders. Part V: Conclusion. Friedman, Cohen, Foa, Keane, Integration and Summary.
2008: 658pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-001-5: £50.00 Published by Guilford Press
Treating Complex Traumatic Stress Disorders An Evidence-Based Guide
Edited by Christine A. Courtois, in private practice, Washington, USA, and Julian D. Ford, University of Connecticut Health Center, USA “This is the single best source for clinical expertise in complex traumatic stress disorders. Leading clinicians and researchers share a rich array of individual, couple, family, and group therapy models that illustrate basic treatment principles and best practices. Informed by recent research, the contributors cover the developmental and neurobiological background against which to frame essential assessment and treatment issues.” - Frank W. Putnam, Cincinnati Children’s Hospital Medical Center, USA
This important book brings together prominent authorities to present the latest thinking on complex traumatic stress disorders and provide practical guidelines for conceptualization and treatment. Evidencebased assessment procedures are detailed, and innovative individual, couple, family, and group therapies are described and illustrated with case vignettes and session transcripts. Contents: Herman, Foreword. Courtois, Ford, Introduction. Part I: Overview. Ford, Courtois, Defining and Understanding Complex Trauma and Complex Traumatic Stress Disorders. Ford, Neurobiological and Developmental Research: Clinical Implications. Ford, Cloitre, Best Practices in Psychotherapy for Children and Adolescents. Courtois, Ford, Cloitre, Best Practices in Psychotherapy for Adults. Briere, Spinazzola, Assessment of the Sequelae of Complex Trauma: Evidence-based Measures. Brown, Attachment and Abuse
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
stress and trauma
102
History, and Adult Attachment Style. Steele, van der Hart, Treating Dissociation. Brown, Cultural Competence. Kinsler, Courtois, Frankel, Therapeutic Alliance and Risk Management. Pearlman, Caringi, Living and Working Self-reflectively to Address Vicarious Trauma. Part II: Individual Treatment Approaches and Strategies. Gold, Contextual Therapy. Jackson, Nissenson, Cloitre, CognitiveBehavioral Therapy. Follette, Iverson, Ford, Contextual Behavior Trauma Therapy. Fosha, Paivio, Gleiser, Ford, Experiential and Emotion-focused Therapy. Fisher, Ogden, Sensorimotor Psychotherapy. Opler, Grennan, Ford, Pharmacotherapy. Part III: Systemic Treatment Approaches and Strategies. R. C. Schwartz, M. F. Schwartz, Galperin, Internal Family Systems Therapy. Johnson, Courtois, Couple Therapy. Ford, Saltzman, Family Systems Therapy. Ford, Fallot, Harris, Group Therapy. Ford, Courtois, Conclusion: The Clinical Utility of a Complex Traumatic Stress Disorders Framework. van der Kolk, Afterword. March 2009: 488pp. Hb: 978-1-60623-039-8: £37.50 Published by Guilford Press
Forthcoming!
Living and Surviving in Harm’s Way A Psychological Treatment Handbook for Pre- and PostDeployment of Military Personnel Edited by Sharon Morgillo Freeman, Director of The Center for Brief Therapy, Indiana, USA, Bret A. Moore, Captain of Medical Service Corps, United States Army, USA, and Arthur Freeman, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA In Living and Surviving in Harm’s Way, experts investigate the psychological impact of how warriors live and survive in combat duty. They address the combat preparation of service men and women, their support system, and their interpersonal and intrapersonal experiences. The book maintains a focus on cognitive behavioral interventions for treating various combat related disorders, and addresses psychological health and adjustment after leaving the battlefield. Contents: Beck, Foreword. Freeman, Freeman, Moore, Introduction.
Understanding the Service Member. Matthews, The Soldier’s Mind: Motivation, Mindset, and Attitude. Stivers, Sammons, Training for Battle: Preparing to be the Warrior and Savior. Reger, Moore, Challenges and Threats of Deployment. Kennedy, Malone, Integration of Women into the Modern Military. On Being a Service Member. Kelly, Vogt, Military Stress: Effects of Acute, Chronic, and Traumatic Stress on Mental and Physical Health. Freeman, Freeman, Vulnerability Factors: Raising and Lowering the Threshold for Response. Conoscenti, Vine, Papa, Litz, Scanning for Danger: Readjustment to the Non-combat Environment. Freeman, Freeman, Assessment and Evaluation: Collecting the Requisite Building Blocks for Treatment Planning. The Individual Service Member: Intervention. Freeman, Moore, Theoretical Base for Treatment of Military Personnel. Meichenbaum, Core Psychotherapeutic Tasks with Returning Soldiers: A Case Conceptualization Approach. Riggs, Treatment of Anxiety Disorders. Rudd, Campise, Depression and Suicide: A Diathesis-stress Model for Understanding and Treatment. Freeman, Hurst, Susbstance Use, Misuse, and Abuse: Impaired Problem Solving and Coping. Moore, Krakow, Characteristics, Effects, and Treatment of Sleep Disorders in Service Members. Moore, Hopewell, Grossman, After the Battle: Violence and the Warrior. Freeman, Lundt, Swanton, Moore, Myths and Realities of Pharmacotherapy in the Military. The Service Member’s Family and Community: Intervention. Mabe, War and Children Coping with Parental Deployment. Lyons, Intimate Relationships and the Military. Cohen, Goodman, Campbell, Carroll, Campagna, Military Children: The Sometimes Orphans of War. Penk, Ainspan, Community Response to Returning Military. Drescher, Burgoyne, Casas, Lovato, Curran, Pivar, Foy, Issues of Grief, Loss, Honor, and Rememberance: Spirituality and Work with Military Personnel and their Families. Peterson, Cigrang, Isler, Future Directions: Trauma, Resilience and Recovery Research. August 2009: 543pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98868-1: £28.00 Published by Routledge
Trauma and Serious Mental Illness
Edited by Steven N. Gold, Nova Southeastern University, Center for Psychological Studies, Florida, USA, and Jon D. Elhai, University of South Dakota, USA For decades, the idea that serious mental illnesses (SMIs) are almost exclusively biologically-based and must be treated pharmacologically has been commonplace in psychology literature. As a result, many mental health professionals have stopped listening to their clients, categorizing their symptoms as manifestations of neurologicallybased disturbed thinking. Trauma and Serious Mental Illness is the groundbreaking series of works that challenge this standard view and provides a comprehensive introduction to the emerging perspective of SMIs as trauma-based. Contents: Gold, Trauma and Serious Mental Illness: Is the Pendulum About to Swing? Conceptual Frameworks. Hammersley, Read, Woodall, Dillon, Childhood Trauma and Psychosis: The Genie is Out of the Bottle. Ross, Dissociation and Psychosis: Conceptual Issues. Moskowitz, Corsten, Auditory Hallucinations: Psychotic Symptom or Dissociative Experience? Empirical Studies. Faust, Stewart, Impact of Child Abuse Timing and Family Environment on Psychosis. Grubaugh, Cusack, Yim, Knapp, Frueh, Gender Differences in Relationship Patterns Between Adverse Psychiatric Experiences, Lifetime Trauma, and PTSD. Clinical Applications. Levy, The Broad Relationship Between Bipolar Disorder and Disorders of Psychological Trauma: Time-limited to Life-long Need for Mood Stabilizers. Karon, Trauma and Schizophrenia.
2008: 170pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3650-6: £25.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3651-3: £16.00 Published by Routledge
New in Paperback!
Principles and Practice of Stress Management Third Edition Edited by Paul M. Lehrer, Robert Wood Johnson Medical School–UMDNJ, USA, Robert L. Woolfolk, Princeton University, New Jersey, USA, and Wesley E. Sime, University of Nebraska–Lincoln, USA “Lehrer et al. have assembled a distinguished group of experts to produce a volume that is both comprehensive and timely... This is a perfect text for students or clinicians who are looking for one book on the topic of stress management.” - Martin M. Antony, Ryerson University, Toronto, Canada
Structured for optimal use as a clinical reference and text, this comprehensive work reviews effective stress management techniques and their applications for treating psychological problems and enhancing physical health and performance. Leading experts present in-depth descriptions of progressive relaxation, hypnosis, biofeedback, meditation, cognitive methods, and other therapies. Tightly edited chapters examine each method’s theoretical and empirical underpinnings and provide step-by-step guidelines for assessment and implementation, illustrated with detailed case examples. 2008: 734pp. Hb: 978-1-59385-000-5: 2007: £57.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-000-8: £30.50 Published by Guilford Press
for books on Child and Adolescent Trauma please see page 51
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
author index
A Abramowitz, J. S. ........................... 95 Addison, O. W. ................................ 46 Alanen, Y. O., Ed. ............................ 98 Altman, N. ........................................ 78 Anderson, J., Ed. ............................ 41 Ando, O., Ed. . .................................. 79 Antony, M. M. . ................................ 90 Archer, A., Ed. . ................................ 17 Arnett, J. ........................................... 53 Aten, J. D., Ed. ................................. 11 Averill, R. . ......................................... 53 B Back, S. E., Ed. ................................. 89 Bagnato, S. J. ................................... 56 Baity, M. R., Ed. ............................... 84 Banks, J. B. . ...................................... 66 Baraitser, L. ...................................... 73 Barbaree, H. E., Ed. ........................ 46 Barlow, J., Ed. .................................. 39 Barnett, L., Ed. ................................ 25 Basseches, M. ................................... 8 Baucom, D. H. ................................. 69 Beck, A. T. ......................................... 97 Becker, C. B. ..................................... 34 Berant, E., Ed. .................................. 90 Bernstein, D. P. . .............................. 29 Bertolino, B. . ..................................... 9 Bien, T., Ed. ....................................... 35 Birksted-Breen, D., Ed. . ............... 74 Bjรถrgvinsson, T. . ............................ 32 Blacher, J., Ed. ................................. 45 Black, D. R. . ...................................... 61 Blagen, M. ........................................ 16 Blais, M. A., Ed. . .............................. 84 Blechner, M. J. . ............................... 77 Blevins, D., Ed. ................................ 23 Bloomgarden, A., Ed. ..................... 7 Boehm, A. E. .................................... 55 Bollas, C. ........................................... 70 Bolt, S. E. ........................................... 58 Bond, F. ............................................. 29 Bond, G. R. ....................................... 82 Borduin, C. M. ................................. 46 Bourgeois, M. S. ............................. 92 Bowen, E. L. ..................................... 97 Boylan, J. C. . .................................... 19 Brady, K. T., Ed. ............................... 89 Brassard, M. R. ................................ 55 Brehm, K. .......................................... 54 Brick, J., Ed. ...................................... 88 Briggs, C. A. ..................................... 90 Brodsky, S. L. ................................... 85 Brom, D., Ed. .................................... 51 Brown, L., Ed. .................................. 19 Bucky, S. F., Ed. ............................... 85 Bukowski, W. M., Ed. . ................... 61 Bukstein, O. G., Ed. . ...................... 47 Burns, M., Ed. .................................. 92 Burns, M. K. . .................................... 58 Burr, K. ............................................... 22 Busch, A. M. ..................................... 30 Butler, G. ........................................... 33 C Callan, J. E., Ed. ............................... 85 Caper, R. . .......................................... 72 Carlson, E. A. ................................... 52 Carlson, J. ......................................... 16 Carr, A. ................................................. 5
Cartwright, D. ................................. 71 Casemore, R., Ed. ........................... 18 Cassidy, J., Ed. ................................. 91 Caudill, M. A. ................................... 83 Cervantes, J. M., Ed. . .................... 16 Chadwick, P. K. ............................... 98 Chaiklin, S., Ed. ............................... 38 Chamow, L. ...................................... 64 Chen, E. Y. . ....................................... 91 Christner, R. W. ............................... 55 Clark, D. M. . ..................................... 42 Clarke, I., Ed. .................................... 27 Clements, M., Ed. . ......................... 57 Cohen, D. . ........................................ 65 Cohen, J. A., Ed. . .......................... 101 Cohen, L. M., Ed. ............................ 11 Collins, Jr., F. L., Ed. . ...................... 11 Collins, W. A. . .................................. 52 Comer, J. S. . ..................................... 44 Connor, S. R. .................................... 24 Cook, K. L., Ed. ................................ 11 Cooper, P. C. .................................... 72 Copello, A. ....................................... 87 Corrigan, P. W. ................................ 82 Courtois, C. A., Ed. . ..................... 101 Crane, R. . .......................................... 31 Crespi, T., Ed. ................................... 60 Crothers, L. M. ................................ 60 Culbreth, J., Ed. .............................. 19 Cullington, D. . ................................ 69 Cummings, N. A. . .......................... 10 Cunningham, P. B. ......................... 46 Cunningham, V., Ed. ....................... 9 Cupitt, C., Ed. .................................. 82 D Dallos, R. ........................................... 65 Darling, R. B. .................................... 56 Davis, W. N., Ed. . ............................ 92 Dawson, P. . ...................................... 56 Day, R. D. . ......................................... 65 De Chรกvez, M. G., Ed. ................... 98 DeGangi, G. A. ................................ 41 Dell, P. F., Ed. .................................... 83 Dixon, Jr., W. E. ............................... 66 Dobson, D. ....................................... 27 Dobson, K. S. ................................... 27 Dokter, D., Ed. ................................. 36 Doll, B. ............................................... 54 Douglas, K. S., Ed. .......................... 86 Draguns, J. G., Ed. . ........................ 13 Drake, R. E. ....................................... 82 Dryden, W. ................................ 28, 32 Duehl, J. T. ........................................ 97 Dudley, R. ......................................... 25 Dunbar, A. ........................................ 17 E Edwards, L. ...................................... 94 Edwards, T. M. . ............................... 64 Egeland, B. ....................................... 52 Eid, M., Ed. . ...................................... 14 Ekleberry, S. C. . .............................. 95 Elhai, J. D., Ed. ............................... 102 Ellis, C. M., Ed. ................................. 16 Erdman, P., Ed. ................................ 63 Erickson, M. H. ................................ 18 Espelage, D. L. ................................ 58 F Fairburn, C. G. ................................. 34 Fall, K. A. ............................................. 6
Feit, M. D., Ed. ................................. 50 Feldman, M. .................................... 75 Fennell, M. ....................................... 33 Fernando, S., Ed. ............................ 84 Ferro, A. ............................................ 76 Finn, S. ............................................... 11 Fish, J. M., Ed. .................................. 13 Fisher, P. ............................................ 31 Fisher, W. .......................................... 97 Fiske, H. ........................................... 101 Fitzpatrick, M. . ............................... 48 Fiumara, G. C. ................................. 71 Flanders, S., Ed. .............................. 74 Flaxman, P. ....................................... 29 Flora, R. ............................................. 97 Foa, E. B., Ed. ................................. 101 Ford, J. D., Ed. . ....................... 51, 101 Fox, A., Ed. . ...................................... 88 Frank, C. ............................................ 75 Freeman, A., Ed. ........................... 102 Freeman, M. .................................... 42 Freeman, S. M., Ed. . .................... 102 Frie, R., Ed. . ...................................... 72 Friedman, M. J., Ed. . ................... 101 G Gabriel, L., Ed. ................................. 18 Gallardo, M. E., Ed. ........................ 12 Gambescia, N., Ed. ........................ 67 Garfield, D., Ed. . ............................. 99 Geekie, J. .......................................... 99 Germer, C. K. ................................... 35 Gibeault, A., Ed. ............................. 74 Gielen, U. P., Ed. . ............................ 13 Gilbert, P., Ed. . ................................ 26 Glickman, N. . .................................. 12 Gold, S. N., Ed. .............................. 102 Golden, G. H. . ................................. 67 Goldstein, S., Ed. . .......................... 48 Gordon, K. C. . ................................. 69 Gotlib, I. H., Ed. ............................... 93 Gould, J. W. ...................................... 47 Gowers, S. G. ................................... 43 Grainger, E., Ed. .............................. 41 Grand, S. ........................................... 78 Grant, P. . ........................................... 97 Grauf-Grounds, C. . ....................... 64 Greenfield, S. F., Ed. ...................... 89 Green, G. . ......................................... 82 Green, L. ........................................... 43 Greenwald, R. ................................. 49 Greenwood, C. R., Ed. .................. 57 Gregg, N. .......................................... 56 Gresham, F. M., Ed. . ...................... 59 Grey, N., Ed. ..................................... 34 Grieco, R. .......................................... 94 Grossmark, R., Ed. ......................... 77 Grusec, J. E., Ed. . ............................ 52 Guare, R. ........................................... 56 Guggenheim, F. G. ........................ 81 Guindon, M., Ed. ............................ 83 Gurman, A. S., Ed. . ........................ 68 Gyler, L. ............................................. 73 H Haaken, J., Ed. ................................. 50 Hackmann, A. ................................. 33 Hall, L. K. ........................................... 14 Hall, S. P. ............................................ 15 Hallisey, B. J. .................................... 21 Halsey, S. . ......................................... 97
103
Hammen, C. L., Ed. . ...................... 93 Hancock, S. ...................................... 81 Hardy, K. V., Ed. . ............................. 64 Hartley, L., Ed. ................................. 10 Hartley, P., Ed. ................................. 81 Hastings, P. D., Ed. ......................... 52 Heard, H. L. ...................................... 31 Heath, N. L., Ed. .............................. 51 Hecker, L. L. ....................................... 8 Hendry, L. B. .................................... 53 Henggeler, S. W. ............................ 46 Hennon, C. B., Ed. .......................... 65 Hertlein, K. M. ................................. 67 Hick, S. F., Ed. . ................................. 35 Hickey, E. .......................................... 92 Hilarski, C., Ed. ................................ 50 Hilt, L. M. . ......................................... 50 Hinz, L. D. ......................................... 37 Hodgson, R. . ................................... 87 Hoff, L. A. ................................... 21, 97 Hoff, M. . ............................................ 21 Hoffman, P. D., Ed. ......................... 95 Hofmann, S. G. ............................... 32 Holden, J. M. ..................................... 6 Hopwood, C. J., Ed. . ..................... 84 Horne, A., Ed. .................................. 40 Horner, R. H., Ed. ............................ 45 Hughes, T. L. ............................. 60, 61 Huprich, S. K. . ................................. 84 I Ittel, A. ............................................... 53 J Jakes, S. .......................................... 100 Jennings, S., Ed. ............................. 38 Johnson, D. R. ................................... 9 Jones, P., Ed. .................................... 36 Joseph, B., Ed. ................................. 75 K Kalberg, J. R. .................................... 59 Kalinich, L. J., Ed. . .......................... 73 Kaminer, Y., Ed. . ............................. 47 Kanan, L. M. ..................................... 54 Kanter, J. W. ..................................... 30 Kapalka, G. ....................................... 13 Karis, T. A., Ed. ................................. 69 Kaufman, J., Ed. .............................. 61 Keane, T. M., Ed. ........................... 101 Keating, F., Ed. ................................ 84 Keen, S. M. . ...................................... 50 Keeney, B. . ......................................... 8 Kellam, T. .......................................... 66 Kelly, J. G., Ed. ................................. 22 Kendall, P. C. .................................... 44 Kendall-Tackett, K. ........................ 93 Kennard, D., Ed. . ............................ 81 Keohane, M. .................................... 97 Keys, D. .............................................. 53 Kiener, M.............................................. 9 Killian, K. D., Ed. . ............................ 69 Kleiman, K. . ..................................... 93 Kloep, M. .......................................... 53 Kratochwill, T. R., Ed. .................... 57 Kretschmer, T. . ............................... 53 Kusumakar, V., Ed. ......................... 94 Kuyken, W. ....................................... 25 L Lachkar, J. . ....................................... 72 Lafrance, M. N. ............................... 93
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over ยฃ20/$35
author index
104
Lane, K. L. ......................................... 59 Lanyado, M., Ed. . ........................... 40 Larsen, R. J., Ed. .............................. 14 Last, C. G. . ........................................ 94 Laursen, B., Ed. ............................... 61 Leach, M. M., Ed. ............................ 11 Leahy, R. L., Ed. ............................... 26 Leavitt, J. P. ...................................... 68 Lee, R. G. ........................................... 74 Leffingwell, T. R., Ed. .................... 11 Lehrer, P. M., Ed. ........................... 102 Lilienfeld, S. O., Ed. ....................... 86 Ling, W., Ed. ..................................... 89 Liotta, E. ............................................ 80 Lisiecki, J. . .......................................... 6 Lochman, J. E., Ed. . ....................... 59 Lubin, H. ............................................. 9 Lucas, R. ............................................ 75 M Maass, V. S. . ..................................... 20 Maberry, B. L. .................................. 97 MacAvoy, M., Ed. ........................... 88 Macdonald, P., Ed. ......................... 91 MacGregor, S., Ed. ......................... 87 Mackler, D., Ed. ............................... 99 Main, S. . ............................................ 80 Maine, M., Ed. ................................. 92 Mallett, S. ......................................... 53 Malson, H., Ed. ................................ 92 Manassis, K. ..................................... 28 Mann, D., Ed. ..................................... 9 Marbley, A. . ..................................... 16 Markell, K. A. ................................... 25 Markell, M. A. .................................. 25 Marquis, A. . ....................................... 6 Marshall, W. L., Ed. ........................ 46 Martindale, B., Ed. ......................... 98 Martindale, D. A. . .......................... 47 Martinic, M., Ed. ............................. 88 Mascolo, M. F. ................................... 8 Mash, E. J., Ed. . ............................... 49 Mathers, D., Ed. ....................... 79, 80 Mathison, S. . ................................... 42 Matteson, D. R. ............................... 22 Mayer, M. J., Ed. .............................. 59 McCarthy, B. W. .............................. 66 McCarthy, E. .................................... 66 McChargue, D. E., Ed. ................... 11 McCloskey, G. ................................. 55 McCorkindale, J. A. ....................... 97 McCoy, M. L. .................................... 50 McDonald, C., Ed. .......................... 86 McGoldrick, M., Ed. . ..................... 64 McMahon, G., Ed. .......................... 17 McMahon, L. ................................... 39 McNeill, B. W. .................... 12, 16, 20 Measham, F., Ed. ............................ 88 Mehrotra, C. M. .............................. 92 Mennuti, R. B. . ............................ 7, 55 Menzies, H. M. ................................ 59 Midgley, N., Ed. .............................. 41 Miller, M. E., Ed. .............................. 79 Milliren, A. . ...................................... 16 Moore, B. A., Ed. . ......................... 102 Morgan, J. F. .................................... 92 Morine, K. A. . .................................. 60 Motz, A., Ed. ................................. 100 Mozdzierz, G. J. ................................ 6 Mueser, K. T. .................................... 82
N Naglieri, J. A., Ed. ........................... 48 Napolitano, S. A. ............................ 58 Neenan, M. ...................................... 29 Neimeyer, R. A. ............................... 31 Nemiroff, M. A. ............................... 41 Nesic-Vuckovic, T., Ed. ................. 41 Ng, K., Ed. ......................................... 63 Nichols, M. P. ................................... 15 Nicolson, P. ...................................... 97 Nixon, M. K., Ed. ............................. 51 Nolen-Hoeksema, S., Ed. . .......... 50 Norton, P. J. . .................................... 90 O Obegi, J. H., Ed. .............................. 90 Odell-Miller, H., Ed. . ..................... 36 Odom, S. L., Ed. .............................. 45 O’Donohue, W. T. .......................... 10 Ogden, T. H. . ................................... 76 Olsen, D. C. ...................................... 69 O’Neil, J. A., Ed. . ............................. 83 Orange, D. M. ........................... 71, 72 Oren, C. Z., Ed. ................................ 13 Oren, D. C., Ed. . .............................. 13 Orford, J. . ......................................... 87 Orsillo, S. M. . ................................... 36 Otto, M. W. ....................................... 32 Otwell, P. . ......................................... 23 Ozonoff, S., Ed. ............................... 48 P Padesky, C. A. . ................................ 25 Paris, J. ............................................... 95 Parkes, C. M. .................................... 24 Parson, L. C. ..................................... 97 Pat-Horenczyk, R., Ed. ................. 51 Patterson, J. . ................................... 64 Patterson, R. . .................................... 9 Pazaratz, D. . .................................... 49 Pearce, J. ........................................... 51 Peled, A. . .......................................... 72 Peltier, B. . ......................................... 17 Peluso, P. R. ........................................ 6 Pennington, B. F. . .......................... 57 Pepperell, J. L. . ............................... 90 Perkins, L. A. .................................... 55 Perrin, S. . .......................................... 42 Persons, J. B. . .................................. 25 Phelps, E. A., Ed. . ........................... 87 Philpot, T. ......................................... 96 Pichot, T. ........................................... 88 Pike, A. . ............................................. 53 Pincus, D. .......................................... 83 Pliszka, S. R. ..................................... 48 Plog, A. E. ......................................... 54 Prigerson, H. G. .............................. 24 Pyles, L. ............................................. 21 Q Quinodoz, D. ................................... 73 R Rafaeli, E............................................ 29 Ragen, T. ........................................... 77 Rathvon, N. ...................................... 57 Rawson, R. A., Ed. .......................... 89 Read, J. .............................................. 99 Reavey, P., Ed. . ................................ 50 Rector, N. A. . ................................... 97 Reeves, M. A. . ................................. 54 Reis, B., Ed. ....................................... 77 Reissland, N. .................................... 52 Rhodes, J. ...................................... 100
Riccio, C., Ed. ................................... 60 Richards, E., Ed. .............................. 36 Riley-Tillman, T. C. ......................... 58 Rivett, M. .......................................... 63 Roach, A. T. ...................................... 58 Roemer, L. ........................................ 36 Rogers, J. .......................................... 43 Roll, J. M., Ed. . ................................. 89 Rosenbaum, M. S. ......................... 78 Rosenberg, J. .................................. 21 Rosenfeld, G. W. . ........................... 12 Rosengren, D. B. .............................. 9 Rosenthal, D. ................................... 53 Rosenthal, H. . ................................. 20 Rosqvist, J. ....................................... 32 Rossi, E. L. ......................................... 18 Rowe, D. .............................................. 5 Rowland, M. D. ............................... 46 Rubin, J. A. ....................................... 37 Rubin, K. H., Ed. .............................. 61 Rusch, L. C. . ..................................... 30 S Safer, D. L. . ....................................... 91 Samons, S. L. ................................... 70 Sandberg, E., Ed. . .......................... 52 Scaife, J. ............................................ 19 Schmidt, U., Ed. .............................. 91 Schoenwald, S. K. .......................... 46 Scott, J. .............................................. 19 Scott, M. J. . ...................................... 27 Selekman, M. D. ............................. 49 Selig, M. ............................................ 15 Seligman, M. ................................... 56 Sendak, S. K. .................................... 67 Shakoor, M. . .................................... 20 Shaver, P. R., Ed. . ............................ 91 Sheikh, A. A. .................................... 83 Shoptaw, S., Ed. . ............................ 89 Shure, J., Ed. .................................... 92 Silver, A. S., Ed. . .............................. 98 Sime, W. E., Ed. . ............................ 102 Simos, G., Ed. . ................................. 26 Singh, G. ........................................... 79 Skeem, J. L., Ed. .............................. 86 Skovholt, T. ...................................... 11 Slovenko, R. ..................................... 85 Smith, P. ............................................ 42 Smock, S. A. ..................................... 88 Snell, M. E., Ed. . .............................. 45 Snyder, D. K. .................................... 69 Solomon, P. . .................................... 82 Song, A. V., Ed. . .............................. 22 Sookman, D., Ed. ........................... 26 Sori, C. F. ............................................. 8 Sperry, L. . .............................. 8, 19, 22 Spillius, E., Ed. ................................. 75 Spritz, B., Ed. ................................... 52 Sroufe, L. A. ..................................... 52 Stallard, P. . ....................................... 44 Steege, M. W. .................................. 59 Steere, D. A. ..................................... 23 Steiner-Grossman, P., Ed. . .......... 95 Stephenson, C. E. .......................... 79 Stern, D. B. . ...................................... 76 Stolar, N. ........................................... 97 Stoltenberg, C. D. .......................... 20 Stopa, L., Ed. . .................................. 35 Strahan, E. Y. . .................................. 66 Street, E. . .......................................... 63 Stricker, G., Ed. . .............................. 85 Strock, C. .......................................... 70
Svanberg, P. O., Ed. ....................... 39 Swales, M. A. ................................... 31 Swearer, S. M. . ................................ 58 Sweeney, T. J. .................................. 16 Swenson, C. C. ................................ 46 T Taibbi, R. ........................................... 68 Tanner, J. . ......................................... 53 Taylor, I. S. . ....................................... 46 Taylor, S. W., Ed. . ............................ 73 Telch, C. F. . ....................................... 91 Thompson, R. A. ............................ 55 Tindall, J. A. . ............................. 61, 62 Tober, G. ........................................... 87 Treasure, J., Ed. ............................... 91 U Urwin, C., Ed. . ................................. 41 V Van Acker, R., Ed. ........................... 59 Van Diviner, B. ................................ 55 Vazquez, E., Ed. .............................. 60 Verduyn, C. ...................................... 43 Vetere, A. .......................................... 65 W Wagner, L. S. . .................................. 92 Waite, P., Ed. .................................... 43 Waldinger, M. ................................. 67 Walker, E. .......................................... 60 Walsh, B. W. .................................. 100 Walsh, F., Ed. .................................... 64 Walsh, W. B. ..................................... 14 Warner, S. ......................................... 96 Washton, A. M. ............................... 89 Waterman, J. ................................... 60 Watson, T. S. .................................... 59 Weeks, G. R. ..................................... 67 Wells, A. ..................................... 31, 33 Wengrower, H., Ed. ....................... 38 Werth, Jr., J. L., Ed. ......................... 23 Wertheimer, A. ............................... 87 Whalen, P. J., Ed. . ........................... 87 Whitbeck, L. B. . .............................. 54 Widdowson, M. . .............................. 6 Wilens, T. E. ...................................... 45 Williams, L. . ..................................... 64 Williams, T., Ed. . ............................. 43 Willows, J. . ....................................... 96 Wills, F. . ............................................. 30 Wilmshurst, L. . ............................... 45 Wilson, H., Ed. ................................. 27 Wilson, S. M., Ed. . .......................... 65 Wimpenny, P.................................... 24 Wodarski, J. S., Ed. . ....................... 50 Wolfe, D. A., Ed. .............................. 49 Wood, A. ........................................... 43 Woolfolk, R. L., Ed. ...................... 102 Wright, K. . ........................................ 73 Y Yang, J. .............................................. 16 Yatham, L. N., Ed. . ......................... 94 Yokley, J. M. ..................................... 45 Young, A., Ed. . ................................ 11 Young, J. ........................................... 29 Yule, W. . ............................................ 42 Z Zayfert, C. ........................................ 34 Zuckerman, E. L. ............................ 18 Zweben, J. E. ................................... 89
10% DISCOUNT! Order online at www.routledgementalhealth.com / www.guilfordpress.co.uk
DISTRIBUTION, INTERNATIONAL REPRESENTATIVES AND AGENTS Milton Park Sales Office Search Taylor & Francis Group (Books Ltd) 2 Park Square Milton Park Abingdon, Oxon, OX14 4RN Group Sales Director Christoph Chesher Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6194 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: christoph.chesher@tandf.co.uk Director of International Sales Graham Crossley Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6048 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: graham.crossley@tandf.co.uk Head of UK Sales Nick Perry Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6132 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email: nick.perry@tandf.co.uk Corporate and Institutional Sales Alfred Lea Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6273 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email: cis@tandf.co.uk UK Sales Administrator Judith Cavell Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6191 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email: judith.cavell@informa.com
Europe INSIDE
Peter Havinga, European Sales Manager Tel: +31 (0) 23 750 5730 Fax: +31 (0) 23 750 5701 Mobile: +31 (0) 6 515 69560 Email: peter.havinga@tandf.co.uk Belgium, The Netherlands, France and Luxembourg Liza Walraven Sales Representative A. Hofmanweg 5a, 2031 BH Haarlem, The Netherlands Tel: 0031 (0) 23 7505731 Fax: 0031 (0) 23 7505701 Mobile: 0031 (0) 623849668 Email: liza.walraven@informa.com Greece Ryan Cooper, Area Sales Manager Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: ryan.cooper@tandf.co.uk Nordic Countries Keith Gray, Sales Representative Tel: +45 (0)4195 1428 Mobile: +45 6064 8041 Email: keith.gray@informa.com Germany, Austria and Switzerland Eva Kneissl, Area Sales Representative (Maternity leave cover for Gabriela Mauch) Mobile: +49 (0) 17 3905 9469 Email: eva.kneissl@informa.com Middle East and North Africa Spain, Portugal and Italy Jasmina Basic Philip Veysey, Area Sales Manager Area Sales Manager – Middle East and Africa +34 91 700 secure 0688 Milton Park Sales Office All books are available to buy online Tel: using our Fax: +34 91 141 2304 Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 e-commerce system, and as an aid to your online Mobile: +34 68 777purchases, 3678 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: philip.veysey@informa.com E-mail: jasmina.basic@tandf.co.uk we have available subject specific Arenas. The Arenas are very and Zoe Kaviani Eastern Europe easy to navigate know that you Sciences) want to find IPS (Middle East) Ltd, P. O.around, Box 27533, because Dubai, UAE we(Humanities and Social Tel: +971-4-282 8801 you’re after quickly, whether Marek Lewinson the information it’s the ‘buy now’ Fax: +971-4-282 8804 Bohaterewicza 3/45, 03-982 Warsaw, Poland link a particular book, the date and venue of a forthcoming Email:for itpme@emirates.net.ae Tel/Fax: + 48 (0) 22 6714819 Website: http://www.ipsme.com +48 (0) 602 707 037 journal conference, or the online version of aMobile: specific academic Email: mlewinso@it.com.pl Africa article. and (Science and Technology) Jasmina Basic, Area Sales Manager Radek Janousek We also three new Arenas: Middle East have and Africa Pod Nouzovem 972/21 Milton Park Sales Office 19700 Prague, Czech Republic Health Psychology Arena Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 Tel: + 42 (0) 286 584 9888 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Mobile: +42 (0) 602 294 014 www.healthpsychologyarena.com Email: jasmina.basic@tandf.co.uk Email: radek@mareklewinson.com Nigeria European Enquiries Gerontology Chinke Ojiji Lucy Astone www.gerontologyarena.com Publishers Support Services Ltd International Sales Support Coordinator Plot 2 Adewunmi Estate, Oregun Road Milton Park Sales Office Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry (Near First Bank Oregun) Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6149 PO Box 9270, Ikeja, Lagos State Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 www.forensic-psychology-arena.com Tel: +234 1 7741073 Email: lucy.astone@informa.com Fax: +234 1 493 0419 For a full list of all our Arenas and series websites, South Asia please visit the email: chinkeojiji@yahoo.co.uk resources page at: Ryan Cooper Botswana Area Sales Manager Arthur Oageng, Sales Manager www.routledgementalhealth.com Milton Park Sales Office Book Promotions/Horizon Books, Botswana Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Gaborone International Finance Park And if you do find a particular Arena useful, don’t forget to Fax: +44 (0)please 20 7017 6748 Plot 113-114, Unit 33, Kgale Mews 2, Suite 3 ryan.cooper@tandf.co.uk Gaborone, Botswana bookmark it and tell your friends andEmail: colleagues about it! Tel: +267 393 1194 India Fax: +267 392 4908 Pankaj Bhardwaj Email: arthur.oageng@online.co.bw Taylor & Francis Books India Pvt Ltd South Africa, Namibia, 912 Tolstoy House, 15-17 Tolstoy Marg Lesotho and Swaziland New Delhi – 110001 Michelle Symington Tel: +91 (0) 11 23712131 / 23351453 Book Promotions Ltd Fax: +91 (0) 11 23712132 BMD Office Park, 108 De Waal Road has been reconstructed Our email alerting service and the new Email: tandfindia@airtelbroadband.in Diep River, 7800 Cape Town Pakistan improved South Africa service is now available to provide new title updates, M. Anwer Iqbal Tel: +27 21 707 5700 and conference news. special offers Book Bird, Mian Chambers, 3 Temple Road General Fax: + 27 21 707 5795 PO Box 518, Lahore, Pakistan Orders +27 21 707 If youFax: would like5794 to receive these bulletins, Tel: +92 42simply 636 7275sign up at: Email: msymington@bookpro.co.za Fax: +92 42 636 1370 www.routledgementalhealth.com/opal E-mail: bookbird@brain.net.pk Israel and the Palestinian Territories Sri Lanka Ryan Cooper, Area Sales Manager of our customers: We respect the privacy we will always include Nirosha Saravanapavan Milton Park Sales Office aTel:link to leave the list in any communication and will never pass Mobile: 0094 714 750911 +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Email: niroshas@sltnet.lk Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748
Arenas
Email Alerting Service
your email address to a third party. Email: ryan.cooper@tandf.co.uk and Rodney Franklin, Franklin’s International PO BOX 3772 7 Tel Aviv 61376, Israel Tel: +972 3 5600724 Fax: +972 3 5600479 Email: rodneyf@netvision.net.il
Japan Hans Van Ess, Book Sales and Marketing Executive Taylor and Francis Group 7F Koshin Bldg. 2-23-4 Kanda-Jimbocho, Chiyoda, Tokyo 101-0051, Japan Tel: +81 (0) 35848 7061 Mobile: +81 (0) 80 5426 3552 Email: hans.vaness@informa.com United Publishers Services Limited Tel: +81 (0) 3 5479 7251 Fax: +81 (0) 3 5479 7307 Email: info@ups.co.jp Editorial Office: Takahiko Kaneko Tel: +81 (0) 3 5296 9186 Fax: +81 (0) 3 3252 1822 Email: edsynapse@nifty.ne.jp
Korea Se-Yung Jun ICK (Information & Culture Korea) 473-19 Seokyo-Dong, Mapo-Ku, Seoul, Korea 121-842 Tel: +82 2 3141 4791 Fax: +82 2 3141 7733 Email: cs.ick@ick.co.kr
New Zealand Macmillan Publishers NZ Ltd Victoria Johnson Tel: +64 9414 0350 Fax: +64 9414 0357 Email: vicki@macmillan.co.nz Australia and New Zealand CRC Press and Marcel Dekker only Libraries may wish to order from their local bookseller, Palgrave Macmillan or DA Information Services Pty Ltd Tel: +61 3 9210 7804 Fax: +61 3 9210 7788 www.dadirect.com.au Australia Europa Publications (non-exclusive) James Bennett Tel: +02 9986 7064 Fax: +02 9986 7030 www.bennett.com.au
Caribbean and The West Indies Jasmina Basic, Area Sales Manager Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: jasmina.basic@tandf.co.uk
East and South East Asia
North America
For all Taylor & Francis Group imprints please order from Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific, Singapore Sales Office Singapore Sales Office Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific 240 Macpherson Road #08-01 Pines Industrial Building Singapore 348574 Tel: +65 6741 5166 Fax: +65 6742 9356 Email: sales@tandf.com.sg Hong Kong and Vietnam Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Singapore Sales Office Email: jeffrey.lim@tandf.com.sg Singapore, Philippines and Indonesia Francis Chua, Sales Manager Singapore Sales Office Email: francis.chua@tandf.com.sg Thailand Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +66 (2) 642 7954-6 ext. 406 Fax: +66 (2) 642 7677 Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: jeffrey.lim@tandf.com.sg and Nonglak Sawaithong, Sales Executive Email: s.nonglak@tandf.com.sg Malaysia and Brunei David Yeong, General Manager Taylor & Francis Publishing Services Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +60 (3) 5630 1361 Fax: +60 (3) 5630 1732 Mobile: +60 (0)16 331 9912 Email: david.yeong@tandf.com.sg China Taylor & Francis Room 903, Resource Building No.151 North Street Zhongguancun, Beijing, China 100080 Tel/Fax: +86 (10) 58876523 Sales: Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: jeffrey.lim@tandf.com.sg and Cynthia Ji, Sales and Marketing Executive Email: cynthia.ji@tandf.com.sg Taiwan Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +886 (2) 2578 6106 ext.125 Fax: +886 (2) 2578 6507 Mobile: +886 (9) 7216 9672 Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: jeffrey.lim@tandf.com.sg and Raymond Hsu, Sales Executive Email: raymond.hsu@tandf.com.sg
Sales Office Dennis Weiss, Vice President Sales Taylor and Francis 6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300, Boca Raton, FL 33487, USA Within the Continental USA: Tel: 800-272-7737 Fax: 800-374-3401 E-mail: orders@taylorandfrancis.com Outside USA: Tel: +1 561-994-0555 Fax: +1 561-361-6018 Email: International.orders@taylorandfrancis.com
Australasia Kate Pearce Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0)207 017 6053 Fax: +44 (0)207 017 6748 Email: kate.pearce@tandf.co.uk Australia Palgrave Macmillan Tel: +61 (0) 39825 1111 Fax: +61 (0) 39825 1010 Email: palgrave@macmillan.com.au
Central and South America and Mexico Michael Dulisse, Sales Office, Boca Raton, FL Taylor & Francis Tel: +1 561 998 2582 Fax: +1 561 361 6049 E-mail: Michael.Dulisse@taylorandfrancis.com and Ethan E. Atkin Cranbury International LLC, 7 Clarendon Ave, Suite 2, Montpelier, VT 05602, USA Tel: +1 802 223 6565 Fax: +1 802 223 6824 Email: eatkin@cranburyinternational.com International Enquiries Kate Pearce International Sales Support Manager (Books) Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6053 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: kate.pearce@tandf.co.uk South Asian, Middle Eastern and African Enquiries Reanna Young International Sales Support Coordinator Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6114 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: reanna.young@tandf.co.uk Foreign Rights Adele Parker Email: adele.parker@tandf.co.uk China Liaison Office Yan Pei, Manager Taylor & Francis Tel/Fax: +86 (10) 58876523 Email: yanpei@tandf.com.sg International Customer Services, Orders and Distribution Taylor and Francis Customer Services Bookpoint 130 Milton Park Abingdon Oxon OX14 4SB, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1235 400 524 Fax: +44 (0) 1235 400 525 email (UK): uktrade@tandf.co.uk email (International): international@tandf.co.uk
FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35
Routledge Psychology Press 27 Church Road Hove East Sussex BN3 2FA, UK 270 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10016, USA page 15
page 5
page 35
page 29
www.routledgementalhealth.com Guilford Press is distributed in the UK and Europe by the Taylor and Francis group. www.guilfordpress.co.uk
TO ORDER A BOOK: Taylor & Francis Customer Services Bookpoint 130 Milton Park Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4SB, UK
page 40
page 79
page 94
page 29
page 42
page 95
page 75
page 17
Tel: +44 (0) 1235 400 524 Fax: +44 (0) 1235 400 525 email: tandf@bookpoint.co.uk
ISBN: 978-0-418-22771-8
Routledge is part of the Taylor & Francis group, a trading division of Informa UK Ltd. Registered in England under no. 3099067 Registered Office: Mortimer House, 37-41 Mortimer Street, London W1T 3JH
PEFC/16-33-228